xPC Target

®
For Use with Real-Time Workshop

I/O Reference Guide

Version 2
How to Contact The MathWorks:

www.mathworks.com Web
comp.soft-sys.matlab Newsgroup

[email protected] Technical support

[email protected] Product enhancement suggestions
[email protected] Bug reports
[email protected] Documentation error reports
[email protected] Order status, license renewals, passcodes
[email protected] Sales, pricing, and general information

508-647-7000 Phone

508-647-7001 Fax

The MathWorks, Inc. Mail

3 Apple Hill Drive
Natick, MA 01760-2098
For contact information about worldwide offices, see the MathWorks Web site.

xPC Target I/O Reference Guide

© COPYRIGHT 2000 - 2005 by The MathWorks, Inc.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may be used
or copied only under the terms of the license agreement. No part of this manual may be photocopied or repro-
duced in any form without prior written consent from The MathWorks, Inc.
FEDERAL ACQUISITION: This provision applies to all acquisitions of the Program and Documentation by,
for, or through the federal government of the United States. By accepting delivery of the Program or
Documentation, the government hereby agrees that this software or documentation qualifies as commercial
computer software or commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used or defined in
FAR 12.212, DFARS Part 227.72, and DFARS 252.227-7014. Accordingly, the terms and conditions of this
Agreement and only those rights specified in this Agreement, shall pertain to and govern the use,
modification, reproduction, release, performance, display, and disclosure of the Program and Documentation
by the federal government (or other entity acquiring for or through the federal government) and shall
supersede any conflicting contractual terms or conditions. If this License fails to meet the government's
needs or is inconsistent in any respect with federal procurement law, the government agrees to return the
Program and Documentation, unused, to The MathWorks, Inc.
MATLAB, Simulink, Stateflow, Handle Graphics, Real-Time Workshop, and xPC TargetBox are registered
trademarks of The MathWorks, Inc.
Other product or brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Printing History: November 2000 Online only New for Version 1.1 (Release 12.0)
June 2001 Online only Revised for Version 1.2 (Release 12.1)
September 2001 Online only Revised for Version 1.3 (Release 12.1+)
July 2002 Online only Revised for Version 2 (Release 13)
September 2002 Online only Revised for Version 2.0.1 (Release 13)
September 2003 Online only Revised for Version 2.0.1 (Release 13 SP1)
June 2004 Online only Revised for Version 2.5 (Release 14)
August 2004 Online only Revised for Version 2.6 (Release 14+)
October 2004 Online only Revised for Version 2.6.1 (Release 14SP1)
November 2004 Online only Revised for Version 2.7 (Release 14SP1+)
March 2005 Online only Revised for Version 2.7.2 (Release 14SP2)
 Contents
xPC Target I/O Library
1
I/O Driver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
I/O Driver Block Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Memory-Mapped Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ISA Bus I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PCI Bus I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
xPC Target I/O Driver Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
PWM and FM Driver Block Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Updated Driver Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library . . . . . . . . 1-11

Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library Browser . . 1-15

Defining I/O Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Serial Communications Support

2
Introduction to Serial Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Hardware Connections for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Host and Target PC Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite) . . . . . 2-5

Adding RS-232 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Building and Running the Target Application (Composite) . . 2-11
RS-232/422/485 Simulink Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

i
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Simulink Blocks for RS-232 I/O (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
MATLAB Message Structures for RS-232 I/O (Conventional) 2-61
RS-232 Synchronous Mode (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
RS-232 Asynchronous Mode (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
RS-232 Simulink Block Reference (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference (Conventional) . . . . . . 2-88
RS-232 Binary Mode (Conventional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

GPIB I/O Support

3
Introduction to GPIB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Hardware Connections for GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Simulink Blocks for GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
MATLAB Message Structures for GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Using GPIB Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Adding GPIB Driver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Creating GPIB Message Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

GPIB Simulink Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

GPIB-232CT-A Setup Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
GPIB-232CT-A Send/Receive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

GPIB Initialization and Termination Message Structures . . . 3-17
GPIB Send/Receive Message Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Shortcuts and Features for Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Supported Data Types for Message Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

ii Contents
 CAN I/O Support
4
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
xPC Target CAN Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
CAN-AC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
CAN-AC2-PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CAN-AC2-104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips

PCA 82C200 CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Send Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Receive Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527
CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Send Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Receive Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips

SJA1000 CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Send Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Receive Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with

Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Send Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Receive Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames . . . . . . . . . 4-38

CAN Bit-Packing Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
CAN Bit-Unpacking Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Detecting Time-Outs When Receiving CAN Messages . . . . 4-47

CAN Timeout Detection Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

iii
 Model Execution Driven by CAN Messages
(Interrupt Capability of CAN Receive Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
CAN-AC2 (ISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
CAN-AC2-PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Defining Initialization and Termination CAN Messages . 4-53

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

CAN I/O Support for FIFO

5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
FIFO Mode Drivers for CAN Boards from Softing . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with

Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
FIFO Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
FIFO Write Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
FIFO Read Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
FIFO Read Filter Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
FIFO Read XMT Level Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
FIFO Reset XMT Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
FIFO Read RCV Level Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
FIFO Reset RCV Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

iv Contents
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with
Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
FIFO Setup Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
FIFO Write Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
FIFO Read Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
FIFO Read Filter Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
FIFO Read XMT Level Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
FIFO Reset XMT Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
FIFO Read RCV Level Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
FIFO Reset RCV Driver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Acceptance Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Example 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Example 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

UDP I/O Support

6
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
What Is UDP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Why UDP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Note on UDP Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

xPC Target UDP Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

UDP Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
UDP Receive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
UDP Send Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
UDP Pack Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
UDP Unpack Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Byte Reversal/Change Endianess Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

v
 xPC Target UDP Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
UDP Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Aerospace I/O Support

7
Condor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Board Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Condor CEI-x20 Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Condor CEI-x20 Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Condor CEI-x20 Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Encode ARINC 429 Words for Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Decode ARINC 429 Words from Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Access IO
8
WDG-CSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
WDG-CSM Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

ADDI-DATA
9
APCI-1710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
APCI-1710 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

PA-1700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
PA-1700 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

vi Contents
 Adlink
10
Adlink PCI-8133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
PCI-8133 3-Phase PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Adlink PCI-6208A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

PCI-6208A Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
PCI-6208A Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
PCI-6208A Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Advantech
11
PCL-1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
PCL-1800 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
PCL-1800 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
PCL-1800 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
PCL-1800 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

PCL-711B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
PCL-711B Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
PCL-711B Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
PCL-711B Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
PCL-711B Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

PCL-726 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
PCL-726 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
PCL-726 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
PCL-726 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

PCL-727 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
PCL-727 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
PCL-727 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
PCL-727 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

vii
 PCL-728 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
PCL-728 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20

PCL-812 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
PCL-812 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
PCL-812 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
PCL-812 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
PCL-812 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26

PCL-812PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
PCL-812PG Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
PCL-812PG Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
PCL-812PG Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
PCL-812PG Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31

PCL-818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
PCL-818 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32
PCL-818 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
PCL-818 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
PCL-818 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

PCL-818H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
PCL-818H Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
PCL-818H Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
PCL-818H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
PCL-818H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42

PCL-818HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
PCL-818HD Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
PCL-818HD Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
PCL-818HD Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
PCL-818HD Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47

PCL-818HG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
PCL-818HG Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
PCL-818HG Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
PCL-818HG Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
PCL-818HG Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52

viii Contents
 PCL-818L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
PCL-818L Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
PCL-818L Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
PCL-818L Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
PCL-818L Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57

Analogic
12
AIM12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
AIM12 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
AIM12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
AIM12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

AIM16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
AIM16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
AIM16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
AIM16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

BittWare
13
Audio-PMC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Audio-PMC+ Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Audio-PMC+ Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

BVM
14
PMCDIO64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
PMCDIO64 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
PMCDIO64 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

ix
 Contec
15
Contec AD12-16(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
AD12-16(PCI) Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
AD12-16(PCI) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
AD12-16(PCI) Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

Contec AD12-16(PCI)E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8

AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12

Contec ADI12-16(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

ADI12-16(PCI) Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14

Contec AD12-64(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16

AD12-64(PCI) Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
AD12-64(PCI) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
AD12-64(PCI) Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19

Contec AD16-16(PCI)E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21

AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22

Contec DA12-4(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24

DA12-4(PCI) Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24

Contec DA12-16(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

DA12-16(PCI) Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26

Contec PIO-32/32T(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28

PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29

Contec CNT24-4D(PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31

CNT24-4D(PCI) Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31

x Contents
 Data Translation
16
DT2821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
DT2821 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
DT2821 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
DT2821 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
DT2821 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

DT2821-F-8DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
DT2821-F-8DI Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
DT2821-F-8DI Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
DT2821-F-8DI Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
DT2821-F-8DI Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

DT2821-G-8DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
DT2821-G-8DI Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
DT2821-G-8DI Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
DT2821-G-8DI Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
DT2821-G-8DI Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17

DT2821-F-16SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
DT2821-F-16SE Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
DT2821-F-16SE Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
DT2821-F-16SE Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
DT2821-F-16SE Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22

DT2821-G-16SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
DT2821-G-16SE Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
DT2821-G-16SE Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
DT2821-G-16SE Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
DT2821-G-16SE Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-27

DT2823 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
DT2823 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
DT2823 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
DT2823 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
DT2823 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31

xi
 DT2824-PGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
DT2824-PGH Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
DT2824-PGH Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35
DT2824-PGH Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36

DT2824-PGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37
DT2824-PGL Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37
DT2824-PGL Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-39
DT2824-PGL Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40

DT2825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
DT2825 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
DT2825 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-43
DT2825 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-44
DT2825 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45

DT2827 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46
DT2827 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46
DT2827 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-47
DT2827 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-48
DT2827 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49

DT2828 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-51
DT2828 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-51
DT2828 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-53
DT2828 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
DT2828 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-55

Diamond
17
Diamond-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
MM Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
MM Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
MM Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
MM Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7

xii Contents
Diamond-MM-16-AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
MM-16-AT Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
MM-16-AT Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
MM-16-AT Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
MM-16-AT Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13

Diamond-MM-32-AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
MM-32-AT Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
MM-32-AT Frame Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
MM-32-AT Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
MM-32-AT Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21
MM-32-AT Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22

Garnet-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-25
Garnet-MM Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-25
Garnet-MM Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-26

Onyx-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28
Onyx-MM Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28
Onyx-MM Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29

Onyx-MM-DIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-31
Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-31
Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-32

Prometheus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-34
Prometheus Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35
Prometheus Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36
Prometheus Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37
Prometheus Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38

xiii
 Quartz-MM 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40
Quartz-MM 5 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41
Quartz-MM 5 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42
Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43
Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-44
Quartz-MM5 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-46
Quartz-MM5 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-47
Quartz-MM5 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-49
Quartz-MM5 FM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-50
Quartz-MMxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-51

Quartz-MM 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-52
Quartz-MM 10 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-53
Quartz-MM 10 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-54
Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-54
Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-56
Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-57
Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-59
Quartz-MM 10 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-60
Quartz-MM 10 FM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-61
Quartz-MMxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-62

Ruby-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-63
Diamond Ruby-MM Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-63
Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-65
Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-66

Ruby-MM-416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-68
Ruby-MM-416 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-68
Ruby-MM-416 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-70
Ruby-MM-416 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-71

Ruby-MM-1612 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-73
Ruby-MM-1612 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-73
Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-76
Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-77

xiv Contents
 General Standards
18
Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
A/D Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Create Enable Signal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
D/A Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Interleaving Analog Input and Analog Output Blocks . . . . . 18-10
Using Multiple Boards for Simultaneous Analog to Digital
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12

PMC-ADADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
PMC-ADADIO Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
PMC-ADADIO Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
Create Enable Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24

PMC-16AO-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
PMC-16AO-12 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25

Humusoft
19
AD 512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
AD 512 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
AD 512 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
AD 512 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
AD 512 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

xv
 Keithley
20
DAS-1800HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
DAS-1800HR Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
DAS-1800HR Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
DAS-1800HR Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

KCPI-1801HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
KPCI-1801HC Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
KPCI-1801HC Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
KPCI-1801HC Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
KPCI-1801HC Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12

KPCI-1802HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14
KPCI-1802HC Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
KPCI-1802HC Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17
KPCI-1802HC Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18
KPCI-1802HC Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19

Measurement Computing (Formerly

ComputerBoards)
21
CIO-CTR05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
CIO-CTR05 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
CIO-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
CIO-CTR05 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
CIO-CTR05 Frequency Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
CIO-CTRxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13

xvi Contents
CIO-CTR10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-14
CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-16
CIO-CTR10 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
CIO-CTR10 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
CIO-CTR10 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
CIO-CTR10 Frequency Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
CIO-CTRxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22

CIO-DAC08 (/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23

CIO-DAC08 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23

CIO-DAC08/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-25
CIO-DAC08/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-25

CIO-DAC16 (/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27

CIO-DAC16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27

CIO-DAC16/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30
CIO-DAC16/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-30

CIO-DAS16/330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-33
CIO-DAS16/330 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-34

CIO-DAS16/JR (/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-35

CIO-DAS16/JR Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36
CIO-DAS16/JR (/12) Analog Input (A/D) with EXP Signal
Conditioning Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-37

CIO-DAS16JR/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-40
CIO-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-41

CIO-DAS1601/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-42
CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-43
CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-44
CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-45
CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-46

xvii
 CIO-DAS1602/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-49
CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-50
CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-51
CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-52
CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-53

CIO-DAS1602/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-55
CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-56
CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-57
CIO-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-58
CIO DAS1602/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-59

CIO-DDA06 (/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-61

CIO-DDA06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-62
CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-63
CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-64

CIO-DDA06/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-67
CIO-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-68
CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-69
CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-70

CIO-DIO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-73
CIO-DIO24 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-73
CIO-DIO24 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-74
CIO-DIO24 Signal Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-76

CIO-DIO24H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
CIO-DIO24H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
CIO-DIO24H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-78

CIO-DIO48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-80
CIO-DIO48 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-80
CIO-DIO48 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-81

CIO-DIO48H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-84
CIO-DIO48H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-84
CIO-DIO48H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-86

xviii Contents
CIO-DIO96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-88
CIO-DIO96 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-88
CIO-DIO96 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-89

CIO-DIO192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-92
CIO-DIO192 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-92
CIO-DIO192 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-93

CIO-DO24DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-96
CIO-DO24DD Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-96

CIO-PDISO16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-98
CIO-PDISO16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-98
CIO-PDISO16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-99

CIO-QUAD02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-101
CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-101
CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . 21-106

CIO-QUAD04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-109
CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-110
CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . 21-114

PC104-DAC06 (/12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-117

PC104-DAC06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-117

PC104-DAS16JR/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-119
PC104-DAS16JR/12 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-119
PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-121
PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-122

PC104-DAS16JR/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-123
PC104-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-123
PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-125
PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-126

PC104-DIO48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-127
PC104-DIO48 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-128
PC104-DIO48 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-129

xix
 PCI-CTR05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-131
PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-132
PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-133
PCI-CTR05 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-135
PCI-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-137
PCI-CTR05 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-138
PCI-CTR05 Frequency Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-139
PCI-CTRxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-140

PCI-DAS1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-141
PCI-DAS1200 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-141
PCI-DAS1200 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-143
PCI-DAS1200 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-144
PCI-DAS1200 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-146

PCI-DAS1200/JR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-148
PCI-DAS1200/JR Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-148
PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-149
PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-151

PCI-DAS1602/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-153
PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-153
PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-155
PCI-DAS 1602/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-156
PCI-DAS1602/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-158

PCI-DAS1602/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-160
PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-161
PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-162
PCI-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-163
PCI-DAS1602/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-165

PCI-DDA02/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-167
PCI-DDA02/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-167
PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-169
PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-170

xx Contents
PCI-DDA02/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-173
PCI-DDA02/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-173
PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-175
PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-176

PCI-DDA04/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-179
PCI-DDA04/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-179
PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-181
PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-182

PCI-DDA04/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-185
PCI-DDA04/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-185
PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-187
PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-188

PCI-DDA08/12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-191
PCI-DDA08/12 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-191
PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-193
PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-194

PCI-DDA08/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-197
PCI-DDA08/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-197
PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-199
PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-200

PCI-DIO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-203
PCI-DIO24 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-203
PCI-DIO24 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-204
PCI-DIO24 Signal Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-206

PCI-DIO24H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-207
PCI-DIO24H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-207
PCI-DIO24H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-208

PCI-DIO48H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-211
PCI-DIO48H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-211
PCI-DIO48H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-212

xxi
 PCI-DIO96H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-215
PCI-DIO96H Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-215
PCI-DIO96H Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-216

PCI-DIO96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-219
PCI-DIO96 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-219
PCI-DIO96 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-220

PCI-PDISO8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-223
PCI-PDISO8 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-223
PCI-PDISO8 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-225

PCI-PDISO16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-226
PCI-PDISO16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-226
PCI-PDISO16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-228

PCIM-DAS1602/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-229
PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-230
PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-231
PCIM-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-233
PCIM-DAS1602/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-234

PCIM-DDA06/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-236
PCIM-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-236
PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-238
PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-239

PCI-DUAL-AC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-242
PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-242
PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-243

PCI-QUAD04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-246
PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-247
PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . 21-251

PCI-DAS-TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-254
PCI-DAS-TC Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-255

xxii Contents
 National Instruments
22
AT-AO-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
AT-AO-6 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

AT-AO-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
AT-AO-10 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6

PC-DIO-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
PC-DIO-24 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
PC-DIO-24 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9

PC-TIO-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
PC-TIO-10 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
PC-TIO-10 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16
PC-TIO-10 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17
PC-TIO10 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19
PC-TIO10 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-21
PC-TIO10 FM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-22
PC-TIO-10xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-22

PCI-6023E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23
PCI-6023E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-24
PCI-6023E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-26
PCI-6023E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27
PCI-6023E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-28
PCI-6023E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-29

PCI-6024E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-31
PCI-6024E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-32
PCI-6024E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-34
PCI-6024E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-35
PCI-6024E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-36
PCI-6024E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-37
PCI-6024E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-38

xxiii
 PCI-6025E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-40
PCI-6025E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-41
PCI-6025E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-43
PCI-6025E and PCI-6025E 8255 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . 22-44
PCI-6025E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-45
PCI-6025E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-46
PCI-6025E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-47

PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-49

PCI-6030E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-50
PCI-6030E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-52
PCI-6030E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-54
PCI-6030E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-55
PCI-6030E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-56
PCI-6030E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-57

PCI-6031E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-59
PCI-6031E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-60
PCI-6031E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-62
PCI-6031E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-64
PCI-6031E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-65
PCI-6031E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-66
PCI-6031E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-67

PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-69

PCI-6040E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-70
PCI-6040E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-72
PCI-6040E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-74
PCI-6040E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-75
PCI-6040E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-76
PCI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-77

PCI/PXI-6052E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-79
PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-80
PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-82
PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-84
PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-85
PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-86
PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . 22-87

xxiv Contents
PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-89
PCI-6070E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-90
PCI-6070E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-92
PCI-6070E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-94
PCI-6070E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-95
PCI-6070E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-96
PCI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-97

PCI-6071E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-99
PCI-6071E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-100
PCI-6071E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-102
PCI-6071E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-104
PCI-6071E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-105
PCI-6071E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-106
PCI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 22-107

PCI-6503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-109
PCI-6503 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-109
PCI-6503 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-110

PCI-6527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-113
PCI-6527 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-113
PCI-6527 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-115

PCI-6601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-117
PCI-6601 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-117
PCI-6601 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-118
PCI-6601 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-120
PCI-6601 Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-121
PCI-6601 Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-122
PCI-6601 Armed Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-124

PCI/PXI-6602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-125
PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-125
PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-126
PCI/PXI-6602 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-128
PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-129
PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . 22-130
PCI/PXI-6602 Armed Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-132

xxv
 PCI-6703 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-134
PCI-6703 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-134

PCI-6704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-136
PCI-6704 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-136

PCI-6711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-138
PCI-6711 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-138
PCI-6711 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-140
PCI-6711 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-141

PCI/PXI-6713 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-143
PCI/PXI-6713 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-143
PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-145
PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-146

PCI-DIO-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-148
PCI-DIO-96 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-148
PCI-DIO-96 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-149

PXI-6040E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-152
PXI-6040E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-153
PXI-6040E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-155
PXI-6040E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-157
PXI-6040E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-158
PXI-6040E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-159
PXI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 22-160

PXI-6070E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-162
PXI-6070E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-162
PXI-6070E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-165
PXI-6070E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-166
PXI-6070E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-167
PXI-6070E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-169
PXI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 22-169

xxvi Contents
 PXI-6071E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-171
PXI-6071E Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-172
PXI-6071E Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-174
PXI-6071E Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-176
PXI-6071E Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-177
PXI-6071E Pulse Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-178
PXI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 22-179

PXI-6508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-181
PXI-6508 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-181
PXI-6508 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-182

PXI-6527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-185
PXI-6527 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-185
PXI-6527 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-187

PXI-6704 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-189
PXI-6704 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-189

North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

23
PC-12SD (PC-77SD1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
PC-12SD (PC-77SD1) Synchro/Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

NAII (Apex) 73LD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

73LD3 LVDT/RVDT Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

NAII (Apex) 73SD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8

NAII 73SD3 Synchro/Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9

NAII (Apex) 76LD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12

NAII 76LD1 L/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12

NAII (Apex) 76CL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15

NAII 76CL1 L/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15
NAII 76CL1 D/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18

xxvii
 NAII (Apex) 76CS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21
NAII 76CS1 S/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21
NAII 76CS1 D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-25

Quanser
24
Q8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Q8 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Q8 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Q8 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6
Q8 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
Q8 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
Q8 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11

Real Time Devices

25
DM6420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
DM6420 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
DM6420 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
DM6420 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
DM6420 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7

DM6430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
DM6430 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
DM6430 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
DM6430 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-12
DM6430 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13

DM6604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
DM6604 Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
DM6604 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
DM6604 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17

xxviiiContents
 DM6804 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
DM6804 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
DM6804 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
DM6804 Counter PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21
DM6804 Counter PWM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
DM6804 Counter FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-24
DM6804 Counter FM & ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-26
DM6804 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
DM6804 FM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-28
DM6804xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-29

DM6814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-30
DM6814 Incremental Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-31
DM6814 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-31
DM6814 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-32

DM6816 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-34
DM6816 PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-34

DM7420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-36
DM7420 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-36
DM7420 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-40
DM7420 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-40

SBS Technologies
26
Flex/104A PC/104 IP Carrier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Flex-104A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

IP-16ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
IP-16ADC Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4

IP-16DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
IP-16DAC Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6

xxix
 IP-DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
IP-DAC Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

IP-Digital 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
IP-Digital 24 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
IP-Digital 24 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-11

IP-HiADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13
IP-HiADC Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13

IP-Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15
IP-Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15

IP-Unidig-E-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18

PCI-40A Carrier Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20

PCI-40A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20

Broadcast Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21

Create Shared Memory Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
Initialize Shared Memory Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24
SBS 2510/2500 Broadcast Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-25
SBS25x0 init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-26
SBS25x0 read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-27
SBS25x0 write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28
Shared Memory Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28
Shared Memory Unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-29
Shared Memory Structure Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-29

xxx Contents
 Sensoray
27
526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Sensoray526 AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Sensoray526 Dual AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
Sensoray526 DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4
Sensoray526 Dual DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5
Sensoray526 DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7
Sensoray526 DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8
Sensoray526 Encoder Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9

626 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
Sensoray 626 Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
Sensoray 626 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12
Sensoray 626 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
Sensoray 626 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14
Sensoray 626 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14
Sensoray 626 Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-15
Sensoray 626 PWM Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16

Softing
28

xxxi
 Systran
29
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Create Shared Memory Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
Initialize Shared Memory Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4

SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5

SC150 init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
SC150 read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
SC150 write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Shared Memory Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-8
Shared Memory Unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-8

Shared Memory Structure Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-9

Shared Memory Partition Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-9
Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure . . . . . . . . . . . 29-14

United Electronic Industries (UEI)

30
Grouping the UEI Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4

Analog Input Frame Driver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6

Notes on Master and Slave Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Interrupt Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Interrupt Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
Example Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21

xxxiiContents
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-35
PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-39
PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-43

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-44
PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-45
PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-49
PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-51

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-53

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-54
PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-60
PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-61

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-63

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-64
PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-65
PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-69
PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-71

xxxiii
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-73
PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-74
PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-75
PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-79
PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-80
PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-81

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-83

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-84
PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-85
PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-89
PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-90
PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-91

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-93

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-94
PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-95
PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-99
PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-100
PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-101

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-103

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-104
PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . 30-105
PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . 30-109
PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-110
PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-111

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-113

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-114
PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . 30-116
PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . 30-120
PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-121
PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-122

xxxivContents
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-124
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-125
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . 30-126
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . 30-130
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-131
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-132

PD2-AO Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-134

PD2-AO Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-134
PD2-AO Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-136
PD2-AO Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-137

PD2-DIO-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-139
PD2-DIO-64 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-140
PD2-DIO-64 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-141

PD2-DIO-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-143
PD2-DIO-128 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-143
PD2-DIO-128 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-144

PD2-DIO-128i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-146
PD2-DIO-128i Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-146
PD2-DIO-128i Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-147

PDL-DIO-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-149
PDL-DIO-64 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-150
PDL-DIO-64 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-151

PDXI-DIO-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-153
PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-154
PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-155

PDXI-AO Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-157

PDXI-AO Analog Output (D/A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-157
PDXI-AO Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-159
PDXI-AO Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-160

xxxv
 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape
31
Vector CANape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Notes on xPC Target and Vector CANape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3

Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape . . . . . . . . . . . 31-5

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-5
Creating a new Vector CANape Project to Associate with a
Particular Target Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Associating an Existing Vector CANape Project with a
Particular Target PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-9
Providing A2L Files for Vector CANape Database . . . . . . . . 31-10

Versalogic
32
VSBC-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
VSBC-6 Analog Input (A/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
VSBC-6 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
VSBC-6 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
VSBC-6 Watch Dog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4

xxxviContents
 VMIC
33
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
Create Shared Memory Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
Initialize Shared Memory Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4

VMICPCI-5565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
5565 init . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
5565 read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
5565 write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
5565 pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9
5565 unpack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9
5565 broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9

Shared Memory Structure Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-11

Shared Memory Partition Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-11
Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure . . . . . . . . . . . 33-13

Miscellaneous Blocks
34
xPC Target Scope Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
xPC Target Scope of Type Target Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
xPC Target Scope of Type Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
xPC Target Scope of Type File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7

From xPC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-10

To xPC Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-12

xPC Target From File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14

File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
Block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-16

xPC Target Software Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-18

Block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-18

xxxvii
 I/O Port Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-19

I/O Port Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-21

xPC Target TET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23

xPC Target Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-24

Asynchronous Event Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-25

Adding an Asynchronous Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-25
Async IRQ Source Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-28
Async Rate Transition Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-29
Async Buffer Write and Read Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-30
Asynchronous Interrupt Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-31

Obsoleted Drivers
35
xPC Target Library of Obsoleted Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2

Burr-Brown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
PCI-20003M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
PCI-20019M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
PCI-20023M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-7
PCI-20041C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
PCI-20098C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11

Gespac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
GESADA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
GESPIA-2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18

Measurement Computing (Computer Boards) . . . . . . . . . . 35-20

CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . . 35-22
PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete) . . . . . . . . . . . 35-24

xxxviiiContents
 1
xPC Target I/O Library

xPC Target is a solution for prototyping, testing, and deploying real-time systems using standard PC
hardware. In support of this, xPC Target allows you to add I/O blocks to your model. I/O blocks in
xPC Target provide a particular function of an I/O board. By using I/O blocks in your model, you can
generate executable code tuned specifically for your hardware. This chapter includes the following
sections:

I/O Driver Blocks (p. 1-2) Introduction to the xPC Target I/O library of driver blocks
Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Adding I/O blocks to a model using the xPC Target library
Library (p. 1-11)
Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Adding I/O blocks to a model using the Simulink® library
Library Browser (p. 1-15) browser
Defining I/O Block Parameters Configuring I/O driver blocks
(p. 1-19)
1 xPC Target I/O Library

I/O Driver Blocks

You add I/O driver blocks to your Simulink model to connect your model to
physical I/O boards. These I/O boards then connect to the sensors and actuators
in the physical system. This section includes the following topics:

• “I/O Driver Block Library” on page 1-2

• “Memory-Mapped Devices” on page 1-5
• “PCI Bus I/O Devices” on page 1-6
• “xPC Target I/O Driver Structures” on page 1-7
• “Updated Driver Information” on page 1-10

Refer to the following sections for descriptions on how to add I/O blocks to your
model, and how to configure those blocks:

• “Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library” on page 1-11
• “Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library Browser” on page 1-15
• “Defining I/O Block Parameters” on page 1-19

I/O Driver Block Library

A driver block does not represent an entire board, but an I/O section supported
by a board. Therefore, the xPC Target library can have more than one block for
each physical board. I/O driver blocks are written as C-code S-functions
(noninlined S-functions). The source code for the C-code S-functions with xPC
Target is included.
xPC Target supports PCI and ISA buses. If the bus type is not indicated in the
driver block number, you can determine the bus type of a driver block by
checking the block’s parameter dialog box. The last parameter is either a PCI
slot, for PCI boards, or a base address, for ISA boards.
You can open the I/O device driver library with the MATLAB® command
xpclib. The library xpclib contains sublibraries grouped by the type of I/O
function they provide.

1-2
 I/O Driver Blocks

Note Opening a dialog box for a source block causes Simulink to pause.
While Simulink is paused, you can edit the parameter values. You must close
the dialog box to have the changes take effect and allow Simulink to continue.

In particular, hardware input blocks in the xPC Target library (blocks that
acquire data from hardware) are affected by this change.

When you double-click one of these groups, the sublibrary opens, displaying a
list grouped by manufacturer as shown below.

1-3
1 xPC Target I/O Library

Double-clicking one of the manufacturer groups then displays the set of I/O
device driver blocks for the specified I/O functionality (for example, A/D, D/A,
Digital Inputs, Digital Outputs, and so on).
The following figure shows the A/D drivers for the manufacturer Measurement
Computing, Inc.

1-4
 I/O Driver Blocks

When you double-click one of these blocks, a Block Parameters dialog box
opens, allowing you to enter hardware-specific parameters. Parameters
typically include

• Sample time
• Number of channels
• Voltage range
• PCI slot (PCI boards)
• Base address (ISA boards)

Memory-Mapped Devices
Some supported boards in the xPC Target I/O library are memory-mapped
devices, for example, Burr-Brown boards. These memory-mapped boards are
accessed in the address space between 640 K and 1 MB in the lower memory
area. xPC Target reserves a 112 KB memory space for memory-mapped devices
in the address range
C0000 - DBFFF

Some drivers for memory-mapped devices allow you to select an address range
supported by the device, but not supported by xPC Target. For example, the
CAN drivers for Softing allow you to select memory ranges above DBFFF. Base
addresses of memory-mapped devices must be chosen within this memory
space for your target application to work properly. Select a memory range
supported by both the device and xPC Target.

ISA Bus I/O Devices

There are two types of ISA boards:

• Jumper addressable ISA cards

• PnP (Plug and Play) ISA cards

xPC Target only supports jumper addressable ISA cards (non-PnP ISA boards)
where you have to set the base address manually.

1-5
1 xPC Target I/O Library

PCI Bus I/O Devices

The xPC Target I/O library supports I/O boards with a PCI bus. During the boot
process, the BIOS creates a conflict-free configuration of base addresses and
interrupt lines for all PCI devices in the target system. The user does not need
to define any base address information in the dialog boxes of the drivers.
All PCI device driver blocks have an additional entry in their dialog boxes. This
entry is called PCI Slot (-1 Autodetect) and allows you to use several
identical PCI boards within one target system. This entry uses a default value
of -1, which allows the driver to search the entire PCI bus to find the board. If
you specify a single number, X, greater than 0, the driver uses the board in bus
0, slot X. When more than one board of the same type is found, you must use a
designated slot number and avoid the use of autodetection. For manually
setting the slot number you use a number greater than or equal to 0. If the
board is not able to locate this slot in the target PC, your target application will
generate an error message after downloading.
If this additional entry is set to any value equal to or greater than 0, you must
be aware of the manufacturer’s identification number (Vendor ID) and the
board identification number (Device ID) of those boards supported by the
I/O library. When the target is booted, the BIOS is executed and the target PC
monitor shows parameters for any PCI boards installed on the target PC. An
example is shown below:
Bus No Device Func. Vendor Device Device Class IRQ
No. No. ID ID
0 4 1 8086 7111 IDE controller 14/15
0 4 2 8086 7112 Serial bus 10
controller
0 11 0 1307 000B Unknown PCI device N/A
1 0 0 12D2 0018 Display controller 11

In this example, the third line indicates the location of the Measurement
Computing PCI-DIO48 board. This is known since the Measurement
Computing vendor ID is 0x1307 and the device ID is 0xb. In this case, you now
can see that the Measurement Computing board is plugged into PCI slot 11
(Device No.), and that this value must be entered in the dialog box entry in your
I/O device driver for each model that uses this I/O device.

1-6
 I/O Driver Blocks

xPC Target I/O Driver Structures

Properties for xPC Target I/O drivers are usually defined using the parameter
dialog box associated with each Simulink block. However, for more advanced
drivers, the available fields defined by text boxes, check boxes, and pull-down
lists are inadequate to define the behavior of the driver. In such cases, a more
textual description is needed to indicate what the driver has to do at runtime.
Textual in this context refers to a programming-language-like syntax and style.
xPC Target currently uses a string description contained in message structures
for the conventional RS-232, GPIB, CAN (initialization), and the general
counter drivers (AMD9513).
What is a message structure? — A message structure is a MATLAB array
with each cell containing one complete message (command). A message
consists of one or more statements.

Syntax of a message statement — Each statement in a message has the

following format:
Structure_name(index).field_name = <field string or value>

The field names are defined by the driver, and need to be entered with the
correct upper- and lowercase letters. However, you can choose your own
structure name and enter that name into the driver parameter dialog box.
Creating a message structure — You could enter the message structure
directly in the edit field of the driver parameter dialog box. But because the
message structure is an array and very large, this becomes cumbersome very
easily.
A better way is to define the message structure as an array in an M-file and
pass the structure array to the driver by referencing it by name. For example,
to initialize an external A/D module and acquire a value during each sample
interval, create an M-file with the following statements:

1-7
1 xPC Target I/O Library

Message(1).senddata='InitADConv, Channel %d'

Message(1).inputports=[1]
Message(1).recdata=''
Message(1).outputports=[]

Message(2).senddata='Wait and Read converted Value'

Message(2).inputports=[]
Message(2).recdata='%f'
Message(2).outputports=[1]

This approach is different from other xPC Target driver blocks:

• The M-file containing the definition of the message structure has to be

executed before the model is opened.
After creating your Simulink model and message M-file, set the preload
function of the Simulink model to load the M-file the next time you open the
model. In the MATLAB window, type
set_param(gcs, 'PreLoadFcn', 'M-file_name'

• When you move or copy the model file to a new directory, you also need to
move or copy the M-file defining the message structure.

During each sample interval, the driver block locates the structure defined in
the Block Parameters dialog box, interprets the series of messages, and
executes the command defined by each message.
Specific drivers and structures — For detailed information on the fields in a
message structure, see the following chapters in this document:
• Chapter 2, “Serial Communications Support”
• Chapter 3, “GPIB I/O Support”
• Chapter 4, “CAN I/O Support”

PWM and FM Driver Block Notes

In PWM and FM driver blocks, your control over the output frequency and duty
cycle is not always precise. In particular, these values are affected by the way
that the base frequency is selected, as described in this section. The base
frequency value is exact.

1-8
 I/O Driver Blocks

At the beginning of each sample time, two unsigned 16-bit integers, n and m,
are computed based on the block parameters and the current values of the
input signals. During the current sample period, the output signal is held high
for m cycles of the base frequency, low for the next n-m cycles, high for the next
m cycles, and so forth.

For a base frequency b, this results in a rectangular output signal of frequency

b/n and duty cycle m/n. Because m and n must be integers, it is not possible to
provide a continuous range of output frequencies and duty cycles with perfect
exactness.
For example, assume that you want to configure an FM block with a duty cycle
(m/n) of 1/2. The input signal f to this block is a relative frequency. It specifies
an output frequency of b x f. Because m and n must be integers, it is not always
possible to find values of m and n such that f will equal b/n exactly and n will
equal 2 x m (duty cycle m/n = 1/2) exactly. Such an exact match is only possible
when the input signal f equals 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, and so forth. The output
frequencies for the intervening input signal f values are approximate. The
errors are smaller as f approaches 0 and larger as f approaches 1.
Hint, to achieve the smallest margin of error, select the largest possible base
frequency. The fact that n and m must be 16-bit integers imposes a lower limit
of b / (216 - 1) on the frequencies that can be generated using a given base
frequency.

1-9
1 xPC Target I/O Library

Updated Driver Information

Because new drivers are always being added, and existing drivers are always
being updated, not all of the information about these drivers is included in the
online or printed documentation.
For updated and additional driver information, see the developer Web site at
http://www.mathworks.com/support/product/XP/productnews/productnew
s.html

1-10
 Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library

Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library

xPC Target includes a Simulink block library for I/O drivers. The highest
hierarchical level in the library is grouped by I/O function. The second level is
grouped by board manufacturer. The manufacturer groups within this second
level contain the driver blocks for specific boards.
This procedure uses the Simulink model xpc_osc.mdl as an example of how to
add and connect I/O blocks:

1 In the MATLAB window, type

xpclib

The Library: xpclib window opens.

Alternatively, you can access the I/O driver library with the Simulink
Library Browser. See “Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library
Browser” on page 1-15.

2 Open a function group. For example, to open the A/D group, double-click the
A/D block.

1-11
1 xPC Target I/O Library

The manufacturer level opens.

Within each manufacturer group are the blocks for a single function.

3 Open a manufacturer group. For example, to open the A/D driver blocks
from Measurement Computing, double-click the group marked
Measurement Computing.

The window with the A/D driver blocks for Measurement Computing opens.

1-12
 Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library

4 In the Simulink window, type

xpc_osc

The Simulink block diagram opens for the model xpc_osc.mdl.

5 From the block library, click and drag the name of an A/D board to the
Simulink block diagram. Likewise, click and drag the name of a D/A board
to your model.

Simulink adds the new I/O blocks to your model.

1-13
1 xPC Target I/O Library

6 Remove the Signal Generator block and add the Analog Input block in its
place. Remove the Scope block and add the Analog Output block in its place.

The demo model xpcosc should look like the figure shown below.

You cannot run this model unless you have the I/O board shown installed in
your target PC. However, you can substitute the driver blocks for another
I/O board that is installed in the target PC.
Your next task is to define the I/O block parameters. See “Defining I/O Block
Parameters” on page 1-19.

1-14
 Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library Browser

Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library Browser

xPC Target includes a Simulink block library for I/O drivers. The highest
hierarchical level in the library is grouped by I/O function. The second level is
grouped by board manufacturer. The manufacturer groups within this second
level contain the driver blocks for specific boards.
This procedure uses the Simulink model xpc_osc.mdl as an example of how to
add and connect I/O blocks:

1 In the MATLAB window, type

xpc_osc

The Simulink block diagram opens for the model xpc_osc.mdl.

1-15
1 xPC Target I/O Library

2 In the Simulink window, from the View menu, click Library Browser.

The Simulink Library Browser window opens. Alternatively, you can open
the Simulink Library Browser by typing simulink in the MATLAB
Command Window.

You can access the xPC Target I/O library by right-clicking xPC Target and
then clicking Open the xPC Target Library.

Alternatively, you can access driver blocks using the xPC Target I/O driver
library. See “Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target Library” on page 1-11.

3 Double-click xPC Target.

A list of I/O functions opens.

1-16
 Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library Browser

4 Open a function group. For example, to open the A/D group for Measurement
Computing, double-click A/D, and then click Measurement Computing.

A list with the A/D driver blocks for Measurement Computing opens.

1-17
1 xPC Target I/O Library

5 From the block library, click and drag the name of an A/D board to the
Simulink block diagram. Likewise, click and drag the name of a D/A board
to your model.

Simulink adds the new I/O blocks to your model.

6 Remove the Signal Generator block and add the analog input block in its
place. Remove the Scope block and add the analog output block in its place.

The model xpc_osc should look like the figure shown below.

You cannot run this model unless you have the I/O board shown above
installed in your target PC. However, you can substitute the driver blocks
for another I/O board that is installed in the target PC.
Your next task is to define the I/O block parameters. See “Defining I/O Block
Parameters.”

1-18
 Defining I/O Block Parameters

Defining I/O Block Parameters

The I/O block parameters define values for your physical I/O boards. For
example, I/O block parameters include channel numbers for multichannel
boards, input and output voltage ranges, and sample time.
This procedure uses the Simulink model xpc_osc.mdl as an example, and
assumes you have added an analog input and an analog output block to your
model. To add an I/O block, see either “Adding I/O Blocks with the xPC Target
Library” on page 1-11 or “Adding I/O Blocks with the Simulink Library
Browser.”

1 In the Simulink window, double-click the input block labeled Analog Input.

The dialog box for the A/D converter opens.

2 Fill in the dialog box. For example, for a single channel enter 1 in the
Number of Channels box, select –10 V for the input range, and select
single-ended (16 channels) for the MUX switch position. Enter the same
sample time you entered for the fixed step size in the Simulation ->
Configuration Parameters dialog box Solver pane. Enter the base address
for this ISA-bus board.

1-19
1 xPC Target I/O Library

The Block Parameters dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

3 In the Simulink window, double-click the output block labeled Analog

Output.

The dialog box for the D/A converter opens.

4 Fill in the dialog box. For example, for one channel enter [1] in the Channel
Vector box; for an output level of –10 V enter the code [-10] in the Range
Vector box. Enter the same sample time you entered for the fixed step size
in the Simulation -> Configuration Parameters dialog box Solver pane.
Enter the base address for this ISA-bus board. E

1-20
 Defining I/O Block Parameters

The Block Parameters dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

If you change the sample time by changing the target object property
SampleTime, the sample times you entered in both of the I/O blocks are set to
the new value. The step size you entered in the Configuration Parameters
dialog box remains unchanged.
Your next task is to build and run the target application. See “xPC Target
Application” in Chapter 3 of the xPC Target getting started documentation.

1-21
1 xPC Target I/O Library

1-22
 2
Serial Communications
Support

xPC Target interfaces the target PC to serial devices using either the COM1 or COM2 port of the
main board, through Quatech drivers, or through Diamond Systems drivers. This chapter includes
the following sections:

Introduction to Serial Drivers (p. 2-2) Description of hardware connections and host/target PC
communications.
xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Description of composite xPC Target RS-232/422/485
Drivers (Composite) (p. 2-5) drivers. Includes description of procedure to add an
RS-232 driver block to your Simulink model. Also
describes associated Simulink blocks.
xPC Target RS-232 Drivers Description of conventional xPC Target RS-232 drivers.
(Conventional) (p. 2-60) Includes description of procedures to add an RS-232
driver block to your Simulink model and create the
message structures associated with those blocks. Also
describes associated Simulink blocks and MATLAB
message structures associated with the Simulink blocks.
2 Serial Communications Support

Introduction to Serial Drivers

xPC Target supports RS-232 I/O communication with the following:

• Serial ports on the target PC

• Third-party Quatech PCI boards (http://www.quatech.com)
• Third-party Diamond Systems PC/104 boards
(http://www.diamondsystems.com)

For the target PC serial ports, xPC Target can use these ports as the RS-232
I/O devices. You can initiate RS-232 communications with these ports and the
accompanying xPC Target drivers.
xPC Target also supports the following:

• RS-232 — QSC-100 and ESC-100 PCI boards from Quatech

• RS-422, RS-485 — QSC-200/300 PCI boards and DSCP-200/300 dual
channel PXI boards from Quatech, Fastcom: 422/2-PCI-335 adapter from
Commtech
• RS-232, RS-422, RS-485 — Emerald-MM and Emerald-MM-8 PC/104 boards
from Diamond Systems. These boards provide 4 and 8 serial ports,
respectively. These boards are jumper-configurable for the protocols (see the
manufacturer documentation for details).

xPC Target provides a set of functionally similar drivers for these boards. See
“RS-232/422/485 Simulink Block Reference” on page 2-12 for a description of
the driver blocks that support the different protocols.
xPC Target supplies two types of drivers to support RS-232 I/O communication,
conventional and composite:

• The composite drivers support RS-232 I/O for the target PC serial ports, the
Quatech RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 I/O devices, and the Diamond Systems
RS-232 I/O devices. These drivers support communication in asynchronous
binary mode. xPC Target uses Simulink blocks for the I/O drivers. The
composite drivers provide a simple ASCII encode/decode for the send and
receive RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 blocks. This set of drivers has the
descriptive name “composite” because the driver represents each functional
piece of the driver as a Simulink block. For more precise behavior, you can
customize the RS-232 driver with these blocks.

2-2
 Introduction to Serial Drivers

• The conventional drivers support RS-232 I/O only for the target PC serial
ports. These drivers support synchronous, asynchronous, and binary
(asynchronous) communication mode. xPC Target uses a model for this
RS-232 I/O that includes both Simulink blocks for the I/O drivers and
MATLAB structures for sequencing messages and commands.

This section includes the following topics:

• “Hardware Connections for RS-232” on page 2-3 — Connect the target PC to

an RS-232 device.
• “Host and Target PC Communication” on page 2-3 — Consider limitations to
using RS-232 for I/O on the target PC when using RS-232 communication
between the host PC and target PC.

Hardware Connections for RS-232

xPC Target supports serial communication with the COM1 and COM2 ports on
the target PC.
Your target applications can use these RS-232 ports as I/O devices. Typically,
the target PC is connected to an RS-232 device with a NULL modem cable.
However, this depends on the DTE/DCE configuration of the devices, and you
might not use a NULL modem cable.

RS-232
Target PC RS-232
connection Device

Host and Target PC Communication

If the host PC and target PC are connected using serial communication, one
COM port on the target PC is dedicated for communication with the host PC.
You cannot use this COM port in your block diagram as an I/O device.
For example, if the target PC uses COM1 for the communication with the host
PC, COM1 cannot be used by your block diagram. If you try to use COM1 as an
I/O device in your block diagram, an error message is displayed. The error

2-3
2 Serial Communications Support

message appears when you attempt to build and download the target
application. In this example, you must use COM2 as an I/O device in your block
diagram.
If you are using TCP/IP as your host PC to target PC communications protocol,
then you can use any of the COM ports for RS-232 I/O.

Note When you use composite driver blocks, COM1 and COM3 often share
interrupt line 4. Similarly, COM2 and COM4 often share interrupt line 3. If
you use COM1 for host-target communication, you cannot also use COM1 or
COM3 in a model. This is because the shared interrupt is caught in the xPC
Target operating system. However, if COM3 uses an interrupt different from
that for COM1, you can use COM3 in a model while using COM1 for
host-target communications. If COM1 and COM3 share an interrupt line, you
can use COM2 or COM4 as your RS-232 I/O port.

2-4
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

This section describes the components that make up the RS-232 and
RS-422/485 composite drivers, and how you can create a model using these
drivers. These drivers perform RS-232 or RS-422/485 asynchronous
communications.
xPC Target supports the target PC serial ports (main board), Quatech
RS-232/422/485 devices, Diamond Systems RS-232 devices, and Commtech
Fastcom: 422/2-PCI-335 adapters with composite drivers. These drivers
distribute the functionality of the device across several subsystems and blocks.
For most RS-232/422/485 requirements, you can use these RS-232/422/485
drivers as they are implemented. However, if you need to customize the xPC
Target RS-232/422/485 drivers, the composite nature of the target PC serial
port, Quatech RS-232/422/485, Diamond Systems RS-232, and Commtech
Fastcom drivers enables you to do so. See “RS-232/422/485 Internal Blocks and
Subsystems” on page 2-49 for details.
Note the following characteristics of the Commtech Fastcom: 422/2-PCI-335
adapter boards:

• The Fastcom 422/2-PCI-335 board has only two independent RS-422

channels.
• The Fastcom 422/2-PCI-335 board can handle baud rates up to 1.5
megabaud.
• The Fastcom 422/2-PCI-335 board hardware FIFO is fixed at 128 bytes for
receive and transmit.

This section includes the following topics:

• “Adding RS-232 Blocks” on page 2-6

• “Building and Running the Target Application (Composite)” on page 2-11
• “RS-232/422/485 Simulink Block Reference” on page 2-12

Note Many of the blocks that support the RS-232 and RS-422/485 composite
drivers are common across the main board, Quatech, and Diamond Systems
boards. The descriptions for these blocks are applicable for all drivers, with
specific board notes as appropriate.

2-5
2 Serial Communications Support

Adding RS-232 Blocks

You add RS-232 subsystem blocks to your Simulink model when you want to
use the serial ports on the target PC, Quatech QSC-100 or ESC-100, or
Diamond Systems Emerald-MM or Emerald-MM-8 serial device connected to
the target PC, for I/O.
After you create a Simulink model, you can add xPC Target driver blocks and
configure those blocks. The following procedure describes how to use the serial
ports on the target PC for I/O with the composite drivers.
Before you start, decide what COM port combinations you want to use. The
example has you configure the Baseboard Send/Receive block. To properly
configure this block, you need to select serial port pairs. This parameter
specifies the ports for which you are defining transmit and receive. You have a
choice of the following:

• Com1/none
• Com2/none
• Com1/Com3
• Com2/Com4
• none/Com3
• none/Com4
• Custom

If you choose either the Com1/Com3 or Com2/Com4 pair, check that the port pair
shares an interrupt. If the port pair does not share an interrupt, you cannot use
the two ports as a pair.
Alternatively, you can define a Custom port pair. A Custom port pair is one that
does not match the existing combinations of port pairs. When you select
Custom, the dialog allows you to configure your own port pair. For example, you
can set the IRQ and two addresses for the port pair. If one of the ports is not
used, set that address to 0.

2-6
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Normally, the ports are set to the following:

COM1 — 0x3F8, IRQ 4
COM2 — 0x2F8, IRQ 3
COM3 — 0x3E8 (if present), IRQ 4
COM4 — 0x2E8 (if present), IRQ 3
A Custom port pair is one where one or both ports of the pair are set to addresses
other than these conventions, or one for which you want to assign a different
IRQ value. Some hardware allows you to set the IRQ numbers independently.
If you choose the port pairs Com1/Com3 or Com2/Com4, you need to include one
Send/Receive subsystem block in the model. If you choose to use COM1 and
COM2, or COM1 and a custom port pair, you need to include two Send/Receive
blocks in the model.
The following example shows two models, one that uses a standard Com1/Com3
port pair, and one that uses custom port pairs:

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target driver block library opens.

2 Double-click the RS-232 group block.

A window with blocks for RS-232 drivers opens.

Note This library contains two sections, composite and conventional.

2-7
2 Serial Communications Support

Alternatively, you can access the xPC Target block library from the Simulink
Library Browser. In the Simulink window, and from the View menu, click
Show Library Browser. In the left pane, double-click xPC Target, and then
click RS232.

3 Drag and drop an ASCII Encode block to your Simulink model. This block
encodes input for the RS-232 Send Receive block.

4 Configure this block.

5 Drag and drop an ASCII Decode block to your Simulink model. This block
decodes output from the RS-232 Send Receive block.

6 Configure this block.

7 Double-click the Mainboard group block.

8 Depending on your port pair configuration, drag and drop one or two
Baseboard RS-232 Send/Receive blocks to your Simulink model.

2-8
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

9 Double-click the Baseboard RS-232 Send/Receive block.

10 Configure this block. Pay particular attention to the Parameter group

Board Setup entry.

11 Add a Signal Generator and Target Scope block.

12 From the Simulink Library Browser, select Sinks. Depending on your

configuration, drag and drop one or more Terminator blocks. Connect this
block to the unused RCV1 port to suppress unused port messages.

13 From the Simulink Library Browser, select Sources. Depending on your

configuration, drag and drop the Ground block. Connect this block to the
unused XMT3 port to suppress unused port messages.

Your model should look similar to one of the following figures. The first
figure shows a single-block model. This model uses the Com1/Com3 port pair.
The second figure shows a two-block model. This model uses two sets of
Custom port pairs.

2-9
2 Serial Communications Support

14 Double-click a Baseboard RS232 Send Receive block. Enter values to

configure the port(s) on the target PC for this board.

For example, if the target PC is connected to COM1, your Send Receive block
dialog box should look similar to the following figure. Note, this is a dynamic
dialog box that changes depending on the Parameter group selection.

2-10
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

For more information on entering the block parameters, see “Send/Receive

Blocks” on page 2-30.

15 Click OK. The Send Receive block dialog box dialog box closes.

Your next task is to build and run the target application.

Building and Running the Target Application

(Composite)
xPC Target and Real-Time Workshop® create C code from your Simulink
model. You can then use a C compiler to create executable code that runs on
the target PC.
After you have added the RS-232 blocks for the main board to your Simulink
model, you can build your target application.

Note You cannot use a serial port to communicate between the host PC and
target PC with this example. You can only use COM1 if it is not already in use
for host-target communications. Additionally, if COM1 and COM3 share an
interrupt, you cannot use COM3 if COM1 is already in use for host-target
communications.

1 In the Simulink window, and from the Tools menu, point to Real-Time
Workshop, and then click Build Model.

2-11
2 Serial Communications Support

2 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

+tg or tg.start or start(tg)

RS-232/422/485 Simulink Block Reference

xPC Target supports RS-232/422/485 communication with driver blocks in
your Simulink model.
This section includes the following topics:

• “Signal Data Types” on page 2-12 — Describes signal data types that
composite drivers support.
• “ASCII Encode/Decode” on page 2-16 — (Generic) Describes encoder and
decoder blocks. Encoders convert input signals for the send/receive
subsystem to ASCII strings. ASCII decoders parse the string from the
Send/Receive subsystem.
• “FIFO Read/Write” on page 2-19 — (Generic) Describes FIFO read and write
blocks.
• “RS232 State” on page 2-29 — (Generic) Monitors the hardware error state
information that is present in the output vector from all blocks.
• “Send/Receive Blocks” on page 2-30 — Provides blocks for sending and
receiving.
• “Modem Control” on page 2-44 — Controls the state of either or both of the
RTS and DTR output lines.
• “Modem Status” on page 2-47 — Reads the states of the four input modem
control lines.
• “RS-232/422/485 Internal Blocks and Subsystems” on page 2-49 — Provides
blocks to customize the RS-232/422/485 drivers.

Signal Data Types

Signals between blocks in composite drivers can be one of several basic data
types, 8-bit and 16- or 32-bit. Both of these types are structures.
8-bit data types are NULL-terminated strings that are represented as
Simulink vectors. The width is the maximum number of characters that can be
stored. In the following figure, M is the actual set of stored characters and N is
the maximum number of characters that can be stored.

2-12
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

M unused values

H E L LO W O RLD 0

This string has 11 characters terminated with a NULL byte (0). This data type
cannot contain a NULL byte as part of the real data.
16- and 32-bit data types use the first element of the vector as a count of the
valid data. In the following figure of a 16-bit data type, C is the count of the
valid data, N is the width of the vector.

C
unused and
undefined values

5 0 H 0 E 0 L 0 L 0 O

These serial blocks interpret each entry in the vector as a single character. The
low-level hardware Send block writes the low-order byte of each entry to the
UART. The 16- and 32-bit data types allow the embedding of any 8-bit data
value, including 0.
The 8-bit data type is most useful with the ASCII Encode and Decode blocks.
The 16- and 32-bit data types are most useful for binary data streams.

Defining the Commtech Fastcom Baud Rate

The Commtech Fastcom 422/2-PCI board can handle baud rates up to 1.5
megabaud. To configure a baud rate for the board, you need to set the following
parameters:

• Clock Bits in the Fastcom 422/2-PCI Send Receive block with the
Parameter group parameter set to Board Setup

2-13
2 Serial Communications Support

• Baud Divisor in the Fastcom 422/2-PCI Send Receive block with the
Parameter group parameter set to Basic Setup

The Fastcom 422/2-PCI board has two serial channels, each of which has an
independent counter (baud clock). A master clock generator, which has a phase
locked loop, controls the master clock for both serial channels. The master clock
generates a maximum baud rate for both channels. The block determines the
actual baud rate of a channel by dividing the maximum baud rate from the
master clock by the baud rate divisor (n).

Desired frequency /n Baud Clock

Maximum
Master clock baud rate
with phase Channel 1
locked loop

a, b /n Baud Clock

Channel 2

Fastcom 422-2 PCI Board

To correctly set the block parameters for this board, choose a maximum baud
rate, as follows. This procedure assumes that both channels require different
baud rates. Determine a common base clock that can be divided to produce the
required baud rates for both channels, as follows:

2-14
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

1 In the MATLAB command window, type a command like the following. With
a desired frequency (for example, 1.5e6) as the desired input, the
fc422mexcalcbits utility calculates parameter values that you can use to
configure the board rate for your board.
[a b df ] = fc422mexcalcbits(1.5e6)

This command returns three values.

a = 12199144
b = 24
df = 1500000

2 Examine the df value. The df value is the actual frequency the board will be
able to attain compared to your desired frequency. If the actual attainable
frequency is not accurate enough, you might want to try another frequency.
In this example, the board can match the desired frequency of 1500000
(1.5e6).

3 Enter the first two values in the Clock Bits parameter of the Fastcom
422/2-PCI Send Receive block with the Parameter group parameter set to
Board Setup.

2-15
2 Serial Communications Support

After you define a maximum baud rate, you can set a unique baud rate for each
channel by choosing a different baud rate divisor for each channel. For
example, you can have Channel 1 have a baud rate of 750000 (1500000/2) and
Channel 2 have a baud rate of 1500000 (1500000/1). To set Channel 1 to have
a baud rate of 750000, with the Fastcom 422/2-PCI Send Receive block with the
Parameter group parameter set to Basic Setup, set

• Port to modify to 1
• Baud Divisor to 2

Note For very slow baud rates (less than 30000), you must use the Baud
Divisor parameter to achieve the desired baud rate.

ASCII Encode/Decode
The ASCII Encode block generates a UINT8 output vector that contains a
NULL-terminated string based on a printf like format string and data on the
input ports. The dialog box for the RS-232 ASCII Encode block contains the
following fields:

Parameter Description

Format string Enter a printf like format string. Each format

specifier such as %d is replaced by the converted
value that is present on the corresponding input
variable. Acceptable format specifiers are %c, %d, %i,
%o, %u, %x, %e, %f, and %g. These follow the normal
description for printf.
Number of Enter the number of input ports to this block. The
variables value on each port is inserted into the output string
with the format specified in Format string.

2-16
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Description

Max output string Enter the maximum allowed length of the converted
length string, in bytes. The block allocates enough memory
to support this length for the output port. When
selecting this length, take into account the NULL
termination on the string.

If the converted string exceeds this length, the block

returns an error and does not write that string to the
output port.
Variable types Enter one of the following: {'double'}, {'int8'},
{'uint8'}, {'int16}, {'uint16'}, {'int32'}, and
{'uint32'}. The default is {'double'}. This
parameter specifies the Simulink data types allowed
for the input ports. A cell vector with the same
number of elements as specified in Number of
variables can specify a different data type for each
input port. A single element is replicated. For
example,
nvars=3

{ } — All three inputs are doubles.

{'uint8'} — All three inputs are uint8.

{'uint16', 'double', 'uint8'} — There are three

inputs: the first is a uint16, the second is a double,
and the third is a uint8.

The ASCII Decode block parses an input vector according to a format specifier
similar to scanf, and makes converted values available to a Simulink program.
The input vector to the ASCII Decode block can be either 8-bit or 16-bit and
signed or unsigned. If the data format is 16-bit, the ASCII Decode block ignores

2-17
2 Serial Communications Support

the upper eight bits of each entry. The dialog box for the RS-232 ASCII Decode
block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Format string Enter a scanf like format string. Each format

specifier such as %d needs to match a corresponding
part of the input vector. Literal strings in the format
need to match the first character plus the number of
characters. Acceptable format specifiers are %c, %d,
%i, %o, %u, %x, %e, %f, and %g. These follow the normal
description for scanf.
Number of Enter the number of output ports for this block. For
variables example,

If Format string has the value of %xmore text%x

and the input vector for the block has
cdmabcdefgh90, you must specify the value of the
Number of variables parameter as 2.

The first variable is assigned the value 0xcd. Next,

the string mabcdefgh is considered a match to more
text because

• The first character for both strings is m.

• Both strings have the same number of characters.

2-18
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Description

The second variable is then assigned the value 0x90.

Note that the string mabcdefgh does not have to
match exactly the value of Format string. This
behavior is different from that for scanf, which
requires an exact match.
Variable types Enter one of the following: {'double'}, {'int8'},
{'uint8'}, {'int16}, {'uint16'}, {'int32'}, and
{'uint32'}. The default is {'double'}. This
parameter specifies the Simulink data types allowed
for the output ports. A cell vector with the same
number of elements as specified in Number of
variables can specify a different data type for each
output port. A single element is replicated. For
example,
nvars=3

{ } — All three outputs are doubles.

{'uint8'} — All three outputs are uint8.

{'uint16', 'double', 'uint8'} — There are three

outputs: the first is a uint16, the second is a double,
and the third is a uint8.

FIFO Read/Write
This section describes the FIFO Read and Write blocks. Of particular note are
the FIFO Read blocks, of which there three. Use the following guidelines when
using these blocks:

• Simple data streams — Use the FIFO Read block to read simple data
streams. An example of a simple data stream is one that has numbers,
separated by spaces, and that is terminated by a newline. The FIFO Read
block is a simple block that can easily extract these numbers.
• More complicated data streams — Use the FIFO Read HDRS and FIFO
Binary blocks for more complicated data streams. A more complicated data
stream can be one that contains headers, messages of varying lengths, or

2-19
2 Serial Communications Support

messages with no specific terminators. A message header consists of one or

more character identifiers at the beginning of a message that specify what
data follows. ASCII messages normally have a variable length and a
terminator. Typically, all messages of a particular device use the same
predefined terminator. Binary messages are normally of fixed length with no
specific terminator.
The FIFO Read HDRS or FIFO Binary blocks are also useful to work with
devices that can send different messages at different times.

All three FIFO read block types need their input to be of type serialfifoptr,
which is output from F type Send Receive subsystems.
The following are examples of when can use the FIFO read blocks.

• For an instrument that sends a string like the form

<number> <number> ... <CR><LF>

use the simple FIFO Read block to read the message. Configure the FIFO
Read block Delimiter parameter for a line feed (value of 10).

2-20
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

You should then connect the output to an ASCII Decode block with a format
that separates the numbers and feeds them to the output ports.
• For an instrument that can send one of a number of different messages, and
each message begins with a different fixed string, use the FIFO Read HDRS
block. For example, a digital multimeter connected through an RS-232 port,
might send a voltage reading and an amp reading with messages of the
following format:
volts <number> <CR><LF>
amps <number> <CR><LF>

Configure the FIFO Read HDRs block Header parameter for the volts and
amps headers, in a cell array. Also configure the Terminating string
parameter for carriage return (value of 13) and line feed (value of 10).

2-21
2 Serial Communications Support

You should then connect the output to multiple ASCII Decode blocks, one for
each header and message. See the xpcserialasciitest and
xpcserialasciisplit models in xpcdemos for examples of how to use this
block in a model.
• For an instrument that sends a binary message, you typically know the
length of each full message, including the header. Configure the FIFO Read
Binary block Header parameter for the headers of the message, in a cell
array, and the Message Lengths parameter for the message lengths. See the
xpcserialbinarytest and xpcserialbinarysplit models in xpcdemos for
further examples of how to use this block in a model.

FIFO Read/Write. The FIFO Read block is the read side of a FIFO read/write
pair. There are two modes for this block:

• If Read to delimiter is checked, this block only reads elements if the chosen
delimiter is found in the FIFO. If the delimiter has not yet been written to
the write side of this FIFO, the block returns a zero length vector, as

2-22
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

determined by the data type. If the delimiter is found, the block returns
elements up to and including the delimiter in the output vector. Selecting
this check box cause the block to perform ASCII reads.
• If Read to delimiter is not checked, this block returns a number of elements
between Minimum read size and the smaller of the number of elements
currently in the FIFO and Maximum read size. Selecting this check box
cause the block to perform binary reads.

The dialog box for the RS-232 FIFO Read block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Maximum read Enter the largest desired read size in bytes. This
size parameter specifies the width of the output vector
and the maximum number of elements to return. See
Output vector type for more information about data
formats. This value is always the absolute maximum
read size, whether or not the Max and Min read size
ports check box is selected.

Minimum read Enter the smallest desired read size in bytes. The
size FIFO must contain at least this number of elements
before any elements will be returned. If you select
the Max and Min read size ports check box, this
value is superseded by the external signals.
Read to delimiter Select this check box to enable the return of element
sets that terminate with the Delimiter value. Use
this parameter when working with character-based
elements.
Delimiter Enter the decimal value for an 8-bit input
terminator. This parameter specifies the value on
which a FIFO read operation should terminate. It
works with the Read to delimiter parameter. By
default, this block looks for a carriage return. It only
returns characters when one is found. For reference,
the decimal value of a carriage return is 13, a line
feed is 10.

2-23
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Output vector From the list, select count+32 bit int, count+32
type bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the output
vector type. The 8-bit data types produce a null
terminated string in the output vector. For 16- and
32-bit data types, the first element contains the
number of elements to expect in the rest of the
output vector.
Max and Min Select this check box to enable the maximum and
read size ports minimum input ports. When this check box is
selected,
• The value from the maximum input port is the
maximum number of characters to be removed
from the FIFO. Note that if this number exceeds
the value of Maximum read size, the block
disregards the value from the maximum input port
and takes the value of Maximum read size as the
maximum number of characters to be removed
from the FIFO.
• The value from the minimum input is the
minimum number of characters the FIFO must
contain before any elements can be returned. This
value supersedes the value set with the Minimum
read size parameter.

Enable Select this check box to pass the maximum read

passthrough input through to the passthrough output.
SampleTime Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

2-24
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

The following are some examples of how you can set up the FIFO Read block:

• In the transmit side of the interrupt service routine, the maximum input port
receives a value of 0 if the interrupt reason is not an empty hardware FIFO,
and the hardware FIFO size if the hardware FIFO is empty. The minimum
input port receives the constant value of 1.
On the receive side, the typical case with ASCII data has the minimum and
maximum input ports disabled. The Read to delimiter parameter check
box is selected and the Delimiter parameter has the value of carriage return
or line feed. The value of the Maximum read size parameter is large (along
the order of the FIFO size) and the value of Minimum read size parameter
is 1. In this form, the driver acts like a nonblocking read line.
• An alternate receive-side configuration for fixed-length binary blocks of data
has the value of the Maximum read size and Minimum read size
parameters set to the fixed length of the block. The Read to delimiter
parameter is not selected.

The FIFO Write block is the write side of a FIFO read/write pair. The dialog
box for the RS-232 FIFO Write block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Size Enter the number of elements that can be held in the

FIFO at any one time. If a write operation to the
FIFO causes the number of elements to exceed Size,
an error occurs.
Input vector type From the list, select count+32 bit int, count+32
bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the input
vector type. The 8-bit data types need a null
terminated string in the output vector. For 16- and
32-bit data types, the first element contains the
number of elements to expect in the rest of the input
vector.

2-25
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Data present Select this check box to create a Boolean output that
output is true if data is present in the FIFO. The transmit
side of the send/receive subsystem uses this output.
This output is given to the Enable TX block, which
enables the transmitter buffer empty interrupt.
SampleTime Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
ID Enter a user-defined identifier for overflow
messages.

FIFO Read HDRS. The FIFO Read HDRS block identifies and separates ASCII
data streams that have embedded identifiers. The data following a particular
header might have varying lengths, but all have a common termination marker
such as <CR><LF>. While you can attain this same functionality with the
sample FIFO Read block, doing so requires a complicated state machine.
The xpcdemos directory contains the following demos that illustrate how to use
the FIFO Read HDRS block: xpcserialasciitest and xpcserialasciisplit.
The dialog box for the RS-232 FIFO Read HDRS block contains the following
fields:

Parameter Description

Header Enter the headers that you want the block to look for
in a block of data from the FIFO. Enter each header
as an element in a cell array.
Terminating Enter the terminating string for the data. Enter as
string many characters as needed to define the end of
string. This is typically one or two characters.

2-26
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Description

Output behavior From the list, select the behavior of the block if the
FIFO has no new data. Select Zero output if no new
data if you want the block to have no output if there
is no new data. Select Hold last output if no new
data if you want the block to keep the output from
the last FIFO message.
Enable input Select this check box to turn on a new input that
takes Boolean signals that enable or disable the
read.
Maximum read Enter the largest desired read size in bytes. This
size parameter specifies the width of the output vector
and the maximum number of elements to return. See
Output vector type for more information about data
formats.
Output vector From the list, select count+32 bit int, count+32
type bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the output
vector type. The 8-bit data types produce a null
terminated string in the output vector. For 16- and
32-bit data types, the first element contains the
number of elements to expect in the rest of the
output vector.
SampleTime Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

FIFO Read Binary. The FIFO Read Binary block reads multiple binary headers
from a FIFO. This block identifies and separates data by finding unique byte
sequences (headers) that mark the data. Each header indicates the start of a
fixed length binary message.
The xpcdemos directory contains the following demos that illustrate how to use
the FIFO Read HDRS block: xpcserialbinarytest and
xpcserialbinarysplit.

2-27
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Header Enter the headers that you want the block to look for
in a block of data from the FIFO. Enter each header
as an element in a cell array either as a quoted
string or a concatenation with char(val) for
non-printable byte patterns.
Message Lengths Enter the message length of each byte of data as
bytes of data. Include the header in the length.
Output behavior From the list, select the behavior of the block if the
FIFO has no new data. Select Zero output if no new
data if you want the block to have no output if there
is no new data. Select Hold last output if no new
data if you want the block to keep the output from
the last FIFO message.
Enable input This check box enables or disables a FIFO read.
Select this check box to turn on a new input that
takes Boolean signals that enable or disable the
read.
Maximum read Enter the largest desired read size in bytes. This
size parameter specifies the width of the output vector
and the maximum number of elements to return. See
Output vector type for more information about data
formats.

2-28
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Description

Output vector From the list, select count+32 bit int, count+32
type bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the output
vector type. The 8-bit data types produce a null
terminated string in the output vector. For 16- and
32-bit data types, the first element contains the
number of elements to expect in the rest of the
output vector.
SampleTime Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

RS232 State
The RS232 State block monitors the board state information that is present in
the vector coming out of a receive port on a send/receive block.
The input data vector can be one of Int8, UInt8, Int16, or UInt16. If the input
vector is Int8 or UInt8, no error status is available and the Boolean outputs are
always false. If the input vector is Int16 or UInt16, the upper byte should
contain the error status bits from the UART.
This block accumulates errors over the whole input vector. An output error
state is true if it is true for any byte in the input vector.
The FIFO Hardware FIFO block puts the UART status in 16+32 bit data
streams. The RS232 State block looks at this status. Note that only the FIFO
Read block passes this status information to its output port.

2-29
2 Serial Communications Support

The dialog box for the RS-232 State block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Overrun error Select this check box to retrieve overrun error

output output. This output is true if the hardware FIFO in
the UART was filled at any time while a character in
the input vector was being received.
Parity error Select this check box to retrieve parity error output.
output This output is true if any byte in the input vector has
incorrect parity.
Framing error Select this check box to retrieve framing error
output output. This output is true if a framing error occurs
on any character in this vector. For example, a
framing error might occur if the baud rates between
the transmitter and receiver do not match.
Break interrupt Select this check box to retrieve break interrupt
output output. A break interrupt output is not an error, but
the UART treats it like an error state. The break
condition is detected if the serial line remains at
logic 0 (negative voltage) for more than one character
time.

Note Disconnecting the serial cable does not cause a break with some serial
port hardware.

Send/Receive Blocks
The dynamic dialog for these subsystem blocks allows you to perform basic
board setup and setup of send/receive data. You control parameter visibility
with the Parameter Group parameter and the port number.
There are two versions of this block, non-F and F (FIFO). All serial boards plus
the main board have these two versions. The primary difference is that the F
blocks bring the FIFO signal out of the subsystem. For example

2-30
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

• The non-F blocks have RCV outputs. These blocks have basic FIFO read
blocks inside the subsystem. These blocks are most useful for simple
character streams. These subsystem blocks generate output as an array of
packed integers (settable at 8, 16, or 32 bits) with characters in the lower
byte and received status information in the upper byte.
• The F blocks have FIFO outputs. These blocks give you greater flexibility
and allow you to use any one of the FIFO read blocks.
- FIFO Read block — A model that contains an F block in combination with
the FIFO Read block provides the same capability as the non-F block.
- FIFO Read HDRS and FIFO Read Binary — A model that contains an F
block in combination with a FIFO Read HDRS or FIFO Read Binary block
provides greater capability than the FIFO Read block. (See “FIFO Read
HDRS” on page 2-26and “FIFO Read Binary” on page 2-27 for details.)
Only one Send/Receive block can exist for each interrupt. All ports that use
that interrupt must be associated with that block.
For example, if you have four ports configured on the mainboard, COM1 and
COM3 typically share an interrupt. In this case, COM1 and COM3 must then
share the same Send/Receive block. COM1 is also of note because you can use
it for host PC/target PC communication. If COM1 is the host PC/target PC link,
neither COM1 nor COM3 can be used with this block as long as they share an
interrupt. The same is true for COM2 and COM4.

2-31
2 Serial Communications Support

Each F Send Receive has Board Setup and Basic Setup configuration
parameter options that are the same as their non-F Send Receive block
counterparts. To provide direct access to the board, these blocks also have a
FIFO Setup parameter option. The following descriptions do not distinguish
between the F and non-F blocks unless necessary.
The Parameter Group parameter allows you to choose which subset of
configuration parameters you want to modify.
Parameter Group — From the list, choose Board Setup, Basic Setup,
Transmit Setup, or Receive Setup. The visible set of parameters changes
according to your selection. The following screenshots reflect the Send Receive
block for the Quatech ESC-100.
Parameter Group: Board Setup

2-32
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Configuration From the list, choose combinations of port pairs

(Mainboard) (Com1/none, Com2/none, Com1/Com3, Com2/Com4,
none/Com3, none/Com4, or Custom). This parameter
specifies the ports for which you are defining
transmit and receive. A Custom port is one that does
not match the existing combinations of port pairs.
For example, you can set the IRQ and two addresses
or, if one of the ports is not used, set that to 0.

IRQ number Enter the number of the interrupt request line for
(Quatech, this board. If you do not know the interrupt request
Commtech) line number for this board, at the MATLAB
Command Window, enter
getxpcpci

This command displays all the PCI interfaces

currently attached to the target PC. From that
display, find the instance of the board controlled by
this block. Each board uses a unique interrupt
request line number.

For Emerald-MM, set this to the IRQ chosen by

jumpers on the board. Set all four ports to the same
IRQ.

For Emerald-MM-8, this block setting programs the

board IRQ.

(Diamond) Not all IRQ values work in all target PC

machines. You should experiment to find a working
combination.

Clock Bits Enter the number of click bits to control a clock

(Commtech) generator common to both channels. This parameter
adjusts the master clock of both channels.

2-33
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameters Description

Slot (PCI boards) If only one board of this type is physically present in
the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

2-34
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Base address Enter the base address of the board that you are
(Diamond setting up. This is the address of the configuration
Emerald-MM-8) register on the board. The first port address
referenced in Modem Control and Modem Status
blocks is offset 0x10 from the configuration register
address, and each subsequent port address is offset
0x8 from that.

You must set the configuration register address on

the board with a jumper. You can set the
configuration register address to one of the following
addresses: 0x100, 0x140, 0x180, 0x1c0, 0x200, 0x240,
0x280, 0x2c0, 0x300, 0x340, 0x380, or 0x3c0. Note
that xPC Target assigns successive 8 byte addresses
to the eight UARTs even though the hardware allows
random placement.

Be sure that these addresses do not conflict with the

COM port addresses listed in “Adding RS-232
Blocks” on page 2-6. Note that if you set the
configuration register address to 0x2c0, it conflicts
with COM2. If you set the configuration address to
0x3c0, it conflicts with COM1.

First port address From the list, select the first port address for the
(Diamond board. This address is the first of four port addresses
Emerald-MM) for the Emerald-MM board. You must initially set
this address on the board with a jumper. The
remaining three addresses follow consecutively in
increments of 0x8. Be sure that these addresses do
not conflict with the COM port addresses listed in
“Adding RS-232 Blocks” on page 2-6.

2-35
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Group: Basic Setup

2-36
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Port to modify From the list, choose a port. The Port to modify
parameter specifies the port for which you want to
view or modify the parameters.

For Baseboard drivers, the port is the Simulink block

port, where the upper port is 1 and the lower port is
2. For all other drivers, the port number corresponds
to the channel number.

Baud Divisor Enter a divisor integer. The block determines the

(Commtech) actual baud rate for a particular channel by dividing
the maximum baud rate by this divisor. This number
can be different for each channel.

Baud rate From the list, choose a baud rate.

(Mainboard,
Quatech,
Diamond)
Parity From the list, choose None, Even, Odd, Mark, or Space.
This parameter defines the parity.
Data bits From the list, choose either 5, 6, 7, or 8 to select the
number of bits per character.
Stop bits From the list, choose either 1 or 2 to define the
number of stop bits for the port. Most modern
hardware works fine with a character stream that
uses single (1) stop bits.

2-37
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameters Description

Hardware From the list, choose either 64 deep, 16 deep, or 1

FIFO size deep. This parameter specifies the size of the FIFO
(Quatech, in the UART. The Hardware FIFO size parameter
Diamond) affects both the receive and transmit FIFOs. For
example, specifying a FIFO size of 64 bytes results in
fewer interrupts. Fewer interrupts can allow more
processing to occur in the model.

The types of UARTs include

16450 — Maximum 1 byte depth

16550 — Maximum 16 byte FIFO depth

16750 — Maximum 64 byte FIFO depth

Receive FIFO From the list, choose 1, quarter full, half full, or
interrupt level almost full. This parameter specifies the number of
characters in the Receive FIFO before an interrupt
occurs. Receive interrupts occur at least as often as
this parameter specifies.

If a gap of at least 4 character times, the span of four

characters, occurs in a data stream, the UART
requests an interrupt for the receiver. The UART
requests an interrupt regardless of the value of
Receive FIFO interrupt level. If there is at least
one character in the hardware FIFO, an interrupt is
signaled.

(Commtech) The Fastcom 422/2-PCI hardware FIFO

is fixed at 128 bytes for receive and transmit. By
default, this parameter is set to 64. In general, leave
this value at 64. If receive latency is critical, you
might want to reduce this value to the size of your
receive data packet.

2-38
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Auto RTS/CTS Select this check box to enable the hardware-based

(RS-232 handshake for flow control. This RTS/CTS
boards) handshake feature of the UART provides a reliable
way to prevent loss due to hardware FIFO overflow.

Because of the large 64 byte FIFO in the hardware,

flow control that is based on software control in the
interrupt service routine can have problems. In most
cases, the interrupt service routine executes quickly
enough to empty the hardware FIFO. However, if
you get hardware FIFO overruns, select this check
box. Doing so causes the hardware to stop sending
data.
Assert on From the list, select None, RTS, or DTR to specify the
transmit state of the RTS or DTR line. The block asserts the
(RS-422/485 selected line upon transmission.
boards)

Parameter Group: Transmit Setup

2-39
2 Serial Communications Support

(Non-F Send Receive blocks)

Parameters Description

Port to modify From the list, choose a port. The Port to modify
parameter specifies the port for which you want to
view or modify the parameters.
Transmit Enter the transmit software FIFO size, in bytes.
software FIFO This parameter specifies the size of the software
size FIFO used to buffer transmitted characters.
Transmit FIFO From the list, choose count+32 bit int, count+32
data type bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the data type
of the transmitter. The 8-bit data types require a
NULL-terminated string in the input vector.

The 16- and 32-bit data types reserve the first full
element to contain the number of elements to expect
in the rest of the input vector. Only the low-order
byte of each data element is sent. Setting this data
type allows a wider data type to hold the bytes. If the
data stream needs to include a NULL byte, you must
select one of the 16- or 32-bit data types.

2-40
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Group: Receive Setup

2-41
2 Serial Communications Support

(Non-F Send Receive blocks)

Parameters Description

Port to modify From the list, choose a port. The Port to modify
parameter specifies the port for which you want to
view or modify the parameters.
Receive software Enter the size of the receive software FIFO, in bytes.
FIFO size This parameter specifies the size of the software
FIFO to buffer characters between interrupt service
and periodic execution.
Receive Enter the maximum number of elements that you
maximum read want returned by a single call to this block. This
parameter is also used to set the output vector width.
If the Read to delimiter check box is selected, the
maximum number of characters read is limited by
this parameter even if the delimiter is not found.
Receive Enter the minimum number of characters to read. If
minimum read the FIFO does not contain at least this number of
characters, the output vector is empty.
Read to delimiter Select this check box to have this block return all
characters in the FIFO up to and including the
specified delimiter. If the block does not find the
delimiter in the FIFO, it returns no characters.

Note that if the buffer has hardware observed errors,

such as framing errors, characters are returned
regardless of the presence of the delimiter. This
special case helps diagnose errors such as
mismatched baud rates.
Delimiter Enter the numeric value of the character that is the
message delimiter. Any value from 0 to 255 is valid.
The common case looks for 10 (line feed) or 13
(carriage return).

2-42
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Receive data type From the list, select count+32 bit int, count+32
bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the data type
of the receiver. The 8-bit data types produce a null
terminated string in the output vector. For 16- and
32-bit data types, the first element contains the
number of valid elements in the rest of the output
vector.

For 8-bit data types, only the character data is in the

output vector, and a NULL terminator is appended.
The 16- or 32-bit wide data types cause the error
status from the UART to be placed in the second byte
of each data element. (The error status contains the
parity, overrun, framing, and break bits.) The
character data is in the bottom eight bits of each
element; the first element of the vector contains the
number of data elements that follow.
Receive Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
SampleTime time.

Parameter Group: FIFO Setup

(All F Send Receive blocks)

Parameters Description

Port to modify From the list, choose port 1 or 2. The Port to modify
parameter specifies the port for which you want to
view or modify the parameters.
Transmit Enter the transmit software FIFO size, in bytes.
software FIFO This parameter specifies the size of the software
size FIFO used to buffer transmitted characters.

2-43
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameters Description

Transmit FIFO From the list, choose count+32 bit int, count+32
data type bit uint, count+16 bit int, count+16 bit uint, 8
bit int null terminated, or 8 bit uint null
terminated. This parameter specifies the data type
of the transmitter. The 8-bit data types require a
NULL-terminated string in the input vector.

The 16- and 32-bit data types reserve the first full
element to contain the number of elements to expect
in the rest of the input vector. Only the low-order
byte of each data element is sent. Setting this data
type allows a wider data type to hold the bytes. If the
data stream needs to include a NULL byte, you must
select one of the 16- or 32-bit data types.
Receive software Enter the size of the receive software FIFO, in bytes.
FIFO size This parameter specifies the size of the software
FIFO to buffer characters between interrupt service
and periodic execution.

Modem Control
The Modem Control block controls the state of either or both of the RTS and
DTR output lines on the specified port.
This block requires an input of type double. If the input value is greater than
0.5, the block asserts the RTS or DTR control bit to true and the output goes to
a positive voltage. If the value is less than or equal to 0.5, the block asserts the
RTS or DTR control bit to false and the output goes to a negative voltage. If
RTS or DTR is not selected, the corresponding output is not changed.

2-44
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

The dialog box for the Modem Control block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Port (Quatech, From the list, choose a port. The Port parameter
Commtech) defines the port to configure for this driver block.
RTS Select this check box to control the RTS line for this
board.
DTS Select this check box to control the DTR line for this
port.

Port (Diamond) From the list, choose a port. The Port parameter
defines the port to configure for this driver block.

First port address For Emerald-MM, this value should be the same as
(Diamond) the First port address parameter value you select in
the Parameter Group: Board Setup dialog of the
Send/Receive block. See the Diamond user’s manual
documentation for the appropriate jumper settings.

For Emerald-MM-8, this parameter contains a value

based on the Base address value of the
configuration register in the Parameter Group:
Board Setup dialog of the Send/Receive block. See
the Diamond user’s manual documentation.

2-45
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Configuration From the list, choose a port. This parameter specifies

(Mainboard) the port whose input modem control line states you
want to read.

Normally, the ports are set to the following:

COM1 — 0x3F8

COM2 — 0x2F8

COM3 — 0x3E8

COM4 — 0x2E8

A Custom port is one that is set to an address other

than these.

Slot (PCI boards) If only one board of this type is physically present in
the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

2-46
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Modem Status
The Modem Status block reads the state of the four input modem control lines.
This block has an output of type Boolean. If the input voltage is positive, the
output is true. If the input voltage is negative, the output is false.

Parameter Description

Port (Quatech, From the list, choose a port. The Port parameter
Commtech) defines the port to configure for this driver block.
CTS Select this check box to monitor the CTS line.
DSR Select this check box to monitor the DSR line.
RI Select this check box to monitor the RI line.
DCD Select this check box to monitor the DCD line.
Sample Time Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

Port (Diamond) From the list, choose a port. The Port parameter
defines the port to configure for this driver block.

First port address This parameter specifies the first port whose input
(Diamond) modem control line states you want to read. Do not
change this value.

For Emerald-MM, this value should be the same as

the First port address parameter value you select in
the Parameter Group: Board Setup dialog.

For Emerald-MM-8, this parameter contains a value

based on the Base address value in the Parameter
Group: Board Setup dialog.

2-47
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Configuration From the list, choose a port. This parameter specifies

(Mainboard) the port whose input modem control line states you
want to read.

Normally, the ports are set to the following:

COM1 — 0x3F8

COM2 — 0x2F8

COM3 — 0x3E8

COM4 — 0x2E8

A Custom port is one that is set to an address other

than these.

Slot (PCI boards) If only one board of this type is physically present in
the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

2-48
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

RS-232/422/485 Internal Blocks and Subsystems

This section describes the internal blocks of the RS-232/422/485 boards.
Typically, the parameters in these blocks are controlled from the mask
parameters dialog for the send/receive subsystem in which they are used.
You might need to access these blocks if you need to modify the RS-232 Quatech
subsystems for your use.

Note Otherwise, do not use these blocks directly.

This section includes the following topics:

• “Setup Block” on page 2-49 — Sets up the interface characteristics for the
board.
• “Read Hardware FIFO Block” on page 2-51 — Reads characters from the
hardware FIFO in the UART.
• “Write Hardware FIFO” on page 2-53 — Writes the data from the input port
to the hardware FIFO in the UART for this port.
• “Read Int(errupt) Status” on page 2-55 — Reads the interrupt status for the
boards in the system.
• “Enable TX Interrupt” on page 2-57 — Enables the transmitter buffer empty
interrupt when data is present in the software FIFO.
• “Filter Interrupt Reason” on page 2-58 — Filters the output of the Read
Int(errupt) Status block.
• “Board Setup (Commtech) and Interrupt Check (Quatech)” on page 2-58 —
Checks for instances where the hardware IRQ differs from the software for
which it is listening.

Setup Block. A setup block is a subsystem block that sets up the interface
characteristics for the board.
For Quatech boards, this setup block is for one channel or port.

2-49
2 Serial Communications Support

The dialog box for the Setup block contains the following fields:

Parameters Description

Port (Quatech, From the list, choose a port. The Port parameter
Commtech) defines the port this driver block configures.

Baud Divisor Enter a divisor integer. The block determines the

(Commtech) actual baud rate for a particular channel by dividing
the maximum baud rate by this divisor. This number
can be different for each channel.

Baud rate From the list, choose a baud rate.

(Mainboard,
Quatech,
Diamond)
Number of data From the list, choose either 5, 6, 7 or 8 to define the
bits number of data bits for the port.
Number of stop From the list, choose either 1 or 2 to define the
bits number of stop bits for the port.
Parity From the list, choose None, Even, Odd, Mark or Space.
This parameter defines the receive and transfer
parity.
Fifo mode From the list, choose 64 deep, 16 deep, or 1 deep.
(Mainboard, This parameter sets the transmit and receive FIFO
Quatech, depth. The UART can operate with a hardware FIFO
Diamond) depth of 1 character (1 deep), 16 characters (16
deep), or 64 characters (64 deep).
Receive trigger From the list, choose 1, quarter full, half full, or
level almost full. This parameter defines a trigger level
for a receive data available interrupt. When the
hardware FIFO reaches the level specified in this
parameter, the driver asserts the receive data
available interrupt.

2-50
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameters Description

Enable auto Select this check box to enable hardware-controlled

RTS/CTS handshaking using the RTS and CTS modem control
lines. If this is not checked, no handshaking is done.

Base Address Enter the base address of the board that you are
(Mainboard, ISA, setting up.
or Diamond)
For Diamond-MM-8 boards, this block uses the base
address you enter for the Send/Receive block.

IRQ This field contains the value of the IRQ number

(Diamond-MM-8) parameter from the Parameter Group: Board
Setup of the Send/Receive block.

For Emerald-MM-8, this block setting programs the

board IRQ.

Slot (PCI boards) If only one board of this type is physically present in
the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Read Hardware FIFO Block. The Read Hardware FIFO block reads characters
from the hardware FIFO in the UART. It then outputs those characters as the
low-order byte of an unsigned 32-bit integer vector with a width of 65. This
output vector is large enough to hold the maximum number of characters that
the hardware FIFO can hold. The first element of the vector specifies the
number of data elements in the remainder of the vector.

2-51
2 Serial Communications Support

If the input to the enable port (input port, labeled E) is not true, this block
outputs a 0 length vector. The following illustrates the vector.

32 bits data byte

0 0

UART error
status

The UART error status can contain one of the following error values:
0x02 — Overrun error

0x04 — Parity error

0x08 — Framing error

0x01 — Break interrupt

The data byte ranges from 0 to 255.

The dialog box for the RS-232 FIFO Read block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Port (Quatech, From the list, choose a port. This block reads the
Commtech) hardware FIFO from this port.
Flush HW FIFO Select this check box to flush the hardware FIFO
on startup when the device starts up.

2-52
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Parameter Description

Base address Enter the base address of the UART for which you
(Mainboard, ISA want to read the hardware FIFO.
boards)

PCI Slot (PCI If only one board of this type is physically present in
boards) the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Write Hardware FIFO. The Write Hardware FIFO block writes the data from the
input port (labeled E) to the hardware FIFO in the UART for this port. The
following pseudocode most accurately describes the behavior of this FIFO.
if (enable is false)
return
else
{
if (input data empty)
disable transmitter buffer empty interrupt
return
else
copy input data to HW FIFO
}

2-53
2 Serial Communications Support

The dialog box for the RS-232 FIFO Write block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Base address Enter the base address of the UART for which you
(Mainboard, ISA want to write the hardware FIFO.
boards)
For Diamond-MM-8 boards, this block uses the base
address you enter for the Send/Receive block.
Port From the list, choose a port. This is the port that this
block writes data to.

Assert on Select None, RTS, or DTR. The board asserts either no

Transmit bit, the RTS bit, or the DTR bit in the modem control
(RS-422/485 register upon data transmission.
boards)
For half duplex operation, set the jumper on the
board to send either RTS or DTR signals to the
transmit enable gate. See the user’s manual
documentation specific to your board for further
information.

PCI Slot (PCI If only one board of this type is physically present in
boards) the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

2-54
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Read Int(errupt) Status. The Read Interrupt Status block reads the interrupt
status for the boards in the system. The output for this block is a vector with
one 32-bit element for each port. Each element contains two pieces of
information for that port, where the four bytes are
[0, 0, IIR, Reason]

The Read Interrupt Status block has signal output with the following format:
This output is a vector of integers. The values in the reason byte and their
definitions are
0 — This UART did not cause this interrupt.

1 — Receive characters are available.

2 — Transmit holding register is empty.

3 — Modem status has changed (ignored).

This second byte is the value read from the Interrupt Reason Register (IIR).
This register is specific to the 16450, 16550, and 16750 types of UARTs. Several
bites in this register indicate the active hardware FIFO depth and the
maximum number of characters that can be written in the transmitter empty
interrupt handlers to the transmit hardware FIFO.
The dialog box for the Read Interrupt Status block contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Base address 1 Enter the base address of the first UART for which
(Mainboard, ISA you want to read the interrupt status.
boards)

Base address 2 Enter the base address of the second UART for
(Mainboard, ISA which you want to read the interrupt status.
boards)

2-55
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

PCI Slot (PCI If only one board of this type is physically present in
boards) the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

First to Fourth These parameters contain the address of the port for
port address which you want to read the interrupt status.
(Diamond-MM)
Starting from the First port address parameter
value you select in the Parameter Group: Board
Setup dialog of the Send/Receive block, the
subsequent parameters contain the incremental port
addresses.

First to Eighth These parameters contain the addresses of the ports

port address for which you want to read the interrupt status.
(Diamond-MM-8)
Starting from the Base address parameter value in
the Parameter Group: Board Setup dialog of the
Send/Receive block, the subsequent parameters
contain the incremental port addresses.

Interrupt status This parameter contains the address for the

address interrupt status. This parameter derives from the
(Diamond) configurations you define in the Parameter Group
dialog of the Send/Receive block.

2-56
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

Enable TX Interrupt. The Enable TX Interrupt block enables the transmitter

buffer empty interrupt when data is present in the software FIFO.

Parameter Description

Base address Enter the base address of the UART for which you
(Mainboard, ISA want to enable the transmitter buffer empty
boards) interrupt.

Port (Quatech, From the list, choose a port. This parameter specifies
Commtech) the input port for which this block enables the
interrupt.

PCI Slot (PCI If only one board of this type is physically present in
boards) the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The input port for controlling this is a Boolean value. If the input port value is
true, the Enable Transmit Interrupt block enables the transmitter buffer
empty interrupt in the UART. After the interrupt service routine empties the
software FIFO, the interrupt is disabled.

2-57
2 Serial Communications Support

Filter Interrupt Reason. The Filter Interrupt Reason block filters the output of the
Read Int(errupt) Status block. If the condition that the interrupt query block
reads from the IIR register matches the one chosen here, the output is true.
This block is used exclusively inside the interrupt service subsystem for this
board.

Parameter Description

Port From the list, choose a port. This parameter specifies

the port from which this block gets control data.
Filter value From the list, choose Receive data, Transmitter
empty, or Modem status change. This parameter
specifies the interrupt reason that this filter block is
looking for.

Note that Modem status change currently has no

effect because the interrupt is never enabled.

Board Setup (Commtech) and Interrupt Check (Quatech). (Quatech and Commtech
only) The Board Setup and Interrupt Check block checks for instances where
the hardware IRQ differs from the software for which it is listening. This block
compares the software-selected interrupt against the value for which the board

2-58
 xPC Target RS-232 and 422/485 Drivers (Composite)

(PCI only) is configured. This check prevents IRQ mismatches. For the
Commtech Fastcom board, the corresponding block also sets up the board clock.

Parameter Description

PCI Slot If only one board of this type is physically present in

the target PC, enter

-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically

present in the target PC, enter the bus number and
the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber,
SlotNumber]. To determine the bus number and the
PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Clock Bits Enter the number of clock bits to control a clock

(Commtech) generator common to both channels. This parameter
adjusts the master clock of both channels.
IRQ Line Number From the list, select an IRQ line number from 5 to
15, inclusive.

2-59
2 Serial Communications Support

xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

This section describes the components that make up the RS-232 conventional
drivers, and how you can create a model using these drivers. This section
includes the following topics:
• “Simulink Blocks for RS-232 I/O (Conventional)” on page 2-60 — Add setup,
send, send/receive, and receive blocks to your Simulink model.
• “MATLAB Message Structures for RS-232 I/O (Conventional)” on page 2-61
— Create message structures to sequence instructions to and from the
RS-232 device.
• “RS-232 Synchronous Mode (Conventional)” on page 2-62 — Add
synchronous driver blocks to have the device wait for a response before
continuing with other computations.
• “RS-232 Asynchronous Mode (Conventional)” on page 2-71 — Add
asynchronous driver blocks if the device does not have to wait for a response
before continuing with other computations.
• “RS-232 Simulink Block Reference (Conventional)” on page 2-83 —
Description of the RS-232 blocks for the conventional drivers.
• “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference (Conventional)” on page 2-88 —
Description of the RS-232 MATLAB structure for messages.
• “RS-232 Binary Mode (Conventional)” on page 2-93 — Add binary driver
blocks to transfer raw data.

Simulink Blocks for RS-232 I/O (Conventional)

To support the use of RS-232, the xPC Target I/O library includes a set of
RS-232 driver blocks. These driver blocks can be added to your Simulink model
to provide inputs and outputs using one or more of the RS-232 ports.

• RS-232 Setup — One setup block is needed for each RS-232 port you use in
your model. The setup block does not have any inputs or outputs, but sends
the initialization and termination messages.
• RS-232 Send/Receive (Synchronous Mode) — Send/Receive blocks have
inputs and outputs from your Simulink model, and wait for responses to
messages sent and received.
• RS-232 Send (Asynchronous Mode) — Send blocks have inputs from your
Simulink model, and wait for responses to messages sent.

2-60
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

• RS-232 Receive (Asynchronous Mode) — Receive blocks have output from

your Simulink model, and wait for responses to messages received.

MATLAB Message Structures for RS-232 I/O

(Conventional)
Communication is through a series of messages passed back and forth between
the target PC and the RS-232 device. To accomplish this, the messages sent to
the RS-232 device must be in a format that the device understands. Likewise,
the target PC must know how to interpret the data returned from the RS-232
device.
xPC Target uses MATLAB structures to create messages and map the input
and output ports on the RS-232 driver blocks to the data written and read from
the RS-232 devices. The RS-232 Setup block sends the messages in the
initialization structure after downloading the target application. The RS-232
Send/Receive, RS-232 Send, and RS-232 Receive blocks repeat the sending of
the messages in the send/receive, send, and receive structures during each
sample interval. When the target application stops running, the RS-232 Setup
block sends the messages in the termination structure.
Below is an example of the send and receive message structure for
asynchronous communication. In this example, an external RS-232 device
requires a string with two floating-point numbers. The numbers are entered
from the Simulink model to the first and second input ports of the RS-232 Send
driver block. The RS-232 device sends back two floating-point numbers that are
passed to the outputs of the RS-232 Receive driver block.

2-61
2 Serial Communications Support

RS232_Send

RS232_Send(1) . . . RS232_Send(n)

.SendData - ‘start,%f,%f,stop:\;’
.InputPorts - [1,2]
.Timeout - 0.01
RS232_Receive

RS232_Receive(1) . . . RS232_Receive(n)

.RecData - ‘start,%f,%f,stop:\;’
.OutputPorts - [1,2]
.Timeout - 0.01
.Eom - 1

For more information on this example, see “Creating RS-232 Message

Structures (Asynchronous)” on page 2-79.

RS-232 Synchronous Mode (Conventional)

Use synchronous mode when you need to receive a response before continuing
with other computations. In synchronous mode, data is sent to an external
device and the driver block waits for a response. In other words, the I/O driver
blocks or stops execution of the target application until an answer is received
from the external device or it reaches a time-out. This section includes the
following topics:

• “Notes for RS-232 Synchronous Mode” on page 2-63 — Overview of RS-232

communication with xPC Target blocks.
• “Adding RS-232 Driver Blocks (Synchronous)” on page 2-63 — Add the setup,
send, and receive blocks you need to your Simulink model for RS-232
communication.

2-62
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

• “Creating RS-232 Message Structures (Synchronous)” on page 2-68 —

Create the initialize, send/receive, and termination message structures you
need in the MATLAB workspace.

Notes for RS-232 Synchronous Mode

For the example in this section, assume an external device (RS-232 device)
includes a D/A conversion module with four independent channels and an
output voltage range of -10 to 10 volts. Also assume that the external device
outputs a new voltage if it receives a serial string with a value to identify the
D/A channel and the voltage value.
Use a Constant block as an input to the Send/Receive block to select the D/A
channel, and a Signal Generator block as a source for voltage values. Also, set
up the message structures to receive a confirmation message from the external
module after the target PC sends a message string to the device.
In synchronous mode, the data is sent to the external device and the block
waits until a response (for example, data) is received from the device before the
execution of the block is considered to be complete. In other words, the I/O
driver blocks until an answer is received from the external device or it reaches
a time-out.
When it is necessary to receive a response before continuing with other
computations, synchronous mode is used, which implies that the Send &
Receive block is placed in your model. This block includes both input and
output lines.

Adding RS-232 Driver Blocks (Synchronous)

You add RS-232 driver blocks to your Simulink model when you want to use
the serial ports on the target PC for I/O.
After you create a Simulink model, you can add xPC Target driver blocks and
define the initialization, send/receive, and termination message structures:

1 In the MATLAB command window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target driver block library opens.

2-63
2 Serial Communications Support

2 Double-click the RS-232 group block.

A window with blocks for RS-232 drivers opens.

Note This library contains two main sections, Composite drivers and
Conventional drivers. Refer to the Conventional drivers section, where there
are two setup blocks. The second block is included for compatibility with xPC
Target Version 1.0.

Alternatively, you can access the xPC Target block library from the Simulink
Library Browser. In the Simulink window, and from the View menu, click
Show Library Browser. In the left pane, double-click xPC Target, and then
click RS-232.

3 From the Conventional drivers area, drag and drop an RS-232 Setup block
to your Simulink model.

2-64
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

4 In the Library window, double-click the RS-232 Synchronous mode group

block. The library window with blocks for RS-232 synchronous
communication opens.

Note This library contains two Setup and Receive blocks. The second block is
included for compatibility with xPC Target Version 1.0.

5 Drag and drop an RS-232 Send/Receive block to your Simulink model.

6 Add a Signal Generator and a Constant block.

Your model should look similar to the figure shown below. Note that inputs
on the RS-232 Send/Receive block are not defined or visible. The inputs are
defined in a MATLAB message structure, and visible only after you load that
structure into the MATLAB workspace and update your Simulink model.

2-65
2 Serial Communications Support

7 Double-click the RS-232 Setup block. Enter values to configure the COM1
port on the target PC.

For example, if the target PC is connected to COM1, and serial

communication is set to 5760 baud, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit, your Block
Parameter dialog box should look similar to the figure shown below.

Note If you are not using an initialization or termination structure, in the

Initialization Struct and Termination Struct boxes, enter the empty matrix
[].

2-66
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

For more information on entering the block parameters, see “RS-232 Setup
Block” on page 2-84. For the procedure to create the initialization and
termination structures, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference
(Conventional)” on page 2-88.

8 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

9 Double-click the RS-232 Send/Receive block. The Block Parameters dialog

box opens.

10 From the Port list, select either COM1 or COM2. For this example, select COM1.
In the Message struct name box, enter the name for the MATLAB structure
this block uses to send messages to the COM1 port. The name of the message

2-67
2 Serial Communications Support

structure is not the name of the M-file, but the name of the structure created
with the M-file.

In the Sample Time box, enter the sample time or a multiple of the sample
time you entered in the Receive block.

Your Block Parameter dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

For information on entering the block parameters, see “RS-232 Send/Receive

Block (Synchronous)” on page 2-86. For the procedure to create the
send/receive structure, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference
(Conventional)” on page 2-88.

11 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

Your next task is to create the MATLAB message structures that the RS-232
driver blocks use to sequence commands to the RS-232 device. See “Creating
RS-232 Message Structures (Synchronous)” on page 2-68.

Creating RS-232 Message Structures (Synchronous)

RS-232 drivers use MATLAB structures to send and receive messages and map
the input and output ports on the RS-232 driver blocks to the data written and
read from the RS-232 devices.

2-68
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

After you add an RS-232 Setup and RS-232 Send/Receive block to your
Simulink model, you can create the message structures to communicate with
the RS-232 devices. You need to create and load these structures into the
MATLAB workspace before you build your target application. The easiest way
to create these structures is using an M-file and loading that M-file into the
MATLAB workspace.

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, and from the File menu, point to New,
and then click M-file.

A MATLAB text editor window opens.

2 Enter the initialization, send/receive, and termination messages. Each

message is an element in a MATLAB structure array. For information and
examples of this structure, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference
(Conventional)” on page 2-88.

For example, assume that you have an external RS-232 device with a D/A
module that requires a string in the format 'identifier, channel,
value;\n'. identifier is any string. channel is an integer value between 1
and 2, defining which D/A channel to update. value is a floating-point value
indicating the new voltage for the D/A output.

Additionally, when the external device receives a legal string, it accepts the
string as an input message and returns the message 'noerror;\n'. This
message is provided as a confirmation. As an example, you can type the
following.

Note Field names in the structures are case sensitive.

RS232_Send_Receive(1).SendData = 'da_1234,%d,%f,;\n';
RS232_Send_Receive(1).InputPorts = [1 2];
RS232_Send_Receive(1).RecData = 'noerror\n';
RS232_Send_Receive(1).Timeout = 0.01;
RS232_Send_Receive(1).EOM = 1;

2-69
2 Serial Communications Support

3 From the File menu, click Save As. In the Save as file dialog box, enter the
name of the M-file script. For example, enter
RS232Sync_Messages.m

4 Close the text editing window.

5 In the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of the M-file you created
with the RS-232 structures. For example, type
RS232Sync_Messages

MATLAB loads and runs the M-file to create the message structures in the
MATLAB workspace needed by the RS-232 driver blocks.

6 Open your Simulink model, or press Ctrl+D.

Simulink updates the RS-232 driver blocks with the information from the
structures. For example, Simulink adds inputs and outputs defined in the
structures to the blocks.

7 Connect the input and output ports on the RS-232 driver blocks to other
blocks in your Simulink model.

You model should look similar to the figure shown below.

2-70
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

8 Set the PreLoadFcn for your Simulink model to load the message structures
when you open your model. For example, if you saved the message
structures in the M-file RS232Sync_messages, type
set_param(gcs, 'PreLoadFcn','RS232Sync_messages.m')

Note If you do not manually load the message structures before opening your
Simulink model, or have the message structures automatically loaded with
the model, the port connections to the RS-232 driver break.

Your next task is to build and run the target application. However, the example
above only illustrates how to set up the dialog entries when using the Send &
Receive block. Without an external RS-232 device to receive the messages and
return a reply 'no error\n', this model cannot run successfully on your target
PC. It will block and wait for a reply each time the application sends a message.

RS-232 Asynchronous Mode (Conventional)

Use asynchronous mode when you do not need a response before continuing
with other computations. You can achieve faster sample rates with
asynchronous mode because neither the Send nor Receive block waits for a
reply. As a result, the asynchronous mode blocks do not block as do the
synchronous mode blocks. The application updates the received outputs only
when the entire package of data is received from the external device. This
section includes the following topics:

• “Notes for RS-232 Asynchronous Mode” on page 2-72 — Overview of RS-232

communications with xPC Target blocks.
• “Adding RS-232 Driver Blocks (Asynchronous)” in Chapter 2 — Add the
setup, send, and receive blocks you need to your Simulink model for RS-232
communication.
• “Creating RS-232 Message Structures (Asynchronous)” on page 2-79 —
Create the initialize, send/receive, and termination message structures you
need in the MATLAB workspace.

• “Building and Running the Target Application (Asynchronous)” on page 2-81

— Run a real-time application with RS-232 communication.

2-71
2 Serial Communications Support

Notes for RS-232 Asynchronous Mode

For the example in this section, two asynchronous mode blocks illustrate how
you can test RS-232 I/O on the target PC in a simple loop-back test. This simple
but effective test lets you check that the RS-232 Send and RS-232 Receive
blocks work correctly with your system using minimal hardware.
In this loop-back test, you use the COM1 port for sending signals and the
COM2 port for receiving signals. A NULL modem serial cable connects COM1
to COM2 so that any messages sent from the target PC through COM1 are
received by COM2 on the same target PC.
Use a Sine Wave block as an input to an RS-232 Send block that you connect
to the COM1 port. Connect the COM2 port to an RS-232 Receive block. The
signal received from this block is then passed through a Gain block of -1.
In the asynchronous mode, data is sent without waiting for response data to be
received. The Send block completes execution immediately upon completing
the Send transfer. The Receive block completes execution upon completing the
Receive transfer or when no more data is ready to be retrieved.
For sending data in asynchronous mode, use the RS-232 Send block. This block
only has input lines for the data to be sent. For receiving data, you must use
the Receive block. This block only has output lines for the data to be received.
Outputs are updated only when the entire package of data is received from the
external device.

Adding RS-232 Driver Blocks (Asynchronous)

You add RS-232 driver blocks to your Simulink model when you want to use
the serial ports on the target PC for I/O.
After you create a Simulink model, you can add xPC Target driver blocks and
define the initialization, send, receive, and termination message structures:

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target driver block library opens.

2 Double-click the RS-232 group block.

A window with blocks for RS-232 drivers opens.

2-72
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Alternatively, you can access the xPC Target block library from the Simulink
Library Browser. In the Simulink window, and from the View menu, click
Show Library Browser. In the left pane, double-click xPC Target, and then
click RS-232.

3 Drag and drop two RS-232 Setup blocks to your Simulink model.

4 In the Library window, double-click the RS-232 Asynchronous mode group

block. The library window containing blocks for RS-232 Synchronous
communication opens.

Note This library contains two send and two receive blocks. The second block
is included for compatibility with xPC Target Version 1.0.

2-73
2 Serial Communications Support

Alternatively, you can access the xPC Target block library from the
Simulink Library Browser. In the Simulink window, and from the View
menu, click Show Library Browser. In the left pane, double-click xPC
Target, and then click RS-232.

5 Drag and drop the RS-232 Send and RS-232 Receive blocks into your
Simulink model.

6 Add a Signal Generator, Gain, and xPC Target Scope block.

Your model should look similar to the figure below. Note that you cannot
connect to the inputs on the RS-232 Send block and the outputs on the
RS-232 Receive block, because they are not defined or visible. The inputs
and outputs are defined in a MATLAB message structure, and visible only
after you load that structure into the MATLAB workspace and update your
Simulink model.

2-74
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

7 Double-click the first RS-232 Setup block. Enter values to configure the
COM1 port on the target PC.

For example, if the COM1 and COM2 ports of the target are connected with
a RS-232 NULL modem cable, and you set serial communication to 57600
baud, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Your Block Parameters dialog box should
look similar to the figure shown below.

Note If you are not using an initialization or termination structure, in the

Initialization Struct and Termination Struct boxes, enter the empty matrix
[].

2-75
2 Serial Communications Support

For more information on entering the block parameters, see “RS-232 Setup
Block” on page 2-84. For the procedure to create the initialization and
termination structures, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference
(Conventional)” on page 2-88.

8 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

9 Repeat the previous setup for the second RS-232 Setup block and the COM2
port. Use the same Baudrate, Databits, Stopbits, Parity, and Protocol
that you entered in the first RS-232 Setup block.

10 Double-click the Send block. The Block Parameters dialog box opens.

2-76
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

11 From the Port list, select either COM1 or COM2. For this example, select COM1.
In the Message struct name box, enter the name for the MATLAB structure
this block uses to send messages to the COM1 port. In the Sample Time box,
enter the sample time or a multiple of the sample time you entered in the
RS-232 Receive block.

Your Block Parameters dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

For information on entering the block parameters, see “RS-232 Send Block
(Asynchronous)” on page 2-87. For the procedure to create the send
structure, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference (Conventional)” on
page 2-88.

12 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

13 Double-click the RS-232 Receive block.

14 The Block Parameters dialog box opens.

15 From the Port list, select either COM1 or COM2. For this example, select COM2.
In the Message Struct Name box, enter the name for the MATLAB
structure this block uses to receive messages from the COM2 port. In the

2-77
2 Serial Communications Support

Sample Time box, enter the sample time or a multiple of the sample time
you entered in the RS-232 Send block.

Your Block Parameters dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

For information on entering the block parameters, see “RS-232 Receive

Block (Asynchronous)” on page 2-87. For the procedure to create the send
structure, see “RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference (Conventional)” on
page 2-88.

16 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

17 Double-click the Signal Generator block and enter parameters. For example,
from the Wave Form list, select sine. In the Amplitude and Frequency
boxes, enter 1. From the Units list, select Hertz. Click OK.

18 Double-click the Gain block and enter parameters. For example, in the Gain
box, enter -1. Click OK.

Your next task is to create the MATLAB message structures that the RS-232
driver blocks use to sequence commands to the RS-232 device. See “Creating
RS-232 Message Structures (Synchronous)” on page 2-68.

2-78
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Creating RS-232 Message Structures (Asynchronous)

RS-232 drivers use MATLAB structures to send and receive messages and map
the input and output ports on the RS-232 driver blocks to the data written and
read from the RS-232 devices in synchronous mode.
After you add the RS-232 Setup, Asynchronous Send, and Asynchronous
Receive blocks to your Simulink model, you can create the message structures
to communicate with the RS-232 devices. You need to create and load these
structures into the MATLAB workspace before you build your target
application. The easiest way to create these structures is to use an M-file and
load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace. See xpcrs232V2.mdl in the
xpcdemos directory for an example model. That example sends and receives two
floating-point numbers. In that example, both floating-point number fields for
SendData are filled from InputPorts 1 because only one input port is specified.
In the case of RecData, the first floating-point number field is sent to
OutputPorts 1, but the second floating-point number field is ignored because
only one output port is specified.
The following procedure describes how to create an RS-232 message structure
to send and receive one floating-point number:

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, and from the File menu, point to New,
and then click M-file.

A MATLAB text editor window opens.

2 Enter the initialization, send, receive, and termination messages. Each

message is an element in a MATLAB structure array with a series of fields
For information and examples of these fields, see “RS-232 MATLAB
Structure Reference (Conventional)” on page 2-88.

For example, if you want to send and receive one floating-point number, type
the following. In this example, the floating-point number field for SendData
is filled from InputPorts 1. In the case of RecData, the floating-point
number field is sent to OutputPorts 1.

Note Field names in the structures are case sensitive.

2-79
2 Serial Communications Support

RS232_Send(1).SendData = 'start,%f,%f,stop;\r';
RS232_Send(1).InputPorts = [1];
RS232_Send(1).Timeout = 0.01;
RS232_Send(1).EOM = 1;

RS232_Receive(1).RecData = 'start,%f,%f,stop;\r';
RS232_Receive(1).OutputPorts = [1];
RS232_Receive(1).Timeout = 0.01;
RS232_Receive(1).EOM = 1;

Note If you do not manually load the message structures before opening your
Simulink model, or have the message structures automatically loaded with
the model, the port connections to the RS-232 blocks break.

3 From the File menu, click Save As. In the Save As File dialog box, enter the
name of the M-file. For example, enter
RS232Async_Messages.m

4 Close the text editing window.

5 In the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of the M-file you created
with the RS-232 structures. For example, type
RS232Async_Messages

MATLAB loads and runs the M-file to create the message structures in the
MATLAB workspace needed by the RS-232 driver blocks.

6 Open your Simulink model, or press Ctrl+D.

Simulink updates the RS-232 driver blocks with the information from the
structures. For example, Simulink adds the inputs and outputs defined in
the structures to the blocks.

7 Connect the input and output ports on the RS-232 driver blocks to other
blocks in your Simulink model.

Your model should look similar to the figure shown below.

2-80
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

8 Set the preload function for your Simulink model to load the message
structures when you open the model. For example, if you saved the message
structures in the M-file RS232async_messages, type
set_param(gcs, 'PreLoadFcn','RS232async_messages')

Note If you do not manually load the message structures before opening your
Simulink model, or have the message structures automatically loaded with
the model, the port connections to the RS-232 blocks break.

Your next task is to build and run the target application.

Building and Running the Target Application (Asynchronous)

xPC Target and Real-Time Workshop create C code from your Simulink model.
You can then use a C compiler to create executable code that runs on the target
PC.
After you have added the RS-232 blocks for asynchronous mode to your
Simulink model, and created and loaded the RS-232 structures into the
MATLAB workspace, you can build your target application.

2-81
2 Serial Communications Support

Note You cannot use a serial port to communicate between the host PC and
target PC with this example. You can only use COM1 if it is not already in use
for host-target communications.

1 In the Simulink window, and from the Tools menu, point to Real-Time
Workshop, and then click Build Model.

2 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

+tg or tg.start or start(tg)

The target application begins running in real time.

For each sample period, the RS-232 messages you entered in the RS-232
send and receive message structures are executed.

In this example, the target PC displays the inverted waveform. The RS-232
Send and RS-232 Receive blocks require a minimum delay or one sample to
send the data and also receive it. When running at faster sample rates,
several sample intervals might elapse while one set of data is transmitted,
because RS-232 communication is not particularly fast. The sample delay
just described is not visible in this example.

2-82
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

You can extend this example for multiple D/A channels by simply adding more
input signals and modifying the format string to have additional '%f' format
specifiers.

Note This example requires that you not use host PC to target PC
communication using a serial port because that would block that COM port
and the example would not operate.

RS-232 Simulink Block Reference (Conventional)

xPC Target supports RS-232 communication with driver blocks in your
Simulink model and message structures in the MATLAB workspace.
This section includes the following topics:

2-83
2 Serial Communications Support

• “RS-232 Setup Block” on page 2-84 — Sends the initialize and termination
messages. You need one Setup block for each RS-232 port you use in your
model.
• “RS-232 Send/Receive Block (Synchronous)” on page 2-86 — Sequences the
send and receive messages for synchronous serial communication.
• “RS-232 Send Block (Asynchronous)” on page 2-87 — Sequences the send
messages.
• “RS-232 Receive Block (Asynchronous)” on page 2-87 — Sequences the
receive messages.

RS-232 Setup Block

The Block Parameters dialog box for the RS-232 Setup block contains the
following fields:

Parameter Description

Port From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. This is
the serial connection the target PC uses to
communicate with the RS-232 device.
Baud rate From the list, select 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200,
9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 300, or 110.

Number of data From the list, select either 7 or 8.

bits

Number of stop From the list, select 1 or 2.

bits

Parity From the list, select None, Odd, or Even.

Protocol From the list, select None or XOnXOff. If your serial
device does not support hardware handshaking, or
your application software requires XOn/XOff
handshaking, you might need to select XOn/XOff.
Send buffer size Enter the size, in bytes, of the send buffer.

2-84
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Parameter Description

Receive buffer Enter the size, in bytes, of the receive buffer.

size
The Send Buffer Size and Receive Buffer Size must
be large enough to hold the data to be sent or received
during each model step. It is important to be aware
that the buffers must also be large enough to store old
data from a prior model step in the event that the
entire data transmission was not completed during
the prior step.
Initialization Enter the name of the structure containing the
command initialization messages and the expected
structure acknowledgments when the model is initialized. If
you are not using initialization messages, enter an
empty matrix in this box.
For information on creating this structure, see
“Creating RS-232 Message Structures
(Synchronous)” on page 2-68 and “Creating RS-232
Message Structures (Asynchronous)” on page 2-79.
Termination Enter the name of the structure containing the
command termination messages and expected
structure acknowledgments when the model is terminated. If
you are not using termination messages, enter an
empty matrix in this box.

The RS232 Setup block defines the number of databits, baudrate, protocol,
and so on for each COM port used in your Simulink model. Each model that
uses RS232 I/O must have one RS232 Setup block for each COM port in the
model. The RS232 Setup block does not have any inputs or outputs.
If your host PC and target PC are connected using serial communication, one
COM port on your target PC is dedicated for communication with your host PC.
You cannot use this COM port in your block diagram as an I/O device. For
example, if the target PC uses COM1 for communication with the host PC,
COM1 cannot be used by your block diagram. An error message is displayed if
you use COM1 as an I/O device in your block diagram. The error message
appears when you attempt to build and download the target application. In this

2-85
2 Serial Communications Support

example, you must use COM2 as an I/O device in your block diagram. If you are
using TCP/IP as your host PC to target PC communications protocol, then you
can use any COM ports with RS-232 I/O drivers in your block diagram.

RS-232 Send/Receive Block (Synchronous)

The Block Parameters dialog box for the Synchronous Send & Receive block
contains the following fields:

Parameter Description

Port From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. This list
allows you to define which COM port is used to send and
receive the data. The model must contain one Setup block
for each COM port you use to send and receive data.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed. Note that data is
sent and received on the same COM port.
Message Enter the name of the MATLAB structure this block uses to
struct send and receive messages and data to an RS-232 device.
name For information to create this structure, see “Creating
RS-232 Message Structures (Synchronous)” on page 2-68.
Sample This entry allows you to define the sample time of the block.
time Because this block waits for data to be received from the
RS-232 external device before the block finishes executing,
small sample times are not suitable with synchronous mode.
You must allow sufficient time for both the RS232 send and
the RS232 receive operations to be completed. The smallest
sample time depends on the following:

• Amount of data being sent

• Amount of data being received
• Selected baud rate
• Response time of the external device

2-86
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

RS-232 Send Block (Asynchronous)

The Block Parameters dialog box for the Asynchronous Send block contains the
following fields:

Parameter Description

Port This list allows you to define which COM port is used for
sending data. The model must contain one RS232 Setup
block to configure its COM port. Otherwise, an error
message is displayed.
Message Enter the name of the MATLAB structure this block uses to
struct send messages and data to an RS-232 device. For
name information on creating this structure, see “Creating
RS-232 Message Structures (Asynchronous)” on page 2-79.
Sample This entry allows you to define the sample time of the block.
time Because the block does not wait until data is received from
the external RS-232 device, you can set sample times to
small values.

RS-232 Receive Block (Asynchronous)

The Block Parameters dialog box for the Asynchronous Receive block contains
the following fields:

Parameter Description

Port This list allows you to define which COM port is used to send
and receive data. The model must contain one RS232 Setup
block for the same COM port. Otherwise, an error message
is displayed.

2-87
2 Serial Communications Support

Parameter Description

Message Enter the name of the MATLAB structure this block uses to
struct receive messages and data from an RS-232 device. For
name information on creating this structure, see “Creating
RS-232 Message Structures (Asynchronous)” on page 2-79.
Sample This entry allows you to define the sample time of the block.
time Because the block does not wait until data is received from
the external RS-232 device, you can set sample times to
small values.

RS-232 MATLAB Structure Reference (Conventional)

You do not use all message fields in all messages. For example, a message to
send data would not use the message field.RecData, but would use the field
.SendData. However, knowing the possible message fields is helpful when you
are creating any of the message structures. This section contains the following
topics:
• “RS-232 Send/Receive Message Structure (Synchronous)” on page 2-89 —
Description of the message fields for the send/receive structure associated
with RS-232 asynchronous mode and the RS-232 Send/Receive block
• “RS-232 Send Message Structure (Asynchronous)” on page 2-91 —
Description of the message fields for the send structure associated with
RS-232 synchronous mode and the RS-232 Send block
• “RS-232 Receive Message Structure (Asynchronous)” on page 2-92 —
Description of the message fields for the receive structure associated with
RS-232 synchronous mode and the RS-232 Receive block
• “Supported Data Types for Message Fields” on page 2-93 — List of supported
data types and the format you use to indicate those types in message fields

2-88
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

RS-232 Send/Receive Message Structure (Synchronous)

Below are descriptions of the possible message fields for the send /receive
structures with asynchronous mode. The order of the fields does not matter.
However, the field names are case sensitive.

Message Description
Field

SendData Data and format sent to the RS-232 device. Default

value = ''.
Note that the SendData syntax format is the same as the
C printf() library function. It is also very similar to the
MATLAB fscanf method, with the exception that
SendData is not vectorized.

InputPorts Number of input ports for the driver block. Data from the
input ports is sent to the RS-232 device with the message
field.SendData. Default value = []. The highest number
you enter determines the number of input ports on the
driver block
For example, the following message creates two input
ports on the driver block,
RS232_Send_Receive(1).InputPorts= [1 2];

RecData Data and format received from the RS-232 device. Default
value = ''. The format of this statement is very similar to
a scanf statement. The read data is mapped to the output
ports defined in the message field .OutputPorts. If a
negative output port is given, the data is read in, but not
sent to any output port.

2-89
2 Serial Communications Support

Message Description
Field

OutputPorts Number of output ports from the driver block. Data

received from an RS-232 device is sent to the output ports
with the message field .ReceiveData. Default value = [].
The highest number you enter determines the number of
output ports on the driver block.
For example, to use output ports 1 and 2 on the driver
block, type
RS232_Send_Receive.OutputPorts = [1 2];

Timeout Time, in seconds, the driver block waits for data to be

returned. Default value = 0.049.
EOM Number of characters you use to indicate the end of a
message.

2-90
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

RS-232 Send Message Structure (Asynchronous)

Below is a description of the possible message fields for the send structure with
synchronous mode. The order of the message fields does not matter. However,
the field names are case sensitive.

Message Description
Field

SendData Data and format sent to the RS-232 device. Default

value = ''.
Note that the SendData syntax format is the same as the C
printf() library function. It is also very similar to the
MATLAB fscanf method, with the exception that SendData
is not vectorized.
InputPorts Number of input ports for the driver block. Data from the
input ports is sent to the RS-232 device with the message
field .SendData. Default value = []. The highest number
you enter determines the number of input ports on the
driver block.
For example, the following message creates two input ports
on the driver block.
RS232_Send_Receive(1).InputPorts= [1 2];

Timeout Time, in seconds, the driver block waits for data to be

returned. Default value = 0.049.
EOM Number of characters you use to indicate the end of a
message.

2-91
2 Serial Communications Support

RS-232 Receive Message Structure (Asynchronous)

Below are descriptions of the possible message fields for the receive message
structure with synchronous mode.

Message Description
Fields

RecData Data and format received from the RS-232 device. Default
value = ''. The format of this statement is very similar to
a scanf statement. The read data is mapped to the output
ports defined in the message field .OutputPorts. If a
negative output port is given, the data is read in but not
sent to any output port.
OutputPorts Number of output ports from the driver block. Data
received from an RS-232 device is sent to the output ports
with the message field .ReceiveData. Default value = [].
The highest number you enter determines the number of
output ports on the driver block.
For example, to use output ports 1 and 2 on the driver
block,
RS232_Send_Receive.OutputPorts = [1 2];

Timeout Time, in seconds, the driver block waits for data to be

returned. Default value = 0.049.
EOM Number of characters you use to indicate the end of a
message.

2-92
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Supported Data Types for Message Fields

The following table lists the supported data types for the RS-232 message
fields.

Format Description

%c and %C Single character

%d or %i Signed decimal integer

%u Unsigned decimal integer
%o Unsigned octal integer

%x or %X Unsigned hexadecimal integer using 'abcdef' or

'ABCDEF' for the hexadecimal digits

%e or %E Exponential format using e or E

%f Floating point
%g Signed value printed in f or e format depending on
which is smaller
%G Signed value printed in f or E format depending on
which is smaller

RS-232 Binary Mode (Conventional)

Use RS232 Binary Mode when you want to transfer raw data. The format of
this data is either a custom format or is an image of the bytes as they are stored
in memory. This section includes the following topics:
• “RS-232 Binary Mode I/O” on page 2-94 — When to use RS232 binary mode
• “RS-232 Binary Mode I/O” on page 2-94 — How to select drivers from the
xPC Target block library
• “RS232 Binary Receive Block” on page 2-96 — Explanation of block
parameters, inputs, and outputs
• “RS232 Binary Send Block” on page 2-97 — Explanation of Block
Parameters and input

2-93
2 Serial Communications Support

• “Example Using RS232 Binary Mode I/O” on page 2-99 — Simulink model
using xPC Target driver blocks

RS-232 Binary Mode I/O

The binary mode drivers operate in asynchronous mode. In other words, they
do not wait until an entire packet of data is received, but receive as many bytes
as available and then go on to the next data block. When an entire packet has
been received, the block outputs the new data. Sent data is also handled
similarly. The Send block instructs the RS-232 hardware to send a certain
number of bytes, but does not wait for these bytes to actually be sent.
The RS-232 binary mode infrastructure also includes blocks to pack and
unpack any data received. This translates the raw bytes into signals that
Simulink can understand.
The functioning of these blocks is identical to the corresponding blocks in the
UDP section of the xPC Target block library. The RS232 Binary Pack and
Unpack blocks are actually references to these blocks. For information about
UDP and the functionality of these blocks, see Chapter 6, “UDP I/O Support.”

Using RS-232 Binary Mode

To use the RS-232 binary mode blocks, you must first insert exactly one RS232
Setup block for each COM port into your model. The setup for this block is
exactly the same as it is for text-based I/O, except that initialization or
termination structures are ignored. In the dialog box, set both these fields to
the empty matrix ([]).
The RS-232 binary mode blocks can be found in the RS-232 section of the xPC
Target Block Library. Use the following procedure to access these blocks:

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target Block Library open.

2 Double-click the group block RS232.

The Library: xpclib/RS232 library opens.

2-94
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

3 Double-click the group block Binary Mode.

The Library: xpclib/RS232/Binary Mode library opens.

2-95
2 Serial Communications Support

4 Drag and drop any of these blocks into your Simulink model.

RS232 Binary Receive Block

The RS232 Binary Receive Block was designed with generality in mind. To this
end, it supports reception of variable-length packets. A packet can be split
between two different RS232 Binary Receive blocks, say for a fixed-length
header followed by a variable-length body. However, the maximum possible
length of a packet has to be specified in the block, and the output from the block
is a vector whose width is equal to this maximum length.
If you drop a block into your model and double-click it, a Block Parameters
dialog box opens where you can modify the parameters for this block.

Block Parameters.
COM Port — From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. This is the RS-232
port you want to receive data from. An RS232 Setup block must also exist for
the same COM port in your model.
Maximum width per packet — Enter a value that Simulink and Real-Time
Workshop use to allocate memory for the received data. This is also the width
of the data output. In case the actual data is less wide than the maximum, the
first few bytes of the output vector are the real data and the remaining bytes
are undefined.

2-96
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Sample time — Specifies how often the block is to be executed. In the example
dialog box shown above, the setting of -1 specifies an inherited sample time,
either from the base sample time of the model or from the block that the output
of this block goes to.

Block Inputs. The RS232 Binary Receive Block has two input ports:

• First input port — This port is labeled Length, and is the size of the packet
it will receive. This value should be less than or equal to the Maximum width
per packet length parameter. The effect of changing the Length input
during reception of one packet is undefined.
• Second input port — This port is labeled Enable, and turns the block on or
off. If the Enable input is nonzero, the block attempts to receive data,
otherwise it simply does nothing.

Block Outputs. The RS232 Binary Receive block has two output ports:

• First output port — This port is labeled Done, and is a function call output.
This output issues a function call as soon as the block has completed
receiving one packet. This can be used to drive a function call subsystem to
switch. For example, to switch from a “header-receive” block to a
“body-receive” block.
• Second output port — This port is labeled Data, and is the data output port.
The data is a vector of uint8s, and is a vector of width equal to that specified
in the Maximum width per packet parameter. If the Length input is less than
this width, the first number of bytes equal to Length are the real data and
the rest is garbage.

RS232 Binary Send Block

If you drop a block into your model and double-click it, a Block Parameters
dialog box opens where you can modify the parameters for this block.

2-97
2 Serial Communications Support

Block Parameters. COM Port — From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.
This is the port you want to use to send the data.
Maximum width per packet — Enter the width of the incoming data. This
value is a constant, unlike the Receive block.
Sample time — Enter the frequency this data is sent.

Block Input
Input Port — This port represents the data to be transmitted. The data should
be a vector of type uint8 and of a Packet width specified in the dialog box.

RS232 Binary Pack Block

Same as UDP Pack block. See “UDP Pack Block” on page 6-9.

RS232 Binary Unpack Block

Same as UDP Unpack block. See “UDP Unpack Block” on page 6-10.

2-98
 xPC Target RS-232 Drivers (Conventional)

Example Using RS232 Binary Mode I/O

To show the flexibility provided by the RS232 Binary Receive block, the
following illustrates how this block can be used. The model that implements
this setup is provided with xPC Target. To access this model, type
xpcrs232bindemo

at the command prompt. This opens the model, which is essentially

self-documenting. Open each subsystem in the model to see what that part is
supposed to accomplish.
Here is an example of a messaging protocol that the model has to conform to.
The protocol consists of a one-byte header, followed by a variable-length body.
The header can have only two legal values, 12 and 17. If the header is 12, the
body is 6 bytes long, and consists of a uint16 followed by an int32 (in terms of
MATLAB data types). If the header is 17, the body is 4 bytes long, and consists
of a uint16 followed by an int16.
The model receives one header byte at a time, rejecting any invalid ones. As
soon as a valid header byte is received, the execution switches to the body block,
where the proper number of bytes is received. The data is then appropriately
decoded and displayed on an xPC Target Scope of type target. The model
should serve as an example of how this is done.
The basic algorithm is to receive a header byte and then compare it to the list
of known headers (12 and 17). The body length is set appropriately depending
on the header, and the “Done” function-call output of the header block is used
to trigger functioning of the body block (via the “distributor” function call
subsystem).

2-99
2 Serial Communications Support

2-100
 3
GPIB I/O Support

xPC Target interfaces the target PC to a GPIB instrument bus using an external GPIB controller
from National Instruments. This external controller is connected to the target PC with a serial cable.
This chapter includes the following sections:

Introduction to GPIB Drivers (p. 3-2) Description of hardware connections, Simulink blocks,
and MATLAB message structures associated with the
Simulink blocks
Using GPIB Drivers (p. 3-5) Procedures to add GPIB driver blocks to your Simulink
model and create the message structures associated with
those blocks
GPIB Simulink Block Reference Description of block parameters for GPIB driver blocks
(p. 3-13)
GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference Description of the fields in the message structures,
(p. 3-16) shortcuts, and data types supported in the message fields
3 GPIB I/O Support

Introduction to GPIB Drivers

xPC Target uses a model for I/O that includes both Simulink blocks, for the
I/O drivers, and MATLAB structures for sequencing messages and commands.
This model provides increased flexibility and control over using only Simulink
blocks in your model. The topics in this section are

• “Hardware Connections for GPIB” on page 3-2 — Connect the target PC to a

GPIB-232CT-A controller from National Instruments.
• “Simulink Blocks for GPIB” on page 3-3 — Add setup, send, and receive
blocks to your Simulink model.
• “MATLAB Message Structures for GPIB” on page 3-3 — Create message
structures to sequence instructions to and from the GPIB controller.

Hardware Connections for GPIB

xPC Target supports connecting to a GPIB instrument bus with a
GPIB-232CT-A controller from National Instruments.
One end of the controller is connected to either the COM1 or COM2 port on the
target PC with a null modem cable. The other end is connected to the GPIB
instrument bus with a standard GPIB connector and cable.

RS-232
connection
GPIB-232CT-A
Target PC RS-232 IEEE 488 Controller

GPIB
instrument
bus

GPIB Device

3-2
 Introduction to GPIB Drivers

Simulink Blocks for GPIB

To support the use of GPIB, the xPC Target I/O library includes a set of GPIB
driver blocks. These driver blocks can be added to your Simulink model to
provide inputs and outputs to devices on a GPIB instrument bus.

• GPIB Setup — One setup block is needed for each GPIB controller. The
setup block does not have any inputs or outputs, but sends the initialization
and termination messages.
• GPIB Send/Receive — The send/receive block has inputs and outputs from
your Simulink model, and sequences both the send and receive messages.

MATLAB Message Structures for GPIB

Communication is through a series of messages passed back and forth between
the target PC and the GPIB controller. To accomplish this, the messages sent
to the GPIB controller must be in a format that the controller understands.
Likewise, the target PC must know how to interpret the data returned from the
GPIB controller.
xPC Target uses MATLAB structures to create messages and map the input
and output ports on the GPIB driver blocks to the data written and read from
the GPIB devices. The GPIB Setup block executes the messages in the
initialization structure after downloading the target application. The GPIB
Send/Receive block repeats the execution of the messages in the send/receive
structure during each sample interval. When the target application stops
running, the GPIB Setup block executes the messages in the termination
structure.
Below is an example of a send/receive message structure. The first message
writes a command to instruct the GPIB device to acquire a single data value,
while the second message sends a command to read that value and output the
result to the output port line coming from a GPIB driver block.

3-3
3 GPIB I/O Support

GPIB_Send_Receive

GPIB_Send_Receive(1) GPIB_Send_Receive(1) ...GPIB_Send_Receive(n)

.Address - 16 .Address
.Command - ‘wrt’ .Command - ‘rd 16’
.SendData - ‘:read?’ .SendData -
.InputPorts .InputPorts
.RecData .RecData - ‘%f’
.RdLength .RdLength - 20
.OutputPorts .OutputPorts - [1]
.OutputDataTypes .OutputDataTypes - {double}
.Wait .Wait
.Timeout - 0.05 .Timeout - 0.05

Currently, only two limitations exist. xPC Target does not support string data
types as input and output data types. Also, you must know the size and order
of data returned from a read command.
For more information on this example, see “Creating GPIB Message
Structures” on page 3-10.

3-4
 Using GPIB Drivers

Using GPIB Drivers

xPC Target uses a combination of Simulink blocks and MATLAB structures to
support GPIB communication from your target application and target PC. The
topics in this section are

• “Adding GPIB Driver Blocks” on page 3-5 — Add the setup and send/receive
blocks you need to add to your Simulink model for GPIB communication.
• “Creating GPIB Message Structures” on page 3-10 — Create the initialize,
send/receive, and termination message structures you need in the MATLAB
workspace.

This section uses an example of a multimeter attached to a GPIB bus with an

address of 16. This multimeter needs the initialization command
:conf:volt:dc

to set the device to read DC voltages, and needs the command

:read?

during each sample interval to read one voltage value

Adding GPIB Driver Blocks

The GPIB driver blocks initialize and communicate directly with the GPIB
controller. The GPIB controller then communicates with the GPIB devices on
the instrument bus.
After you create a Simulink model, you can add GPIB driver blocks and define
the initialization, send/receive, and termination message structures.

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target driver block library opens.

2 Double-click the GPIB group block.

A manufacturers window opens. Currently xPC target only supports GPIB

communication with a National Instruments controller.

3-5
3 GPIB I/O Support

3 Double-click the National Instruments group block.

A window with blocks for GPIB drivers opens.

Alternatively, you could access the xPC Target block library from the
Simulink Library Browser. In the Simulink window, and from the View
menu, click Show Library Browser. In the left pane, double-click xPC
Target, double-click GPIB, and then click National Instruments.

4 Drag and drop a GPIB Setup block and a GPIB Send/Receive block to your
Simulink model.

Your model should look similar to the figure below. Note that the input and
output ports are not defined or visible on the blocks. The inputs and outputs
are defined in a MATLAB message structure, and are visible only after you
load that structure into the MATLAB workspace and update your Simulink
model.

3-6
 Using GPIB Drivers

5 Double-click the GPIB Setup block. Enter values that correspond to the DIP
switch settings you set on the GPIB-232CT-A controller. In the
Initialization Struct box, enter the name for the MATLAB structure this
block uses to send initialization messages to the GPIB device.

Note If you are not using an initialization or termination structure, enter

two single quotes.

For example, if the target PC is connected to COM1, and you set the switches
on the controller to 38400 baud, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit, your Block
Parameter dialog box should look similar to the figure shown below.

3-7
3 GPIB I/O Support

For more information on entering the block parameters, see “PC-DIO-24” on

page 22-8. For the procedure to create the initialization structure, see
“Creating GPIB Message Structures” on page 3-10.

6 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

7 Double-click the GPIB Send/Receive block. The Block Parameters dialog box
opens.

3-8
 Using GPIB Drivers

8 From the Port list, select either COM1 or COM2. This is the port on the target
PC connected to the GPIB controller. In the Message Struct Name box,
enter the name for the MATLAB structure this block uses to send and
receive messages to the GPIB device. In the Sample Time box, enter the
same sample time or multiple of the sample time you entered for the fixed
step size in the Simulation -> Configuration Parameters dialog box Solver
pane.

Your Block Parameter dialog box should look similar to the figure shown
below.

For more information on entering the block parameters, see “PC-DIO-24” on

page 22-8.

9 Click OK. The Block Parameters dialog box closes.

Your next task is to create the MATLAB message structures that the GPIB
driver blocks use to sequence commands to the GPIB controller. See “Creating
GPIB Message Structures” on page 3-10.

3-9
3 GPIB I/O Support

Creating GPIB Message Structures

GPIB drivers use MATLAB structures to send and receive messages and to
map the input and output ports on the GPIB driver blocks to the data written
and read from the GPIB devices.
After you add GPIB driver blocks to your Simulink model, you can create the
message structures to communicate with the GPIB controller. You need to
create and load these structures into the MATLAB workspace before you build
your target application. The easiest way to create these structures is to create
an M-file and load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace.

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, and from the File menu, point to New,
and then click M-file.

A MATLAB text editor window opens.

2 Enter the initialization and send/receive messages. Each message is an

element in a MATLAB structure array with a series of fields. For
information and examples of these fields, see “GPIB Initialization and
Termination Message Structures” on page 3-17 and “GPIB Send/Receive
Message Structure” on page 3-18.

As an example, if you have a multimeter attached to a GPIB bus that has an

address of 16, needs the initialization command :conf:volt:dc to set the
device to read DC voltages, and uses the command :read? to read one
voltage value, you could type the following:

Note Field names in the structures are case sensitive.

GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'wrt 16';
GPIB_Initialize(1).SendData = ':conf:volt:dc';

GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Address= 16;
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Command = 'wrt 16';
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).SendData = ':read?';
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Timeout = 0.05;

GPIB_Send_Receive(2).Command = 'rd 16';

GPIB_Send_Receive(2).RecData = '%f';
GPIB_Send_Receive(2).RdLength = 20;
GPIB_Send_Receive(2).OutputPorts = [1];

3-10
 Using GPIB Drivers

GPIB_Send_Receive(2).OutputDataTypes = {'double'};
GPIB_Send_Receive(2).Timeout = 0.15;

This example did not need a termination structure. But if it did, the format
of the structure is the same as the initialization structure. For example, a
termination structure could have a message with the .Command and
.SendData fields.
GPIB_Termination(1).Command
GPIB_Termination(1).SendData

3 From the File menu, click Save As. In the Save As File dialog box, enter the
name of the M-file. For example, enter
GPIB_Messages.m

4 Close the text editing window.

5 In the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of the M-file you created
with the GPIB structures. For example, type
GPIB_Messages

MATLAB loads and runs the M-file to create the message structures in the
MATLAB workspace needed by the GPIB driver blocks.

6 Open your Simulink model, or press Ctrl+D.

The GPIB driver blocks are updated with the information from the
structures. For example, inputs and outputs defined in the structures are
now visible on the driver blocks.

Your model should look similar to the figure shown below.

3-11
3 GPIB I/O Support

7 Set the PreLoadFcn for your Simulink model to load the message structures
when you open the model. For example, if you saved the message structures
in the M-file GPIB_messages, type
set_param(gcs, 'PreLoadFcn','GPIB_messages.m')

Note If you do not manually load the message structures before opening
your Simulink model, or have the message structures automatically loaded
with the model, the port connections to the GPIB driver blocks break.
Your next task is to build the target application and download it to the target
PC.

3-12
 GPIB Simulink Block Reference

GPIB Simulink Block Reference

The GPIB-232CT-A is a GPIB controller external to the target PC. It is
connected to the target PC with an RS-232 cable.
xPC Target supports this controller with two driver blocks:

• “GPIB-232CT-A Setup Block” on page 3-13

• “GPIB-232CT-A Send/Receive Block” on page 3-15

Board Characteristics

Board name GPIB-232CT-A

Manufacturer National Instruments

Bus type N/A

Access method RS232

Multiple block instance support No

Multiple board support Yes

GPIB-232CT-A Setup Block

The setup block parameters must be set to match the jumper settings on the
GPIB-232CT-A controller.

Driver Block Parameters

Parameter Description

GPIB Enter the identification number for the GPIB controller.

address When the GPIB-232CT-A is turned on, the identification
number is set to 0.
Port From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. This is the
serial connection the target PC uses to communicate with
the GPIB-232CT-A controller.

3-13
3 GPIB I/O Support

Parameter Description

Baud rate From the list, select 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, 600, or 300.

Number of From the list, select 8 or 7.

data bits

Number of From the list, select 1 or 2.

stop bits

Parity From the list, select None, Odd, or Even.

Protocol From the list, select None or XOn/XOff. If your serial device
does not support hardware handshaking, or your
application software requires XOn/XOff handshaking, you
might need to select XOn/XOff.
Send buffer Enter the buffer size in bytes.
size

Receive Enter the buffer size in bytes.

buffer size

Initialization Enter the name of the structure containing the

command initialization information. For example, enter
struct
GPIB_Initialize

If you are not using initialization messages, enter two

single quotes in this box. For information on creating this
structure, see “Creating GPIB Message Structures” on
page 3-10.
Termination Enter the name of the structure containing the
command termination information.
struct

3-14
 GPIB Simulink Block Reference

GPIB-232CT-A Send/Receive Block

Driver Block Parameters

Parameter Description

Port From the list, select COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. This is the
serial connection the target PC uses to send and receive
data with the GPIB-232CT-A controller.
Message Enter the name of the MATLAB structure containing the
structure messages to be sent to the GPIB controller.
Sample Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time time you entered for the fixed step size in the Simulation ->
Configuration Parameters dialog box Solver pane.

3-15
3 GPIB I/O Support

GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference

You do not use all message fields in all messages. For example, a message to
send data would not use the message field .RecData, but would use the field
.SendData. However, knowing the possible message fields is helpful when you
are creating any of the message structures.
This section includes the following topics:

• “GPIB Initialization and Termination Message Structures” on page 3-17 —

Description of the message fields for the initialization and termination
structures associated with the GPIB Setup block
• “GPIB Send/Receive Message Structure” on page 3-18 — Description of the
message fields for the send/receive structure associated the GPIB
Send/Receive block
• “Shortcuts and Features for Messages” on page 3-21 — Shortcuts to using
the GPIB wrt and rd commands
• “Supported Data Types for Message Fields” on page 3-23 — List of supported
data types and the format you use to indicate those types in message fields

3-16
 GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference

GPIB Initialization and Termination Message

Structures
The formats for the initialization and termination structures are similar to the
send/receive structure except for a few differences:
The initialization and termination structures do not need to receive or send
information through driver block ports on your Simulink model. Therefore, the
initialization and termination structures do not use the message fields
.InputPorts, .OutputPorts, .RecData, and .OutputDataTypes.

Below is a description of the possible message fields for the initialization and
termination structures. The order of the message fields does not matter.
However, the field names are case sensitive.

Message Description
Fields

Address Sets the GPIB address for the device being accessed and
defines the keyword ADDR. Default value = [].
Command GPIB command sent to a GPIB device. Default value = ''.
SendData Data sent with the GPIB command. Default value = ''.
RdLength Defines the length of the acknowledge string, in bytes, from
the GPIB controller.
Ack The expected acknowledgment string from the controller as
a result of an initialization or termination message. If this
value is set, you need to set the time-out value. If no string
is defined, then no acknowledge is expected.
Timeout Time, in seconds, allowed for the GPIB controller to respond
to a message and send back an acknowledge string. Default
value = 0.049 seconds.
If the time-out value is exceeded, a time-out error is
reported.

3-17
3 GPIB I/O Support

GPIB Send/Receive Message Structure

Below is a description of the possible fields for the send/receive message
structure. The order of the message fields in a message does not matter.
However, the field names are case sensitive.

Message Description
Fields

Address Sets the GPIB address for the device being accessed. After
the GPIB address is set, the remaining messages use this
address value until another message changes the address
value. Default value = 0.
The keyword ADDR is equal to the value in the message
field .Address. You can use this keyword in the message
fields .Command or .SendData to replace the numerical value
of the GPIB address. For example, you can write
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Command='wrt 16';

Or you can write

GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Address = 16;
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Command='wrt ADDR';

Command GPIB command sent to a GPIB device. Default value = ''.

SendData Data sent with the GPIB command. Default value = ''.
InputPorts Defines the input ports for the driver block. Data from the
input ports is sent to the GPIB device with the message
fields .Command and .SendData. Default value = []. The
highest number you enter determines the number of input
ports on the driver block.
For example, the following message creates two input ports
on the driver block, and passes data from the input ports to
the read command.
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Command = 'rd #%d %d';
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).InputPorts= [1 2];

3-18
 GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference

Message Description
Fields

The first port is used to dynamically provide the length of

the receive string, while the second port provides the value
of the GPIB device.
RecData Format of the data received from the GPIB device. Default
value = ''. The format of this statement is very similar to a
scanf statement. The read data is mapped to the output
ports defined in the field .OutputPorts. If a negative output
port is given, the data is read in, but not sent to any output
port.
For example, to read from a GPIB device with an address of
16, one floating-point number with a maximum number of
bytes of 20, and send the data to the first driver block
output, type the following:
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).Command = 'rd #20 16';
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).RecData = '%f';
GPIB_Send_Receive(1).OutputPorts = [1];

RdLength Defines the length of the data, in bytes, received with the
read command and defines the keyword LENGTH. Default
value = 0.
OutputPorts Defines the output ports from the driver block. Data
received from a GPIB device with the read command is sent
to the output ports. Default value = []. The highest
number you enter determines the number of output ports on
the driver block.
For example, to use output ports 1 and 2 on the driver block,
type
GPIB_Send_Receive.OutputPorts = [1 2];

3-19
3 GPIB I/O Support

Message Description
Fields

OutputData Defines the data types for the output ports on the driver
Types block. Default value = [].
If this value is not defined, and there are output ports, the
default type is double. Also, if there are more output ports
than output data types listed, the default type for the
undefined ports is double.
Wait The amount of time, in seconds, to wait before executing the
next message. This value is limited to 50 milliseconds.
Default value = 0.
Timeout Time, in seconds, the driver block waits for data to be
returned. Default value = 0.049.

3-20
 GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference

Shortcuts and Features for Messages

xPC Target defines the abbreviations wrt and rd to make message writing with
GPIB commands easier. When the message interpreter sees the statements

• Structure_name(index).'wrt', it is replaced with

Structure_name(index).'wrt ADDR'. For example, you could write
GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'wrt 8';

or you could write

GPIB_Initialize(1).Address = 8;
GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'wrt';

The following message fields, with the keyword ADDR, use the address value
8 defined in the message field .Address.

• Structure_name (index).Command = 'rd', it is replaced with

Structure_name(index).Command = 'rd #LENGTH ADDR'. For example, you
could write
GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'rd #10 8';

or you could write

GPIB_Initialize(1).Address = 8;
GPIB_Initialize(1).RdLength = 10
GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'wrt';

If you enter numerical values in the wrt and rd commands, then the
command uses those values instead of the values in the variables ADDR and
LENGH. For example, the following message uses the GPIB address 10 even
though the value for ADDR is defined as 8.
GPIB_Initialize(1).Address = 8;
GPIB_Initialize(1).Command = 'wrt 10';

Changes to the Read Command — When a GPIB rd command is sent to the

GPIB controller, the controller responds with the data and length of data. To
make using this command easier, the xPC Target driver block discards the
length of data information. For example, using the normal GPIB rd command,
you could write
GPIB_Message(1).Command = 'rd #20 16';
GPIB_Message(1).RecData = '%f%d';

3-21
3 GPIB I/O Support

GPIB_Message(1).OutputPorts = [1 -1];

The code %d reads the length of data and the -1 discards the length. Using the
modified xPC Target rd command, you would write
GPIB_message(1).Command = 'rd #20 16';
GPIB_message(1).RecData = '%f';
GPIB_message(1).OutputPorts = [1];

Automatic Addition of Escape Characters — The message interpreter

automatically places the correct escape characters at the end of the message
fields .Command, .SendData, and .Ack. However, if you add the escape
characters, then the message interpreter does not add additional characters.
The escape characters are \\, \a, \b, \f, \r, \t, \v, \', \'', and \n.
For example, you can write
GPIB_Message.Command = 'wrt 16\n';
GPIB_Message.SendData = ':conf:volt:dc\r';
GPIB_Message.Ack = '10\n\r';

or you can write the following, and the appropriate escape characters are
added.
GPIB_Message.Command = 'wrt 16';
GPIB_Message.SendData = ':conf:volt:dc';
GPIB_Message.Ack = '10';

3-22
 GPIB MATLAB Structure Reference

Supported Data Types for Message Fields

The following table lists the supported data types for the message fields
.SendData and .Recdata:

Format Description

%c and %C Single character and wide character

%d or %I Signed decimal integer
%u Unsigned decimal integer
%o Unsigned octal integer
%x or %X Unsigned hexadecimal integer using 'abcdef' or
'ABCDEF' for the hexadecimal digits.

%e or %E Exponential format using e or E

%f Floating point
%g Signed value printed in f or e format depending on
which is smaller
%G Signed value printed in f or E format depending on
which is smaller

3-23
3 GPIB I/O Support

3-24
 4
CAN I/O Support

This chapter includes the following sections:

Introduction (p. 4-3) xPC Target offers support to connect a target PC to a

CAN network using the CAN driver blocks provided by
the xPC Target I/O block library. This support is for I/O
device drivers for the CAN-AC2-ISA and CAN-AC2-PCI
boards from Softing GmbH (Germany).
CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2
(ISA) with Philips PCA 82C200 CAN (ISA) without piggyback modules.
Controller (p. 4-7)
CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2
(ISA) with Intel 82527 CAN Controller (ISA) with piggyback modules.
(p. 4-14)
CAN Driver Blocks for the The driver blocks described here support the
CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN-AC2-PCI.
CAN Controller (p. 4-22)
CAN Driver Blocks for the The driver blocks described here support the
CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with Philips CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104).
SJA1000 CAN Controller (p. 4-30)
Constructing and Extracting CAN CAN data frames have a maximum size of 8 bytes (64
Data Frames (p. 4-38) bits). For the CAN driver blocks found in the xPC Target
I/O block library, Simulink signals of data type double are
used to propagate data frames as an entity.
Detecting Time-Outs When Receiving The Receive driver blocks for all CAN boards allow you to
CAN Messages (p. 4-47) output the timestamp at which the latest corresponding
CAN message has been received.
Model Execution Driven by CAN In certain applications, the model (target application)
Messages (Interrupt Capability of CAN execution is driven by the pace of an incoming CAN
Receive Blocks) (p. 4-49) message.
4 CAN I/O Support

Defining Initialization and The CAN Setup driver blocks for all supported CAN
Termination CAN Messages (p. 4-53) boards allow the definition of CAN messages to be sent
out during initialization and termination of the target
application.
CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices xPC Target CAN-AC2 supports CAN specification 2.0a
(p. 4-55) and 2.0b but this does not generally include the CANopen
protocol on driver level. Nevertheless it is possible to
access CANopen devices by the CAN-AC2 drivers in a
general way.

4-2
 Introduction

Introduction
xPC Target offers support to connect a target PC to a CAN network using the
CAN driver blocks provided by the xPC Target I/O block library. This support
is for I/O device drivers for the CAN-AC2-ISA and CAN-AC2-PCI boards from
Softing GmbH (Germany). The CAN driver library allows xPC Target
applications to connect to any CAN field bus network for I/O communication or
real-time target-to-target communication. This topics in this section are

• “xPC Target CAN Library” on page 4-3

• “CAN-AC2” on page 4-5
• “CAN-AC2-PCI” on page 4-6
• “CAN-AC2-104” on page 4-6

xPC Target CAN Library

The drivers support CAN specifications 2.0A and 2.0B and use the dynamic
object mode of the CAN-AC2 firmware to achieve maximum real-time
performance.
The library supports the following CAN boards from Softing GmbH, Germany.

Board Name Form Identifier Range Multiple

Factor Board Support

CAN-AC2 ISA Standard (& Extended with No

piggyback module)

CAN-AC2-PCI PCI Standard & Extended Yes (up to 3)

CAN-AC2-104 PC/104 Standard & Extended Yes (up to 3)

For more information on the board specifications, visit

http://www.softing.com.

4-3
4 CAN I/O Support

The xPC Target CAN library intentionally restricts its support to Softing
boards with two CAN ports (boards with one channel would be available as
well). This is because the two-port versions allow you to check the correct
functioning of the board and drivers by just connecting the first CAN port to
the second CAN port. This forms a loop-back without you needing to connect
the board to a “real” CAN-network. The xpcdemos directory contains simple
loop-back test models to test the ISA, PCI, and PC/104 boards. Type the
following commands to open the corresponding test models.

Model Name (Command) Board

xpccanisa CAN-AC2
xpccanpci CAN-AC2-PCI
xpccanpc104 CAN-AC2-104

The size of the driver code of the CAN boards supported by the xPC Target
block library is significant, and because not all xPC Target applications will use
CAN, the CAN library code is not linked by default when building a target
application. This makes target applications smaller if no CAN communication
functionality is needed. If the model to be built contains CAN driver blocks,
xPC Target links in the appropriate CAN library code when necessary.
For each CAN board three driver blocks are provided:

• A setup block, which defines the type of physical connection (baud rate and
so forth). Exactly one instance of the setup block must be defined in a model
for each physically installed CAN board.
• A send block, which transmits (sends) the data entering the block’s input
ports to the connected CAN network. One or more instances of the Send block
can be used in a model.
• A receive block, which retrieves (reads) CAN messages received by the board
and outputs the data at the corresponding output ports. One or more
instances of the Receive block can be used in a model.

The maximum size of the data frame of a CAN message is 8 bytes. This is the
same size as the C data type double uses on PC-compatible systems. At the
same time, the double data type is the default data type used for Simulink
signals. Therefore the CAN data frame within a Simulink model can be easily

4-4
 Introduction

represented by a scalar Simulink signal even if the data frame has nothing in
common with a double floating point value. The xPC Target CAN library
provides a Utility sublibrary that offers bit-packing and bit-unpacking blocks.
These blocks are used to pack data types other than doubles into 64 bits (8
bytes or a double) as well as for the opposite operation. This is discussed in
greater detail below. What is important for now is that CAN data frames are
represented by Simulink signals of data type double.
All drivers for the supported CAN boards program the boards for the so-called
dynamic object mode. This is one of three modes the CAN board firmware from
Softing can operate in. For a more detailed discussion of the three modes see
the board’s user manual. Dynamic object mode is best suited for real-time
environments where each component of the application must have
deterministic time behavior. This is the case for xPC Target, and that is the
main reason why this mode has been chosen over the other two modes, which
are FIFO and static object mode.
The following paragraphs summarize the differences among the three
supported Softing boards.

CAN-AC2
This is the CAN board for the ISA bus offering two CAN ports (highspeed). In
its standard hardware configuration it uses the Philips PCA 82C200 CAN
controller, which supports standard identifiers only. Piggyback modules are
available (one for each port) that replace the Philips CAN controllers with Intel
82527 CAN controllers. The Intel controllers support both standard and
extended identifiers. The board is a memory-mapped device and uses a 16 KB
address range between 640 KB and 1 MB. We do not recommend this board for
new projects; use the CAN-AC2-PCI which is described below instead. Softing
plans that no new firmware versions are planned for this board.

4-5
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN-AC2-PCI
This is the CAN board for the PCI bus offering two CAN ports. The CAN
controllers used on the board are the SJA1000 from Philips. In its standard
hardware configuration the board is designed for both standard and extended
identifiers for high-speed CAN. Piggyback modules are available (one for each
port) that add low-speed CAN support to switch between high-speed and
low-speed CAN. The board is a memory mapped PCI device that uses 64 KB of
address space. The address space is assigned automatically by the PCI BIOS of
the target PC and lies usually in the range between 2 GB and 4 GB. Any new
projects where a desktop PC is used as the target system should use this board
and not the ISA board described above.

CAN-AC2-104
This is the CAN board for the PC/104 bus offering two CAN ports. The CAN
controllers used on the board are the SJA1000 from Philips. The board offers
both standard and extended identifiers for high-speed CAN. A low-speed CAN
hardware extension is not available. The board is both I/O mapped and
memory mapped. The I/O-mapped area uses a 3 B address range and the
memory-mapped area uses a 4 KB address range between 640 KB and 1 MB.

4-6
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips PCA 82C200 CAN Controller

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips PCA
82C200 CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2 (ISA) without
piggyback modules. The Philips PCA 82C200 chip is used as the CAN
controller in this configuration and supports the standard identifier range
only. The driver block set for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block
library in the group CAN/Softing.

The first group, Phillips C200, contains the three available CAN blocks: Setup,
Send, and Receive.

4-7
4 CAN I/O Support

Setup Driver Block

The Setup block defines general settings of the installed CAN board. Because
the CAN driver blocks for this ISA board only support a single physical board
for each target system, this block can only be used once (one instance) in a
model.

CAN 1 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), select the value User defined. In this
case, use CAN 1 - user defined baud rate to provide the four values for the
timing information. The vector elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 2. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), the value User defined can be selected.

4-8
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips PCA 82C200 CAN Controller

In this case, use CAN 1 - User defined baud rate to provide the four values for
the timing information. The vector elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
Initialization command structure and Termination — Defines CAN
messages sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block.
Memory base address — Defines the memory base address of the board.
Hardware jumpers on the board itself set the address range that the board
uses. Refer to the Softing user manual on how to set the various address
ranges. The setting in the dialog box must correspond to the jumper setting;
otherwise the board cannot be accessed. The available address ranges (memory
base address) in the pop-up menu are those supported by the board. Because
the xPC Target kernel only reserves a subrange (C0000 to DC000) of the
640 KB to 1 MB address range for memory-mapped devices, the valid settings
when used within a xPC target system are
1 (16k): D0000-D3FFF
2 (16k): D4000-D7FFF

The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of hardware jumpers. Refer to the Softing user manual on how to set the
jumpers. Both CAN ports must be terminated properly when you use the
loop-back model provided to test the board and drivers.

4-9
4 CAN I/O Support

Send Driver Block

The Send driver block transmits data to a CAN network from within a block
model.

CAN port — Selects the CAN port to which the CAN message is sent.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages sent by this block.
It must be a row vector where the elements define a set of standard identifiers.
Each element must be in the range between 0 and 2031. The number of
identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board cannot exceed
200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The number of
elements defined here also specifies the number of input ports of the block. The
block icon displays the selected identifier at each input port. Each input port
accepts the data frame to be sent along with the CAN message. The signal
entering each input port must be a scalar of type double representing the
maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Data frame sizes — Defines the data frame size for each identifier (CAN
message) in bytes. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of
data frame sizes. Each element must be in the range between 1 and 8. If the
data frame sizes for all the identifiers defined in the Identifiers parameter
must be the same, you can provide the size as a scalar only and scalar

4-10
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips PCA 82C200 CAN Controller

expansion applies. If the sizes are different for at least two identifiers (CAN
messages), you must provide one size element for each identifier defined in the
Identifiers parameter. Therefore the length of the two vectors must be the
same.
Show status output ports — Enables status output ports for each identifier
(CAN message). If the check box is checked the block shows as many output
ports as input ports. The data type of each output port is a double and the value
is identical to the return argument of function CANPC_write_object(…),
described in the Softing user manual. Refer to the manual for more
information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Send block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block with different sample times, you
can send CAN messages out at different rates. Or you can use multiple
instances to structure your model more efficiently.

Receive Driver Block

The Receive driver block retrieves data from a CAN network to be used within
a block model.

4-11
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN port — Defines the CAN port from which the CAN messages are
retrieved.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages retrieved by this
block. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of standard
identifiers. Each element must be in the range between 0 and 2031. The
number of identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board
cannot exceed 200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The
number of elements defined here, also defines the number of output ports of the
block. The block icon displays the selected identifier at each output port. Each
output port outputs the data frame being retrieved along with the CAN
message. The signal leaving each output port is a scalar of type double
representing the maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Output port options — Defines the type of retrieved data output at each
output port. Three different types of data can be output, data frame, status,
and timestamp. The status information is of type double and is identical to the
return value of function CANPC_read_rcv_data(…), described in the Softing
user manual. Refer to the manual for more information. The timestamp
information is of type double and outputs the latest time at which a
CAN message with the corresponding identifier was received. This time
information in seconds (with a resolution of 1 microsecond) can be used to
implement time-out logic within your model.
The pop-up menu lets you select the output information output at each output
port of the block. If you select Data, each output port signal is a scalar only. If
you select Data - Status, each output port signal is a vector with two elements
in which the first element contains the data frame and the second element the
status information. If you select Data - Status - Timestamp, each output port
signal is a vector with three elements in which the first element contains the
data frame, the second element the status information, and the third element
the timestamp.
Generate interrupts — Defines whether the CAN messages defined in this
instance of the block initiate an interrupt from the CAN board each time they
are received. If selected, you can use CAN messages to control model (target
application) execution.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Receive block is executed
during a model (target application) run.

4-12
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Philips PCA 82C200 CAN Controller

You can use as many instances of the Receive block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block with different sample times, you
can retrieve CAN messages at different rates. Or you can use multiple
instances to structure your model more efficiently.

4-13
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527
CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with piggyback
modules. The Intel 82527 chip is used as the CAN controller in this
configuration and supports both standard and extended identifier ranges in
parallel. The driver block set for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block
library in the group CAN/Softing.

The second block, CAN-AC2-ISA Intel527, contains the three available CAN
blocks: Setup, Send, and Receive.

4-14
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527 CAN Controller

Setup Driver Block

The Setup block defines general settings of the installed CAN board. Because
the CAN driver blocks for this board only supports a single physical board for
each target system, this block can only be used once (one instance) in a model.

4-15
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN 1 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), the value User defined can be selected.
In this case, use the CAN 1 - user-defined baud rate parameter to provide the
four values for the timing information. The vector elements have the following
meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), the value User defined can be selected.
In this case, use CAN 1 - user-defined baud rate parameter the four values for
the timing information. The vector elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

4-16
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527 CAN Controller

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
Initialization command structure and Termination — Define CAN
messages sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block.
Memory base address — Defines the memory base address of the board. The
address range used by the board must be set by hardware jumpers on the board
itself. Refer to the Softing user manual on how to set the various address
ranges. The setting in the dialog box must correspond to the jumper setting;
otherwise the board cannot be accessed. The available address ranges (memory
base address) in the pop-up menu are those supported by the board. Because
the xPC Target kernel only reserves a subrange (C0000 to DC000) of the
640 KB to 1 MB address range for memory-mapped devices, the valid settings
when used within a xPC Target system only are
1 (16k): D0000-D3FFF
2 (16k): D4000-D7FFF

The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of hardware jumpers. Refer to the Softing user manual on how to set the
jumpers. Both CAN ports must be terminated properly when you use the
loop-back model provided to test the board and drivers.

4-17
4 CAN I/O Support

Send Driver Block

The Send driver block transmits data to a CAN network from within a block
model.

CAN port — Selects the CAN port to which the CAN message is sent.
CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages sent
by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard and
extended identifier ranges, you must use at least two instances of this block,
each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages sent by this block.
It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of either standard or
extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between 0 and 2031
29
for standard identifiers or 0 and 2 -1 for extended identifiers. The number of
identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board cannot exceed
200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The number of
elements defined here also defines the number of input ports of the block. The
block icon displays the selected identifier at each input port. Each input port
accepts the data frame to be sent along with the CAN message. The signal

4-18
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527 CAN Controller

entering each input port must be a scalar of type double representing the
maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Data frame sizes — Defines the data frame size for each identifier (CAN
message) in bytes. It must be a row vector where the elements define a set of
data frame sizes. Each element must be in the range between 1 and 8. If the
data frame sizes for all identifiers defined in the Identifiers parameter must
be the same, you can provide the size as a scalar only and scalar expansion
applies. If the sizes are different for at least two identifiers (CAN messages),
you can provide one size element for each identifier defined in the Identifiers
parameter. Therefore the length of the two vectors must be the same.
Show status: Output ports — Enables status output ports for each identifier
(CAN message). If the check box is checked, the block shows as many output
ports as input ports. The data type of each output port is a double and the value
is identical to the return argument of function CANPC_write_object(…),
described in the Softing user manual. Refer to the manual for more
information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Send block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can send CAN messages at
different sample times. Or you can use multiple instances to structure your
model more efficiently.

4-19
4 CAN I/O Support

Receive Driver Block

The Receive driver block retrieves data from a CAN network to be used within
a block model.

CAN port — Selects the CAN port from which to retrieve the CAN messages.
CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages
retrieved by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard
and extended identifier ranges, you must use at least two instances of this
block, each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages retrieved by this
block. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of either
standard or extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between
29
0 and 2031 for standard identifiers or 0 and 2 - 1 for extended identifiers.
The number of identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board
cannot exceed 200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The
number of elements defined here also defines the number of output ports of the
block. The block icon displays the selected identifier at each output port. Each
output port outputs the data frame being retrieved along with the CAN

4-20
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2 (ISA) with Intel 82527 CAN Controller

message. The signal leaving each output port is a scalar of type double
representing the maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Output port options — Defines the type of retrieved data output at each
output port. Three different types of data can be output, data frame, status,
and timestamp. The status information is of type double and is identical to the
return value of function CANPC_read_rcv_data(…), described in the Softing
user manual. Refer to the manual for more information. The timestamp
information is of type double and outputs the latest time at which a
CAN message with the corresponding identifier was received. This time
information in seconds (with a resolution of 1 microsecond) can be used to
implement time-out logic within your model.
The pop-up menu lets you select the output information output at each output
port of the block. If you select Data, each output port signal is a scalar only. If
you select Data - Status, each output port signal is a vector with two elements
in which the first element contains the data frame and the second element the
status information. If you select Data - Status - Timestamp, each output port
signal is a vector with three elements in which the first element contains the
data frame, the second element the status information, and the third element
the timestamp.
Generate interrupts — Defines whether the CAN messages defined in this
instance of the block initiate an interrupt from the CAN board each time they
are received. If selected, you can use CAN messages to control model (target
application) execution.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Receive block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can send CAN messages at
different sample times. Or you can use multiple instances to structure your
model more efficiently.

4-21
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips

SJA1000 CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2-PCI. The Philips
SJA1000 chip is used as the CAN controller in this configuration and supports
both standard and extended identifier ranges in parallel. The driver block set
for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block library in the group
CAN/Softing.

The third block group, CAN-AC2-PCI SJA 1000, contains the three available
CAN blocks: Setup, Send, and Receive, plus a FIFO Mode block, which is
discussed in Chapter 5, “CAN I/O Support for FIFO.”

4-22
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Setup Driver Block

The Setup block defines general settings of the installed CAN boards. The CAN
driver blocks for this board support up to three boards for each target system,
making up to six CAN ports available. For each board in the target system, you
must use exactly one Setup driver block.

4-23
4 CAN I/O Support

Board — Defines the board being accessed by this driver block instance. If
multiple boards are present in the target PC, you can use the board number
(1…3) to differentiate the boards. The physical board referenced by the board
number depends on the PCI Slot parameter. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
CAN 1 - physical bus — Defines the physical CAN bus type of CAN port 1. In
the board’s standard hardware configuration, only high-speed CAN is
supported. By extending the board with low-speed CAN piggyback modules,
you can also select low-speed CAN as the physical bus. Do not change this value
to low-speed if no module is present for the corresponding CAN port. If the
module is present (see the Softing user manual on how to install the modules),
you can select between high-speed and low-speed CAN here.

4-24
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

CAN 1- baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), you can select the value User defined.
In this case, you use the CAN 1 - user defined baud rate parameter to provide
the four values for the timing information. The vector elements have the
following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 - physical bus — Defines the physical CAN bus type of CAN port 2. In
the board’s standard hardware configuration, only high-speed CAN is
supported. By extending the board with lows-peed CAN piggyback modules,
you can also select low-speed CAN as the physical bus. Do not set this value
should to low-speed if no module is present for the corresponding CAN port. If
the module is present (see the Softing user manual on how to install the
modules), you can select between high-speed and low-speed CAN here.
CAN 2 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 2. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), the value User defined can be selected.
In this case, you can use the CAN 2 - user defined baud rate parameter to
provide the four values for the timing information. The vector elements have
the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
Initialization command structure and Termination — Defines CAN
messages sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block.
PCI slot (-1: autosearch) — Defines the PCI slot in which the referenced board
(board number) resides. If only one board is present in the target system, set
the value for this control to -1 (autosearch). This ensures that the xPC Target
kernel automatically finds the board regardless of the PCI slot it is plugged
into. If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC,
enter the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. Use the xPC Target

4-25
4 CAN I/O Support

function getxpcpci to query the target system for installed PCI boards and the
PCI slots they are plugged into. For more information see help getxpcpci.
The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of DIP switches at the rear panel. Refer to the Softing user manual on
how to set the DIP switches. Both CAN ports must be terminated properly
when you use the loop-back model provided to test the board and drivers.

Send Driver Block

The Send driver block transmits data to a CAN network from within a block
model.

Board — Defines the board used to send out the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number
see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
CAN port — Selects the CAN port to which the CAN message is sent.

4-26
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages sent
by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard and
extended identifier ranges, you must use at least two instances of this block,
each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages sent by this block.
It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of either standard or
extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between 0 and 2031
29
for standard identifiers or 0 and 2 -1 for extended identifiers. The number of
identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board cannot exceed
200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The number of
elements defined here also define the number of input ports of the block. The
block icon displays the selected identifier at each input port. Each input port
accepts the data frame to be sent along with the CAN message. The signal
entering each input port must be a scalar of type double representing the
maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Data frame sizes — Defines the data frame size for each identifier (CAN
message) in bytes. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of
data frame sizes. Each element must be in the range between 1 and 8. If the
data frame sizes for all identifiers defined in the control above must be the
same, you can provide the size as a scalar only and scalar expansion applies. If
the sizes are different for at least two identifiers (CAN messages), you must
provide one size element for each identifier defined in the Identifiers
parameter. Therefore the lengths of the two vectors must be the same.
Show status output ports — Enables status output ports for each identifier
(CAN message). If the check box is checked the block shows as many output
ports as input ports. The data type of each output port is a double and the value
is identical to the return argument of function CANPC_write_object(…),
described in the Softing user manual. Refer to the manual for more
information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Send block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can send CAN messages at
different sample times. Or you can use multiple instances to structure your
model more efficiently.

4-27
4 CAN I/O Support

Receive Driver Block

The Receive driver block retrieves data from a CAN network to be used within
a block model. You can use as many instances of the Receive block in the model
as needed.

Board — Defines the board the CAN messages defined by this block instance
are retrieved from. For more information about the meaning of the board
number, see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present
in the target system, select board number 1.
CAN port — Selects the CAN port from which the CAN messages are retrieved.
CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages
retrieved by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard
and extended identifier ranges, you must use at least two instances of this
block, each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages retrieved by this
block. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of either
standard or extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between

4-28
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

0 and 2031 for standard identifiers or 0 and 229 - 1 for extended identifiers. The
number of identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board
cannot exceed 200 (limitation of the firmware’s dynamic object mode). The
number of elements defined here also defines the number of output ports of the
block. The block icon displays the selected identifier at each output port. Each
output port outputs the data frame being retrieved along with the CAN
message. The signal leaving each output port is a scalar of type double
representing the maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Output port options — Defines the type of retrieved data output at each
output port. Three different types of data can be output, data frame, status,
and timestamp. The status information is of type double and is identical to the
return value of function CANPC_read_rcv_data (…), described in the Softing
user manual. Refer to the manual for more information. The timestamp
information is of type double and outputs the latest time at which a CAN
message with the corresponding identifier was received. This time information
in seconds (with a resolution of 1 microsecond) can be used to implement
time-out logic within your model. The pop-up menu lets you select the output
information at each output port of the block. If you select Data, each output port
signal is a scalar only. If you select Data - Status, each output port signal is
a vector with two elements, in which the first element contains the data frame
and the second element the status information. If you select Data - Status -
Timestamp, each output port signal is a vector with three elements, in which
the first element contains the data frame, the second element the status
information, and the third element the timestamp.
Generate interrupts — Defines whether the CAN messages defined in this
instance of the block will initiate an interrupt from the CAN board each time
they are received. If selected, you can use CAN messages to control model
(target application) execution.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Send block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can send CAN messages at
different sample times. Or you can use multiple instances to structure your
model more efficiently.

4-29
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with

Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104). The
Philips SJA1000 chip is used as the CAN controller in this configuration and
supports both standard and extended identifier ranges in parallel. The driver
block set for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block library in the group
CAN/Softing.

The fourth block group, CAN-AC2-104 SJA 1000, contains the three available
CAN blocks: Setup, Send, and Receive, plus a FIFO Mode block, which is
discussed in Chapter 5, “CAN I/O Support for FIFO.”

4-30
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Setup Driver Block

The Setup block defines general settings of the stacked CAN boards. The CAN
driver blocks for this board support up to three boards for each target system,
making up to six CAN ports available. For each board in the target system, you
must use exactly one Setup driver block.

4-31
4 CAN I/O Support

Board — Defines the board being accessed by this driver block instance. If
multiple boards are present in the target PC, you can use the board number
(1…3) to differentiate the boards. The physical board referenced by the board
number depends on the PCI Slot parameter. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1. The physical board referenced by the
board number depends on the I/O base address parameter.
CAN 1 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), you can select the value User defined.
In this case, use the CAN 1 - user defined baud rate parameter to provide the
four values for the timing information. The vector elements have the following
meanings:

4-32
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,

Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 2. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), you can select the value User defined.
In this case, use the CAN 2 - user defined baud rate parameter to provide the
four values for the timing information. The vector elements have the following
meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
Initialization command structure and Termination — Define CAN
messages sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block.
I/O base address — Defines the I/O base address of the board to be accessed
by this block instance. The I/O base address is given by the DIP switch setting
on the board itself. The I/O address range is 3 bytes and is mainly used to
transfer the memory base address the board should use. See the Softing user
manual for this board to set the I/O base address. The I/O base address entered
in this control must correspond with the DIP switch setting on the board. If
more than one board is present in the target system, a different I/O base
address must be entered for each board. In this case the I/O base address itself
defines which board is referenced by which board number.
Memory base address — Defines the memory base address of the board to be
accessed by this block instance. The memory base address is a software setting
only (no corresponding DIP switch is found on the board). The memory address
range is 4 KB. If more than one board is present in the target system, a
different memory base address must be entered for each board. You must make
sure that the defined address ranges do not overlap. Because the xPC Target
kernel only reserves a subset of the address range between 640 KB and 1 MB
for memory mapped devices, the address ranges must lie within the following
range:
C0000 - DC000

4-33
4 CAN I/O Support

The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of jumpers found on the board. Refer to the board user manual for how
the DIP switches must be set. Both CAN ports must be terminated properly
when you use the loop-back model provided to test the board and drivers.
Interrupt line — Selects an interrupt line from the list.

Send Driver Block

The Send driver block transmits data to a CAN network from within a block
model. You can define up to 200 send objects for standard and extended
identifiers for each CAN channel.

Board — Defines the board to use to send the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number,
see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
CAN Port — Selects the CAN port to send the CAN message.

4-34
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages sent
by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard and
extended identifier ranges, you must use at least two instances of this block,
each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Defines the identifiers of the CAN messages sent by this block.
It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of either standard or
extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between 0 and 2031
for standard identifiers or 0 and 229 - 1 for extended identifiers. The number of
identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board cannot exceed
200. The number of elements defined also defines the number of input ports of
the block. The block icon displays the selected identifier at each input port.
Each input port accepts the data frame to be sent along with the CAN message.
The signal entering each input port must be a scalar of type double
representing the maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data frame.
Data frame sizes — Defines the data frame size for each identifier (CAN
message) in bytes. It must be a row vector in which the elements define a set of
data frame sizes. Each element must be in the range between 1 and 8. If the
data frame sizes for all identifiers defined in the preceding control must be the
same, you can provide the size as a scalar only and scalar expansion applies. If
the sizes are different for at least two identifiers (CAN messages), one size
element must be provided for each identifier specified in the Identifiers
control. Therefore the lengths of the two vectors must be the same.
Show status output ports — Enables status output ports for each identifier
(CAN message). If the check box is selected, the block shows as many output
ports as input ports. The data type of each output port is a double and the value
is identical to the return argument of function CANPC_write_object(…),
described in the Softing user manual. Refer to the manual for more
information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Send block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can define different sample
times at which CAN messages are sent out. Or you can use multiple instances
to structure your model more efficiently.

4-35
4 CAN I/O Support

Receive Driver Block

The Receive driver block retrieves data from a CAN network to be used within
a block model. You can use as many instances of the Receive block in the model
as needed.

Board — Defines the board from which the CAN messages defined by this
block instance are to be retrieved. For more information about the meaning of
the board number, see the Setup driver block. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
CAN Port — Selects the CAN port from which to retrieve the CAN message.
CAN identifier range — Selects the identifier range of the CAN messages
retrieved by this block instance. If an application makes use of mixed standard
and extended identifier ranges, at least two instances of this block must be
used, each defining the corresponding identifier range.
Identifiers — Specifies the identifiers of the CAN messages retrieved by this
block. It must be a row vector where the elements define a set of either
standard or extended identifiers. Each element must be in the range between

4-36
 CAN Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

0 and 2031 for standard identifiers, or 0 and 229 - 1 for extended identifiers.
The number of identifiers for each CAN port in a model per physical CAN board
cannot exceed 200. The number of elements defined here defines the number of
output ports of the block. The block icon displays the selected identifier at each
output port. Each output port outputs the data frame being retrieved along
with the CAN message. The signal leaving each output port is a scalar of type
double representing the maximum size of 8 bytes of a CAN message data
frame.
Output port options — Defines the type of retrieved data output at each
output port. Three different types of data can be output: data frame, status,
and timestamp. The status information is of type double and is identical to the
return value of function CANPC_read_rcv_data(…), described in the Softing
user manual. Refer to the manual for more information. The timestamp
information is of type double and outputs the most recent time at which a CAN
message with the corresponding identifier was received. This time information
in seconds (with a resolution of 1 microsecond) can be used to implement
time-out logic within your model.
The pop-up menu lets you select the output information output at each output
port of the block. If you select Data, each output port signal is a scalar only. If
you select Data-Status, each output port signal is a vector with two elements,
in which the first element contains the data frame and the second element the
status information. If you select Data-Status-Timestamp, each output port
signal is a vector with three elements, in which the first element contains the
data frame, the second element the status information, and the third element
the timestamp.
Generate interrupts — Defines whether the CAN messages defined in this
instance of the block initiate an interrupt from the CAN board each time they
are received. If selected, you can use CAN messages to control model (target
application) execution.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the Send block is executed
during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the Receive block in the model as needed. For
example, by using two instances of the block, you can define different sample
times at which CAN messages are retrieved. Or you can use multiple instances
to structure your model more efficiently. You can define up to 200 receive
objects for standard and extended identifiers for each CAN channel.

4-37
4 CAN I/O Support

Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames

CAN data frames have a maximum size of 8 bytes (64 bits). For the CAN driver
blocks found in the xPC Target I/O block library, Simulink signals of data type
double are used to propagate data frames as an entity. But in most applications
the data frame content does not consist of 64-bit floating point values; instead
they are constructed from one or more smaller data type entities such as signed
and unsigned integers of various size.
To simplify the construction and extraction of data frames for the user, the xPC
Target I/O library contains two utility blocks (found in subgroup CAN/Utilities)
that allow bit-packing (construction) and bit-unpacking (extraction) of data
frames in a very flexible way.

The main purpose of the two blocks is to be used in conjunction with CAN Send
and Receive driver blocks, but they can be used as well for other types of data
manipulation. Their functionality is entirely independent of any CAN driver
blocks or CAN library.

4-38
 Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames

CAN Bit-Packing Block

This block constructs CAN data frames, and its output port is normally
connected to an input port of a CAN Send driver block. The block has one
output port of data type double (a scalar), which represents the data frame
entity constructed by the signals entering the block at its input ports. The
number of input ports and the data type of each input port depend on the
setting in the block’s dialog box.

The dialog box contains the Bit Patterns parameter, which lets you define the
bit patterns in a flexible way. The data type entered in the control must be a
MATLAB cell array vector. The number of elements in the cell array define the
number of input ports shown by this block instance. The cell array elements
must be of type double array and define the position of each bit of the incoming
value (data typed input port) in the outgoing double value (data frame).
From a data type perspective (input ports), the block behaves like a Simulink
Sink block, and therefore the data types of the input ports are inherited from
the driving blocks.
The sample time of the block is also inherited from the driving blocks.
Therefore no explicit sample time must be provided in the block’s dialog box.
The functionality of the block is best explained by means of an example.

4-39
4 CAN I/O Support

Assume that a node on the CAN network needs to receive a CAN message with
identifier 156 having the following data frame content. The data frame must be
6 bytes long.

Byte 0 Function class of type uint8

Byte 1 Function subclass of type uint8 with reversed
bit order
Byte 2 Reserved, all bits must be 1
Byte 3 Bit 0 must be 0, Bit 1 must be a boolean (flag),
bits 2 to 7 must be bit 2 to 7 of an incoming int8
value (control)
Byte 4 and 5 Value of type int16

The bit pattern cell array, which bit-packs the data frame according to the
above specification, can look as follows:
{ [0:7] , [15:-1:8] , [16:23] , [25] , [-1,-1,26:31] , [32:47] }

And the Simulink model simulating the needed behavior would be as shown.

4-40
 Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames

Analyze the model.

The first input is the function class of type uint8, which has an example value
of 112. This value becomes byte 0 (bits 0 to 7) of the data frame. Therefore the
first bit (element 1 of double array [0:7]) gets bit 0 of the data frame, the second
bit 1, and so on. It is easiest to define this mapping by the MATLAB colon
operator (:).
The second input is the function subclass of type uint8, which has an example
value of 23. This value becomes byte 1 (bits 8:15) of the data frame but in
reversed bit order. Therefore the first bit (element 1 of double array [15:-1:8])
gets bit 15, the second bit 14, and so on. It is easiest to define this mapping by
the MATLAB colon operator (:) and an increment of -1.
The third input is only necessary because the reserved byte 2 must have all bits
set to 1. If a bit position in the outgoing data frame is not referenced by a bit
pattern array element, the bit is 0 by default, but there is no way to set them

4-41
4 CAN I/O Support

to 1 as the default. Therefore a uint8 constant with value 255 must be brought
in externally. The constant 255 must get to bit position 16 to 23 (byte 2) of the
outgoing data frame.
Because bit 0 of data frame byte 3 (bit 24) must be 0, and 0 is the default bit
value if not referenced by a bit pattern array element, no explicit action is
taken here.
The fourth input is the flag of type Boolean, which has an example value of 1.
This value must become bit 1 of byte 3 (bit 25) of the data frame. Therefore the
single bit (element 1 of double array [25]) must get bit 25 of the data frame.
The fifth input is the control of type int8, which has an example value of 121.
But only bits 2 to 7 must be mapped into the outgoing data frame or, in other
words, bits 0 and 1 must be thrown away. Because indexing of incoming values
always starts with the first bit (bit 0), a special indexing value (-1) must be used
to skip bit 0 and 1 of the incoming int8 value. Bits 2 to 7 are directly mapped
to bits 2 to 7 of byte 3 (bits 26 to 31) of the outgoing data frame. This leads to
the following bit pattern: [-1,-1,26:31].
The sixth input is the value of type int16, which has an example value of
-12270. This value must become byte 4 and 5 (bits 32 to 47) of the outgoing data
frame. Therefore the first bit (element 1 of double array [32:47]) must get bit
32 of the data frame, the second bit 33, and so on. It is easiest to define this
mapping by the MATLAB colon operator (:).
The output of the block then consists of a double value representing the packed
data types within the first six bytes. The last two bytes are zero. This means
that even in the case where less than eight bytes are significant, the CAN data
frame is always represented by a double value (eight bytes). The value of the
constructed floating-point double does not have any particular meaning but
you still see it with a numerical display.

4-42
 Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames

The data frame is then propagated to the CAN Send driver block and is sent as
part of a CAN message having identifier 156. In the Send block’s dialog box, the
data frame size is defined as 6 bytes. This ensures that only the first six bytes
of the incoming double value are transmitted as part of the CAN message.

CAN Bit-Unpacking Block

This block is used to extract CAN data frames, and its input port is normally
connected to an output port of a CAN Receive driver block. The block has one
input port of data type double (a scalar), which represents the data frame
entity from which the signals are extracted and leaving the block at its output
ports. The number of output ports and the data type of each output port depend
on the settings in the block’s dialog box.

4-43
4 CAN I/O Support

The dialog box contains two controls (edit fields).

The dialog box contains the Bit Patterns parameter, which lets you define the
bit patterns in a flexible way. The data type entered in the control must be a
MATLAB cell array vector. The number of elements in the cell array define the
number of input ports shown by this block instance. The cell array elements
must be of type double array and define the position of each bit of the incoming
value (data typed output port) in the incoming double value (data frame).
From a data type perspective (output ports), the block behaves like a Simulink
Source block, and therefore the data types of the output ports must be defined
in the second control (edit field). The data type entered in that control must be
a MATLAB cell array vector of the same length as the bit pattern cell array.
The cell array elements must be of type char and define the data type of the
corresponding output port. The following values are supported:
boolean, int8, uint8, int16, uint16, int32, uint32

The sample time of the block is inherited from the driving block. Therefore no
explicit sample time need be provided in the block’s dialog box.
Note that if you unpack the data frame into a signed type (int8, int 16, or int
32), the block performs sign extension as necessary. For example, if the bit
pattern is [0:4], and the data type is int8, you are extracting 5 bits into an 8
bit wide signed type. In this case, bits 5, 6, and 7 are the same as bit 4, resulting
in the proper sign extension. This functionality enables you to pack and unpack

4-44
 Constructing and Extracting CAN Data Frames

negative numbers without losing accuracy. In the preceding example, you can
pack and unpack numbers in the range [-16 : 15] (a fictitious int5 type).
The functionality of the block is easiest explained by means of an example. The
same example as used above demonstrates the functionality of the bit-packing
block. But in this case, the data frame is sent by an external CAN node and is
received by the target application running on an xPC Target system. Therefore
the bit-unpacking block is used to extract the various data fields from the
entire data frame. Because the bit pattern definitions of the packing and
unpacking block are symmetric, the bit pattern definition could look exactly the
same. There is one simple optimization possible: You do not need to extract
byte 2 (reserved area), because its content is known. The bit pattern edit field
can therefore look as follows:
{ [0:7] , [15:-1:8] , [25] , [-1,-1,26:31] , [32:47] }

and the data type edit field as

{ 'uint8' , 'uint8' , 'boolean' , 'int8' , 'int16' }

4-45
4 CAN I/O Support

This leads to the following Simulink model.

In many cases it makes sense to test the proper bit-packing and bit-unpacking
operations in a Simulink model (simulation) before building the target
application. Both blocks work the same way either in Simulink or the
generated code. By combining the two models shown so far, a third model
emerges that can be used to simulate the behavior.

4-46
 Detecting Time-Outs When Receiving CAN Messages

Detecting Time-Outs When Receiving CAN Messages

The Receive driver blocks for all CAN boards allow you to output the
timestamp at which the latest corresponding CAN message was received. This
information can be used to detect whether another CAN node is still active and
therefore is sending CAN messages or is no longer active and special action
must be taken. Assume that a CAN message is expected from another CAN
node every 2 milliseconds. If no new message is received within 10
milliseconds, the other CAN node is considered faulty, and the Simulink model
(target application) must proceed accordingly.
The CAN blockset in the xPC Target I/O block library provides a utility block
called CAN Timeout Detection. This is a simple graphical subsystem (inspect
it by looking under its mask) that uses the timestamp information to calculate
the time-out condition.
A Simulink model using this block in conjunction with a Receive block could
look as follows:

4-47
4 CAN I/O Support

CAN Timeout Detection Block

The CAN Timeout Detection block uses the timestamp information to calculate
the time-out condition. For examples of this block usage, see

• “Detecting Time-Outs When Receiving CAN Messages” on page 4-47 —

Detecting time-outs example
• xpccanpci — Loop-back example for the CAN-AC2-PCI board
• xpccanpc104 — Loop-back example for the CAN-AC2-104 board

The dialog box of the CAN Timeout Detection block has one edit field.
Timeout — Specify the time-out value, in seconds. The output of the block is:

• 0, if no time-out has been detected

• 1, if a time-out has been detected

4-48
 Model Execution Driven by CAN Messages (Interrupt Capability of CAN Receive Blocks)

Model Execution Driven by CAN Messages (Interrupt

Capability of CAN Receive Blocks)
In certain applications, the model (target application) execution is driven by
the pace of an incoming CAN message. The standard behavior of the xPC
Target kernel is to drive the model (target application) in time monotonic
fashion (time interrupt). However, the driving interrupt can be replaced by any
other hardware interrupt. Because the three supported CAN boards permit the
firing of a hardware interrupt upon reception of a specific CAN message, you
can replace the timer interrupt line in the kernel by the interrupt line assigned
to a CAN board. This leads to a CAN-message-driven execution of the target
application.
To set this up, two independent steps are necessary:

1 Replace the timer interrupt line in the kernel setup with the board’s
hardware interrupt line.

2 Properly set up the CAN Setup and CAN Receive blocks.

Both steps are slightly different for each of the three supported CAN boards.
Therefore the two steps are explained for each board type below.

CAN-AC2 (ISA)
The CAN-AC2 is an ISA board, and the hardware interrupt line is set by means
of hardware jumpers on the board. Refer to the Softing user manual for the
board on how to set a certain interrupt line. Select an interrupt line that is not
used by any other hardware device in the xPC Target system (for example by
the Ethernet card).

1 In the Simulink window, and from the Tools menu, point to Real-Time
Workshop, and then click Options.

The Configuration Parameters dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Real-Time Workshop node.

3 Ensure that in the Target selection section, the RTW system target file
field is set to xpctarget.tlc.

4-49
4 CAN I/O Support

4 Select the xPC Target options node.

5 In the Real-time interrupt source field, select the interrupt line number
that you have set using the jumpers on the board.

6 Click OK and save the model.

7 Open the dialog box of the CAN Receive block in the model that defines the
CAN message (identifier) to be used to fire the interrupt. Select the
Generate interrupts check box. Selecting this box declares all CAN
messages defined in this Receive block instance through their identifiers as
messages that fire an interrupt. In other words, it is not possible to define a
single CAN message within the set of defined identifiers to be the only one
to fire an interrupt. In most cases only the reception of one specific message
is used to drive the application execution. Therefore use at least two
instances of the Receive block. One to receive the CAN message that drives
the execution (Generate Interrupts selected) and the other for all other
normal CAN messages to be received (Generate Interrupts cleared).

CAN-AC2-PCI
The CAN-AC2 is a PCI board, and the hardware interrupt line is automatically
assigned by the PCI BIOS during the initialization of the target system. Use
the xPC Target function getxpcpci (see help getxpcpci) at the MATLAB
command prompt to query the target system for installed PCI devices and the
assigned resources. Write down the interrupt line number assigned to the
CAN-AC2-PCI board.

1 In the Simulink window, and from the Tools menu, point to Real-Time
Workshop, and then click Options.

The Configuration Parameters dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Real-Time Workshop node.

3 Ensure that in the Target selection section, the RTW system target file
field is set to xpctarget.tlc.

4 Select the xPC Target options node.

4-50
 Model Execution Driven by CAN Messages (Interrupt Capability of CAN Receive Blocks)

5 In the Real-time interrupt source field, select the interrupt line number
that you retrieved with the getxpcpci command.

6 Click OK and save the model.

7 Open the dialog box of the CAN Receive block in the model that defines the
CAN message (identifier) to be used to fire the interrupt. Select the
Generate interrupts check box. Selecting this box declares all CAN
messages defined in this Receive block instance through their identifiers as
messages that fire an interrupt. In other words, it is not possible to define a
single CAN message within the set of defined identifiers to be the only one
to fire an interrupt. In most cases only the reception of one specific message
is used to drive the application execution. Therefore use at least two
instances of the Receive block. One to receive the CAN message that drives
the execution (Generate Interrupts selected) and the other for all other
normal CAN messages to be received (Generate Interrupts cleared).

CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104)
The CAN-AC2-104 is an ISA board (PC/104), and the hardware interrupt line
is set by means of a software setting within the CAN Setup driver block. Note
a free interrupt line that is not used by any other hardware device in the xPC
target system (for example by the Ethernet card).

1 In the Simulink window, and from the Tools menu, point to Real-Time
Workshop, and then click Options.

The Configuration Parameters dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Real-Time Workshop node.

3 Ensure that in the Target selection section, the RTW system target file
field is set to xpctarget.tlc.

4 Select the xPC Target options node.

5 In the Real-time interrupt source field, select the free interrupt line
number that you chose.

6 Click OK and save the model.

4-51
4 CAN I/O Support

7 In the model open the dialog box of the CAN Setup block for the
CAN-AC2-104 board. Select the chosen interrupt line in the Interrupt Line
pop-up menu and close the dialog box. Open the dialog box of the CAN
Receive block in the model that defines the CAN message (identifier) to be
used to fire the interrupt. Select the Generate interrupts check box.
Selecting this box declares all CAN messages defined in this Receive block
instance through their identifiers as messages that fire an interrupt. In
other words, it is not possible to define a single CAN message within the set
of defined identifiers to be the only one to fire an interrupt. In most cases
only the reception of one specific message is used to drive the application
execution. Therefore use at least two instances of the Receive block. One to
receive the CAN message that drives the execution (Generate Interrupts
selected) and the other for all other normal CAN messages to be received
(Generate Interrupts cleared).

After you complete these two steps, you are ready to build the model. After the
downloading has succeeded and the target application execution has been
started, the execution is now driven by the selected CAN messages. The
execution time information displayed on the target screen is now directly
dependent on the reception of the corresponding message. If no message is
received the time does not advance. You should ensure that the corresponding
CAN message on the other CAN node is only generated if the xPC target
application is running, otherwise unexpected interrupt messages might be
displayed on the target screen.

4-52
 Defining Initialization and Termination CAN Messages

Defining Initialization and Termination CAN Messages

The CAN Setup driver blocks for all supported CAN boards allow the definition
of CAN messages to be sent during initialization and termination of the target
application (once at the beginning of each application run and once before an
application run is stopped). The main purpose for sending these messages is to
initialize or terminate other CAN nodes on the network. This is the case, for
example, for CANOpen or DeviceNet nodes. Even if xPC Target does not
provide direct support of those CAN application layers, communication with
those nodes can usually be done over standard CAN messages as long as the
nodes have been properly initialized. The initialization and termination fields
of the Setup blocks are intended for this purpose.
You define the initialization and termination CAN messages using MATLAB
struct arrays with CAN specific field names. This is the same concept as used
for the RS-232, GPIB, and general Counter driver blocks found in the xPC
Target I/O library. Refer to those driver blocks and their help for additional
information about this basic concept.
The CAN Setup block-specific field names are the following:
Port — Selects the CAN port over which the message is sent. Valid values are
either 1 or 2 (double).
Type — Defines whether the message to be sent is of type standard or
extended. Valid values are either 'Standard' or 'Extended' (strings).
Identifier — Defines the identifier of the message. The value (scalar) itself
must be in the corresponding identifier range (standard or extended).
Data — Defines the data frame to be sent out along with the CAN message. The
value must be a row vector of type double with a maximum length of 8. Each
element of the vector defines one byte, where the first element defines the data
for byte 0 and the eighth element the data for byte 7. Each element can have a
value between 0 and 255 (decimal). The data frame size is defined by the length
of the row vector.
Pause — Defines the amount of time in seconds the Setup block waits after this
message has been sent and before the next message defined in the struct array
is parsed and sent. Valid values are between 0 and 0.05 seconds. Some CAN
nodes need some time to settle before they can accept the next message,
especially when the message just received puts the node in a new operational
mode. Use this field to define those necessary idle times.

4-53
4 CAN I/O Support

Example
Consider an A/D converter module with a CANOpen interface. After the node
is powered up, the module is in preoperational mode, which is common for
CANOpen nodes. At least two initialization messages must be sent to the node
to make the module fully operational.
The first message puts the node from preoperational into operational mode.
The second message programs the module so that each time the converted A/D
value differs by more than 10 mV from the former conversion, a CAN message
is automatically sent, with the converted value as the data frame.
After the target application starts and the node is properly initialized, the node
automatically sends a CAN message, which the xPC target application receives
and then processes.
Before the target application execution is actually stopped, the module (node)
must be returned to preoperational mode. You do this by sending out one
corresponding termination message.
The initialization and termination message struct for this example could look
as follows:
% put node into operational mode
init(1).port=1;
init(1).type='Standard';
init(1).identifier=1536+11;
init(1).data=[hex2dec('22'),hex2dec('23'),hex2dec('64'),hex2dec(
'00'),hex2dec('01')];
init(1).pause=0.02;

% program node to send CAN messages with converted A/D values

automatically
init(2).port=1;
init(2).type='Standard';
init(2).identifier=0;
init(2).data=[hex2dec('01'),11];
init(2).pause=0;

% put node back into preoperational mode

term(1).port=1;
term(1).type='Standard';

4-54
 CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices

CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices

xPC Target CAN-AC2 supports CAN specification 2.0a and 2.0b but this does
not generally include the CANopen protocol on driver level. Nevertheless it is
possible to access CANopen devices by the CAN-AC2 drivers in a general way.
CANopen knows two types of messages i.e. SDO and PDO. SDOs are used to
setup or initialize a CANopen device for a certain behavior. PDOs are messages
that contain real-time data (i.e. converted A/D values from a analog input
device) and are CAN-type messages with no CANopen object, index, and
subindex information.
xPC Target applications that have to access CANopen devices over the
CAN-AC2 drivers transmit SDOs during the initialization phase and the
termination phase of the driver. PDOs are sent or received during the
simulation phase of the driver.
Because SDOs and PDOs are regular CAN-messages the CAN-AC2 drivers
have to provide a way to transmit SDOs during the initialization and
termination phase of the CAN-AC2 set up driver block to initialize the different
CANopen devices in the network. This is done by providing a c-file within your
project directory that describes the SDO messages to send to setup and
terminate the CANopen device. During the compilation stage of the xPC Target
application (build-process) this c-file, which has to have the filename
CANAC2_setup.c, is then included into the setup driver.

This implementation has the advantage of accessing a specific CANopen device

without the need to have special driver blocks for this device. It is, therefore, a
general implementation but has the disadvantage that the user must be able
to provide the information (messages) to properly set up and terminate the
communication with a specific CANopen device. This information is provided
either by the CANopen device manufacturer or by the CAN-CIA association
(www.can-cia.de).
For an explanation of how to write the CANAC2_setup.c file for a specific
CANopen device, see the example below. In this example an analog input
device from Selectron (www.selectron.ch) with the name AIC711 is used to get
the A/D-converted values over the CAN-network into the xPC Target
application.

4-55
4 CAN I/O Support

Note CANopen initialization and termination is only supported if the

CAN-AC2 board is equipped with the Philips C200 controller for standard
identifiers.

Example: Accessing the AIC711 CANopen Device from Selectron

The AIC711 contains four analog input channels with a resolution of 12bits and
a minimal update-time (sample time) of 10ms.
As explained in earlier chapters, the CAN-AC2 drivers use the dynamic object
model to reach low latency times. Therefore the A/D values from the AIC711
have to be received in such a way that they are compatible to the object model
of the driver.
The AIC711 has to be seen as a CANopen server and the xPC Target CAN-AC2
drivers (the xPC Target application) as a CANopen client. The AIC711 offers
two ways of getting the converted A/D-values over the network:

• Synchronous
• Asynchronous

In the synchronous mode, the client transmits a remote frame to the server to
invoke an A/D-conversion of a specified channel. It then waits (poll) until the
converted value is received by an ordinary CAN data-message which will
contain the values. Synchronous mode leads to large latency times up to 20ms
(Tsmin=10ms). During this time period, the xPC Target gets stuck and this is
inacceptable.
In addition, the synchronous mode does not fit into the dynamic object model
implementation of the xPC Target CAN-drivers because remote frames have to
be transmitted.
In the asynchronous mode, the AIC711 sends PDOs automatically in a regular
manner to the client. A change in an analog input value invokes automatically
an A/D-conversion. After conversion, a PDO-message is constructed and sent
automatically to the client. This mode fits well into the object model of the
drivers. Therefore the CANopen devices should always be used in
asynchronous mode if used with xPC Target.

4-56
 CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices

Regarding the information in the AIC711 CANopen manual (provided by

Selectron), the following initialization messages (SDOs) and termination
messages (SDOs) must be invoked:

• Initialization phase — Enable global interrupts to enable asynchronous

mode (object 6423). Put device from preoperational mode into operational
mode (transmission of PDOs starts).
• Simulation phase — CAN-AC2 Receive block outputs the latest received
A/D values.
• Termination phase — Put device from operational mode into
preoperational mode (transmission of PDOs stops)
The node id of the AIC711 device is set over DIP-switches and, in this example,
it is assumed that the node id is set to 11 (decimal). The device is connected to
CAN-port 1 of the CAN-AC2-board.
Then the CANAC2_setup.c file could look as follows
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Number of initialization and termination messages
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
#define CANAC2_init_number2
#define CANAC2_term_number1
//#define DEBUG_CANAC2

// do not change the following four lines

#define CANAC2_setup_present
CANAC2_type CANAC2_init[CANAC2_init_number+1];
CANAC2_type CANAC2_term[CANAC2_term_number+1];
int CANAC2_counter;
//

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Identifier and constant section
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

#define AIC711_node_111
#define AIC711_sdo_base1536
#define MAS_boot 0

4-57
4 CAN I/O Support

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Initialization section
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

// AIC711 SDO object 6423: enable global interupts

CANAC2_init[0].port=1;
CANAC2_init[0].identifier=AIC711_sdo_base+AIC711_node_1;
CANAC2_init[0].data[0]=0x22;
CANAC2_init[0].data[1]=0x23;
CANAC2_init[0].data[2]=0x64;
CANAC2_init[0].data[3]=0x00;
CANAC2_init[0].data[4]=0x01;
CANAC2_init[0].no_bytes=5;
CANAC2_init[0].wait_ms=20;

// put AIC711_node_1 from pre-operational into operational state

CANAC2_init[1].port=1;
CANAC2_init[1].identifier=MAS_boot;
CANAC2_init[1].data[0]=0x01;
CANAC2_init[1].data[1]=AIC711_node_1;
CANAC2_init[1].no_bytes=2;
CANAC2_init[1].wait_ms=20;

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Termination section
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

// put AIC711_node_1 from operational into pre-operational state

CANAC2_term[0].port=1;
CANAC2_term[0].identifier=MAS_boot;
CANAC2_term[0].data[0]=0x80;
CANAC2_term[0].data[1]=AIC711_node_1;
CANAC2_term[0].no_bytes=2;
CANAC2_term[0].wait_ms=20;

As soon as this file is placed into your project directory and the xPC Target
application is rebuilt, the messages defined above will be sent during
initialization and termination phase of the Setup block.

4-58
 CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices

The Simulink model could look as follows

The Receive block will read continuously the object to which the AIC711 sends
the PDOs (i.e. the converted A/D-values).
Because the output of this block contains the 8 bytes of the received CAN-data
as a double value, a conversion block (AIC711conversion) is necessary to split
the 8 bytes (double) into 4 doubles (output signals) that represent the A/D value
in volts for each of the four analog input channels. The conversion is made
according to the data representation of object 6401. You use the CAN
bit-unpacking block from the CAN Utilities library. For example, in the CAN
bit-unpacking block, set the Data types parameter to four vectors of int16 data
types:
{'it16' 'int16' 'int16' 'int16'}

In the same block, set the Bit patterns parameter to

{[0:15] [16:31] [32:47] [48:63]}

You then need to multiply the output by the voltage range, which you should
already know. Note that you may need to convert the output to type double
first.

4-59
4 CAN I/O Support

The third channel is then stored with an outport block, which can be visualized
by the xPC Target scope functionality.
Because CAN-messages with id 0 (boot) and 1536+node_id (SDO) have to be
sent and CAN-messages with id 640+node_id (PDO) have to be received over
CAN-port 1, the dialog box of the Setup block must look as follows:

The Receive block receives the data (PDO) over CAN-message 640+node-i and
must look as follows:

4-60
 CAN-AC2 and CANopen Devices

If more than one CANopen device is connected to the network, the dialog boxes
of the Setup and Receive blocks and the CANAC2_setup.c file have to be
extended accordingly. If you need for-loops in the CANAC2_setup.c, use the
variable CANAC2_counter.
If an analog output device (or digital output device) is connected to the
network, you must drag an additional Send block into the model to send the
PDOs to the newly connected CANopen server.

4-61
4 CAN I/O Support

4-62
 5
CAN I/O Support for FIFO

This chapter includes the following sections:

Introduction (p. 5-2) This chapter describes the alternative First In First Out
(FIFO) CAN drivers provided with xPC Target.
CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the The driver blocks described here support the
CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN-AC2-PCI using FIFO mode.
CAN Controller (p. 5-6)
CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the The driver blocks described here support the
CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) using FIFO mode.
CAN Controller (p. 5-22)
Acceptance Filters (p. 5-38) The CAN controller’s acceptance filters can be used to
ensure that certain received messages referenced by their
identifiers get written into the receive FIFO.
Examples (p. 5-40) Examples involving FIFO CAN drivers.
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Introduction
This chapter describes the alternative First In First Out (FIFO) CAN drivers
provided with xPC Target. The standard CAN drivers for the CAN boards from
Softing GmbH (http://www.softing.com) program the CAN board firmware
to run in Dynamic Object Buffer (DOB) mode. This mode is best suited for
real-time environments where it is mandatory that the driver latency time is
time deterministic. Actually, running the firmware in Dynamic Object Buffer
mode is always the best choice except for the undesired side effect of high driver
latency times.

• Sending a CAN message — When sending a CAN message, the latency time
is the time interval between the time accessing the board to provide all the
information for the CAN message to be sent and the time the board returns
the acknowledgment that the information has been received by the
firmware.
• Receiving a CAN message — When receiving a CAN message, the latency
time is the time interval between the time accessing the board to ask for
current data (object data) of a certain CAN identifier and the time the board
returns the actual data and other information about the CAN message.

Disadvantages of Dynamic Object Buffer mode — These latency times are

mainly defined by the reaction time of the board firmware. In the case of the
Softing boards, the latency time is the same for sending and receiving
messages, with a fixed value of about 40 υs. If your xPC Target application has
to send and receive a large number of CAN messages, the overall latency time
can quickly become high and can make it impossible to run the application at
the desired base sample time.
For example, assuming that a specific xPC Target application gets data from
12 CAN identifiers and transmits data by using eight CAN messages, the total
number of CAN board read and write accesses adds up to 20. This results in a
total CAN I/O latency time of
20*40 υs = 800 υs

With such an application, base sample times below 800 υs are impossible even
if the dynamics of the corresponding Simulink model are simple and would only
need 20 υs of computation time.

5-2
 Introduction

Advantages of Dynamic Object Buffer mode — However, even if the CAN I/O
latency time in Dynamic Object Buffer mode is high, the benefit of this mode is
that the latency time stays constant almost independent of the traffic volume
on the CAN network. This means that the Dynamic Object Buffer mode is best
suited for xPC Target applications that only deal with a small subset of all CAN
messages going over the CAN network.

FIFO Mode Drivers for CAN Boards from Softing

The CAN boards from Softing support another mode, called First In First Out
(FIFO) mode. In this mode the Dynamic Object Buffer mode abstraction layer
in the firmware is missing, and the firmware plays the role of a slim interface
between the receive and transmit FIFOs and the drivers in the application
code. Because of this slimmer interface, the I/O latency times are considerably
smaller. Writing to the transmit FIFO takes 4 υs per CAN message and
reading one event (CAN message) from the receive FIFO takes 17 υs. Both of
these latency times are smaller than the 40 υs for Dynamic Object Buffer mode.
While writing to the transmit FIFO is efficient, this is not the case for reading
from the receive FIFO. Because the receive FIFO is filled with all CAN
messages (identifiers) going over the CAN network, there can be a lot of data
(CAN messages) that have to be read out of the FIFO even if their data is not
used in the target application. Because of the FIFO structure, all events
(messages) have to be read until the message is returned that is propagated to
the target application. The driver code for reading the receive FIFO is
principally a while loop, and this can add the problem of non-deterministic
latency times.
You resolve the latency time issue in the xPC Target CAN FIFO drivers by
defining a receive FIFO read depth that is a constant number during
application execution. For example, if you assume a FIFO read depth of 5, each
time the Read Receive FIFO driver block is executed at the block sample time,
the driver code reads and returns five events (messages) from the receive FIFO.
This is independent of how many events the FIFO currently contains. There
can be only two messages received in the FIFO and the third to fifth read
attempt might just return the “No new event” code. Nevertheless, because the
FIFO read latency does not exceed 17 υs regardless of the event read out of the
FIFO, the latency time becomes deterministic and is the Read FIFO Depth
multiplied by 17 υs. The driver block returns all new events and therefore all
CAN messages going over the network. If only a small subset of the CAN
messages received must be processed in the target application, the total latency

5-3
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

can easily exceed the latency encountered with the Dynamic Object Buffer
mode for the same application. There is another restriction specific to the FIFO
mode concept. Using more than one Read Receive FIFO block in a Simulink
model is not recommended, because a new event (message) read by one block
instance cannot be read again by another block instance (the event is no longer
in the FIFO buffer). Therefore the entire CAN receive part has to be
concentrated in one Read Receive FIFO block in your model. For the write
transmit FIFO side, this restriction does not apply. Here you can use as many
instances as you want.
The Setup block for the CAN FIFO mode controls the CAN acceptance filters of
the CAN controller. The acceptance filter defines a range of CAN messages not
to be forwarded to the receive FIFO. Filtering out unwanted CAN messages
can drastically reduce the read receive FIFO latency time because the
unwanted messages do not reach the receive FIFO. Unfortunately, the
acceptance filter process uses binary evaluation, which does not allow filtering
messages below and above a certain decimal range. Therefore the use of the
acceptance filter only resolves the problem for a small subset of CAN network
applications. See “Acceptance Filters” on page 5-38 for more information on
this.
Look again at the example of 12 messages to be received and eight messages to
be transmitted. If those 20 messages with their specific identifiers are the only
messages going over the CAN network (100% usage ratio) the total latency
time is
12*17 υs + 8*4 υs = 236 υs

This is a considerable smaller value than the 800 υs that results when you use
Dynamic Object Buffer mode drivers.
For the next case, assume that there are 12 additional messages going
regularly over the network that do not need to be processed by the target
application. Additionally, assume that those messages cannot be filtered by the
CAN controller acceptance filter. Then the total latency time increases to
12*17 υs +20*4 υs = 284 υs

There is no impact on the final result. That is the tradeoff. Therefore the FIFO
mode drivers are best suited for either CAN network monitoring applications
or low-latency CAN applications where the ratio between the number of
messages to be processed and the number of total messages going over the
network is high.

5-4
 Introduction

FIFO mode drivers are especially suited for monitoring type applications,
because FIFO mode can return additional information such as the bus state or
the reception of error frames. Dynamic Object Buffer mode drivers do not allow
querying such information.
This documentation only covers the differences between the Dynamic Object
Buffer mode drivers (standard drivers), and the FIFO mode drivers introduced
here. It assumes that you are familiar with the Dynamic Object Buffer mode
drivers and have successfully run one of the loop-back tests provided with xPC
Target.
If you use FIFO mode drivers in your model, you must replace all Dynamic
Object Buffer mode blocks (Setup, Send, Receive) with FIFO mode driver
blocks. The CAN-AC2-xxx boards from Softing do not let you run the two CAN
ports in different modes. Therefore the mode has to be same for both ports, but
you can use more than one CAN board and run the boards in different modes
just by selecting the correct I/O driver blocks.
As mentioned in the standard CAN chapter, you should not use the CAN-AC2
(ISA) for new projects. Instead use the CAN-AC2-PCI. Therefore, FIFO mode
drivers are only provided for the CAN-AC2-PCI and the CAN-AC2-104 boards.

5-5
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips

SJA1000 CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2-PCI using FIFO mode.
The Philips SJA1000 chip is used as the CAN controller in this configuration
and supports both standard and extended identifier ranges in parallel. The
driver block set for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block library in
the group CAN/Softing.

The third block group, CAN-AC2-PCI SJA 1000, contains the FIFO mode
subgroup.

5-6
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

The highlighted group contains all driver blocks available for FIFO Mode CAN.

FIFO Setup Driver Block

The Setup block defines general settings of the installed CAN board(s). The
CAN driver blocks for this board support up to three boards for each target
system, making up to six CAN ports available. For each board in the target
system, you can use one Setup block in a model.

5-7
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Board — Defines the board being accessed by this driver block instance. If
multiple boards are present in the target PC, you can use the board number
(1…3) to differentiate the boards. The physical board referenced by the board
number depends on the PCI Slot parameter. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
CAN 1 - physical bus — Defines the physical CAN bus type of CAN port 1. In
the board’s standard hardware configuration, only high-speed CAN is

5-8
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

supported. By extending the board with low-speed CAN piggyback modules,

you can also select low-speed CAN as the physical bus. Do not change this value
to low-speed if no module is present for the corresponding CAN port. If the
module is present (see the Softing user manual on how to install the modules),
you can select between high-speed and low-speed CAN here.
CAN 1 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), select User defined.
CAN 1 - user defined baud rate — If you select User defined from the CAN
1 Baud rate list, enter the four values for the timing information. The vector
elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 1 - acceptance — Defines the acceptance filters for the CAN 1 port.
Because the receive FIFO is filled with any CAN messages going over the bus,
the use of the CAN controller acceptance filters becomes important to filter out
unwanted messages already at the controller level. This acceptance filter
information is provided by a row vector with four elements in which the first
two are used to define the acceptance mask and acceptance code for standard
identifiers and the latter two for extended identifiers. The default value
defined by the Setup block does not filter out any messages. For information on
how to define the acceptance information to filter certain messages, see
“Acceptance Filters” on page 5-38.
CAN 2 - physical bus — Defines the physical CAN bus type of CAN port 2. In
the board’s standard hardware configuration, only high-speed CAN is
supported. By extending the board with lows-peed CAN piggyback modules,
you can also select low-speed CAN as the physical bus. Do not set this value
should to low-speed if no module is present for the corresponding CAN port. If
the module is present (see the Softing user manual on how to install the
modules), you can select between high-speed and low-speed CAN here.
CAN 2- baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 2. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), select User defined.

5-9
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

CAN 2 - user defined baud rate — If you select User defined from the CAN
2 baud rate list, enter the four values for the timing information. The vector
elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 - acceptance — Defines the acceptance filters for the CAN 2 port.
Because the receive FIFO is filled with any CAN messages going over the bus,
the use of the CAN controller acceptance filters becomes important to filter out
unwanted messages already at the controller level. This acceptance filter
information is provided by a row vector with four elements in which the first
two are used to define the acceptance mask and acceptance code for standard
identifiers and the latter two for extended identifiers. The default value
defined by the Setup block does not filter out any messages. For information on
how to define the acceptance information to filter certain messages, see
“Acceptance Filters” on page 5-38.
Enable error frame detection — If the CAN controller should detect error
frames and forward these to the Receive FIFO, select this box. Selecting this
box makes sense for monitoring applications where you want to be informed
about all events going over the bus. For low-latency time applications, selecting
this box might increase the FIFO Read driver block latency time because the
receive FIFO gets filled with additional events.
Initialization (struct) and Termination (struct) — Define the CAN messages
sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block. For more
information, see the standard CAN driver documentation in “Defining
Initialization and Termination CAN Messages” on page 4-53.
PCI Slot (-1: autosearch) — Defines the PCI slot in which the referenced board
(board number) resides. If only one CAN board is present in the target system,
the value for this control should be -1 for autosearch. This value ensures that
the xPC Target kernel automatically finds the board regardless of the PCI slot
it is plugged into. If two or more boards of this type are physically present in
the target PC, enter the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board
associated with this driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber].
Use the xPC Target function getxpcpci to query the target system for installed

5-10
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

PCI boards and the PCI slots they are plugged into. For more information see
help getxpcpci.

The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of DIP switches at the rear panel. Refer to the Softing user manual on
how to set the DIP switches. Both CAN ports must be terminated properly if
you use the loop-back model provided to test the board and drivers.

FIFO Write Driver Block

The FIFO Write driver block is used to write CAN messages into the transmit
FIFO. The firmware running in FIFO mode processes the information found in
the transmit FIFO and finally puts the constructed CAN messages onto the
bus.
The block has one input port of type double. At this port, all necessary
information has to be provided to construct valid CAN messages to be written
into the transmit FIFO. For each CAN message, five elements are passed:
Port
Identifier
Identifier type
Data frame size
Data

Port — The value can be either 1 (port 1) or 2 (port 2) and defines the port the
CAN message is sent from.
Identifier — Identifier of the CAN message to be sent. If it is a standard CAN
message the valid range is 0 to 2047. If the CAN message is extended, the range
is 0 to 229-1.
Identifier type — The value can be either 0 (standard identifier range) or 1
(extended identifier range) and defines the identifier type of the outgoing CAN
message.
Data frame size — The value can be in the range of 0 to 8 and defines the data
frame size in bytes of the outgoing CAN message.
Data — This is the data for the data frame itself and is defined as a double
value (8 bytes). The CAN packing block is used to construct the data as a double
value.

5-11
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Because all this information can be dynamically changed in FIFO mode during
application execution, the information is provided at the block input instead of
you setting them through block parameters. To be able to transmit more than
one CAN message per block instance, a matrix signal is used as a container for
all information.
The dimension of the matrix signal entering the block has to be n*5, where n is
the number of CAN messages to be sent by this block instance. Therefore each
row of the matrix signal defines one CAN message and each row combines the
five elements of information defined above (in this order).
For more on how to construct the correct matrix signal for the FIFO write
block, see “Examples” on page 5-40.
For certain applications it might be necessary to make the writing of a CAN
message into the transmit FIFO dependent on the model dynamics. For this
case, the matrix signal can also be of dimension n*6 instead of n*5. In this case,
the sixth column defines whether the corresponding CAN message is written
into the transmit FIFO (1) or not (0).

Board — Define the board used to send the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number,
see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present in the
target system, you should select 1.
Show status output port — Select this box to enable the status output port. If
the box is cleared, the block does not have an output port. If enabled, a port is

5-12
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

shown. The signal leaving the block is a vector of type double in which the
number of elements depends on the signal dimension of the block input port.
There is one element for each CAN message written into the transmit FIFO
and the value is identical to the return argument of function
CANPC_send_data(…), described in the Softing user manual. Refer to that
manual for more information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Write block is
executed during a model (target application) run.
You can use as many instances of the FIFO Write block in the model as needed.
For example, by using two instances of the block, you can send CAN messages
at different sample times. Or you can use multiple instances to structure your
model more efficiently.

FIFO Read Driver Block

The FIFO Read driver block is used to read CAN messages from the receive
FIFO. The firmware running in FIFO mode puts received events (CAN
messages) into the receive FIFO from which the FIFO Read driver reads it.
The FIFO Read driver block has at least one output port of type double. The
signal of this port is a matrix of size m*6, where m is the FIFO Read depth
defined in the block dialog box (see below). For example, if the FIFO read depth
is 5, then the matrix signal of port 1 has size 5*6. Therefore, one row for each
event is read out of the receive FIFO (no new message is considered an event
as well). For information on how to extract data from the matrix signal, see
“Examples” on page 5-40.
Each row with its six elements contains all the information defining a CAN
message:
Port
Identifier
Event type
Data frame size
Timestamp
Data

Port — The value can be either 1 (port 1) or 2 (port 2) and reports the port at
which the CAN message was received.

5-13
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Identifier — Identifier of the CAN message being received. If it is a standard

CAN message the range is 0 to 2047. It is an extended CAN message, the range
is 0 to 229-1.
Event type — This value defines the type of event read from the receive FIFO.
The following values are defined in the Softing user manual.
0 No new event
1 Standard data frame received
2 Standard remote frame received
3 Transmission of a standard data frame is confirmed
4 -
5 Change of bus state
6 -
7 -
8 Transmission of a standard remote frame is confirmed
9 Extended data frame received
10 Transmission of an extended data frame is confirmed
11 Transmission of an extended remote frame is confirmed
12 Extended remote frame received
13 -
14 -
15 Error frame detected

Data frame size — If a data frame has been received, the length of the data in
bytes is reported by this element. Possible values are 0 to 8.
Timestamp — Time at which the event was received. The resolution of the
timestamp counter is 1 υs.
Data — Data of the data frame itself returned as a double value (8 bytes). The
CAN Unpacking block is used to extract the data from the double value.

5-14
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Board — Defines the board used to send the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number,
see the Setup driver block described above. If one board is present in the target
system, select board number 1.
FIFO read depth — Defines the number of receive FIFO read attempts. Each
time the block is executed it reads this fixed number of events (CAN messages),
which lead to a deterministic time behavior regardless of the number of events
currently stored in the receive FIFO. The Read depth (m) also defines the size
of the matrix signal (m*6) leaving the first output port. If no event is currently
stored in the receive FIFO, the FIFO is read anyway, but the event type is
reported as 0 (no new event).
Show status output port — Select this box to enable the Status output port.
If the box is cleared (disabled), the block has one output port for the events. If
enabled, a second port is shown. The signal leaving that port is a vector of type
double with two elements:
[Number of lost messages (events), Bus state]

5-15
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

The first element returns the current value of the lost messages counter. The
receive FIFO can store up to 255 events. If the receive FIFO is not regularly
accessed for reading events, the FIFO is filled and the lost messages counter
starts to count up. This is an indicator that events (messages) will be
unavoidably lost. The second element returns the current bus state. Possible
values are
0 Error active
1 Error passive
2 Bus off

Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read block is
executed during a model (target application) run.
It is strongly recommended that you use only one instance of this block per
physical CAN board in your model. Otherwise you might get the unwanted
behavior that one instance would read events that must be processed by blocks
connected to the other, second instance.

FIFO Read Filter Block

This is a utility block for the CAN FIFO driver block set, but does not actually
access the CAN board or any other hardware device. This block is usually
connected to the first output port of the FIFO Read driver block and allows
filtering events out of the event matrix, the signal leaving the FIFO Read
driver block.
The block code walks through the rows of the incoming event matrix signal and
looks for events matching the criteria defined in the block dialog box. If it
matches, the entire event information (row) is written to the block’s first output
port. If more than one row matches the criteria, the later event overwrites the
earlier event.
The block has one input port and two output ports. The input port is of type
double and accepts a matrix signal of size m*6. The two output ports are of type
double as well. The first output is a row vector (1*6), the filtered event, and the
second outputs a scalar value that reports the number of matching events the
filter block has processed.

5-16
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

CAN port — Defines the filter criterion for the CAN port. From the list, select
Any, 1, or 2.

Message type command — Defines the filter criterion for the event types. This
entry can consist of a concatenation of space-delimited keywords that are
SDF Standard data frame
SRF Standard remote frame
EDF Extended data frame
ERF Extended remote frame
EF Error frame
NE No new event
CBS Change of bus state

Message type selection mode — Defines how the event type (message type),
from the Message type command parameter, is treated. If you select Include,
the event type criterion is the sum of the concatenated keywords. If you select
Exclude, the event type criterion is equal to all event types minus the sum of
the concatenated keywords.
Identifier(s) — Defines the filter criterion for the CAN message identifiers. A
set of identifiers can be provided as a row vector.

5-17
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Identifier selection mode — Defines how the identifier criterion, from the
Identifier(s) parameter, is treated. If you select Include, the identifier
criterion is the sum of all specified identifiers. If you select Exclude, the
identifier criterion is equal to all identifiers minus the specified identifiers.
You can use as many instances of this block in your model as needed. Usually,
you connect several instances in parallel to the output of the FIFO Read driver
block to filter out particular messages or events. For more information on how
to do this, see “Examples” on page 5-40.

FIFO Read XMT Level Driver Block

The FIFO Read XMT Level driver block is used to read the current number of
CAN messages stored in the transmit FIFO to be processed by the firmware.
The transmit FIFO can store up to 255 messages. If it is full and a FIFO write
driver block tries to add another message to the transmit FIFO, the passed
messages are lost. You can use this driver block to check for this condition and
take appropriate action. For example, you could stop the execution or wait for
a nonfull transmit FIFO.
The block has a single output port of type double returning a scalar value
containing the current transmit FIFO level (number of messages to be
processed).

Board — Defines the board accessed to read the current transmit FIFO level.
For more information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup
driver block described above. If just one board is present in the target system,
select board number 1.

5-18
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read XMT Level
driver block is executed during a model (target application) run.

FIFO Reset XMT Driver Block

The FIFO Reset XMT driver block is used to reset the transmit FIFOs. This
deletes all messages currently stored in the transmit FIFO and reset the level
counter to 0. As an example, you can use this driver block to reset the transmit
FIFO after having detected a fault condition.
The block has a single input port of type double. If a scalar value of 1 is passed,
the transmit FIFO is reset. If a scalar value of 0 is passed, no action takes
place.

Board — Defines the board accessed to reset the transmit FIFO. For more
information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup driver block
described above. If just one board is present in the target system, select board
number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Reset XMT driver
block is executed during a model (target application) run.

5-19
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

FIFO Read RCV Level Driver Block

The FIFO Read RCV level driver block reads the current number of CAN
messages stored in the receive FIFO. The receive FIFO can store up to 255
events (messages). If it is full and no FIFO read driver block attempts to read
the stored events, new incoming events are lost, as shown by the lost message
counter incrementing. You can use this driver block to check for this condition
and take appropriate action, such as stopping the execution or resetting the
receive FIFO.
The block has a single output port of type double returning a scalar value
containing the current receive FIFO level (number of messages to be
processed).

Board — Defines the board accessed to read the current receive FIFO level.
For more information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup
driver block described above. If just one board is present in the target system,
select board number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read RCV Level
driver block is executed during a model (target application) run.

5-20
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-PCI with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

FIFO Reset RCV Driver Block

The FIFO Reset RCV driver block resets the receive FIFO. This deletes all
messages currently stored in the receive FIFO and reset the level counter to 0.
As an example, you can use this driver block to reset the receive FIFO after
having detected a fault condition.
The block has a single input port of type double. If a scalar value of 1 is passed,
the transmit FIFO is reset. If a scalar value of 0 is passed, no action takes
place.

Board — Defines the board accessed to reset the receive FIFO. For more
information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup driver block
described above. If just one board is present in the target system, select board
number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Reset RCV driver
block is executed during a model (target application) run.

5-21
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips

SJA1000 CAN Controller
The driver blocks described here support the CAN-AC2-104 (PC/104) using
FIFO mode. The Philips SJA1000 chip is used as the CAN controller in this
configuration and supports both standard and extended identifier ranges in
parallel. The driver block set for this board is found in the xPC Target I/O block
library in the group CAN/Softing.

The fourth block group, CAN-AC2-104 SJA 1000, contains the FIFO Mode
subgroup.

5-22
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

The highlighted group contains all the driver blocks available for FIFO mode
CAN.

FIFO Setup Driver Block

The FIFO Setup driver block defines general settings of the installed CAN
boards. The CAN driver blocks for this board support up to three boards for
each target system, making up to six CAN ports available. For each board in
the target system, you must use exactly one Setup driver block.

5-23
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Board — Defines the board accessed by this driver block instance. If multiple
boards are present in the target PC, you can use the board number (1…3) to
differentiate the boards. The physical board referenced by the board number
depends on the PCI Slot parameter. If just one board is present in the target
system, select board number 1.

5-24
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

CAN 1 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 1. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), you can select User defined.
CAN 1 - user defined baud rate — If you selected User defined from the CAN
1 - baud rate list, enter four values for the timing information. The vector
elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 1 - acceptance — Defines the acceptance filters for CAN port 1. Because
the receive FIFO is filled with any CAN messages going over the bus, the use
of the CAN controller acceptance filters becomes important to filter out
unwanted messages already at the controller level. This acceptance filter
information is provided by a row vector with four elements in which the first
two are used to define the acceptance mask and acceptance code for standard
identifiers and the latter two for extended identifiers. The default value
defined by the Setup block does not filter out any messages. For information on
how to define the acceptance information to filter certain messages, see
“Acceptance Filters” on page 5-38.
CAN 2 - baud rate — Defines the most common baud rates for CAN port 2. If
special timing is necessary (baud rate), you can select User defined.
CAN 2- user defined baud rate — If you selected User defined from the CAN
1 - baud rate list, enter four values for the timing information. The vector
elements have the following meanings:
[ Prescaler, Synchronization-Jump-Width, Time-Segment-1,
Time-Segment-2 ]

For more information about these values, see the Softing user manual for this
board.
CAN 2 acceptance — Defines the acceptance filters for CAN port 2. Because
the receive FIFO is filled with any CAN messages going over the bus, the use
of the CAN controller acceptance filters becomes important to filter out
unwanted messages already at the controller level. This acceptance filter
information is provided by a row vector with four elements in which the first
two are used to define the acceptance mask and acceptance code for standard
identifiers and the latter two for extended identifiers. The default value

5-25
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

defined by the Setup block does not filter out any messages. For information on
how to define the acceptance information to filter certain messages, see
“Acceptance Filters” on page 5-38.
Enable error frame detection — Defines whether the CAN controller should
detect error frames and forward these to the receive FIFO. Selecting this box
makes sense for monitoring applications where you want to be informed about
all events going over the bus. For low-latency time applications, selecting this
box might increase the FIFO Read driver block latency, because the receive
FIFO is filled with additional events.
Initialization command structure and Termination — Defines CAN
messages sent during initialization and termination of the Setup block. For
more information, see Chapter 4, “CAN I/O Support.”
I/O base address — Defines the I/O base address of the board to be accessed
by this block instance. The I/O base address is given by the DIP switch setting
on the board itself. The I/O address range is 3 bytes and is mainly used to
identify the memory base address the board should use. See the Softing user
manual for this board on how you can set the I/O base address. The I/O base
address entered in this control must correspond with the DIP switch setting on
the board. If more than one board is present in the target system, you must
enter a different I/O base address for each board. In this case, the I/O base
address itself defines which board is referenced by which board number.
Memory base address — Defines the memory base address of the board to be
accessed by this block instance. The memory base address is a software setting
only (no corresponding DIP switch is found on the board). The memory address
range is 4 KB. If more than one board is present in the target system, you must
enter a different memory base address for each board and you must ensure that
the defined address ranges do not overlap. Because the xPC Target kernel only
reserves a subset of the address range between 64 KB and 1 MB for
memory-mapped devices, the address ranges must lie within the following
range:
C0000-DC000

The board allows you to terminate each of the two CAN ports separately by
means of DIP switches at the back panel of the board. Refer to the Softing user
manual on how to set the DIP switches. Both CAN ports must be properly
terminated before you can use the loop-back model provided to test the board
and drivers.

5-26
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Interrupt line — Select an interrupt line from the list.

FIFO Write Driver Block

The FIFO Write driver block is used to write CAN messages into the transmit
FIFO. The firmware running in FIFO mode then processes the information
found in the transmit FIFO and finally puts the constructed CAN messages
onto the bus.
The block has one input port of type double. At this port, you must provide all
necessary needed to construct valid CAN messages to be written into the
transmit FIFO. For each CAN message, five elements have to be passed:
Port
Identifier
Identifier type
Data frame size
Data

Port — The value can be either 1 (port 1) or 2 (port 2) and defines at which port
the CAN message is sent from.
Identifier — Identifier of the CAN message to be sent. If it is a standard CAN
message, the valid range is 0 to 2047. If extended, the range is 0 to 229-1.
Identifier type — The value can be either 0 (standard identifier range) or 1
(extended identifier range) and defines the identifier type of the outgoing CAN
message.
Data frame size — The value can be in the range of 0 to 8 and defines the data
frame size in bytes of the outgoing CAN message
Data — Data for the data frame itself, defined as a double value (8 bytes). The
CAN Packing block is used to construct the data as a double value.
Because all this information can be dynamically changed in FIFO mode during
application execution, the information is provided at the block input instead of
using the block parameters. To transmit more than one CAN message per block
instance, use a matrix signal as a container for all information.
The dimension of the matrix signal entering the block must be n*5, where n is
the number of CAN messages to be sent by this block instance. Therefore, each
row of the matrix signal defines one CAN message and each row combines the
five elements of information defined above (in this order).

5-27
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

For more information on how to construct the correct matrix signal for the
FIFO write block, see “Examples” on page 5-40.
For certain applications it might be necessary to make the writing of a CAN
message into the transmit FIFO dependent on the model dynamics. For this,
the matrix signal can also be of dimension n*6 instead of n*5. In this case, the
sixth column defines whether the corresponding CAN message is written into
the transmit FIFO (value 1) or not (value 0).

Board — Defines the board used to send the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number,
see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
Show status output port — Selecting this check box lets you enable the Status
output port. If the box is cleared (disabled), the block does not have an output
port. If enabled, a port is shown. The signal leaving the block is a vector of type
double in which the number of elements depends on the signal dimension of the
block input port. There is one element for each CAN message written into the
transmit FIFO and the value is identical to the return argument of function
CANPC_send_data(…), described in the Softing user manual. Refer to that
manual for more information.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Write block is
executed during a model (target application) run.

5-28
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

You can use as many instances of the FIFO Write block in the model as needed.
For example, by using two instances of the block with different sample times,
you can send CAN messages out at different rates. Or you can use multiple
instances to structure your model more efficiently.

FIFO Read Driver Block

The FIFO Read driver block reads CAN messages from the receive FIFO. The
firmware running in FIFO mode puts received events (CAN messages) into the
receive FIFO. From here, the FIFO Read driver reads the events out. The
receive FIFO can store up to 255 events (messages). If it is full and no FIFO
Read driver block attempts to read the stored events, new incoming events are
lost. This is reflected by the incrementing of the lost message counter. You can
use the FIFO Read RCV Level driver block to check for this condition and take
appropriate action (for example, like stopping the execution or resetting the
receive FIFO).
The FIFO Read driver block has at least one output port of type double. The
signal of this port is a matrix of size m*6, where m is the FIFO read depth
defined in the block’s dialog box (see below). For example, if the FIFO read
depth is 5, the matrix signal of port 1 has size 5*6. Therefore, there is one row
for each event read from the receive FIFO (no new message is considered as an
event as well). For information on how to extract data from the matrix signal,
see “Examples” on page 5-40.
Each row with its six elements contains all the information defining a CAN
message:
Port
Identifier
Event type
Data frame size
Timestamp
Data

Port — The value is either 1 (port 1) or 2 (port 2) and reports the port at which
the CAN message was received.
Identifier — Identifier of the CAN message being received. If it is a standard
CAN message, the range is 0 to 2047. If the CAN message is extended, the
range is 0 to 229-1.

5-29
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Event type — Defines the type of event read from the receive FIFO. The
following values are defined from the Softing user manual:
16 No new event
17 Standard data frame received
18 Standard remote frame received
19 Transmission of a standard data frame is confirmed
20 -
21 Change of bus state
22 -
23 -
24 Transmission of a standard remote frame is confirmed
25 Extended data frame received
26 Transmission of an extended data frame is confirmed
27 Transmission of an extended remote frame is confirmed
28 Extended remote frame received
29 -
30 -
31 Error frame detected

Data frame size — If a data frame has been received, the length of the data in
bytes is reported by this element. Possible values are 0 to 8.
Timestamp — Reports the time at which the event was received. The
resolution of the timestamp counter is 1 µ s.
Data — Data of the data frame itself. It is returned as a double value (8 bytes).
The CAN Unpacking block is used to extract the data from the double value.

5-30
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Board — Defines the board to use to send the CAN messages defined by this
block instance. For more information about the meaning of the board number,
see the Setup driver block described above. If just one board is present in the
target system, select board number 1.
FIFO read depth — Defines the number of receive FIFO read attempts. Each
time the block is executed, it reads this fixed number of events (CAN
messages), which leads to a deterministic time behavior independent of the
number of events currently stored in the receive FIFO. The read depth (m) also
defines the size of the matrix signal (m*6) leaving the first output port. If no
event is currently stored in the receive FIFO, the FIFO is read anyway but the
event type is reported as 0 (no new event).
Show status output port — Lets you enable the status output port. If the box
is cleared (disabled), the block has one output port for events. If enabled, a
second port is shown. The signal leaving that port is a vector of type double
with two elements:
[Number of lost messages (events), Bus state]

The first element returns the current value of the lost messages counter. The
receive FIFO can store up to 255 events. If the receive FIFO is not regularly
accessed for reading events, the FIFO is filled and the lost messages counter
starts to increment. This is an indicator that events (messages) will be

5-31
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

unavoidably lost. The second element returns the current bus state. Possible
values are
3 Error active
4 Error passive
5 Bus off

Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read block is
executed during a model (target application) run.
Only use one instance of this block per physical CAN board in your model.
Otherwise you may get unwanted behavior when one instance reads events
while the events are being processed by blocks connected to the other, second
instance.

FIFO Read Filter Block

This is a utility block for the CAN FIFO driver block set, but does not actually
access the CAN board or any other hardware device. This block is usually
connected to the first output port of the FIFO Read driver block. It allows
filtering events from the event matrix, which is the signal leaving the FIFO
Read driver block.
The block code walks through the rows of the incoming event matrix signal and
looks for matching events according to the criteria defined in the block’s dialog
box. If match is found, the entire event information (row) is written to the
block’s first output port. If more than one row matches the criteria, the later
event overwrites the earlier event.
The block has one input port and two output ports. The input port is of type
double and accepts a matrix signal of size m*6. The two output ports are of type
double as well. The first output is a row vector (1*6), the filtered event. The
second output is a scalar value that reports the number of matching events the
filter block has processed.

5-32
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

The dialog box of the FIFO Read Filter block lets you define the following
settings:
CAN port — Defines the filter criterion for the CAN port. Possible choices are
Any, 1, or 2.

Message type command — Defines the filter criterion for the event types. This
entry can consist of a concatenation of space-delimited keywords:
SDF Standard data frame
SRF Standard remote frame
EDF Extended data frame
ERF Extended remote frame
EF Error frame
NE No new event
CBS Change of bus state

Message type selection mode — Defines how the event type (message type)
listed in Message type command is treated. If you select Include, the event
type criterion is the sum of the concatenated keywords. If you select Exclude,
the event type criterion is equal to all event types minus the sum of the
concatenated keywords.

5-33
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Identifier(s) — Defines the filter criterion for the CAN message identifiers. A
set of identifiers can be provided as a row vector.
Identifier selection mode — Defines how the identifier criterion entered in
the Identifier(s) parameter is treated. If you select Include, the identifier
criterion is the sum of all specified identifiers. If you select Exclude, the
identifier criterion is equal to all identifiers minus the specified identifiers.
You can use as many instances of this block in your model as needed. Usually,
you connect several instances in parallel to the output of the FIFO Read driver
block to filter out particular messages or events. For more information on how
to do this, see “Examples” on page 5-40.

FIFO Read XMT Level Driver Block

The FIFO Read XMT Level driver block is used to read the current number of
CAN messages stored in the transmit FIFO to be processed by the firmware.
The transmit FIFO can store up to 255 messages. If it is full and a FIFO write
driver block tries to add another message to the transmit FIFO, the passed
messages are lost. You can use this driver block to check for this condition and
take appropriate action. For example, you can stop the execution or wait for the
transmit FIFO to empty.
The block has a single output port of type double returning a scalar value
containing the current transmit FIFO level (number of messages to be
processed).

5-34
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

Board — Defines the board to access to read the current transmit FIFO level.
For more information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup
driver block described above. If just one board is present in the target system,
select board number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read XMT Level
driver block is executed during a model (target application) run.

FIFO Reset XMT Driver Block

The FIFO Reset XMT driver block resets the transmit FIFO. This deletes all
messages currently stored in the transmit FIFO and resets the level counter to
0. For example, you can use this driver block to reset the transmit FIFO after
detecting a fault condition.
The block has a single input port of type double. If a scalar value of 1 is passed,
the transmit FIFO is reset; if 0 is passed, no action takes place.

Board — Defines the board to access to reset the transmit FIFO. For more
information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup driver block
described above. If just one board is present in the target system, select board
number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Reset XMT driver
block is executed during a model (target application) run.

5-35
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

FIFO Read RCV Level Driver Block

The FIFO Read RCV Level driver block reads the current number of CAN
messages stored in the receive FIFO. The receive FIFO can store up to 255
events (messages). If it is full and no FIFO Read driver block attempts to read
the stored events, new incoming events are lost. This is reflected by the
incrementing of the lost message counter. You can use this driver block to
check for this condition and take appropriate action (for example, like stopping
the execution or resetting the receive FIFO).
The block has a single output port of type double returning a scalar value
containing the current receive FIFO level (number of messages to be
processed).

Board — Defines the board to access to read the current receive FIFO level.
For more information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup
driver block described above. If just one board is present in the target system,
select board number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Read RCV Level
driver block is executed during a model (target application) run.

FIFO Reset RCV Driver Block

The FIFO Reset RCV driver block resets the receive FIFO. This deletes all
messages currently stored in the receive FIFO and resets the level counter to
0. For example, you can use this driver block to reset the receive FIFO after
detecting a fault condition.

5-36
 CAN FIFO Driver Blocks for the CAN-AC2-104 with Philips SJA1000 CAN Controller

The block has a single input port of type double. If a scalar value of 1 is passed,
the transmit FIFO is reset; if 0 is passed no action takes place.

Board — Defines the board to access to reset the receive FIFO. For more
information about the meaning of the board number, see the Setup driver block
described above. If just one board is present in the target system, select board
number 1.
Sample time — Defines the sample time at which the FIFO Reset RCV driver
block is executed during a model (target application) run.

5-37
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Acceptance Filters
As mentioned earlier, you can use the CAN controller’s acceptance filters to
ensure that certain received messages referenced by their identifiers are
written into the receive FIFO. Therefore, fewer read attempts are necessary to
get at the messages that are of importance for the target application.
The behavior of the acceptance filter is described for standard and extended
identifier ranges individually (one for standard identifiers and one for
extended identifiers). Each acceptance filter is defined by a mask parameter
and a code parameter.
The mask parameter defines, for each bit of the identifier, whether the filtering
process cares about this bit or not. A 0 means “don’t care” and a 1 means “do
care.”
The code parameter then defines, for each bit of the identifier, that the filtering
process cares about (defined by the mask parameter), what the bit value has to
be (0 or 1).
For standard identifiers the mask parameter and code parameter must be
both, in the range 0 to 2047. For extended identifiers the mask parameter and
code parameter must be both, in the range 0 to 229-1.
The filtering process evaluates the following binary expression:
and( xor( mask, identifier ), code )

If all bits of the resulting value are 0, the message with this identifier is
accepted. If any bit is 1, the message is voided.
According to this description, acceptance filters work using binary evaluation,
while most applications differentiate messages (identifiers) in a decimal or
hexadecimal manner. As a consequence, it is possible to filter messages, whose
identifiers are above a certain decimal number. The opposite (identifiers below
a certain decimal number) cannot be achieved in a general way.

5-38
 Acceptance Filters

Examples
The default values for the mask parameter and the code parameter in the FIFO
setup driver block are both 0. These parameter values ensure (the above
expression always evaluates to 0) that all incoming messages will reach the
receive FIFO (no filtering takes place). All parameter values are defined using
decimal numbers. You can use the MATLAB function hex2dec to define
hexadecimal numbers in the dialog box entry.
Assume a CAN application where messages with the following identifiers
(standard) are crossing the CAN network:
2-30, 48-122 (decimal)

Additionally, only incoming messages 4-29 must be processed by the target

application. Ideally, all messages not having identifiers 4-29 would be filtered
out, but the mask and code parameters do not allow this exact scheme. The
closest you can achieve is filtering out all messages with identifiers above 31
by using value 2047-31=2016 for the mask parameter and value 0 for the code
parameter. The messages with identifier 0, 1, 2, and 3 cannot be filtered out
and are returned by the FIFO read driver block, even if they do not need to be
processed by the target application.

5-39
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Examples
This section includes the following topics:

• “Example 1” on page 5-40 — Loop-back test from CAN port 1 to CAN port 2
• “Example 2” on page 5-42 — Filtering out events
• “Example 3” on page 5-43 — Constructing CAN messages dynamically at
run-time
• “Example 4” on page 5-44 — Stopping the execution when a FIFO overflow
occurs
• “Example 5” on page 5-44 — Stopping the execution when a FIFO overflow
occurs
• “Example 6” on page 5-45 — Using CAN acceptance filters

Example 1
Start with a simple model using the FIFO Setup block, FIFO Write block, FIFO
Read block, and FIFO Read Filter block. The entire CAN network consists of a
single physical connection between CAN port 1 and port 2 (loop-back
configuration). Both CAN ports must be terminated properly.
The objective of the application is the following:

• Send a message with extended identifier 5100 and change data every
millisecond on port 1.
• Send a message with standard identifier 112 and change data every even
millisecond on port 1.
• Send a message with standard identifier 114 and change data every odd
millisecond on port 1.
• Read three events every millisecond from the receive FIFO on port 2.
• Display the incoming data of the three messages separately.
• Do not use acceptance filtering (all messages are accepted).

The data transmitted with the CAN messages are double values in all the
following examples. This has been chosen for simplicity. You should refer to the
bit-packing and bit-unpacking chapter of the standard CAN driver
documentation on how to construct the data.
The first implementation uses the following scheme.

5-40
 Examples

The matrix signal entering the FIFO Write block consists of all three messages
including the Control element (sixth element); therefore the matrix size is [3,6].
The sample time of the FIFO Write block is defined as 1 millisecond. For the
standard identifiers that must be sent out every other millisecond, the Control
element is alternated accordingly. You do this by using a Unit delay block with
corresponding feedback as the Control element value.
The FIFO Read block has a read depth of 3 and also a base sample of 1
millisecond. Three FIFO filter blocks are connected to the output of the FIFO
read block (in parallel) to extract the information of the incoming CAN
messages. You can display the model by typing, in the MATLAB Command
Window, either xpccanpcififo1 or xpccan104fifo1.

The model uses several xPC Target scope blocks to display different types of
data on the target screen:

• Scope 1 (numerical) displays the status vector leaving the FIFO Write block.
• Scope 2 (numerical) displays the status vector [lost-message-counter, bus
state] leaving the FIFO Read block.
• Scope 3 (graphical) plots the data of all three CAN messages being received.

5-41
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

• Scopes 4-6 (numerical) displays the other relevant message data of the three
incoming CAN messages individually (port, identifier, type, data length,
timestamp).

Example 2
When looking at the time behavior of the model, you can observe that at each
millisecond two CAN messages are sent out via the FIFO Write block, while the
FIFO Read block reads three events each millisecond from the receive FIFO.
This implies that one of the three events leaving the FIFO Read block is of type
No new event. You can show this by attaching another FIFO Filter block in
parallel that filters “No new events”, and then displaying the second output
port, which reports the number of matching events. You can display the model
by typing, in the MATLAB Command Window, either xpccanpcififo2 or
xpccan104fifo2.

Having observed this, you can reduce the read depth of the FIFO Read block
from 3 to 2. This would not change the overall behavior of the model. As a

5-42
 Examples

positive side effect, the latency time of the FIFO Read block becomes smaller
and therefore the model’s cycle time as well.

Example 3
Now look at a second implementation on the FIFO Write side. Instead of
providing three messages in parallel, you can just write two messages and then
alternate the identifier and data of the second CAN message to be sent.
Because the messages are now sent every millisecond in any case, you need not
provide the Control element, thereby reducing the matrix entering the FIFO
Write block to a size of [2,5]. You can display the model by typing, in the
MATLAB Command Window, either xpccanpcififo3 or xpccan104fifo3.

This implementation behaves exactly like the first implementation, but shows
how CAN messages to be sent can be constructed dynamically at run-time.

5-43
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

Example 4
Look at the situation where the read depth parameter of the FIFO Read block
in the model above is set to 1 instead of 2 or 3. This leads to a receive FIFO
overflow when the execution time reaches 256 milliseconds. Here, for example,
the execution should be stopped if the overflow occurs. This can do this easily
by evaluating the lost message counter value leaving the status output port of
the FIFO Read block. You can display the model by typing, in the MATLAB
Command Window, either xpccanpcififo4 or xpccan104fifo4.

Example 5
Consider a different handling of the receive FIFO overflow: If the receive FIFO
level reaches the value of 200, the receive FIFO should be reset to delete all
currently stored events. The application execution has to continue normally.
For this, you need to add two new driver blocks to the model, which are used to
read the receive FIFO level and then reset it. You can display the model by
typing, in the MATLAB Command Window, either xpccanpcififo5 or
xpccan104fifo5.

5-44
 Examples

Example 6
The next example shows the use of the CAN acceptance filters. First the Read
depth parameter of the FIFO Read block is set to a value of 2. Then the
identifier of the second standard message is changed from 114 to 188. The goal
is to filter any CAN messages with an identifier larger than 127. This means
that the receive FIFO never contain the CAN message with identifier 188. Also,
the FIFO Filter block, filtering CAN message with identifier 114, is changed to
filter the message with identifier 188. To achieve this, the Acceptance Filters
parameter of CAN port 2 in the FIFO Setup block must be set accordingly:
[2047-127, 0, 0, 0]

If you rebuild and reexecute the target application, you can see the following:

• Scope with ID 6 shows 0 for all elements of the vector leaving the
corresponding FIFO Filter block. The message with identifier 188 is never
received.

5-45
5 CAN I/O Support for FIFO

• Scope with ID 3 shows one of the data traces always being zero.
• Scope with ID 7 shows a value of 1, which reflects that the read depth could
be reduced to 1, because only one message per millisecond reaches the
receive FIFO now.

You can display the model by typing, in the MATLAB Command Window,
either xpccanpcififo6 or xpccan104fifo6.

5-46
 6

UDP I/O Support

xPC Target provides support for the UDP/IP communication protocol. This chapter includes the
following sections:

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) (p. 6-2) Send and receive messages from a target application
using UDP packets.
xPC Target UDP Blocks (p. 6-5) Description of the block parameter fields for the xPC
Target blocks that support UDP communication.
xPC Target UDP Examples (p. 6-13) Communicate between two xPC Target applications,
between a target application and Simulink models or
systems, or between two Simulink models.
6 UDP I/O Support

User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

xPC Target supports communication from the target PC to other systems or
devices using User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets. UDP is a transport
protocol similar to TCP. However, unlike TCP, UDP provides a direct method
to send and receive packets over an IP network. UDP uses this direct method
at the expense of reliability by limiting error checking and recovery. This
section includes the following topics:

• “What Is UDP?” on page 6-2

• “Why UDP?” on page 6-4

What Is UDP?
The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a transport protocol layered on top of
the Internet Protocol (IP) and is commonly known as UDP/IP. It is analogous
to TCP/IP. A convenient way to present the details of UDP/IP is by
comparison to TCP/IP as presented below:

• Connection Versus Connectionless — TCP is a connection based protocol,

while UDP is a connectionless protocol. In TCP, the two ends of the
communication link must be connected at all times during the
communication. An application using UDP prepares a packet and sends it
to the receiver’s address without first checking to see if the receiver is ready
to receive a packet. If the receiving end is not ready to receive a packet, the
packet is lost
• Stream Versus Packet — TCP is a stream-oriented protocol, while UDP is
a packet-oriented protocol. This means that TCP is considered to be a long
stream of data that is transmitted from one end to the other with another
long stream of data flowing in the other direction. The TCP/IP stack is
responsible for breaking the stream of data into packets and sending those
packets while the stack at the other end is responsible for reassembling the
packets into a data stream using information in the packet headers. UDP,
on the other hand, is a packet-oriented protocol where the application itself
divides the data into packets and sends them to the other end. The other
end does not have to reassemble the data into a stream. Note, some
applications might indeed present the data as a stream when the
underlying protocol is UDP. However, this is the layering of an additional

6-2
 User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

protocol on top of UDP, and it is not something inherent in the UDP

protocol itself.
• TCP Is a Reliable Protocol, While UDP Is Unreliable — The packets that
are sent by TCP contain a unique sequence number. The starting sequence
number is communicated to the other side at the beginning of
communication. Also, the receiver acknowledges each packet, and the
acknowledgment contains the sequence number so that the sender knows
which packet was acknowledged. This implies that any packets lost on the
way can be retransmitted (the sender would know that they did not reach
their destination because it had not received an acknowledgments). Also,
packets that arrive out of sequence can be reassembled in the proper order
by the receiver.

Further, time-outs can be established, because the sender will know (from
the first few packets) how long it takes on average for a packet to be sent
and its acknowledgment received. UDP, on the other hand, simply sends
the packets and does not keep track of them. Thus, if packets arrive out of
sequence, or are lost in transmission, the receiving end (or the sending end)
has no way of knowing.
TCP communication can be compared to a telephone conversation where a
connection is required at all times and two-way streaming data (the words
spoken by each party to the conversation) are exchanged. UDP, on the other
hand, can be compared to sending letters by mail (without a return address).
If the other party is not found, or the letter is lost in transit, it is simply
discarded. The analogy fails, however, when considering the speed of
communication. Both TCP and UDP communication roughly happen at the
same speed, because both use the underlying Internet Protocol (IP) layer.

Note Unreliable is used in the sense of “not guaranteed to succeed” as

opposed to “fails a lot of the time.” In practice, UDP is quite reliable as long
as the receiving socket is active and is processing data as quickly as it
arrives.

6-3
6 UDP I/O Support

Why UDP?
UDP was chosen as the transport layer for xPC Target precisely because of
its lightweight nature. Since the primary objective of an application running
in the xPC Target framework is real-time, the lightweight nature of UDP
ensures that the real-time application will have a maximum chance of
succeeding in real-time execution. Also, the datagram nature of UDP is ideal
for sending samples of data from the Real-Time Workshop-generated
application. Because TCP is stream oriented, separators between sets of data
must be used for the data to be processed in samples. It is easier to build an
application to deal with unreliable data than it is to decode all of this
information in realtime. If the application is unable to process the data as
quickly as it arrives, the following packets can just be ignored and only the
most recent packet can be used.
Communication can involve a packet made up of any Simulink data type
(double, int8, int32, uint8, etc.), or a combination of these. xPC Target
provides blocks for combining various signals into one packet (packing), and
then transmitting it. xPC Target also provides blocks for splitting a packet
(unpacking) into its component signals that can then be used in a Simulink
model. The maximum size of a packet is limited to about 500 bytes.

Note on UDP Communication

The UDP blocks work in the background when the real-time application is not
running. The UDP communication has been set up to have a maximum of two
UDP packets waiting to be read. All subsequent packets are rejected. This
prevents excessive memory usage and minimizes the load on the TCP/IP
stack. Consequently, when any large background task is performed, such as
uploading a screen shot or communicating large pages through the WWW
interface, packet loss might occur. Design applications so that this is not
critical. In other words, the receipt of further packets after the ones that were
lost ensures seamless continuation.

6-4
 xPC Target UDP Blocks

xPC Target UDP Blocks

This section includes the following topics:

• “UDP Communication Setup” on page 6-5

• “UDP Receive Block” on page 6-6
• “UDP Send Block” on page 6-8
• “UDP Pack Block” on page 6-9
• “UDP Unpack Block” on page 6-10
• “Byte Reversal/Change Endianess Block” on page 6-11

UDP Communication Setup

The infrastructure provided in the xPC Target Library for UDP
communication consists mainly of two blocks — a Send block and a Receive
block. These blocks are in the xPC Target Library, available from the
Simulink Library under xPC Target. You can also access them from the
MATLAB command line by typing
xpclib

The blocks are located under the UDP heading in the library. The Send block
takes as input a vector of type uint8, which it sends. This is limited to a
length of about 500 bytes (i.e., a 1 by 500 vector). Similarly, the Receive block
outputs a vector of uint8. To convert arbitrary Simulink data types into this
vector of uint8, a Pack block is provided, while an Unpack block is provided
to convert a vector of uint8s back into arbitrary Simulink data types.
You can have up to 32 UDP blocks in any given model (Send and Receive
blocks combined in any order).
xPC Target includes a Byte Reversal block for communication with
big-endian architecture systems. You do not need this block if you are
communicating between 80x86-based PC systems running either xPC Target
or Microsoft Windows.

6-5
6 UDP I/O Support

All the blocks are set up to work both from within Simulink and from an
application running under xPC Target. However, you must be careful when
using a Simulink simulation and an xPC Target application to communicate,
or when using two Simulink models. This is because a Simulink model
executes in nonreal time and can be several times faster or slower than real
time. The sample time of the send and receive blocks and the sample time of
the Simulink model must be set so that the communication can proceed
properly.

UDP Receive Block

The Receive block has two output ports. The first port is the output of the
received data as a vector of uint8 while the second one is a flag indicating
whether any new data has been received. This port outputs a value of 1 for
the sample when there is new data and a 0 otherwise. The default behavior
of the Receive block is to keep the previous output when there is no new data.
You can modify this behavior by using the second port to flag when there is
new data.
The block parameters for the Review block are shown below.

6-6
 xPC Target UDP Blocks

The IP address to receive from parameter can be left with the default value
of 0.0.0.0. This accepts all UDP packets from any other computer. If set to a
specific IP address, only packets arriving from that IP address are received.
The IP port to receive from parameter is the port that the block accepts data
from. The other end of the communication sends data to the port specified
here. The output port width is the width of the acceptable packets. You can
obtain this when designing the other side (send side) of the communication.
The sample time can be set to -1 for inheritable sample time, but it is
recommended that this be set to some specific (large) value to eliminate
chances of dropped packets. This is especially true when you are using a small
base sample time.

6-7
6 UDP I/O Support

UDP Send Block

The Send block has only one input port, which receives the uint8 vector that
is sent as a UDP packet.
The block parameters for the Send block are shown below.

Specify the IP address to send to and IP port to send to parameters in the

appropriate locations.
Set the Use the following local IP port parameter to -1 (default) to allow the
networking stack to automatically determine the local IP port that is used for
sending. Otherwise, specify a particular port to send a packet from that port.
Set the Sample time parameter to an appropriate value, with the same
considerations as in the Receive block.

6-8
 xPC Target UDP Blocks

UDP Pack Block

The Pack block is used to convert one or more Simulink signals of varying
data types to a single vector of uint8 as required by the Send block. The data
types for the different signals must be specified as part of the block
parameters, while the sizes of the signals are determined automatically.

As seen in the figure above, the data types of each of the signals must be
specified as a cell array of strings in the correct order. Once this is done, the
block automatically converts itself to one with the correct number of input
ports. There is always one output port. The supported data types are double,
single, int8, uint8, int16, uint16, int32, uint32, and boolean. The byte
alignment field specifies how the data types are aligned. The possible values
are: 1, 2, 4, and 8. The byte alignment scheme is simple, and ensures that
each element in the list of signals starts on a boundary specified by the
alignment relative to the start of the vector. For example, say the Input port
data types are specified as
{'uint8','uint32','single','int16','double'}

and an alignment of 4 is used. Assume also that all the signals are scalars.
The first signal then starts at byte 0 (this is always true), the second at byte
4, the third at byte 8, the fourth at byte 12, and the fifth at byte 16. Note that
the sizes of the data types used in this example are 1, 4, 4, 2, and 8 bytes
respectively. This implies that there are “holes” of 3 bytes between the first
and second signal and 2 bytes between the fourth and fifth signal.
A byte alignment of 1 means the tightest possible packing. That is, there are
no holes for any combination of signals and data types.

6-9
6 UDP I/O Support

Note Individual elements of vector/matrix signals are not byte aligned:

only the entire vector/matrix is byte aligned. The individual elements are
tightly packed with respect to the first element.

UDP Unpack Block

This block is the exact analog of the Pack block. It receives a vector of uint8
and outputs various Simulink data types in different sizes.

As shown in the figure above, the Output port datatypes field is the same as
the Input port data types field of the matching Pack block. The Pack block
is on the sending side and the Unpack block is on the receiving side in
different models. The Output port dimensions field contains a cell array,
with each element the dimension returned by the size function in MATLAB
of the corresponding signal. This should normally be the same as the
dimensions of the signals feeding into the corresponding Pack block.

6-10
 xPC Target UDP Blocks

Note on Byte Alignment

The byte-alignment feature provided in the Pack and Unpack blocks is
primarily intended for interfacing a system running xPC Target to another
system that is running neither Simulink nor xPC Target. For example, the
data on the other end might be in the form of a C struct, which is subject to
the byte-alignment convention of the compiler used. We recommend using a
byte-alignment value of 1 (tightly packed) whenever possible. Of course, this
is easily accomplished when UDP I/O is used to exchange data between two
xPC Target systems or between xPC Target and Simulink.
Even when communication is between xPC Target and a system using a C
struct, the use of compiler pragmas might help to pack the structure tightly.
For example, #pragma pack(1) is common to several compilers. The
byte-alignment blocks are provided for the case when this is not possible.

Byte Reversal/Change Endianess Block

You use the Byte Reversal/Change Endianess block for communication
between an xPC Target system and a system running with a processor that
is big-endian. Processors compatible with the Intel 80x86 family are always
little-endian. For this situation, you should insert a Byte Reversal/Change
Endianess block before the Pack block and just after the Unpack block to
ensure that the values are transmitted properly. The following is the Change
Endianess block.

This block has the following parameters:

Number of input ports — The number of input ports adjusts automatically
to follow this parameter, and the number of outputs is equal to the number of
inputs.

6-11
6 UDP I/O Support

Machine word length — Select one of the following machine word lengths to
which to convert the data:

• Byte
• Word
• Double Word

The following is the Byte Reversal block.

This block has the following parameter:

Number of inputs — The number of input ports adjusts automatically to
follow this parameter, and the number of outputs is equal to the number of
inputs.

6-12
 xPC Target UDP Examples

xPC Target UDP Examples

This section includes the following topic:

• “UDP Example” on page 6-13

UDP Example
This section provides an example of how to set up two-way data exchange
between two xPC Target systems, between xPC Target and Simulink, or
between two Simulink models. When one or both of the systems is running
Simulink in nonrealtime, be sure to set the sample time properly.

Note To use UDP for your xPC Target system, be sure to create a TCP/IP
boot disk and boot the target PC with that boot disk.

The hypothetical models are called udpsendreceiveA and udpsendreceiveB.

Two different sets of data are transferred between these two models, one set
from udpsendreceiveA to udpsendreceiveB and another set in the opposite
direction.
The data to transfer is in the following order:
udpsendreceiveA to udpsendreceiveB

• uint8 (3x3)
• uint16 (1x1)
• double (2x4)

udpsendreceiveB to udpsendreceiveA

• single (4x1)
• double (2x2)
• uint32 (2x2)
• int8 (5x3)

For the purposes of this example, all the inputs are generated using Simulink
Constant blocks that use the MATLAB random number function (rand). The
random numbers are generated by Real-Time Workshop using this function

6-13
6 UDP I/O Support

at the time of code generation. To generate the vector of uint8 (3x3), use the
MATLAB function
uint8(255 * rand(3,3))

since 255 is the maximum value for an unsigned 8-bit integer. The other
values are generated similarly.
With this setup, construct the send side of udpsendreceiveA.

Note that the width of the UDP packet to be sent is 75 bytes. The parameters
used in the Pack block are Input port datatypes
{'uint8','uint16','double'} and Byte Alignment 1.

For the Send block, set the IP Address to send to to 192.168.0.2. This is the
hypothetical address of the system that will run udpsendreceiveA. Set the IP
Port to send to to 25000 (picked arbitrarily). The sample time is set to 0.01.

6-14
 xPC Target UDP Examples

Use this information to construct the receive end of udpsendreceiveB.

For setting up the Receive block, set IP address to receive from to

192.168.0.2 (the hypothetical address of the system that will run
udpsendreceiveB). The IP port to receive from is set to 25000 (the same
value as set in the Send block in udpsendreceiveA). The Output port width
is set to 75, which is obtained from the output port width of the Pack block in
udpsendreceiveA.

For the Unpack block, Byte Alignment is set to 1 and the Output port
datatypes is set to {'uint8','int16','double'} from the Pack block in
udpsendreceiveA. The Output port dimensions is set to {[3 3],1,[2 4]}
from the dimensions of the inputs to the Pack block in udpsendreceiveA.
Note that in udpsendreceiveB, the second output port of the Receive block is
sent into a terminator. You can use this to determine when a packet has
arrived. The same is true for the outputs of the Unpack block, which in a real
model would be used in the model.

6-15
6 UDP I/O Support

For constructing the udpsendreceiveB to udpsendreceiveA side of the

communication, follow an analogous procedure. The final udpsendreceiveA is
shown below.

6-16
 xPC Target UDP Examples

The following table lists the parameters in udpsendreceiveA.

Block Parameter Value

Receive IP address 192.168.0.1

IP port 25000

Output port width 80

Sample time 0.01

Unpack Output port dimensions {4,[2 2],[2 2],[5 3]}

Output port data types {'single','double',

'uint32','int8'}

Byte alignment 2

The final udpsendreceiveB model is shown below.

6-17
6 UDP I/O Support

The following table lists the parameters in udpsendreceiveB.

Block Parameter Value

Pack Input port data types {'single','double',

'uint32','int8'}

Byte alignment 2

Send IP address 192.168.0.1

IP port 25000

Sample time 0.01

6-18
 7

Aerospace I/O Support

xPC Target interfaces the target PC to an ARINC 429 bus using the ARINC 429 blocks provided by
the xPC Target I/O block library. The xPC Target ARINC 429 blocks work with the Condor
Engineering CEI-X20 series boards (http://www.condoreng.com). This chapter includes the
following sections

Condor (p. 7-2) PCI board series that interfaces target PCs to ARINC 429
data buses
7 Aerospace I/O Support

Condor
The commercial and aircraft transport industry uses the ARINC 429 protocol.
The Aerospace ARINC-429 driver library allows xPC Target applications to
connect to an ARINC bus network to send and receive 32-bit words. This
chapter assumes that you are familiar with the ARINC 429 standard.
xPC Target supports the ARINC 429 protocol with the following Condor
boards. These board interface a target PC to an ARINC 429 data bus. These
boards support the PCI bus.

• CEI-520
• CEI-520A

xPC Target provides the following driver blocks to support these boards:

• “Condor CEI-x20 Initialize” on page 7-3

• “Condor CEI-x20 Send” on page 7-4
• “Condor CEI-x20 Receive” on page 7-5

Use the following utility blocks to format the data sent to and received from the
CEI-x20 Send and Receive blocks:

• “Encode ARINC 429 Words for Send” on page 7-6

• “Decode ARINC 429 Words from Receive” on page 7-9

7-2
 Condor

Board Characteristics
Board name CEI-520, CEI-520A
Manufacturer Condor
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

Condor CEI-x20 Initialize

Your model must include a CEI-x20 Initialize block for every physical board in
the model. configure your Send and Receive blocks with the appropriate board
ID value from this block to identify the physical board to which they refer. This
block supports up to 16 CEI-x20 boards.

Driver Block Parameters

Board ID — From the list, select from 1 to 16 a unique ID for the CEI board.
Use this ID to identify the board in the associated Send and Receive blocks in
your model.
Wrap each send channel to the corresponding receive channel — Select
this check box to enable the hardware loopback feature. If this block is selected,
each word sent over the output channel n will be received on the input channel
n.

Timer tick length — Specify the length of a timer tick in .25 microsecond
units. The default value is 4000, which results in a tick length of one
millisecond. Time tags (if selected from a Decode ARINC 429 Words from
Receive block) are provided in units of timer ticks. A timer tick specifies the
units in which the time the time tags is expressed. This concept is provided as
a convenience to users.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

7-3
7 Aerospace I/O Support

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Condor CEI-x20 Send

Use this block to set up one channel of a board to send 32-bit words. The
number of channels varies depending on the board you have.

Driver Block Parameters

Board ID — From the list, select a unique ID from 1 to 16 for the CEI board.
Use the ID previously assigned by the associated Initialize block in the model.
If you are using a corresponding Receive block for this Send block, select the
same board ID as you enter here.
Channel — From the list, select a channel ID. This number varies with the
particular board you are using. Check your board manufacturer documentation
for the number of channels in the board. If you try to select a non-existent
channel, the block returns an error.
Baud rate — From the list, select
• 12.5 Kbits/sec
• 100 Kbits/sec
If you are using a corresponding Receive block, be sure to select the same baud
rate setting for this channel.
Parity — From the list, select
• odd
• none

Note If you are using a corresponding Receive block, be sure to select the
same parity setting for this channel.

7-4
 Condor

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Condor CEI-x20 Receive

Use this block to set up one channel of a board to receive 32-bit words. The
number of channels varies depending on the board you have.

Note The output port of a Receive block is a signal of type double, but the
data on this port is encoded in a nonstandard way. Normally, you should feed
this output port into an ARINC Decode block (which converts the data into
standard double output). You can also feed it into blocks such as MUX blocks
which do not interpret the data. However, before feeding this port into a block
such as an xPC Target Scope block which does interpret the data, you must
first pass it through an ARINC Decode block.

Driver Block Parameters

Board ID — From the list, select a unique ID from 1 to 16 for the CEI board.
Use the ID previously assigned by the associated Initialize block in the model.
If you are using a corresponding Send block, be sure to enter the same board
ID.
Channel — From the list, select a channel number. The number of channels
supported varies with the particular board you are using. Check your board
manufacturer documentation for the number of channels in the board.
Max number of words to return — Enter the maximum number of words to
extract from the hardware receive buffer. This is the maximum number of
words for the selected channel at each sample time.
If you select n, the output port of the block will have a signal width of n+1 and
the first signal element will contain the count of words actually extracted from
the buffer during the current sample time.
Min number of words to return — Enter the minimum number of words to
extract from the hardware receive buffer. This is the minimum number of
words for the selected channel at each sample time.
If the hardware receive buffer does not contain this minimum number of words
for the selected channel during the current sample time, the block extracts no

7-5
7 Aerospace I/O Support

words from the hardware receive buffer. The word count associated with the
output port would then be 0.
Baud rate — From the list, select
• 12.5 Kbits/sec
• 100 Kbits/sec
If you are using a corresponding Send block, be sure to select the same baud
rate setting for this channel.
Parity — From the list, select
• odd
• none
If you are using a corresponding Send block, be sure to select the same parity
setting for this channel.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Encode ARINC 429 Words for Send

The output port of an Encode block is a signal of type double. Because the
Encode block encodes the data on this port in a nonstandard way, you must
send this data to one of the following:

• Condor CEI-520A Send block — The ARINC Send block converts the data
into standard double output. This is the block to which you will most likely
send data from the ARINC Encode block.
• MUX block — The MUX block does not interpret the data. After the MUX
block, you can send it to an ARINC Send block.

7-6
 Condor

Driver Block Parameters

Label — Enter a three digit octal number as the label. The label field of each
ARINC word sent over the output port will contain this value.
Data type vector — Enter a vector consisting of values between 0 and 3. These
values specify the data type. The length of this vector determines the widths of
both the input and output ports. The data type determines how the input
double value is converted to a corresponding ARINC value, as follows

Type Interpretation

0 Raw — Cast the input to an unsigned 32-bit integer and output it

as an ARINC word with no further processing.
1 BNR (two’s complement binary notation) — Cast the input as a
signed integer, clamp it to lie in the range representable by a
signed 19-bit binary integer, and pack it into an ARINC word with
the appropriate Sign/Status Matrix (SSM), Source/Destination
Identifier (SDI), and Label data.
2 BCD (binary coded decimal) — Cast the input as a signed integer,
clamp it to lie in the range representable by an ARINC five
character BCD value, and pack it into an ARINC word with the
appropriate SSM, SDI, and Label data.
3 Discretes — Cast the input as an unsigned 32-bit integer and pack
the low order 19 bits of the result into an ARINC word with the
appropriate SSM, SDI, and Label data.

Resolution vector — Enter a vector or scalar value as the resolution vector.

This must be a vector of the same length as the data type vector. Otherwise,

7-7
7 Aerospace I/O Support

the scalar value is applied to the length of the data type vector. The block
works with the data types as follows

Type Effect

Raw The block ignores any resolution value. However, you must
still include an associated value in the resolution vector.
BNR The resolution value specifies, in the same units as the input
signal, the value of the least significant bit of the binary data
field. For example, if the associated resolution value is 10 and
the input signal contains the value 1000, the output ARINC
word will contain the binary number 100 in its data field.

A 19-bit signed ARINC binary can represent a range from

-262,144 to 262,143. If the combination of input signal and
resolution produces a value outside this range, the block
clamps it to lie within the range.
BCD The resolution value specifies, in the same units as the input
signal, the value of the least significant digit of the BCD data
field. For example, if the associated resolution is 10 and the
input signal contains the value 1000, the output ARINC word
will contain the number 100 in its data field, encoded in BCD.

The range representable as an ARINC BCD value is -79,999

to 79,999. If the combination of input signal and resolution
produces a value outside this range, the block clamps it to lie
within the range.
Discretes The block ignores any resolution value. However, you must
still include an associated value in the resolution vector.

SDI vector — Enter a vector or scalar value as the SDI vector. This must be a
vector of the same length as the data type vector. Otherwise, the scalar value
is applied to the length of the data type vector.

7-8
 Condor

This block interprets the SDI vector values as follows:

Type Effect

Raw The block ignores any resolution value. However, you must
still include an associated value in the resolution vector.
BNR, BCD, If the SDI element is in the range 0 to 3, the block sets the
Discretes SDI field of the corresponding output word to that value. If
an SDI element has a value of -1, the block performs no SDI
processing on the corresponding output word.

SSM vector — Enter a vector or scalar value as the SDI vector. This must be
a vector of the same length as the data type vector. Otherwise, the scalar
value is applied to the length of the data type vector.
If the SSM element is in the range 0 to 3, the block sets the SSM field of the
corresponding output word to that value. If an SSM element has a value of -1,
the block performs no SSM processing on the corresponding output word. Note
that the meaning of a given SSM value differs depending on the data type of
the ARINC word.

Decode ARINC 429 Words from Receive

The input port of a Decode block is a signal of type double. Because the Decode
block interprets the data on this port in a nonstandard way, you can send the
data to this port from one of the following:

• Condor CEI-520A Receive block — The Condor CEI-520A Receive block

outputs its data into standard double output. This is the block from which
you will most likely send data to the ARINC Decode block.
• ARINC Encode block — The output port of an Encode block is a signal of type
double.

The output port of a Decode block is in standard double format.

The input to this block should be a CEI-x20 Receive block. The Decode block
input port width will automatically adapt to that of the source block. connected
width of the input port of the block adjusts to the block it is connected to.

7-9
7 Aerospace I/O Support

Driver Block Parameters

Label — Enter a three digit octal number. If the label of an input word does
not match this label, the block completely ignores the word and does not apply
the Sync mask and Sync value parameters.
Data type vector — Enter a vector consisting of values between 0 and 3. These
values specify the data type. The length of this vector determines how many
ARINC words the block will attempt to decode and output each sample time.
The elements of the vector determine how the input double value is converted
to a corresponding double output value, as follows

Type Interpretation

0 Raw — Convert the entire (unsigned) 32 bit input word to double.

1 BNR — For each word, convert bits 10-28 from signed binary
format to double.
2 BCD — For each word, convert bits 10-28 from BCD format to
double, using the sign data in the SSM.
3 Discretes — For each word, extract bits 10-28 and return them as
a double.

The elements of the data type vector determine how the input ARINC value is
converted to a corresponding double output. The following describes how this
block performs the conversion. For the purposes of this description, n denotes
the length of the data type vector.

• The output width is one of the following, depending on your time tag
selection
- 2n + 1 — This is the output width if you select the Provide time tags
check box. The width consists of a count element, followed by n data
elements, followed by n time tag elements.
- n + 1 — This is the output width if you do not select the Provide time tags
check box. The width consists of a count element followed by n data
elements.
The count element indicates how many valid messages the block has decoded
during the current sample time. The count element has a nonzero value if a

7-10
 Condor

at least one message on the data element is currently valid, and zero
otherwise. If the count element has a value greater than one, the block
asserts only the most recent valid message on the output port.
• The Decode block buffers its input internally. It updates its output port only
during sample times when it has successfully assembled at least one
complete message of length n.
Note that more than one complete message might be assembled during one
sample time. The Decode block successively overwrites these messages such
that only the most recent message is on the output port.

Resolution vector — Enter a vector or scalar value as the resolution vector.

This must be a vector of the same length as the data type vector. Otherwise,
the scalar value is applied to the length of the data type vector. The block
works with the data types as follows

Type Effect

Raw The block ignores any resolution value. However, you must
still include an associated value in the resolution vector.
BNR, BCD The resolution value specifies, in output port units, the value
of the least significant bit of the data field. For example, if
the resolution is 10 and the input data contains the value
100, the output signal will contain the number 1000.

Discretes The block ignores any resolution value. However, you must
still include an associated value in the resolution vector.

Sync mask — Enter a value, in hexadecimal, to specify which bits (if any) of
the input words are the sync bits. (A sync bit lets you specify, using other
parameters, when a message should begin.) The Decode block will examine
these bits to look for the start of the next message. A message might be a string
of one or more words. For example, a sync mask value of 0x300 equals
1100000000 in binary. This value selects the SDI bits (bits 9 and 10) as the
sync bits. This functionality works in conjunction with the Sync value
parameter.
If the sync mask is 0x0, no sync logic is used. In this case, the next word always
begins a new message.

7-11
7 Aerospace I/O Support

Sync value(s) — This parameter specifies the sync logic for the block. Enter
one hex value to specify oneSync, two hex values separated by a space for
twoSync logic. For example, the sync value
0x100

selects oneSync logic. The sync value

0x100 0x200

selects twoSync logic. You can enter an 32-bit value.

The sync value takes into account the value of the sync mask, as follows:

• Assume the following

sync mask = 0x300
sync value = 0x100
When looking for the beginning of a new message, the block ANDs each input
word with the sync mask 0x300 and compares the result with 0x100 and
0x300. When it finds a match, the block stops this search and begins a new
search, looking for the next message. The block decodes the next n words
starting at this point.
• Assume the following
sync mask = 0x300
sync value = 0x100 0x200
When looking for the beginning of a new message, the block ANDs each input
word with 0x300 and compares the result to 0x100 and 0x300. When the
block finds a match, and when the next input word, when ANDed with 0x300,
equals 0x200 and 0x300, this second word begins a new message.

Once the block locates the beginning of a message, it uses the next n input
words with the appropriate label to assemble the next output message. The
block does not use sync logic until it is time to begin the assembly of a new
message.

Provide time tags — Select this check box to enable an output port of width
2n + 1, with time tag data in the last n elements.

7-12
 8

Access IO

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.accesio.com).

WDG-CSM (p. 8-2) The WDG-CSM is a watchdog timer used to detect

computer failure.
8 Access IO

WDG-CSM
The WDG-CSM is a watchdog timer used to detect computer failure. You can
program this watchdog to reboot the system when a programmable timeout
occurs. The timeout interval can range from 20 microseconds to 400 seconds.
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:
• “WDG-CSM Watchdog Timer” on page 8-2

Board Characteristics
Board name WDG-CSM
Manufacturer Access IO
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

WDG-CSM Watchdog Timer

Driver Block Parameters
Watchdog Time [s] (20us-4800s) — Enter a timeout value in seconds.
Show reset port — Select this check box to enable an input port on the driver
block. A signal connected to this port resets the watchdog.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

8-2
 9

ADDI-DATA

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.addi-data.de).

APCI-1710 (p. 9-2) The APCI-1710 is a general-purpose counting board with

four function modules.
PA-1700 (p. 9-5) The PA1700 is a counter board with three 24-bit counters
for connecting three incremental encoders.
9 ADDI-DATA

APCI-1710
The APCI-1710 is a general-purpose counting board with four function
modules.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “APCI-1710 Incremental Encoder” on page 9-2

Note, xPC Target only supports the 32-bit mode for this board. As a result, each
port only supports a single encoder.

Board Characteristics
Board name APCI-1710
Manufacturer ADDI-DATA
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

APCI-1710 Incremental Encoder

A function module is individually programmable with different firmware. You
do this by using the ADDI-DATA utility SET1710. This driver supports the
APCI-1710 if the specified function module is programmed with the
incremental encoder firmware.
If the board and its specific module are not programmed with the incremental
encoder firmware, you must invoke SET1710 before the driver can be used
within an xPC Target application. In this case, plug the board into a PC
running Microsoft Windows and install the board as indicated in the
ADDI-DATA user manual. Use SET1710 to download the incremental encoder
firmware onto the appropriate function module. After this step, you can remove
the board and plug it into the target PC.
This driver block has two block outputs. The values output depend on the value
of the Type of Evaluation parameter. See below for further information. Refer

9-2
 APCI-1710

to the APCI-1710-manual for information on how to connect the encoders to the

board.

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list select 1, 2, 3, or 4. This field specifies the
function module (counter) to be used for this block. It must be programmed
with the incremental encoder firmware. Two blocks for the same board cannot
have the same module (channel) specified.
Type of evaluation — From the list select the type of counter evaluation as
either

• Virtual Absolute — Gets the counter value as an absolute value after the
reference point of the encoder has been reached for the first time. The first
output of the block outputs the absolute angle of the connected encoder in
radians. As long as the reference point has not been reached for the first
time, the second block output is zero. If the reference point is reached for the
first time, and only for the first time, the corresponding counter is reset to
zero and the second output goes to 1. From then on the output 1 outputs an
absolute angle even if the encoder is turned multiple times. The second
output can be used for controlling or switching different Simulink
submodels.
• Reset and Index Output Up-Dating — Gets the counter value in the range
of 0..2*pi or –pi..+pi where the counter is reset every time the reference point
is reached. The first output of the block outputs the angle of the connected
encoder in radian. As long as the reference point has not been reached for the
first time, the second block output is zero. Every time the reference point is
reached, the counter is reset to zero and, depending on the direction of the
encoder at this event, the output value is either incremented or decremented
by the value 1. In other words the second output outputs the actual number
of turns n because the reference point has been reached for the first time. If
the second output is multiplied by 2*pi and added to the value of the first
output, you get an absolute multiturn angle, even if the counter is reset
periodically.

Mode — From the list, choose single, double, or quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode, that is, how many phase changes of the
specified module are detected (see the APC1-1710 manual).

9-3
9 ADDI-DATA

Hysteresis — From the list choose either off or on. The Hysteresis parameter
specifies whether a counter should skip a tick if the direction changes (see the
APC1-1700 manual).
Resolution — Specifies the resolution of the connected incremental encoder for
one revolution.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

9-4
 PA-1700

PA-1700
The PA1700 is a counter board with three 24-bit counters for connecting three
incremental encoders.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PA-1700 Incremental Encoder” on page 9-5

Board Characteristics
Board name PA1700
Manufacturer ADDI-DATA
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PA-1700 Incremental Encoder

The driver block has two block outputs. The first outputs the absolute angle in
radians. The second output is zero as long as the index or the reference point
was not reached by rotating the encoder. If it is reached for the first time, and
only for the first time, the corresponding counter is reset to zero and this output
goes to 1. From then on the output 1 outputs an absolute angle even if the
encoder is turned multiple times. The second output can be used for controlling
or switching different Simulink submodels.

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list select 1, 2, or 3. This parameter specifies the counter
used for this block. Two blocks for the same board (same base address) cannot
have the same counter (channel) specified.
Mode — From the list select single, double, or quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode, that is, how many phase changes of the
specified counter are detected (see the PA1700 manual).

9-5
9 ADDI-DATA

Hysteresis — From the list choose either off or on. The Hysteresis parameter
specifies whether a counter should skip a tick if the direction changes (see the
PA1700 manual).
Resolution — Specifies the resolution of the connected incremental encoder for
one revolution.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base Address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The following jumpers must be set according to the parameters entered above:

• Jumper J16, 17, and 18 must be set to position 1-2.

• Jumper J13, 14, and 15 must be set to position 1-2.
• Jumper J1, 5, and 9 must be set according to the connected encoders.
• Jumper J2, 6, and 10 must be set according to the connected encoders.
• Jumper J3, 7, and 11 must be set according to the connected encoders.
• Jumper J4, 8, and 12 must be set according to the connected encoders.

For information on how to connect the encoders to the board, see the PA1700
manual.
If you want to use the 5 V power supply from the board (PIN20), you must
insert Fuse 1 on the board. Refer to the PA1700 manual.

9-6
 10

Adlink

This chapter describes the Adlink boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.adlinktech.com).

Adlink PCI-8133 (p. 10-2) Three-phase encoder counter and PWM output board
Adlink PCI-6208A (p. 10-5) Digital to analog converter board with four bits of digital
input and four bits of digital output lines.
10 Adlink

Adlink PCI-8133
The Adlink PCI-8133 is a three-phase encoder counter and PWM output board.
This board has three 16-bit quadruple AB phase encoder counters, 12-bit PWM
resolution, and eight general-purpose digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports the three-phase PWM generation section of the board
with this driver block:
• “PCI-8133 3-Phase PWM” on page 10-2

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-8133
Manufacturer Adlink
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support No

PCI-8133 3-Phase PWM

Scaling Output to Input

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: double 0 to 1

Of Note
• There is one input port for each phase (channel). You can select and order
each phase (channel) individually.
• Hardware outputs are open collector lines that can draw a maximum current
of 20 mA.
• To enable PWM generation, ensure that the OENA pin (pin 34 of connector
CN1) is connected to pin VCC (pin 19 of connector CN1).

10-2
 Adlink PCI-8133

• Although the duty cycle inputs are of type double, the duty cycle resolution
is finite. The value of the Factor n determining square wave period
parameter defines the duty cycle resolution. For example, if the value of
Factor n determining square wave period is 1000 for an output period of
200 microseconds, the duty cycle can be adapted with a resolution of 1000
steps (from 0...1), in relation to the value of Factor n determining square
wave period. The duty cycle resolution lowers by a smaller output period (or
higher output frequency).

Driver Block Parameters

Factor n determining square wave period — Defines the period (duration)
of the square wave, where the square wave is the sum of the on and off part.
This parameter is also called the n factor. The n factor must be in the range
from 1 to 65535. The resulting period is calculated as
T=n*200 nanoseconds

Factor m determining dead time duration — Defines the duration of the

dead time that is needed if the output lines drive transistor bridges. This
parameter is also called the m factor. The m factor must be in the range from 1
to 255. The resulting duration is calculated as
Tdt= 750 nanoseconds*(m+1)

Channel vector — Defines the channel (phase) that is active. Enter a vector of
numbers between 1 and 3 to This parameter also specifies the input port of the
block is connected to the channel. Channel value 1 represents phase U, value
2 represents phase V, and value 3 represents phase W. The maximum length
of the vector is 3.
Reset vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length and channel
order as the Channel vector value. Enter 1 or 0. A value of 1 resets the output.
A value of 0 retains the last value of the duty cycle when the target application
stops. You can specify a different reset vector value for each channel.
Initial duty cycle vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length
and channel order as the Channel vector value. Enter 1 or 0. A value of 1 sets
the reset duty cycle for the corresponding channel if the Reset vector for that
channel is also 1.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

10-3
10 Adlink

PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

10-4
 Adlink PCI-6208A

Adlink PCI-6208A
The Adlink PCI-6208A is a digital to analog converter board. This board has
four bits of digital input and four bits of digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with the following driver blocks:

• “PCI-6208A Analog Output” on page 10-5

• “PCI-6208A Digital Input” on page 10-7
• “PCI-6208A Digital Output” on page 10-8

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6208A
Manufacturer Adlink
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6208A Analog Output

Scaling Output to Input

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

ma Double 1

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.

For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels enter
[1, 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4.

10-5
10 Adlink

Range — From the list, choose

• 0 to 20 ma
• 5 to 25 ma
• 4 to 20 ma
Signal input to the block is in milliamps (ma). The output voltage maximum is
10 volts. If the resistance is too large to get the chosen current, the voltage
measured across the output load will saturate.
For example, assume an input sine wave with:
Input = 10*sin(omega*t) + 10

If you set the range to 0 to 20 ma, the current should oscillate from 0 to 20 ma
at omega radians per second. The current will only reach 20 ma if the load
resistance is less than or equal to 500 ohms. If the load resistance is 1000 ohms,
the maximum current that 10 volts can drive is only 10 ma. The top half of the
sine wave will be clipped off.
Note the following:

• The scaling in this block is correct for the current output ports, not the
voltage ones.
• This block limits output to positive values only. This is in response to the
board hardware manual caution that states driving a negative voltage from
the D/A converter to the voltage to current output board might cause damage
to the current output.

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running. For example, if Channel
vector is [1 2] and the Reset vector is [1], the action taken will be the same
as if Reset vector was set to [1 1]. Both channels will be reset to their initial
values when model execution is stopped.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between

10-6
 Adlink PCI-6208A

the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. When model
execution is stopped, the corresponding position in Reset vector is checked.
Depending on that value, the channel is either reset to the initial value or
remains at the last value attained while the model was running. For example,
assume that Channel vector is [ 1 2 ], Reset vector is [1 0], and Initial
value vector is [2.3 5.6]. On initial download, channel 1 is set to 2.3 ma and
channel 2 to 5.6 ma. When the model is stopped, channel 1 resets to 2.3 ma and
channel 2 remains at the last value attained.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6208A Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0

TTL high = 1

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the digital input port
ports.
For example, to use the first and second digital input channels enter
[1, 2]

10-7
10 Adlink

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4. Each input can be listed at most
once in this vector.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6208A Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the digital output

channels.
For example, to use the first and second analog digital output channels enter
[1, 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 8.

10-8
 Adlink PCI-6208A

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running. For example, if Channel
vector is [1 2] and the Reset vector is [1], the action taken will be the same
as if Reset vector was set to [1 1]. Both channels will be reset to their initial
values when model execution is stopped.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is
the initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values
between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. When
model execution is stopped, the corresponding position in Reset vector is
checked. Depending on that value, the channel is either reset to the initial
value or remains at the last value attained while the model was running. For
example, assume that Channel vector is [ 1 2 ], Reset vector is [1 0], and
Initial value vector is [0 1]. On initial download, channel 1 is set to off and
channel 2 to on. When the model is stopped, channel 1 resets to off and channel
2 remains at the last value attained.
If the Initial value vector value is greater than 0.5, the corresponding digital
output port is turned on, otherwise it is turned off.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

10-9
10 Adlink

10-10
 11

Advantech

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.advantech.com)

PCL-1800 (p. 11-3) 16 single or eight differential analog channels, two analog
output D/A channels, and 16 digital input lines and 16
digital output lines
PCL-711B (p. 11-8) Eight single-ended analog input channels, one analog
output channel, and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital
output lines
PCL-726 (p. 11-12) Six independent analog output D/A channels, and 16
digital input lines and 16 digital output lines
PCL-727 (p. 11-16) 12 independent analog output D/A channels, 16 digital
input lines and 16 digital output lines
PCL-728 (p. 11-20) Two independent analog output D/A channels
PCL-812 (p. 11-22) 16 single ended analog input channels, two analog output
D/A channels, and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital
output lines
PCL-812PG (p. 11-27) 16 single or eight differential analog channels, two analog
output D/A channels, and 16 digital input lines and 16
digital output lines
PCL-818 (p. 11-32) 16 single or eight differential analog channels, two analog
output D/A channels, and 16 digital input lines and 16
digital output lines
PCL-818H (p. 11-38) 16 single or eight differential analog channels, one analog
output D/A channel, and 16 digital input lines and 16
digital output lines
11 Advantech

PCL-818HD (p. 11-43) 16 single or eight differential analog channels, one analog
output D/A channel, and 16 digital input lines and 16
digital output lines
PCL-818HG (p. 11-48) 16 single or eight differential analog input (A/D)
channels, one analog output (D/A) channel, and 16 digital
input lines and 16 digital output lines
PCL-818L (p. 11-53) 16 single or eight differential analog input (A/D)
channels, one analog output (D/A) channel, and 16 digital
input lines and 16 digital output lines

11-2
 PCL-1800

PCL-1800
The PCL-1800 is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 330 KHz, two analog output
D/A channels (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-1800 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-3

• “PCL-1800 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-5
• “PCL-1800 Digital Input” on page 11-6
• “PCL-1800 Digital Output” on page 11-7

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCL-1800
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-1800 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

11-3
11 Advantech

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1
and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
the numbering of the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to +2.5 2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25 0 to +1.25 1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts and the second channel is 0
to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

11-4
 PCL-1800

Your choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-1800 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

0 to +10 10 0 to +5 5

11-5
11 Advantech

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts and the second channel is 0
to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-1800 Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

11-6
 PCL-1800

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-1800 Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-7
11 Advantech

PCL-711B
The PCL-711B is an I/O board with eight single-ended analog input channels
(12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 25 kHz, one analog output channel
(12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with four driver blocks:

• “PCL-711B Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-8

• “PCL-711B Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-10
• “PCL-711B Digital Input” on page 11-10
• “PCL-711B Digital Output” on page 11-11

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-711B
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-711B Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. For example, to use the
first and second analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,2]

11-8
 PCL-711B

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
-2.5 to 2.5 volts, enter
[-10,-2.5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-9
11 Advantech

PCL-711B Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Range — From the list, choose either 0-10V or 0-5V.
The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-711B Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

11-10
 PCL-711B

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-711B Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-11
11 Advantech

PCL-726
The PCL-726 is an I/O board with, six independent analog output D/A channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “PCL-726 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-12
• “PCL-726 Digital Input” on page 11-14
• “PCL-726 Digital Output” on page 11-15

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-726
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-726 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

11-12
 PCL-726

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

0 to +10 10

0 to +5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-13
11 Advantech

PCL-726 Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-14
 PCL-726

PCL-726 Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-15
11 Advantech

PCL-727
The PCL-727 is an I/O board with 12 independent analog output D/A channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “PCL-727 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-16
• “PCL-727 Digital Input” on page 11-18
• “PCL-727 Digital Output” on page 11-19

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-727
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-727 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 12. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

11-16
 PCL-727

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-5 to +5 -5

0 to +5 5

0 to 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-17
11 Advantech

PCL-727 Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-18
 PCL-727

PCL-727 Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-19
11 Advantech

PCL-728
The PCL-728 is an I/O board with two independent analog output D/A channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PCL-728 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-20

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-728
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus Type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-728 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Channel numbers begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts

numbering channels with 0.

11-20
 PCL-728

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

0 to 10 10

0 to +5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-21
11 Advantech

PCL-812
The PCL-812 is an I/O board with 16 single-ended analog input channels
(12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 30 KHz, two analog output D/A
channels (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-812 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-22

• “PCL-812 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-24
• “PCL-812 Digital Input” on page 11-25
• “PCL-812 Digital Output” on page 11-26

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-812
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-812 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. For example, to use the
first and second analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1,2]

11-22
 PCL-812

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.0 to +2.0 -2.0

-1.0 to +1.0 -1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
-5 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,-5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-23
11 Advantech

PCL-812 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range Range code

0 to +5V 5

For example, if both channels are 0 to +5 volts, enter

[5,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

11-24
 PCL-812

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-812 Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-25
11 Advantech

PCL-812 Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-26
 PCL-812PG

PCL-812PG
The PCL-812PG is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 30 KHz, two analog output
D/A channels (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-812PG Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-27

• “PCL-812PG Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-29
• “PCL-812PG Digital Input” on page 11-30
• “PCL-812PG Digital Output” on page 11-31

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-812PG
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-812PG Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. For example, to use the
first and second analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1,2]

11-27
11 Advantech

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

0 to 10 10

0 to +5 5

0 to +2.5 2.5

0 to +1.25 1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-28
 PCL-812PG

PCL-812PG Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range Range Code

-10 to +10 V -10

-5 to +5 V -5

0 to 10 V 10

0 to +5 V 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

11-29
11 Advantech

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-812PG Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-30
 PCL-812PG

PCL-812PG Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-31
11 Advantech

PCL-818
The PCL-818 is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 KHz, two analog output
D/A channels (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-818 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-32

• “PCL-818 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-34
• “PCL-818 Digital Input” on page 11-35
• “PCL-818 Digital Output” on page 11-36

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-818
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-818 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1

11-32
 PCL-818

and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

0 to 10 10

0 to +5 5

0 to +2.5 2.5

0 to +1.25 1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

11-33
11 Advantech

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

Your choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

11-34
 PCL-818

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range Range Code

-10 to +10V -10

-5 to +5 V -5

0 to 10 V 10

0 to +5 V 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818 Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines used.

11-35
11 Advantech

For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter

[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818 Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

11-36
 PCL-818

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-37
11 Advantech

PCL-818H
The PCL-818H is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 KHz, one analog output
D/A channel (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-818H Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-38

• “PCL-818H Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-40
• “PCL-818H Digital Input” on page 11-41
• “PCL-818H Digital Output” on page 11-42

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-818H
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-818H Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1

11-38
 PCL-818H

and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

0 to 10 10

0 to +5 5

0 to +2.5 2.5

0 to +1.25 1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

11-39
11 Advantech

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time —Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818H Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Range — From the list, choose either 0-10V or 0-5V.
The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-40
 PCL-818H

PCL-818H Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-41
11 Advantech

PCL-818H Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-42
 PCL-818HD

PCL-818HD
The PCL-818HD is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 KHz, one analog output
D/A channels (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-818HD Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-43

• “PCL-818HD Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-45
• “PCL-818HD Digital Input” on page 11-46
• “PCL-818HD Digital Output” on page 11-47

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-818HD
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-818HD Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1

11-43
11 Advantech

and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

0 to 10 10

0 to +5 5

0 to +2.5 2.5

0 to +1.25 1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

11-44
 PCL-818HD

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

Your choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818HD Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Range — From the list, choose either 0-10V or 0-5V.
The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-45
11 Advantech

PCL-818HD Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-46
 PCL-818HD

PCL-818HD Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-47
11 Advantech

PCL-818HG
The PCL-818 is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 KHz, one analog
output (D/A) channel (12-bit), and 16 digital input lines and 16 digital output
lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-818HG Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-48

• “PCL-818HG Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-50
• “PCL-818HG Digital Input” on page 11-51
• “PCL-818HG Digital Output” on page 11-52

Board Characteristics
Board name PCL-818HG
Manufacturer Advantech
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCL-818HG Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

11-48
 PCL-818HG

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1
and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

0 to 10 10

0 to +1 1

0 to +0.1 0.1

0 to +0.01 0.01

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

11-49
11 Advantech

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

Your choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818HG Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Range — From the list, choose either 0-10V or 0-5V.
The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-50
 PCL-818HG

PCL-818HG Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-51
11 Advantech

PCL-818HG Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-52
 PCL-818L

PCL-818L
The PCL-818L is an I/O board with 16 single or eight differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate or 40 KHz, one analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input lines, and 16 digital output
lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCL-818L Analog Input (A/D)” on page 11-53

• “PCL-818L Analog Output (D/A)” on page 11-55
• “PCL-818L Digital Input” on page 11-56
• “PCL-818L Digital Output” on page 11-57

Board Characteristics

Board name PCL-818

Manufacturer Advantech

Bus type ISA

Access method I/O mapped

Multiple block instance support Yes

Multiple board support Yes

PCL-818L Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

11-53
11 Advantech

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended), enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you select differential
(Input coupling parameter set to differential), enter numbers between 1
and 8. For example, to use the first and second analog output (A/D) channels,
enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

-1.25 to +1.25 -1.25

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
-5 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,-5]

The range settings must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

11-54
 PCL-818L

Your choice must correspond to the MUX switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCL-818L Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Range — From the list, choose either 0-10V or 0-5V.
The range setting must correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-55
11 Advantech

PCL-818L Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter channels between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-56
 PCL-818L

PCL-818L Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter channels between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use the first eight digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

11-57
11 Advantech

11-58
 12

Analogic

This chapter describes the Analogic I/O boards supported by xPC Target
(http://www.analogic.com).

AIM12 (p. 12-2) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit)
AIM16 (p. 12-6) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit)
12 Analogic

AIM12
This board comes in three configurations from the factory. The configurations
are the AIM12-1/104, the AIM16-1/104, and the AIM16-2/104. The
AIM16-1/104 and the AIM16-2/104 differ only in the time needed to acquire
each sample. The AIM12-1/104 acquires 4 fewer bits, but since the 12 bits are
placed in the high 12 bits of the result word, the internal scaling factors are
identical to those used with the AIM16. The output of the AIM12 changes in
larger steps. Gain settings for the AIM12 are also different than for the AIM16.
When acquiring samples from multiple channels, the board is driven in its
burst mode when the highest clock rate available for the board is used. The
AIM12-1/104 can acquire all 16 channels in 160 microseconds.
The AIM12 hardware can acquire from 1 to 16 (single ended) channels at each
sample time. These channels must be in a contiguous group, but can start with
any channel number and end with any channel number that is greater than or
equal to the start channel number. A single channel is acquired by setting both
first channel and last channel to the same value.
The choice of unipolar or bipolar conversion range is made by placing jumpers
in accordance with the hardware manual. The driver is able to read the
hardware configuration and adjusts the integer to float conversion as
necessary.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AIM12 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 12-3

• “AIM12 Digital Input” on page 12-4
• “AIM12 Digital Output” on page 12-5

Board Characteristics
Board name AIM12
Manufacturer Analogic
Bus type PC/104
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

12-2
 AIM12

AIM12 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

First channel — In Single-ended (16 channels) input mode, enter a number
between 1 and 16 to indicate the first channel to be acquired. In Differential
(8 channels) input mode, enter a a number between 1 and 8.

Last channel — This is the last channel to acquire. The number must be
greater than or equal to the first channel. In Single-ended (16 channels)
input mode, the number must be less than or equal to 16. In Differential (8
channels) input mode, the number must be less than or equal to 8.

Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

Check the hardware manual of the board for wiring configurations.

Gain vector — Enter a vector of gain values with one entry for each channel
in the range first channel to last channel. Allowable gain settings for the
AIM12 are 1, 10, and 100. If you enter a scalar for gain, this gain value is used
for all channels.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-3
12 Analogic

AIM12 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Channel group — Choose Lower 8 bits to connect to channels 1 through 8 or
Upper 8 bits to connect to channels 9 through 16.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-4
 AIM12

AIM12 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Channel group — Choose Lower 8 bits to connect to channels 1 through 8 or
Upper 8 bits to connect to channels 9 through 16.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-5
12 Analogic

AIM16
This board comes in three configurations from the factory. The configurations
are the AIM12-1/104, the AIM16-1/104 and the AIM16-2/104. The
AIM16-1/104 and the AIM16-2/104 differ only in the time needed to acquire
each sample. The AIM12-1/104 acquires 4 fewer bits, but since the 12 bits are
placed in the high 12 bits of the result word, the internal scaling factors are
identical to those used with the AIM16. The output of the AIM12 changes in
larger steps. Gain settings for the AIM12 are also different than for the AIM16.
When acquiring samples from multiple channels, the board is driven in its
burst mode when the highest clock rate available for the board is used. The
AIM16-1/104 can acquire all 16 channels in 160 microseconds while the
AIM16-2/104 completes the same acquisition in 80 microseconds.
The AIM16 hardware can acquire from 1 to 16 (single ended) channels at each
sample time. These channels must be in a contiguous group, but can start with
any channel number and end with any channel number that is greater than or
equal to the start channel number. A single channel is acquired by setting both
first channel and last channel to the same value.
The choice of unipolar or bipolar conversion range is made by placing jumpers
in accordance with the hardware manual. The driver is able to read the
hardware configuration and adjusts the integer to float conversion as
necessary.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AIM16 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 12-7

• “AIM16 Digital Input” on page 12-8
• “AIM16 Digital Output” on page 12-9

Board Characteristics
Board name AIM16
Manufacturer Analogic
Bus type PC/104
Access method I/O mapped

12-6
 AIM16

Multiple block instance support No

Multiple board support Yes

AIM16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

First channel — In Single-ended (16 channels) input mode, enter a number
between 1 and 16 to indicate the first channel to be acquired. In Differential
(8 channels) input mode, enter a a number between 1 and 8.

Last channel — This is the last channel to acquire. The number must be
greater than or equal to the first channel. In Single-ended (16 channels)
input mode, the number must be less than or equal to 16. In Differential (8
channels) input mode, the number must be less than or equal to 8.

Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

Check the hardware manual of the board for wiring configurations.

Gain vector — Enter a vector of gain values with one entry for each channel
in the range first channel to last channel. Allowable gain settings for the
AIM16 are 1, 2, 4, and 8. If you enter a scalar for gain, this gain value is used
for all channels.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-7
12 Analogic

AIM16 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Channel group — Choose Lower 8 bits to connect to channels 1 through 8 or
Upper 8 bits to connect to channels 9 through 16.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-8
 AIM16

AIM16 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Channel group — Choose Lower 8 bits to connect to channels 1 through 8 or
Upper 8 bits to connect to channels 9 through 16.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as determined by the hardware jumpers on the board.

12-9
12 Analogic

12-10
 13

BittWare

This chapter describes the BittWare boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.bittware.com).

Audio-PMC+ (p. 13-2) Professional audio board with 8 channels of audio input
and output.
13 BittWare

Audio-PMC+
The Audio-PMC+ board is an audio board with 8 I/O channels.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Audio-PMC+ Analog Input” on page 13-3

• “Audio-PMC+ Analog Output” on page 13-5

Block parameters for the input and output blocks appear the same.

Board Characteristics
Board name Audio-PMC+
Manufacturer BittWare
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support No

Features
• Input and output are in the form of the Signal Processing Blockset frame
signal type when the frame is larger than a single sample.
• The analog input block outputs a double or 32 bit integer frame of data.
• The Audio-PMC+ board performs acquisition simultaneously for all the
selected channels in a model.
• The analog output block is dynamically typed. The integer or double data
type is taken from the connection instead of a block parameter.

Hardware Installation Notes

The Audio-PMC+ daughter board might come from BittWare with jumpers
installed to boot from an onboard ROM. You must remove these jumpers, as
follows:

13-2
 Audio-PMC+

1 With the Audio-PMC+ off the carrier board, look for 6 pairs of pins along one
edge. For proper operation with xPC Target, none of the pairs should be
jumpered.

2 If there are any jumpers present, remove and then reinstall the jumpers
with only one pin connected. Leave the other side of the jumper hanging.
Leaving the jumpers like this will provide you with the jumpers if you want
to use the board in ROM bootable mode at some future time.

Audio-PMC+ Analog Input

Driver Block Parameters
Channel Vector — This is a vector of channels. Specifies the input channels
that the block works on. For example, to use the first, third, and fifth analog
input channels, enter
[1,3,5]

Output Format — Specify the format that the data takes. The choices are

• A normalized double in the range from -1.0 to 1.0

• An unscaled integer

The unscaled integer format is usable with blocks that can accept fixed point
data. This format contains the data in the lower 24 bits of a 32 bit integer
with sign extension in the upper 8 bits.

This parameter is only settable for the analog input block. The analog output
block determines the data type from the connection and sets itself
appropriately.
Frame Size, Sample Rate, and Sampletime — These three parameters are
not independent but are related by:

FrameSize = Sampletime × SampleRate

After you specify two of the parameters, the equation determines the third
parameter.

13-3
13 BittWare

For example, if you set Frame Size to 32 and Sample Rate to 40000, specify
Sampletime as -1. It is computed internally to 0.0008 seconds. This example
model will execute every 0.0008 seconds, which is every 32 samples at 40 KHz.
Conversely, you can also specify that you want to execute every 1.0 ms with a
Frame Size of 64 samples. Specify Sample Rate as -1. It is computed to be
64000 Hz.
The implementation of Sample Rate on the Audio-PMC+ might cause the rate
on your board to be inexact. Audio-PMC+ derives the sample rate using the
PWM0 output from the first 21065L SHARC DSP chip. The base clock that
effects this output is the 60 MHz CPU clock for sample rates between 100 KHz
and 20 KHz and a prescaled 30 MHz CPU clock (half the 60 MHz CPU clock)
for sample rates between 8 KHz and 20 KHz.
The sample rate is implemented internally by specifying the total number of
counts per sample interval. For example, the number of counts for a sample
rate of 44.1 KHz is calculated as
6 3
60 ×10 ⁄ 44.1 ×10 = 1360.544217

This value is rounded down to 1360. To calculate the actual clock sample rate,
divide 60 MHz by the number of counts
6
60 ×10 ⁄ 1360 = 44117.647

The result indicates that the sample rate is off by 0.04%. This calculation
assumes that the CPU clock is exactly 60 MHz.
Since you can build a model with just input or just output, the three rate
parameters are included in both block parameter dialogs. You must set them
to equal values if you have a model that has both. If they are not equal, you will
get an error when you try to build the model.
The practical limit on Sample Rate is
8000 ≤ SampleRate ≤ 100000

Below 8 KHz, the output digital filter does not seem to work, although the
converter continues to work there.
Frame Size values can be between 1 and 256. If the specified or computed
frame size exceeds 256, the driver will return an error during initialization.

13-4
 Audio-PMC+

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note The use of multiple boards, at the same time and in the same model, is
unsupported.

Audio-PMC+ Analog Output

Driver Block Parameters
Channel Vector — This is a vector of channels. Specifies the output channels
that the block works on. For example, to use the first, third, and fifth analog
output channels, enter
[1,3,5]

Frame Size, Sample Rate, and Sampletime — These three parameters are
not independent but are related by:

FrameSize = Sampletime × SampleRate

After you specify two of the parameters, the equation determines the third
parameter.
For example, if you set Frame Size to 32 and Sample Rate to 40000, specify
Sampletime as -1. It is computed internally to 0.0008 seconds. This example
model will execute every 0.0008 seconds, which is every 32 samples at 40 KHz.

13-5
13 BittWare

Conversely, you can also specify that you want to execute every 1.0 ms with a
Frame Size of 64 samples. Specify Sample Rate as -1. It is computed to be
64000 Hz.
The implementation of Sample Rate on the Audio-PMC+ might cause the rate
on your board to be inexact. Audio-PMC+ derives the sample rate using the
PWM0 output from the first 21065L SHARC DSP chip. The base clock that
effects this output is the 60 MHz CPU clock for sample rates between 100 KHz
and 20 KHz and a prescaled 30 MHz CPU clock (half the 60 MHz CPU clock)
for sample rates between 8 KHz and 20 KHz.
The sample rate is implemented internally by specifying the total number of
counts per sample interval. For example, the number of counts for a sample
rate of 44.1 KHz is calculated as
6 3
60 ×10 ⁄ 44.1 ×10 = 1360.544217

This value is rounded down to 1360. To calculate the actual clock sample rate,
divide 60 MHz by the number of counts
6
60 ×10 ⁄ 1360 = 44117.647

The result indicates that the sample rate is off by 0.04%. This calculation
assumes that the CPU clock is exactly 60 MHz.
Since you can build a model with just input or just output, the three rate
parameters are included in both block parameter dialogs. You must set them
to equal values if you have a model that has both. If they are not equal, you will
get an error when you try to build the model.
The practical limit on Sample Rate is
8000 ≤ SampleRate ≤ 100000

Below 8 KHz, the output digital filter does not seem to work, although the
converter continues to work there.
Frame Size values can be between 1 and 256. If the specified or computed
frame size exceeds 256, the driver will return an error during initialization.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

13-6
 Audio-PMC+

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note The use of multiple boards, at the same time and in the same model, is
unsupported.

Frame Size, Sample Rate, and Sampletime Notes

Experimentally, with all 8 input and all 8 output channels in use, the
Audio-PMC+ can run with sample rates below the following frequencies as a
function of Frame Size:

Frame Size Maximum Sample Rate

1 15 KHz
2 30 KHz
3 40 KHz
4 45 KHz
8 70 KHz
16 80 KHz
32 80 KHz
64 100KHz
128 100KHz
256 100KHz

If fewer than all 8 inputs and outputs are in use, then the maximum sample
rate increases.

13-7
13 BittWare

Frame Size 1 Channel 2 Channels 4 Channels 6 Channels 8 Channels

1 30 KHz 30 KHz 25 KHz 18 KHz 15 KHz

2 60 KHz 60 KHz 45 KHz 33 KHz 30 KHz

These above rates were obtained from testing at The MathWorks. As with all
hardware benchmarks, results might vary, depending on a number of
hardware conditions. For example, the following hardware elements, among
others, might effect your throughput:

• The PCI bus interface chip set on the mother board

• Main memory speed
• General mother board architecture

Model Notes
Model Execution Timing — To run the model, the xPC Target model is
executed when each frame completes on the board. Set the simulation
parameters to use the interrupt from the Audio-PMC+ rather than the timer
interrupt when running the model. First, you need to determine the interrupt
vector number to which the board is set. This is determined by the BIOS in the
target machine during boot.

1 From the MATLAB Command Window, type

getxpcpci

This command lists board information for all installed PCI devices that xPC
Target knows about.

2 Find the IRQ specified for this board. This is the interrupt source number
you need to specify in the xPC target code generation options field in step
6 of the following procedure.

Set the interrupt vector number:

13-8
 Audio-PMC+

1 From the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of your Simulink
model.

The Simulink model appears

2 From the Simulation menu, click Configuration Parameters.

The Configuration Parameter dialog box is displayed for the model.

3 Click the xPC Target options node.

4 Ensure that the Execution mode field is set to Real-Time.

5 Click the Real-time interrupt source list.

6 Select the interrupt number to which the board is set (from step 2 in the
previous procedure).

7 Click the I/O board generating the interrupt list and select AudioPMC+
from the list.

8 Click OK and save the model.

Failure to set the interrupt vector as described, which results in your using the
xPC Target timer, will not stop the model from running. However, you will
occasionally see corrupt data since the Audio-PMC+ clock and the xPC Target
timer drift relative to each other and will sometimes overlap.
Example Models — Two example models are included with this version in the
xpcdemos directory. Correct operation of either of these requires that the
interrupt source be set correctly in the simulation parameters dialog.
xpc8audiochannels.mdl shows the use of all 8 input and 8 output channels at
the same time. A block from the Signal Processing Blockset is used to convert
from frame to sample based signals to drive the xPC Target scopes.
xpcaudiospectrum.mdl uses the xPC Target Spectrum Scope subsystem from
the xpcdspspectrum sample model with the Audio-PMC+ as the source. This
model only works correctly with Frame Size set to 1 because of the way that the
spectrum scope displays the results.

13-9
13 BittWare

Model Execution Limitations — Model execution is entered each time a

frame completes on the Audio-PMC+ board. The frame rate is the fastest clock
available. You cannot obtain a minor step execution that runs more frequently
than frame completions. Any attempt to do a multirate model must use the
frame completion time as the fastest rate. The audio input and audio output
blocks must be executed at the fastest rate in the model.
Input and output data from these blocks is in the form of a frame of data as
used by the Signal Processing Blockset. If the frame size is 1, then the blocks
revert to sample based signals. The blocks in the Signal Processing Blockset
expect to see signals that are frames.

13-10
 14

BVM

This chapter describes the BVM I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.bvmltd.co.uk).

PMCDIO64 (p. 14-2) A 64-bit digital I/O board with two ports. Each port can be
configured to be either 32 independent 1-bit channels or a
single 32-bit wide integer channel.
14 BVM

PMCDIO64
The PMCDIO64 is a 64-bit digital I/O board. The hardware provides 64 bits,
which the driver splits into two ports of 32 bits each. Each port can be
configured to be either input or output. In addition, each port can be configured
to be either 32 independent 1-bit channels or a single 32-bit wide integer
channel.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PMCDIO64 Digital Input” on page 14-3

• “PMCDIO64 Digital Output” on page 14-4

Board Characteristics

Board name PMCDIO64

Manufacturer BVM

Bus type PCI

Access method Memory mapped

Multiple block instance support Yes

Multiple board support Yes

14-2
 PMCDIO64

PMCDIO64 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Format — From the list, select either 32 One bit channels or Single 32 bit
port.

If the format is 32 One bit channels, then the channel vector specifies the
configuration of the block. Each output is a double with value of 0 or 1. The
value is 0 when the hardware input voltage is low.
If the format is Single 32 bit port, then the output from the block is a 32-bit
integer where all 32 bits on the hardware feed into the single output. The
channel vector is not used in this mode and is unavailable on the Block
Parameters dialog box. The least significant bit is the lowest numbered bit in
the hardware manual.
Channel vector — This is a vector of channels. This parameter is only used
when the format is 32 One bit channels. Channels are numbered from 1 to
32 even though the hardware manual labels them 0 to 31.
Port — Each half of the 64 bits is a separate port. Port 1 is the lower 32 bits
and Port 2 is the upper 32 bits. You can use one port for input and the other
port for output.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

14-3
14 BVM

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PMCDIO64 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Format — From the list, choose either 32 One bit channels or Single 32 bit
port.

If the format is 32 One bit channels, then the channel vector specifies the
configuration of the block. Each input is a double. The hardware output is set
to low voltage if the input is < 0.5 and high voltage if the input is > 0.5.
If the format is Single 32 bit port, then the input to the block is a 32-bit
integer where all 32 bits on the hardware are controlled by the single input.
The channel vector is not used in this mode and is unavailable on the Block
Parameters dialog box. The least significant bit is the lowest numbered bit in
the hardware manual.
Channel vector — This is a vector of channels and is only used when the
format is 32 One bit channels. Channels are numbered from 1 to 32 even
though the hardware manual labels them 0 to 31. Hardware I/O signal
numbers IO32 to IO63 are acquired by choosing Port 2 and channels 1 to 32.
Reset action vector — If you chose 32 One bit channels, enter a vector of 1’s
and 0’s that is the same length as the channel vector. A value of 1 indicates that
the channel is reset to the value in the initial value vector when the model is
stopped. A value of 0 indicates that the output remains at the last value written

14-4
 PMCDIO64

when the model is stopped. If you enter a scalar value, that value is used for all
channels.
If you chose Single 32 bit port, enter a 1 or a 0 to determine what happens
when the model is stopped. If you enter 1, all 32 bits of the output are reset to
the value given by the initial value vector. If you enter 0, the output remains
at the last value written when the model is stopped.
Initial value vector — If you chose 32 One bit channels, this vector
determines both the initial value of the outputs at xPC boot time and the values
when model execution is stopped. A value of 1 for a given channel sets the
output for that channel to 1 while any other value sets the output to 0.
If you chose Single 32 bit port, enter the scaler value to write to the output
port. The value can be a hexadecimal or a decimal. If it is a hexadecimal, then
use C syntax. For example, 0xaaaaaaaa in hexadecimal would be the
equivalent of 2863311530 in decimal.
Port — Each half of the 64 bits is a separate port. Port 1 is the lower 32 bits
and Port 2 is the upper 32 bits. You can use one port for input and the other
port for output. In a given model, each port can only be set to one direction.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

14-5
14 BVM

14-6
 15

Contec

This chapter describes the Contec I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.contec.com).

Contec AD12-16(PCI) (p. 15-3) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4
digital output lines.
Contec AD12-16(PCI)E (p. 15-8) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12 bit), one analog output channel
(12 bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and
an i8254-compatible counter.
Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E (p. 15-11) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12 bit), one analog output channel
(12 bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and
an i8254-compatible counter.
Contec ADI12-16(PCI) (p. 15-14) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4
digital output lines.
Contec AD12-64(PCI) (p. 15-16) I/O board with 64 single-ended or 32 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4
digital output lines.
Contec AD16-16(PCI)E (p. 15-21) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16 bit), one analog output channel
(16 bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and
an i8254-compatible counter.
Contec DA12-4(PCI) (p. 15-24) I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels (12 bit).
Contec DA12-16(PCI) (p. 15-26) I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels (12 bit).
15 Contec

Contec PIO-32/32T(PCI) (p. 15-28) I/O board with 32 digital input lines and 32 digital output
lines.
Contec CNT24-4D(PCI) (p. 15-31) 24-bit differential up/down counter board with four
channels.

15-2
 Contec AD12-16(PCI)

Contec AD12-16(PCI)
The Contec AD12-16(PCI) is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential
analog input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4 digital output
lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD12-16(PCI) Analog Input (A/D)” on page 15-3

• “AD12-16(PCI) Digital Input” on page 15-5
• “AD12-16(PCI) Digital Output” on page 15-6

xPC Target does not support the Counter/Timer functionality of the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name AD12-16(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

AD12-16(PCI) Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

15-3
15 Contec

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the them beginning with
1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number for this board is 8 (double-ended) or
16 (single-ended). If the highest channel number you specify is n, the hardware
converts all the channels between 1 and n, whether or not they occur in your
channel vector. It is most efficient to specify a contiguous range of channels.
(Permuting the order of such a range has no impact on efficiency however.)
Range vector — This board allows the range of each channel to be selected
independently. Enter a scalar, in which case the same range will be used for all
channels, or a vector the same length as the channel vector. The range vector
entries must be range codes selected from the following table:.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to 5 5

-2.5 to 2.5 -2 0 to 2.5 2

-1.25 to 1.25 -1 0 to 1.25 1

Polarity — Choose single-ended or double-ended. This setting applies to all

channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

15-4
 Contec AD12-16(PCI)

The Device ID of this board is 8153.

AD12-16(PCI) Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example to use the first and third digital input channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8153.

15-5
15 Contec

AD12-16(PCI) Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

15-6
 Contec AD12-16(PCI)

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8153.

15-7
15 Contec

Contec AD12-16(PCI)E
The Contec AD12-16(PCI)E is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12 bit), one analog output channel (12
bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and an i8254-compatible
counter.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 15-8

• “AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 15-10

xPC Target does not support the digital I/O or Counter/Timer functionality of
the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name AD12-16(PCI)E
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

15-8
 Contec AD12-16(PCI)E

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number them beginning with 1
even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for this board is 8 (double-ended) or 16
(single-ended).
Gain vector — To specify the gain, enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels
in the channel vector. The gain vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. If you enter a scalar, the value is applied to all channels.
The gain is applied to the signal prior to sampling the voltage. After the signal
voltage is sampled, the result is divided by the gain to obtain the block output
signal value. To avoid clipping, make sure that the amplified gain falls within
the range you selected.
Range — From the list, select Bipolar -10V to +10V or Unipolar 0V to +10V.
This range applies to all channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8113.

15-9
15 Contec

AD12-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Range — From the list, select -5V to +5V, -10V to +10V, or 0 to +10V as the
output range for the analog output. This range must correspond to the output
range determined by the jumpers on the board.
Reset — This check box controls the behavior of the output channel at model
termination. If the check box is selected, the output channel is reset to the
value specified as the initial value. If the check box is not selected, the output
channel remains at the most recent value attained while the model was
running.
Initial value — Enter the initial voltage value for the output channel. The
output channel is set to this value between the time the model is downloaded
and the time the model is started. Also, if the reset check box is selected, the
output channel is reset to the initial value when the model is stopped.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8113.

15-10
 Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E

Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E
The Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12 bit), one analog output channel (12
bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and an i8254-compatible
counter.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 15-11

• “AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 15-12

xPC Target does not support the digital I/O or Counter/Timer functionality of
the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name AD12-16U(PCI)E
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

15-11
15 Contec

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number them beginning with 1
even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for this board is 8 (double-ended) or 16
(single-ended).
Range — From the list, select Bipolar -2.5V to +2.5V, Bipolar -5V to +5V,
Unipolar 0V to +5V, or Unipolar 0V to +10V. This range applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8103.

AD12-16U(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Range — From the list, select -5V to +5V, -10V to +10V, or 0 to +10V as the
output range for the analog output. This range must correspond to the output
range determined by the jumpers on the board.

15-12
 Contec AD12-16U(PCI)E

Reset — This check box controls the behavior of the output channel at model
termination. If the check box is selected, the output channel is reset to the
value specified as the initial value. If the check box is not selected, the output
channel remains at the most recent value attained while the model was
running.
Initial value — Enter the initial voltage value for the output channel. The
output channel is set to this value between the time the model is downloaded
and the time the model is started. Also, if the reset check box is selected, the
output channel is reset to the initial value when the model is stopped.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8103.

15-13
15 Contec

Contec ADI12-16(PCI)
The Contec ADI12-16(PCI) is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4
digital output lines.

Board Characteristics
Board name ADI12-16(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

ADI12-16(PCI) Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number them beginning with 1
even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for this board is 8 (double-ended) or 16
(single-ended).
Gain vector — To specify the gain, enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels
in the channel vector. The gain vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. If you enter a scalar, the value is applied to all channels.

15-14
 Contec ADI12-16(PCI)

The gain is applied to the signal prior to sampling the voltage. After the signal
voltage is sampled, the result is divided by the gain to obtain the block output
signal value. To avoid clipping, make sure that the amplified gain falls within
the range you selected.
Range — From the list, select Bipolar -10V to +10V, Unipolar 0V to +10V,
or Unipolar 4mA to 20mA. Choose a range that is consistent with the jumper
settings on the board. This range applies to all channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8133.

15-15
15 Contec

Contec AD12-64(PCI)
The Contec AD12-64(PCI) is an I/O board with 64 single-ended or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12 bit), 4 digital input lines, and 4
digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD12-64(PCI) Analog Input (A/D)” on page 15-16

• “AD12-64(PCI) Digital Input” on page 15-18
• “AD12-64(PCI) Digital Output” on page 15-19

xPC Target does not support the Counter/Timer functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name AD12-64(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

AD12-64(PCI) Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

15-16
 Contec AD12-64(PCI)

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the them beginning with
1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number for this board is 32 (double-ended) or
64 (single-ended). If the highest channel number you specify is n, the hardware
will convert all the channels between 1 and n, whether or not they occur in your
channel vector. It is most efficient to specify a contiguous range of channels.
(Permuting the order of such a range has no impact on efficiency however.)
Range vector — This board allows the range of each channel to be selected
independently. If you enter a scalar, the same range is used for all channels. If
you enter a vector, it must be the same length as the channel vector. The range
vector entries must be range codes selected from the following table:.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to 5 5

-2.5 to 2.5 -2 0 to 2.5 2

-1.25 to 1.25 -1 0 to 1.25 1

Polarity — Choose single-ended or double-ended. This setting applies to all

channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

15-17
15 Contec

The Device ID of this board is 8143.

AD12-64(PCI) Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8143.

15-18
 Contec AD12-64(PCI)

AD12-64(PCI) Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values (0 or 1) for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is
the initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values
between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

15-19
15 Contec

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8143.

15-20
 Contec AD16-16(PCI)E

Contec AD16-16(PCI)E
The Contec AD16-16(PCI)E is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (16 bit), one analog output channel (16
bit), 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output lines, and an i8254-compatible
counter.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 15-21

• “AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 15-22

xPC Target does not support the digital I/O or Counter/Timer functionality of
the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name AD16-16(PCI)E
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

15-21
15 Contec

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number them beginning with 1
even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for this board is 8 (double-ended) or 16
(single-ended).
Range — From the list, select Bipolar -10V to +10V, Bipolar -5V to +5V,
Unipolar 0V to +5V, or Unipolar 0V to +10V. This range applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8123.

AD16-16(PCI)E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Range — From the list, select -5V to +5V, -10V to +10V, or 0 to +10V as the
output range for the analog output. This range must correspond to the output
range determined by the jumpers on the board.

15-22
 Contec AD16-16(PCI)E

Reset — This check box controls the behavior of the output channel at model
termination. If the check box is selected, the output channel is reset to the
value specified as the initial value. If the check box is not selected, the output
channel remains at the most recent value attained while the model was
running.
Initial value — Enter the initial voltage value for the output channel. The
output channel is set to this value between the time the model is downloaded
and the time the model is started. Also, if the reset check box is selected, the
output channel is reset to the initial value when the model is stopped.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 8123.

15-23
15 Contec

Contec DA12-4(PCI)
The Contec DA12-4(PCI) is an I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels
(12 bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “DA12-4(PCI) Analog Output (D/A)” on page 15-24

xPC Target does not support the timer, external trigger, or interrupt
functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DA12-4(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

DA12-4(PCI) Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels enter
[1, 2]

15-24
 Contec DA12-4(PCI)

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8183.

15-25
15 Contec

Contec DA12-16(PCI)
The Contec DA12-16(PCI) is an I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels
(12 bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “DA12-16(PCI) Analog Output (D/A)” on page 15-26

xPC Target does not support the timer, external trigger, or interrupt
functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DA12-16(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

DA12-16(PCI) Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels enter
[1, 2]

15-26
 Contec DA12-16(PCI)

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8163.

15-27
15 Contec

Contec PIO-32/32T(PCI)
The Contec PIO-32/32T(PCI) is an I/O board with 32 digital input channels and
32 output channels.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Input” on page 15-28

• “PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Output” on page 15-29

xPC Target does not support the timer, external trigger, or interrupt
functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name PIO-32/32T(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

I/O format — Select serial or parallel. If you select serial, the block is
configured to accept up to 32 one-bit input channels. If you select parallel,
the block is configured to accept a single 32-bit input channel and the channel
vector parameter is unavailable.

15-28
 Contec PIO-32/32T(PCI)

Channel vector — If you selected serial I/O format, enter a vector of numbers
to specify the input channels for serial I/O format. For example, to use the first
and third digital input channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order, but the numbers must lie in the
range 1 to 32.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8152.

PIO-32/32T(PCI) Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

I/O format — Select serial or parallel. If you select serial, the block is
configured to accept up to 32 one-bit input channels for output. If you select
parallel, the block is configured to accept a single 32-bit channel and the
channel vector parameter is unavailable.

15-29
15 Contec

Channel vector — For serial I/O format, enter a vector of numbers to specify
the output channels. For example to use the first and third digital output
channels enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order, but the numbers must lie in the
range 1 to 32.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values (0 or 1) for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is
the initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values
between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you
selected parallel I/O format, the values can be in the form [hex2dec('ffffffff')].
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8152.

15-30
 Contec CNT24-4D(PCI)

Contec CNT24-4D(PCI)
The Contec CNT24-4D(PCI) is a 24-bit differential up/down counter board with
four channels. This board typically connects to incremental encoders.
Incremental encoders convert physical motion into electrical pulses than can
be used to determine velocity, direction, and distance.
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:
• “CNT24-4D(PCI) Incremental Encoder” on page 15-31

xPC Target does not support the timer or interrupt functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CNT24-4D(PCI)
Manufacturer Contec
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

CNT24-4D(PCI) Incremental Encoder

Driver Block Parameters
Note that you can have only one driver block instance for each physical board.
If you need to use multiple channels, select and enable more than channel on
the same block.
Channel — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies the
channel to which the subsequent parameters refer. The other parameters in
this block apply to this channel. The Enable channel check box number
changes to match the selected channel.

15-31
15 Contec

Enable channel — Select this check box to enable the currently selected
channel. Click OK after you select this check box to add an output port for the
channel on the driver instance of your model. This check box also enables you
to set a number of operation parameters for the block, ranging from Input type
to Initial count. Whatever operation parameters are in place when you click
OK are preserved for the channel until the next time you change them.
The following are some additional behavior notes for this check box:

• If you do not select this check box for a channel, an output port for that
channel is not added to the block. You also cannot change the operation
parameters for the channel.
• If you select this check box and save the operation parameters for that
channel, then later deselect this check box, the block preserves the operation
parameters for the channel. The output port is removed from the block.

Input type — From the list, choose either Line receiver or TTL-level input.
This parameter specifies the input type for the current channel.
Mode — From the list, select the counter operation mode for the current
channel. There are a number of modes, based on 1-phase or 2-phase pulse
inputs. See the Contec CNT24-4D(PCI) user’s guide documentation for
descriptions of these modes.
Note that of this list of modes, the Multiply by 4 modes are synonyms for
quadrature encoding.
Direction — From the list, select either Clockwise rotation counts down or
Clockwise rotation counts up as the counter direction of the current
channel.
Phase Z logic — From the list, select either Active high or Active low for the
current channel. This parameter specifies the state of the phase Z input
(reference position signal). If the phase Z mode parameter has a value of
Disable phase Z input, Phase Z logic has no effect.

Phase Z mode — From the list, select either Disable phase Z input, Enable
next phase Z input only once, or Enable every phase Z input. This
parameter specifies the operation mode of the phase Z input for the current
channel.

15-32
 Contec CNT24-4D(PCI)

Digital filter — From the list, select the characteristics of the digital input
filter you want to apply to the current channel’s input signal. There are a
number of sampling cycles to choose from, ranging from 0.1 microseconds (1
MHz) to 1056.1 microseconds (94 Hz).
Initial count — Enter a number from 0 to 16777215 (FFFFFF hex, the largest
24-bit number). This parameter specifies the initial value of the counter for the
current channel.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

The Device ID of this board is 8163.

15-33
15 Contec

15-34
 16

Data Translation

I/O boards supported by xPC Target. (http://www.datx.com)

DT2821 (p. 16-3) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog

input (A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels,
and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
DT2821-F-8DI (p. 16-8) I/O board with 8 differential analog input (A/D) channels,
2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital I/O lines
that can be configured in groups of 8 for either input or
output.
DT2821-G-8DI (p. 16-13) I/O board with 8 differential analog input (A/D) channels,
2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital I/O lines
that can be configured in groups of 8 for either input or
output.
DT2821-F-16SE (p. 16-18) I/O board with 16 single-ended analog input (A/D)
channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital
I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8 for either
input or output
DT2821-G-16SE (p. 16-23) I/O board with 16 single-ended analog input (A/D)
channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16
digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8 for
either input or output.
DT2823 (p. 16-28) I/O board 4 differential analog input (A/D) channels, 2
analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital I/O lines
that can be configured in groups of 8 for either input or
output.
16 Data Translation

DT2824-PGH (p. 16-33) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog

input (A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels,
and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
DT2824-PGL (p. 16-37) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels,
and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
DT2825 (p. 16-41) I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels,
and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
DT2827 (p. 16-46) I/O board with 4 differential analog input (A/D) channels,
2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital I/O lines
that can be configured in groups of 8 for either input or
output.
DT2828 (p. 16-51) I/O board with 4 single-ended analog input (A/D)
channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16 digital
I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8 for either
input or output.

16-2
 DT2821

DT2821
The DT2821 is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 50 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2821 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-3

• “DT2821 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-5
• “DT2821 Digital Input” on page 16-6
• “DT2821 Digital Output” on page 16-7

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2821
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2821 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-3
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you choose Single-ended (16 channels) from the Input
coupling list, enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you choose Differential (8
channels) from the Input coupling list, enter numbers between 1 and 8. For
example, to use the first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the input mode setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-4
 DT2821

DT2821 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-5
16 Data Translation

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821 Digital Input

DT2821 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-6
 DT2821

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821 Digital Output

DT2821 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-7
16 Data Translation

DT2821-F-8DI
The DT2821-F-8DI is an I/O board with 8 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 150 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2821-F-8DI Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-8

• “DT2821-F-8DI Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-10
• “DT2821-F-8DI Digital Input” on page 16-11
• “DT2821-F-8DI Digital Output” on page 16-12

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2821-F-8DI
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2821-F-8DI Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-8
 DT2821-F-8DI

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-9
16 Data Translation

DT2821-F-8DI Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-10
 DT2821-F-8DI

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-F-8DI Digital Input

DT2821-F-8DI series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-11
16 Data Translation

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-F-8DI Digital Output

DT2821-F-8DI series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-12
 DT2821-G-8DI

DT2821-G-8DI
The DT2821-G-8DI is an I/O board with 8 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 250 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2821-G-8DI Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-13

• “DT2821-G-8DI Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-15
• “DT2821-G-8DI Digital Input” on page 16-16
• “DT2821-G-8DI Digital Output” on page 16-17

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2821-G-8DI
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2821-G-8DI Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-13
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V (-5
volts to +5 volts), or 0-10V (0 volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective
range which is the same for all channels and must correspond with the input
range setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-14
 DT2821-G-8DI

DT2821-G-8DI Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel vector.
The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This board
allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-15
16 Data Translation

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-G-8DI Digital Input

DT2821-G-8DI series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-16
 DT2821-G-8DI

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-G-8DI Digital Output

DT2821-G-8DI series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-17
16 Data Translation

DT2821-F-16SE
The DT2821-F-16SE is an I/O board with 16 single-ended analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 150 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2821-F-16SE Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-18

• “DT2821-F-16SE Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-20
• “DT2821-F-16SE Digital Input” on page 16-21
• “DT2821-F-16SE Digital Output” on page 16-22

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2821-F-16SE
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2821-F-16SE Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-18
 DT2821-F-16SE

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-19
16 Data Translation

DT2821-F-16SE Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-20
 DT2821-F-16SE

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-F-16SE Digital Input

DT2821-F-16SE series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-21
16 Data Translation

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-F-16SE Digital Output

DT2821-F-16SE series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-22
 DT2821-G-16SE

DT2821-G-16SE
The DT2821-G-16SE is an I/O board with 16 single-ended analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 250 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2821-G-16SE Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-23

• “DT2821-G-16SE Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-25
• “DT2821-G-16SE Digital Input” on page 16-26
• “DT2821-G-16SE Digital Output” on page 16-27

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2821-G-16SE
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2821-G-16SE Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-23
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V (-5
volts to +5 volts), or 0-10V (0 volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective
range which is the same for all channels and must correspond with the input
range setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-24
 DT2821-G-16SE

DT2821-G-16SE Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-25
16 Data Translation

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-G-16SE Digital Input

DT2821-G-16SE series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-26
 DT2821-G-16SE

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2821-G-16SE Digital Output

DT2821-G-16SE series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-27
16 Data Translation

DT2823
The DT2823 is an I/O board 4 differential analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit)
with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8 for either
input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2823 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-28

• “DT2823 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-29
• “DT2823 Digital Input” on page 16-30
• “DT2823 Digital Output” on page 16-31

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2823
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2823 Analog Input (A/D)

The range for the DT2823 is -10 to + 10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-28
 DT2823

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2823 Analog Output (D/A)

The range of the DT2823 is -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

16-29
16 Data Translation

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2823 Digital Input

DT2823 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

16-30
 DT2823

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2823 Digital Output

DT2823 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

16-31
16 Data Translation

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-32
 DT2824-PGH

DT2824-PGH
The DT2824-PGH is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 50 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2824-PGH Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-33

• “DT2824-PGH Digital Input” on page 16-35
• “DT2824-PGL Digital Output” on page 16-40

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2824-PGH
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2824-PGH Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-33
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you choose Single-ended (16 channels) from the Input
coupling list, enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you choose Differential (8
channels) from the Input coupling list, then enter numbers between 1 and 8.
For example, to use the first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the input mode setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-34
 DT2824-PGH

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

DT2824-PGH Digital Input

DT2824-PGH series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-35
16 Data Translation

DT2824-PGH Digital Output

DT2824-PGH series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-36
 DT2824-PGL

DT2824-PGL
The DT2824-PGL is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 50 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2824-PGL Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-37

• “DT2824-PGL Digital Input” on page 16-39
• “DT2824-PGL Digital Output” on page 16-40

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2824-PGL
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2824-PGL Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-37
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you choose Single-ended (16 channels) from the Input
coupling list, enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you choose Differential (8
channels) from the Input coupling list, then enter numbers between 1 and 8.
For example, to use the first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 10, 100, or 500 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the input mode setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-38
 DT2824-PGL

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

DT2824-PGL Digital Input

DT2824-PGL series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-39
16 Data Translation

DT2824-PGL Digital Output

DT2824-PGL series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-40
 DT2825

DT2825
The DT2825 is an I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 45 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups
of 8 for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2825 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-41

• “DT2825 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-43
• “DT2825 Digital Input” on page 16-44
• “DT2825 Digital Output” on page 16-45

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2825
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2825 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-41
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you choose Single-ended (16 channels) from the Input
coupling list, enter numbers between 1 and 16. If you choose Differential (8
channels) from the Input coupling list, then enter numbers between 1 and 8.
For example, to use the first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 10, 100, or 500 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Input coupling — From the list, choose one of the input modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the input mode setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-42
 DT2825

DT2825 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-43
16 Data Translation

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2825 Digital Input

DT2825 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-44
 DT2825

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2825 Digital Output

DT2825 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-45
16 Data Translation

DT2827
The DT2827 is an I/O board with 4 differential analog input (A/D) channels
(16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100kHz, 2 analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8
for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2827 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-46

• “DT2827 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-47
• “DT2827 Digital Input” on page 16-48
• “DT2827 Digital Output” on page 16-49

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2827
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2827 Analog Input (A/D)

The range for this board is -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-46
 DT2827

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector —Enter numbers between 1 and 4. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2827 Analog Output (D/A)

The range for this board is -10 to + 10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

16-47
16 Data Translation

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2827 Digital Input

DT2827 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

16-48
 DT2827

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2827 Digital Output

DT2827 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

16-49
16 Data Translation

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-50
 DT2828

DT2828
The DT2828 is an I/O board with 4 single-ended analog input (A/D) channels
(12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 2 analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of 8
for either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DT2828 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 16-51

• “DT2828 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 16-53
• “DT2828 Digital Input” on page 16-54
• “DT2828 Digital Output” on page 16-55

Board Characteristics
Board Name DT2828
Manufacturer Data Translation
Bus Type ISA
Access Method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:No, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DT2828 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

16-51
16 Data Translation

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. For example, to use the
first and third analog output (A/D) channels, enter
[1,3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
to number the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the Channel
vector to specify the gain for that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the Channel vector. (If your enter a scalar, it is automatically
expanded to channel vector). This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different. The gain is applied prior to sampling the voltage.
For example, if you have an input signal from -1 to +1 volts, and a gain of 8, the
signal is amplified -8 to +8 volts. Select a range equal or larger than the
amplified voltage. For example, select a range of +-10V. After the signal voltage
is sampled, this block divides by the gain to output the original signal value.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), or 0-10V (0
volts to +10 volts). This specifies the effective range which is the same for all
channels and must correspond with the input range setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the bass address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-52
 DT2828

DT2828 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 2. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1, 2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the Channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the Channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +5 5

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +10 10

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the Output Range Selection settings
on the board for DAC0, and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).

16-53
16 Data Translation

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2828 Digital Input

DT2828 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of
digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

16-54
 DT2828

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DT2828 Digital Output

DT2828 series boards have two I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
These ports can be configured independently for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Port — From the list, choose 1 or 2.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital lines you use.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for this port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

16-55
16 Data Translation

16-56
 17

Diamond

I/O Boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.diamondsystems.com).

Diamond-MM (p. 17-3) DAS16 compatible I/O board with 16 single or 8

differential analog input (A/D) channels, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels, 8 digital input lines, and 8 digital output
lines.
Diamond-MM-16-AT (p. 17-9) PC104 I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8 differential
analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit), 4 optional analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output
lines.
Diamond-MM-32-AT (p. 17-15) PC104 I/O board with 32 single or 16 differential analog
input (A/D) channels, 4 analog output (D/A) channels, 24
digital input and output lines.
Garnet-MM (p. 17-25) I/O board with 24 or 48 high current digital I/O lines that
can be configured in groups of eight for either digital input
or digital output.
Onyx-MM (p. 17-28) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of 8 for either digital input or digital output,
counters, and timers.
Onyx-MM-DIO (p. 17-31) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of eight for either digital input or digital output.
Prometheus (p. 17-34) Intel 486-based embedded PC/104 CPU board with 4
serial ports, 2 USB ports, 1 parallel port, keyboard and
mouse ports, floppy and IDE driver connectors, a
100BaseT Ethernet connector, and provision for solid
state flashdisk modules.
Quartz-MM 5 (p. 17-40) 8 digital input lines, 8 digital output lines, and 10
counter/timers.
17 Diamond

Quartz-MM 10 (p. 17-52) 8 digital input line, 8 digital output lines, and 10
counter/timers.
Ruby-MM (p. 17-63) PC104 I/O board with 4 or 8 single analog output (D/A)
channels, unipolar and bipolar operation, +/- 10V, +/- 5V,
0-10V, 0-5V fixed ranges, +/- 2.5V, 0-2.5V user-adjustable
ranges, 24 digital input and output lines.
Ruby-MM-416 (p. 17-68) 4 16-bit analog output (D/A) channels, and 24 digital I/O
lines that can be configured in groups of 8 for either input
or output.
Ruby-MM-1612 (p. 17-73) 16 12-bit analog output (D/A) channels, and 24 digital I/O
lines which can be configured in groups of 8 for either
input or output.

17-2
 Diamond-MM

Diamond-MM
The Diamond-MM is a DAS16 compatible I/O board with 16 single or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate
or 100 kHz, 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 digital input lines, and 8
digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “MM Analog Input (A/D)” on page 17-3

• “MM Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-5
• “MM Digital Input” on page 17-7
• “MM Digital Output” on page 17-7

Board Characteristics
Board name Diamond-MM
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

MM Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

17-3
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — If you select 16 channels (Coupling parameter set to
16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select the
number of single A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Note, you cannot select the starting channel for this block, you can only select
the number of channels. This block works differently from the
Diamond-MM-32-AT A/D block, where you can specify the starting channel.
Range — Enter an input range code for all A/D channels. This driver does not
allow the selection of a different range for each channel. The input range is the
same for all A/D channels.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2.5 to + 2.5 -2.5 0 to +2 2

-1 to +1 -1 0 to +1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -5

The gain jumpers on the board have to be in the correct positions for the chosen
range.The bipolar jumper on the board has to be in the bipolar position, if a
bipolar range is used or in the unipolar position, when a unipolar range is used.
Coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input modes:

• 16 single-ended channels
• 8 differential channels

This choice must correspond to the jumper setting in block J6 on the board.

17-4
 Diamond-MM

Show error status output (E) — Select this check box to add a port labeled E
to the block and to display (the contents of) that special port. This output will
always have a value of 0 unless a problem is detected while attempting an A/D
conversion. In the unlikely event that an error occurs, the port has a nonzero
value. This nonzero value takes the form of a real number whose binary
representation of 1’s and 0’s (true and false) indicates which channels have
errors.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — This parameter is a combined Channel vector and Range
vector. The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the D/A channels used. This
driver allows a different range for each channel with a maximum of 2 channels.

17-5
17 Diamond

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes. The D/A specific jumpers on the board have to be in the correct
positions for the ranges entered.

Input Range (V) Range Code

0 to +10 10

0 to +5 5

For example, if the first channel is 0 to + 10 volts and the second channel is 0
to +5 volts, enter
[10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the input channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the initial
value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between the
time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide an
out-of-range value for a channel, that value is adjusted to lie within the correct
range, as defined in the parameter Range.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-6
 Diamond-MM

MM Digital Input
Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input channels in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital input channels you use. For example, to
use all the digital input channels, enter
[1:8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM Digital Output
Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

17-7
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input channels in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital input channels you use. For example, to
use all the digital output channels, enter
[1:8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the input channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the initial
value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between the
time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide an
out-of-range value for a channel, that value is adjusted to lie within the correct
range, as defined in the parameter Range.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-8
 Diamond-MM-16-AT

Diamond-MM-16-AT
The Diamond MM-AT is a PC104 I/O board with 16 single-ended or 8
differential analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit), 4 optional analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “MM-16-AT Analog Input (A/D)” on page 17-10

• “MM-16-AT Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-11
• “MM-16-AT Digital Input” on page 17-12
• “MM-16-AT Digital Output” on page 17-13

xPC Target does not support the counters/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name Diamond-MM-16-AT
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

17-9
17 Diamond

MM-16-AT Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

First Channel — Enter the number of the first channel in a set of contiguous
analog input channels. Depending on the channel configuration selected, the
first channel number must lie within the range 1 through 8 (Coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) or 1 through 16 (Coupling
parameter set to 16 single-ended channels).
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Number of Channels — Enter the number of input channels you want to use.
The maximum number of channels varies between 1 and 16 and depends on the
values of Coupling and the First channel number.
Range — From the list, choose a voltage range. The input range applies to all
channels.
Coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input modes:

• Single-ended (16 channels)

• Differential (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the jumper setting in block J4 on the board.
Show error status output (E) — Select this check box to add a port labeled E
to the block and to display (the contents of) that special port. This output will
always have a value of 0 unless a problem is detected while attempting an A/D
conversion. In the unlikely event that an error occurs, the port has a nonzero
value. This nonzero value takes the form of a real number whose binary
representation of 1’s and 0’s (true and false) indicates which channels have
errors.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-10
 Diamond-MM-16-AT

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-16-AT Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range — From the list, select 0 to 5V or -5V to 5V as the input voltage range
of the board. The input range applies to all channels.
This choice must correspond to the jumper setting in block J5 on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

17-11
17 Diamond

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the input channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the initial
value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between the
time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide an
out-of-range value for a channel, that value is adjusted to lie within the correct
range, as defined in the parameter Range.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-16-AT Digital Input

Diamond-MM-16-AT boards have an 8-bit digital input port.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital input channels in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital input channels you use. For example, to
use all the digital input channels, enter
[1:8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-12
 Diamond-MM-16-AT

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-16-AT Digital Output

Diamond-MM-16-AT boards have an 8-bit digital output port.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital output channels in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital output channels you use. For example,
to use all of the digital output channels, enter
[1:8]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

17-13
17 Diamond

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide an
out-of-range value for a channel, that value is adjusted to lie within the correct
range, as defined in the parameter Range.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-14
 Diamond-MM-32-AT

Diamond-MM-32-AT
The Diamond-MM-32-AT is a PC104 I/O board with 32 single or 16 differential
analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 200 kHz,
4 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 24 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “MM-32-AT Analog Input (A/D)” on page 17-16

• “MM-32-AT Frame Analog Input (A/D)” on page 17-17
• “MM-32-AT Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-20
• “MM-32-AT Digital Input” on page 17-21
• “MM-32-AT Digital Output” on page 17-22

Board Characteristics
Board name Diamond-MM-32-AT
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No
D/A:Yes
DIO:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

17-15
17 Diamond

MM-32-AT Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel configuration — From the list, select the following. Refer to the
Diamond-MM-32-AT documentation for a description of the configuration
modes.

• 1-32 SE to select the configuration mode labeled A (32 single-ended input

channels)
• 1-16 DI to select the configuration mode labeled B (16 differential input
channels)
• 1-8SE 9-16 DI 17-24 SE to select the configuration mode labeled D (eight
single-ended input channels labeled 1 through 8, eight differential input
channels labeled 9 through 16, and an additional eight single-ended input
channels labeled 17 through 24).

Note that the selected channel configuration must match the configuration set
by the jumpers in block J5. This driver does not support mode C.
First channel number — Enter the number of the first channel in a set of
contiguous channels. Depending on the value of the Channel Configuration
parameter, the first channel number must lie within the range 1 through 32, 1
through 16, or 1 through 24.
Number of channels — Enter the number of input channels you want to use.
The maximum number of channels varies between 1 and 32 and depends on
Channel configuration and the First channel number.
Range — From the list, choose a voltage range. The input range applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-16
 Diamond-MM-32-AT

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-32-AT Frame Analog Input (A/D)

The Diamond-MM-32-AT Frame Analog Input block is a frame-based one. A
frame consists of a fixed number of samples (defined by the Number of scans
per frame parameter) for each of a specified set of channels. A scan is a group
of samples, one for each channel.
Normally, the system timer controls an xPC Target model at intervals specified
by the block Sample Time parameter. In contrast, the Diamond-MM-32-AT
Frame Analog Input block executes the model in which it occurs each time it
converts a new frame of data. You control this rate with the parameter values
Interval between scans and Number of scans per frame:
Rate = (Interval between scans) x (Number of scans per frame)

You control the frame size with the parameter values Number of channels
and Number of scans per frame:
frameSize = (Number of channels) x (Number of scans per frame)

After the block assembles a frame of data, it generates an interrupt, which

triggers the next iteration of the model.
Note, after you add this block to a model and are ready to configure the model,
edit the xPC Target code generation options.

1 From the model, select Simulation -> Configuration Parameters.

2 Select the Real-Time Workshop node.

3 In the Target selection section, from the RTW system target file list,
browse to and select xpctarget.tlc.

4 In the xPC Target options node, from the I/O board generating the
interrupt list, select the value Diamond-MM-32. This specifies that the
Diamond-MM-32-AT board generates the interrupt.

17-17
17 Diamond

5 In the same node, from the Real-time interrupt source list, select the IRQ
number you have jumpered on the board.

6 In the same node, for the PCI slot/ISA base address parameter, enter the
same ISA address as for the Diamond-MM-32-AT Frame block Base
address parameter.

7 Click OK and save the model.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel configuration — From the list, select the following. Refer to the
Diamond-MM-32-AT documentation for a description of the configuration
modes.

• 1-32 Single-Ended to select the configuration mode labeled A (32

single-ended input channels)
• 1-16 Differential to select the configuration mode labeled B (16
differential input channels)
• 1-8 and 7-24 Single-Ended; 9-16 Differential to select the
configuration mode labeled D (eight single-ended input channels labeled 1
through 8, eight differential input channels labeled 9 through 16, and an
additional eight single-ended input channels labeled 17 through 24).

Note that the selected channel configuration must match the configuration set
by the jumpers in block J5. This driver does not support mode C.
Output Signal Type — From the list, select either Vector or Frame:

• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

17-18
 Diamond-MM-32-AT

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.

Range — From the list, select a voltage range. The input range applies to all
channels.
First channel number — Enter the number of the first channel in a set of
contiguous channels. Depending on the value of the Channel Configuration
parameter, the first channel number must lie within the range 1 through 32, 1
through 16, or 1 through 24.
Number the channels starting from 1 even if Diamond Systems numbers them
starting from 0.
Number of channels — Enter the number of input channels you want to use.
The maximum number of channels varies between 1 and 32 and depends on
Channel configuration and the First channel number. Note that hardware
limitations require that either the Number of channels or Number of scans
per frame value be even. If your application requires that both quantities be
odd, add 1 to one of them and ignore the resulting additional data.
Number of scans per frame — Enter the number of scans per frame. For a
value of N, each output port of the block will have a signal width of N and
contain N samples of the corresponding channel. Note that hardware
limitations require that either the Number of channels or Number of scans
per frame value be even. If your application requires that both quantities be
odd, add 1 to one of them and ignore the resulting additional data.
Interval between conversions within a scan — From the list, select the
interval, in microseconds, between conversions within a scan.
Interval between scans — Enter the interval, in seconds, between successive
scans.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-19
17 Diamond

MM-32-AT Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels you use. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range — From the list, choose a range code. This driver does not allow a
different range for each of the four channels. This selection must correspond to
the range and bipolar/unipolar jumper settings on the board.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes. The D/A specific jumpers on the board must be in the correct
positions for the ranges entered.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

For example, if the first and second channel range is 0 to + 10 volts, enter
[10, 10]

17-20
 Diamond-MM-32-AT

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-32-AT Digital Input

The Diamond-MM-32-AT has one 8255 chip with three ports (A,B,C). Each port
has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or
outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, you configure the port as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-21
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C. The I/O board has an 8255 chip with
three ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for
this driver block. Each port has a maximum of eight digital lines that you can
configure as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

MM-32-AT Digital Output

The Diamond-MM-32-AT has one 8255 chip with three ports (A,B,C). Each port
has a maximum of eight digital I/O lines that you can configure as inputs or
outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, you can configure the port as output.

17-22
 Diamond-MM-32-AT

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has an 8255 chip
with three ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is
used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or eight digital lines that
can be configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is
chosen. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-23
17 Diamond

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-24
 Garnet-MM

Garnet-MM
The Garnet-MM is an I/O board with 24 or 48 high current digital I/O lines that
can be configured in groups of eight for either digital input or digital output.
There are two versions of this board, 24 (GMM-24) or 48 (GMM-48) digital I/O
lines. The 48 line version has two 82C55 chips. Each chip has three 8-bit I/O
ports for a total of 48 lines. The 24 line version has one 82C55 chip with three
8-bit I/O ports for a total of 24 lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Garnet-MM Digital Input” on page 17-25

• “Garnet-MM Digital Output” on page 17-26

Board Characteristics
Board name Garnet-MM
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support DIO: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Garnet-MM Digital Input

Each chip port of the Garnet-MM board can be configured independently for
either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital output driver block for a given port to configure the port for output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-25
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. Note, only select 1 for the 24 line version
of the Garnet-MM board. Selecting 2 for the 24 line board has no effect. You can
select either 1 or 2 for the 48 line version of the board.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Garnet-MM Digital Output

Each chip port of the Garnet-MM board can be configured independently for
either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital input driver block for a given port to configure the port for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-26
 Garnet-MM

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. Note, only select 1 for the 24 line version
of the Garnet-MM board. Selecting 2 for the 24 line board has no effect. You can
select either 1 or 2 for the 48 line version of the board.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-27
17 Diamond

Onyx-MM
The Onyx-MM is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of eight for either input or output. xPC Target does not support the
Counter/Timer functionality of this board.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Onyx-MM Digital Input” on page 17-28

• “Onyx-MM Digital Output” on page 17-29

Board Characteristics
Board name Onyx-MM
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support DIO: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Onyx-MM Digital Input

Onyx-MM boards have two digital I/O chips, each with three 8-bit digital I/O
ports, for a total of 48 I/O lines. Each port can be configured independently for
either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital input driver block for a given port to configure the port for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-28
 Onyx-MM

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Onyx-MM Digital Output

Onyx-MM boards have two digital I/O chips, each with three 8-bit digital I/O
ports, for a total of 48 I/O lines. Each port can be configured independently for
either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital output driver block for a given port to configure a port for output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-29
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-30
 Onyx-MM-DIO

Onyx-MM-DIO
The Onyx-MM is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines that can be configured
in groups of eight for either digital input or digital output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Input” on page 17-31

• “Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Output” on page 17-32

Board Characteristics
Board name Onyx-MM-DIO
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support DIO: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Input

Onyx-MM-DIO boards have two digital I/O chips, each with three 8-bit digital
I/O ports, for a total of 48 I/O lines. Each port can be configured independently
for either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital input driver block for a given port to configure the port for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-31
17 Diamond

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Onyx-MM-DIO Digital Output

Onyx-MM-DIO boards have two digital I/O chips, each with three 8-bit digital
I/O ports, for a total of 48 I/O lines. Each port can be configured independently
for either input or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. Select the
digital output driver block for a given port to configure a port for output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

17-32
 Onyx-MM-DIO

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-33
17 Diamond

Prometheus
The Diamond Prometheus is an Intel 486-based embedded PC/104 CPU board
with 4 serial ports, 2 USB ports, 1 parallel port, keyboard and mouse ports,
floppy and IDE driver connectors, a 100BaseT Ethernet connector, and
provision for solid state flashdisk modules.
xPC Target supports Model PR-Z32-EA of Prometheus. In addition to the above
functionality, Model PR-Z32-EA also contains a data acquisition subsystem.
This subsystem supports 16 single-ended or 8 differential 16-bit A/D, 4 12-bit
analog outputs, 24 programmable digital I/O channels, and a 16-bit
counter/timer.
xPC Target supports the Prometheus model PR-Z32-EA with four driver
blocks:

• “Prometheus Analog Input (A/D)” on page 17-35

• “Prometheus Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-36
• “Prometheus Digital Input” on page 17-37
• “Prometheus Digital Output” on page 17-38

xPC Target does not support the counter/timer on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name Prometheus
Manufacturer Diamond Systems
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support No

17-34
 Prometheus

Prometheus Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

First channel — Enter the number of the first channel in a set of contiguous
channels. Depending on the channel configuration selected, the first channel
number must lie within the range:

• 1 through 8, if the input coupling is differential.

• 1 through 16, if the input coupling is single-ended.

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Number of channels — Enter the number of input channels you want to use.
The maximum number of channels varies between 1 and 16 and depends on the
values of First channel and Input coupling. For example, if the value of First
channel is 1 and Input coupling is Single-ended, the maximum value for
Number of channels is 16.
Range (J13 setting) — From the list, choose a voltage range. The input range
applies to all channels. This range must agree with jumper settings in block
J13 on the board.
Input coupling (J13 setting) — From the list, select one from the following list
of input modes:

• Single-ended (16 channels)

• Differential (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the jumper setting in block J13 on the board.

17-35
17 Diamond

Show error status output port — Select this check box to display real-time
error information. This check box displays an output port labeled E. As long as
no error is detected on any of the channels currently in use, this signal has a
value of 0. Values of 1, 2, 4, 8, and so forth respectively indicate problems on
channels 1, 2, 3, 4, and so forth. To use one signal to indicate errors on multiple
channels, the driver combines these values. For example, the E value 1 + 2 = 3
encodes the concurrent errors on channels 1 and 2, the value 2 + 4 = 6 encodes
the concurrent errors on channels 2 and 3, and so on.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the base address setting on the board. For example, if the
base address is 280 (hexadecimal), enter
0x280

Prometheus Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel Vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 4. This driver
allows the selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the
first and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]
Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range — From the list, choose a voltage range. The output range applies to all
channels. This range must agree with jumper settings in block J13 on the
board.

17-36
 Prometheus

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
If you provide an out-of-range value for a channel, that value is adjusted to lie
within the correct range, as defined in the parameter Range.
Show error status output port — Select this check box to display real-time
error information. This check box displays an output port labeled E. As long as
no error is detected on any of the channels currently in use, this signal has a
value of 0. Values of 1, 2, 4, 8, and so forth respectively indicate problems on
channels 1, 2, 3, 4, and so forth. To use one signal to indicate errors on multiple
channels, the driver combines these values. For example, the E value 1 + 2 = 3
encodes the concurrent errors on channels 1 and 2, the value 2 + 4 = 6 encodes
the concurrent errors on channels 2 and 3, and so on.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 280 (hexadecimal), enter
0x280

Prometheus Digital Input

Prometheus boards have three I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
You can independently configure these ports for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for input.

17-37
17 Diamond

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel Vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8 to select the
digital input lines used from this port. This driver allows the selection of
individual digital input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the
number of digital lines used. For example, to use all of the digital inputs for the
current port, enter
[1:8]
Number the lines starting with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering them with 0.
Port — From the list, choose A, B, or C to choose one of the three I/O ports.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 280 (hexadecimal), enter
0x280

Prometheus Digital Output

Prometheus boards have three I/O ports, each containing 8 digital I/O lines.
You can independently configure these ports for either input or output. Use a
separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver block
for a given port, that port is configured for output.

17-38
 Prometheus

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Block Output Data Type Scaling

Input

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel Vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8 to select the
digital output lines used from this port. This driver allows the selection of
individual digital output lines in any order. The number of elements defines
the number of digital lines used. For example, to use all of the digital outputs
for the current port, enter
[1:8]
Number the lines starting with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering them with 0.
Port — From the list, choose A, B, or C to choose one of the three I/O ports.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 280 (hexadecimal), enter
0x280

17-39
17 Diamond

Quartz-MM 5
The Quartz-MM 5 has 8 digital input lines, 8 digital output lines, and 10
counter/timers.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “Quartz-MM 5 Digital Input” on page 17-41
• “Quartz-MM 5 Digital Output” on page 17-42
• “Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM” on page 17-43
• “Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 17-44
• “Quartz-MM5 Counter FM” on page 17-46
• “Quartz-MM5 Counter FM & ARM” on page 17-47
• “Quartz-MM5 PWM Capture” on page 17-49
• “Quartz-MM5 FM Capture” on page 17-50
• “Quartz-MMxx” on page 17-51

Board Characteristics
Board name Quartz-MM 5
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support
Multiple board support Yes

17-40
 Quartz-MM 5

Quartz-MM 5 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-41
17 Diamond

Quartz-MM 5 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-42
 Quartz-MM 5

Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM

The Quartz-MM5 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The Quartz-MM5 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, or 4 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency Base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
Output Frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz

Note Your control over the output frequency is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

17-43
17 Diamond

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM5 Counter PWM & ARM

The Quartz-MM5 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The Quartz-MM5 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

17-44
 Quartz-MM 5

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency Base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
Output Frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.

17-45
17 Diamond

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM5 Counter FM
The Quartz-MM5 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The Quartz-MM5 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. XTAL frequency is assumed to
be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in position 1MHz
not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

17-46
 Quartz-MM 5

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter

Quartz-MM5 Counter FM & ARM

The Quartz-MM5 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The Quartz-MM5 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM
(Frequency Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle
and variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

17-47
17 Diamond

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.

17-48
 Quartz-MM 5

Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM5 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, or 4&5. This selects which two
counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. Use one block for each
pair of counters. No two blocks should use the same counter. For example, use
counters 1&2 for one block and 3&4 for a second block. Do not use a combination
like 1&2 and 2&3.

17-49
17 Diamond

Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,

F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM5 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM5 FM Capture
This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. This selects which counter the
driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is needed for
each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM5 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.

17-50
 Quartz-MM 5

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MMxx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and FM Capture blocks use this block
in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

17-51
17 Diamond

Quartz-MM 10
The Quartz-MM 10 has eight digital input line, eight digital output lines, and
10 counter/timers.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “Quartz-MM 10 Digital Input” on page 17-53
• “Quartz-MM 10 Digital Output” on page 17-54
• “Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM” on page 17-54
• “Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 17-56
• “Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM” on page 17-57
• “Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM & ARM” on page 17-59
• “Quartz-MM 10 PWM Capture” on page 17-60
• “Quartz-MM 10 FM Capture” on page 17-61
• “Quartz-MMxx” on page 17-62

Board Characteristics
Board name Quartz-MM 10
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

17-52
 Quartz-MM 10

Quartz-MM 10 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-53
17 Diamond

Quartz-MM 10 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM

The Quartz-MM10 has two AM9513A chips with five counters each.
The Quartz-MM10 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (pulse width
modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input that defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

17-54
 Quartz-MM 10

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=4MHz, F2=400kHz, F3=40kHz,
F4=4kHz, or F5=400Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1 MHz; therefore the jumper on the Quartz MM-10 must be in
position 1 MHz not 5 MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave must be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100 kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and
becomes armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the
TTL level when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle)

17-55
17 Diamond

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 Counter PWM & ARM

The Quartz-MM 10 has two AM9513A chips with five counters.
The Quartz-MM 10 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows you to arm and disarm the counter
by using the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1 MHz, therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM 10 must be in
position 1 MHz not 5 MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave must be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100 kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz

17-56
 Quartz-MM 10

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM
The Quartz-MM10 has two AM9513A chips with five counters.
The Quartz-MM10 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (frequency
modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the FM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

17-57
17 Diamond

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=4MHz, F2=400kHz, F3=40kHz,
F4=4kHz, or F5=400Hz to set the base frequency. XTAL frequency is assumed to
be 1 MHz; therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM 10 must be in position 1
MHz not 5 MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The duty cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and
becomes armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the
TTL level when the counter is disarmed.

17-58
 Quartz-MM 10

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 Counter FM & ARM

The Quartz-MM 10 has two AM9513A chips with five counters.
The Quartz-MM 10 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM
(frequency modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle
and variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows you to arm and disarm
the counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel,
the FM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1 MHz; therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM 10 must be in
position 1 MHz not 5 MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The duty cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

17-59
17 Diamond

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above defines the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle).
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 PWM Capture

This block programs the AM9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the length of time the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.

17-60
 Quartz-MM 10

The PWM signal must enter the pins of both corresponding counter channels
(parallel wiring) named GATE. Both CLK pins must be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5, 6&7, 7&8, 8&9, or 9&10. This
selects which two counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. Use
one block for each pair of counters. No two blocks should use the same counter.
For example, use counters 1&2 for one block and 3&4 for a second block. Do not
use a combination like 1&2 and 2&3.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1 MHz, therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM 10 must be in
position 1 MHz not 5 MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MM 10 FM Capture
This block programs the AM9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal must enter the pin of the corresponding counter channel named
GATE. The CLK pin must be left unconnected.

17-61
17 Diamond

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10. This selects which
counter the driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is
needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1 MHz, therefore the jumper on the Quartz-MM 10 must be in
position 1 MHz not 5 MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(duty cycle).
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Quartz-MMxx
You can use this block to program the AM9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and FM Capture blocks use this block
in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

17-62
 Ruby-MM

Ruby-MM
The Diamond Ruby-MM is a PC104 I/O board with 4 or 8 single analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), unipolar and bipolar operation, +/- 10V, +/- 5V, 0-10V,
0-5V fixed ranges, +/- 2.5V, 0-2.5V user-adjustable ranges, 24 digital input and
output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Diamond Ruby-MM Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-63

• “Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Input” on page 17-65
• “Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Output” on page 17-66

Board Characteristics
Board name Diamond Ruby-MM
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support D/A:No, DIO:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Diamond Ruby-MM Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — List the output channels as a vector. Up to 8 different
channels can be listed. To specify the first three channels, enter
[1,2,3]

17-63
17 Diamond

The board comes in two different hardware versions. If the 4-channel version
of the hardware is used and the channels 5-8 are listed, the those outputs will
not show an error, but the data will be ignored.
Range — The output range of the board is selected with jumpers on the board.
Each group of 4 channels can be jumpered for any of the available ranges. The
range you select in the Block Parameters must correspond to the range
specified by the jumper settings or you will obtain incorrect results.
Reset vector – The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector – The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as selected with the hardware jumpers on the board.

Note Please consult the appropriate Diamond Ruby-MM hardware manuals

for more information on jumper settings and I/O connections.

17-64
 Ruby-MM

Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of up to 8 individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering lines with 0.
Port — From the Port list, choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines
which port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital
inputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as selected with the hardware jumpers on the board.

Note Please consult the appropriate Diamond Ruby-MM hardware manuals

for more information on jumper settings and I/O connections.

17-65
17 Diamond

Diamond Ruby-MM Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines to drive. This driver allows the selection of up to 8 individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering lines with 0.
Port — From the Port list, choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines
which port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital
outputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-66
 Ruby-MM

Base address — Enter the base address of the board in hexadecimal (such as
0x300) as selected with the hardware jumpers on the board.

Note Please consult the appropriate Diamond Ruby-MM hardware manuals

for more information on jumper settings and I/O connections.

17-67
17 Diamond

Ruby-MM-416
The Ruby-MM-416 is an I/O board with four 16-bit analog output (D/A) chan-
nels, and 24 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of eight for
either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “Ruby-MM-416 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-68
• “Ruby-MM-416 Digital Input” on page 17-70
• “Ruby-MM-416 Digital Output” on page 17-71

Board Characteristics
Board name Ruby-MM-416
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PCI/104)
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support D/A:No
DIO:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Ruby-MM-416 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

17-68
 Ruby-MM-416

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector containing channel numbers between 1 and
4. This driver allows the selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The
number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to
use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — The range vector must be a scalar or a vector the same length
as the channel vector. The vector entries must use range codes from the
following table

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

0 to 10 10

The range codes you enter must be consistent with the jumper settings on the
board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector – The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide a
value that is out of the channel’s range, the value is reset to the lower or upper
range value.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

17-69
17 Diamond

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address setting on the board (header J6). For example,
if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Ruby-MM-416 Digital Input

Ruby-MM-416 boards have three I/O ports, each containing eight digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, you configure that port for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-70
 Ruby-MM-416

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Ruby-MM-416 Digital Output

Ruby-MM-416 boards have three I/O ports, each containing eight digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-71
17 Diamond

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-72
 Ruby-MM-1612

Ruby-MM-1612
The Ruby-MM-1612 is an I/O board with 16 (12-bit) analog output (D/A)
channels, and 24 digital I/O lines that can be configured in groups of eight for
either input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Ruby-MM-1612 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 17-73

• “Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Input” on page 17-76
• “Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Output” on page 17-77

Board Characteristics
Board name Ruby-MM-1612
Manufacturer Diamond Systems Corporation
Bus type ISA (PC/104)
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support D/A:No
DIO:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

Ruby-MM-1612 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

Volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector containing channel numbers between 1 and
16. This driver allows the selection of individual D/A channels in any order.

17-73
17 Diamond

The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used. For
example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range for bank 1, Range for bank 2 — Bank 1 consists of channels 1 to 8 and
bank 2 consists of channels 9 to 16. The output range may be specified on a
per-bank basis. These ranges must correspond to the jumper settings in header
R4 on the board. See the board manual for details.
Note that if you select a range of either -5V to +5V or 0 to +5V for one bank,
then it is not possible to select a range of either -10V to +10V or 0 to +10V for
the other bank. This is because jumper 5 in header J4 (On-Board Reference
Full-Scale Voltage Selection) affects all channels, not just those of a single
bank. See the board manual for details. The following lists the allowed output
voltage range combinations for the two channel banks. B1 is the first bank of
channels, B2 is the second bank of channels.

B1 B2 Configuration

+10 V +10 V C11

0-10 V +10 V C41

+5 V +5 V C22

+2.5 +5 V C32

0-5 V +5 V C52

0-2.5 V +5 V C62

+5 V +2.5 V C23

+2.5 V +2.5 V C33

0-5 V +2.5 V C53

0-2.5 V +2.5 V C63

+10 V 0-10 V C14

17-74
 Ruby-MM-1612

B1 B2 Configuration

0-10 V 0-10 V C44

+5 V 0-5 V C25

+2.5 V 0-5 V C35

0-5 V 0-5 V C55

0-2.5 V 0-5 V C65

+5 V 0-2.5 V C26

+2.5 V 0-2.5 V C36

0-5 V 0-2.5 V C56

0-2.5 V 0-2.5 V C66

This driver supports the Adjustable Reference Voltage. You can use this
feature with either output range -2.5V to +2.5V or 0 to +2.5V. If for example
you adjust potentiometer R4 to 2.3 V (instead of the default setting of 2.5), then
an input signal of 1.2 results in an output voltage of (1.2 / 2.5) * 2.3 V = 1.1 V.
See the board manual for details.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide a
value that is out of the channel’s range, the value is reset to the lower or upper
range value.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

17-75
17 Diamond

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Input

Ruby-MM-1612 boards have three I/O ports, each containing eight digital I/O
lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input or output.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block for a given port, that port is configured for input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

17-76
 Ruby-MM-1612

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Ruby-MM-1612 Digital Output

Ruby-MM-1612 series boards have three I/O ports, each containing eight
digital I/O lines. These ports can be configured independently for either input
or output. Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital
output driver block for a given port, you configure that port for output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A, B, or C.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

17-77
17 Diamond

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. If you provide a
value that is out of the channel’s range, the value is reset to the lower or upper
range value.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

17-78
 18

General Standards

I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.generalstandards.com).

Overview of PMC-ADADIO Description of how the PMC-ADADIO blocks can be

Functionality (p. 18-2) configured to interact with one another and other blocks.
PMC-ADADIO (p. 18-14) High performance multifunction board that has eight 16
bit analog to digital converters and eight 16 bit digital to
analog outputs. The board also has 8 bits of TTL level
digital I/O.
PMC-16AO-12 (p. 18-25) High speed board that has twelve 16 bit analog outputs.
18 General Standards

Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

The PMC-ADADIO board is an analog I/O PCI mezzanine card (PMC) device
that can be used for a number of applications, such as data acquisition and
process monitoring.
xPC Target supports this board with A/D and D/A driver blocks. The following
xPC Target driver blocks control the A/D functionality of the PMC-ADADIO
board:

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Start” on page 18-15

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Read” on page 18-16

The following xPC Target driver blocks control the D/A functionality of the
PMC-ADADIO board:

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Write” on page 18-17

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Update” on page 18-20

The use of these drivers differ slightly from other boards. Of particular note are
the Boolean enable ports (labelled E) that most of the A/D and D/A blocks have
for input and/or output. These enable ports perform the following:

• Control block action. If the value of the input enable port is true, the block
executes. If the value is false, the block does not execute. Most blocks also
have output enable ports. The output enable port has the same value as the
input enable port. This allows the control block action value to be passed to
successive blocks.
• Ensure that A/D and/or D/A blocks execute in the correct order. For example,
the A/D Start block starts the analog to digital conversion of the channels
selected by the A/D Read block. This block must finish its operation before
the A/D Read block can execute. If the A/D Read block executes first, the A/D
Read block waits indefinitely for the A/D conversion to complete.

An input enable port can have an Enable Signal block connected to the port.
The Enable Signal block generates an input enable signal for the A/D and D/A
blocks. If you do not connect an Enable Signal block to the A/D or D/A block,
the input enable port has a constant value of 1, or ‘true.’

18-2
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

A typical A/D block configuration for analog input operation connects the AD
Start block and AD Read block. Because the A/D Start block can take several
microseconds to perform the analog to digital conversion of the channels
selected by the A/D Read block, you can perform other operations in the
meantime. For example, you can insert a typical D/A block configuration
between the AD Start and Read blocks. A typical configuration for analog
output operation connects the DA Write and DA Update blocks.
This section describes how to use the PMC-Adadio blocks to create a model that
interleaves the analog input and analog output operations. It has the following
topics:

• “A/D Blocks” on page 18-3

• “Create Enable Signal Blocks” on page 18-5
• “D/A Blocks” on page 18-8
• “Interleaving Analog Input and Analog Output Blocks” on page 18-10
• “Using Multiple Boards for Simultaneous Analog to Digital Conversion” on
page 18-12

A/D Blocks
A typical A/D block configuration for analog input operation connects the AD
Start block and AD Read block. The AD Start block converts the data of the
channels selected by the AD Read block.

Adding A/D Blocks to a Model for Analog Input

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target driver block library opens.

2 Double-click the A/D group block.

A window with blocks for A/D drivers opens.

3 Double-click the General Standards group block.

A window with blocks for General Standards opens.

18-3
18 General Standards

4 From the File menu, select New -> Model.

5 Drag and drop an AD Start block from the General Standards window to the
new model.

By default, this block should have the Enable input port and Enable
output port check boxes selected.

6 Drag and drop an AD Read block from the General Standards window to the
new model.

By default, this block has the Enable input port and Enable output port
check boxes selected. Double-click the AD Read block and deselect the
Enable output port. Deselecting this check box prohibits the block from
passing the Boolean value from the input enable port to the output enable
port.

7 Connect the AD Start block to the AD Read block.

Note the following

- No signal has been connected to the AD Start block’s input enable port, E,
so the port has a default value of ‘true’. Accordingly, the output enable port
of the AD Start block and input enable port of the AD Read block also have
a value of ‘true’. You can drag and drop a Ground block from the Simulink
Source library and connect that block to the unconnected input port of AD
Start to prevent build errors until you add another block. You can drag and
drop a Terminator block from the Simulink Sink library and connect that

18-4
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

block to unconnected output ports of AD Read to prevent build errors until

you add other blocks.
- Connecting the output enable port of the AD Start block to the input
enable port of the AD Read block ensures that the AD Start block executes
before the AD Read block. The AD Start block initiates the A/D conversion.
The Read block waits until the conversion has completed before putting
the results on its output port.

Note The Start block must execute before every call to the Read block. If the
Read block is executed without the Start block, the system hangs because it is
waiting for data to be available.

8 From the File menu, select Save As. Browse to a writable directory and
enter a unique model name. For example, AdadioADDA, then click Save.

Your next task is to add a Create Enable Signal block to this model. See
“Adding Enable Signal Blocks to A/D Blocks” on page 18-6.

Create Enable Signal Blocks

The A/D and D/A series of blocks both have Create Enable Signal blocks.

You can use a Create Enable Signal block to generate an input enable signal
for A/D and D/A blocks. You can connect a signal generator to the input of the
Create Enable Signal block to control the output enable port. You can then
connect the output E port of the Create Enable Signal block to the input E port
of an A/D or D/A block.

18-5
18 General Standards

Adding Enable Signal Blocks to A/D Blocks

This procedure assumes that you have a model named AdadioADDA (see
“Adding A/D Blocks to a Model for Analog Input” on page 18-3). Add a Create
Enable Signal block to generate an input enable signal for the AD Start block.
If you have Ground or Terminator blocks, remove them as you make
connections to the additional blocks.

1 If your model AdadioADDA is not already open, in the MATLAB Command

Window, type
AdadioADDA

The model opens.

2 In the MATLAB window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target library opens.

3 Double-click the A/D group block.

A window with blocks for A/D drivers opens.

4 Double-click the General Standards group block.

A window with blocks for General Standards opens.

5 Drag and drop a Create Enable Signal block from the General Standards
window to the new model.

6 Double click the Create Enable Signal block and deselect the Show input
port for thresholding signal of type double.

The Create Enable block has an output enable port, E, that can provide an
input enable signal for any of the other PMC-ADADIO blocks. The Boolean
value of this output enable port is controlled by an input port, S, and
(optionally) an input port, L. When the S port is connected to the output of
an arbitrary block B, the Create Enable Signal block executes immediately
after block B executes. The L port is a level-sensitive thresholding port that
allows an attached signal to control the Boolean value at the output enable
port E.

18-6
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

7 Click Start -> Simulink -> Library Browser.

8 Click Sources. The Sources pane displays the included blocks.

9 Drag and drop a Sine Wave block to the new model.

10 Connect the output port of the Sine Wave block to the input port S of the
Create Enable Signal block.

Connecting the Sine Wave to the Create Enable Signal block triggers the
sequence chain of the ADADIO blocks.

11 In the new model, connect the S port of the Create Enable Signal block to the
Sine Wave block.

12 In the new model, connect the AD Start block E port to the Create Enable
Signal E port.

The output enable port, E, of the Create Enable Signal block provides the
first Boolean output to feed into the other ADADIO driver blocks.

13 From the File menu, select Save.

Your next task is to set up the D/A blocks to provide the analog output for the
analog input blocks.

18-7
18 General Standards

D/A Blocks
A typical D/A block configuration for analog output operation connects the DA
Write block and DA Update block. The DA Update block converts the data that
the DA Write block puts out.

Adding D/A Blocks to a Model for Analog Output

1 If the model AdadioADDA is not already open, in the MATLAB Command

Window, type
AdadioADDA

The model opens.

2 In the MATLAB window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target library opens.

3 Double-click the D/A group block.

A window with blocks for D/A drivers opens.

4 Double-click the General Standards group block.

A window with blocks for General Standards opens.

5 Drag and drop a DA Write block from the General Standards window to the
new model.

6 Drag and drop a DA Update block from the General Standards window to
the new model.

7 Connect the DA Update block to the DA Write block.

18-8
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

Note the following:

• No signal has been connected to the DA Write block’s input enable port, E, so
the port has a default value of ‘true’. Accordingly, the output enable port of
the DA Write block and input enable port of the DA Update block also have
a value of ‘true’.
• Connecting the output enable port of the DA Write block to the input enable
port of the DA Update block ensures that the DA Write block executes before
the DA Update block. The DA Write block loads the PMC-ADADIO registers
in preparation for the D/A conversion. The DA Update block waits until the
loading has completed before initiating the D/A conversion. As with the AD
Start and Read blocks, the DA Write and Update blocks do not need to be
directly connected to each other. You can interleave other blocks if you want.

You can interleave the analog output blocks between the AD Start and AD
Read blocks. Such a configuration allows the analog output block to perform
concurrently with the A/D conversion by the AD Start block. To connect to the
AD Start and AD Read blocks, the interleaving block(s) must have an input
enable port and an output enable port. See “Interleaving Analog Input and
Analog Output Blocks” on page 18-10.

18-9
18 General Standards

Interleaving Analog Input and Analog Output

Blocks
After the AD Start block executes, the acquisition hardware becomes busy with
the operation. If you have the AD Read block execute immediately, it will idle
waiting for the hardware to finish the acquisition. Rather than allowing idle
cycles, you can insert other blocks between the AD Start and AD Read block.
You can insert

• An atomic subsystem that has a pass through input for the enable signal
from the AD Start to the AD Read blocks. This type of system enforces an
execution order where the inserted subsystem executes between the other
two blocks.
• A pair of blocks that already have an enable port, such as DA Write and DA
Update. Because the DA Write and DA Update blocks already have an
enable port, you do not have to include them in another subsystem to ensure
correct execution order. See the following enable line for the execution order:

a AD Start enable out to DA Write enable in

b DA Write enable out to DA Update enable in

c DA Update enable out to AD Read enable in

This results in the time sequence: AD Start -> DA Write -> DA Update -> AD
Read. By the time AD Read executes, the hardware has either finished or is
much closer to finishing. Less time is wasted than if you use no interleaving.
Note that the data input to DA Write comes from another part of the model.
Typically, it will be the value calculated from the AD Read from the previous
time step.
The following procedure assumes that you have a model named AdadioADDA
that has AD Start and Read blocks, an Enable Create Signal block, and DA
Write and Update blocks:

1 If the model AdadioADDA is not already open, in the MATLAB Command

Window, type
AdadioADDA

The model opens.

18-10
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

2 In the MATLAB window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target library opens.

3 Disconnect the AD Start block from the AD Read block.

Perform this step to insert the intermediate DA blocks between the AD Start
and Read blocks.

4 Connect the output E port of the AD Start block to the input E port of the
DA Write block.

5 Connect the output port of the Sine Wave block to the input 1 port of the DA
Write block.

6 Connect the output E port of the DA Write block to the input E port of the
DA Update block.

7 Connect the output E port of the DA Update block to the input E port of the
AD Read block.

8 At the xPC Target library, double-click the Misc group block

9 Drag and drop the Scope (xPC) block into the AdadioADDA model.

10 Connect the output E port of the AD Read block to the Scope (xPC) block.

18-11
18 General Standards

11 From the File menu, select Save.

You can build and run the model and download it to your target PC like any
other xPC Target model.

Using Multiple Boards for Simultaneous Analog to

Digital Conversion
The previous topics describe how to set up a model for up to eight channels
performing simultaneous analog to digital conversion. You can increase the
number of channels for this conversion by using two or more PMC-ADADIO
boards, configured in a master/slave configuration.
In such a configuration, observe the following guidelines:

• Decide how many slave PMC-ADADIO boards you want in your

configuration.
• Identify one PMC-ADADIO as the master board.
• Create a model that uses the master PMC-ADADIO board. This model must
contain an A/D Start block for the master board.
• For each PMC-ADADIO board in your system, including the master and all
slave boards, the model must contain an associated A/D Read block.
• Connect the Enable output port (E) of the A/D Start block of the master board
to the Enable input port (E) of each of the slave A/D Read blocks. You can do
this in one of the following ways. Note that the order in which the A/D Read
blocks are connected is irrelevant.
- Directly connect the Enable output port (E) of the A/D Start block to the
Enable input port (E) of each of the slave A/D Read blocks.
- Directly connect the Enable output port (E) of the A/D Start block to the
Enable input port (E) of the first slave A/D Read block, then create a daisy
chain of slave Enable input to Enable output ports for the slave A/D Read
blocks. For example

18-12
 Overview of PMC-ADADIO Functionality

• Connect pin4 of the P5B connector (INPUT TRIGGER READY signal) of the
master board to pin 2 of the P5B connector (INPUT TRIGGER signal) of all
the slave boards. For example

Board1 Board2 Board3

Master Slave Slave

Pin 4 Pin 2 Pin 2

P5B P5B P5B

connector connector connector

Note The pulse of the master board INPUT TRIGGER READY output occurs
250 nanoseconds after the software trigger in the A/D Start block. This results
in a 250 nanosecond delay, relative to the master board, for the slave boards,
but should still be considered simultaneous in most situations.

18-13
18 General Standards

PMC-ADADIO
The PMC-ADADIO is a high performance multifunction board that has eight
16 bit analog to digital converters and four 16 bit digital to analog outputs. Up
to eight input channels are sampled simultaneously from a single acquisition
start. The board also has 8 bits of TTL level digital I/O. All 8 bits are either
inputs or outputs.
You can purchase the PMC-ADADIO board in either a memory mapped or an
I/O mapped configuration. The driver detects this configuration and adjusts for
it. In addition, you order the board for a specific factory configured voltage
range. Consult the board’s documentation to determine the voltage range of
your board.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Start” on page 18-15

• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Read” on page 18-16
• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Write” on page 18-17
• “PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Update” on page 18-20
• “PMC-ADADIO Digital Input” on page 18-21
• “PMC-ADADIO Digital Output” on page 18-22
• “Create Enable Signal” on page 18-24

Note that you cannot use the PMC-ADADIO Digital Input and Digital Output
driver blocks simultaneously on the same board. Trying to do so results in an
error.

18-14
 PMC-ADADIO

Board Characteristics
Board name PMC-ADADIO
Manufacturer General Standards
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped or I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Start

Scaling Input to Output
The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Enable input port — Select this check box to display the enable input port that
controls the execution of the A/D conversion. If the enable input signal is true,
the A/D conversion begins. If the enable input signal is false, then the A/D
conversion is not started. If this check box is not selected, then the enable input
signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this

18-15
18 General Standards

driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PMC-ADADIO Analog Input (A/D) Read

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — Enter a scalar between 1 and 8 to select the number
of channels from which to acquire data. This board always acquires data from
the channels in chronological order with no random access to channel selection.
For example, if you enter 3, data is acquired from channels 1, 2 and 3. Select a
number between 1 and 8 even though the hardware manual numbers the
channels from 0 to 7.
Range option — From the list, select +-10V, +-5V or +-2.5V as the input
voltage range of the board. You must select the range that corresponds to the
factory configured input range. Consult the board’s documentation to
determine the voltage range of your board. xPC Target uses this parameter to
convert the data to floating point numbers.
Input coupling — From the list, select Single-ended (8 channels) or
Differential (8 channels). See the board’s hardware manual for
information on how to wire the board for these configurations.
Autocalibration — The PMC-ADADIO can check its own calibration
(autocalibration) against an internal voltage reference. Choose this check box
to execute the autocalibration cycle when the model is downloaded to the xPC
Target target PC. The calibration cycle takes several seconds to run. The
output ports show a square wave during the cycle. Refer to the PMC-ADADIO
documentation for further information on autocalibration.

18-16
 PMC-ADADIO

Enable input port — Select this check box to display an input port that
controls writing data from the A/D ports on the hardware. If the enable input
signal is true, then the output of the A/D converter is read and output to the
block output port. If the enable input signal is false, then zero data is output to
the block output port. If this check box is not selected, then the enable input
signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Write

Data from 1 to 4 input data streams is written to the hardware digital to analog
output registers when the enable port also receives a true value. If the enable
port is not used, then it is assumed to be true always. The output registers are
held and not written through to the output converters until the analog output
update block is executed.

18-17
18 General Standards

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 4 to select the
analog output lines to drive. Number the lines beginning with 1 even though
the board manufacturer starts numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running. For example, if Channel
vector is [ 2 3 ] and the Reset vector is [1], the action taken will be the same
as if Reset vector was set to [1 1]. Both channels will be reset to their initial
values when model execution is stopped.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. When model
execution is stopped, the corresponding position in Reset vector is checked.
Depending on that value, the channel is either reset to the initial value or
remains at the last value attained while the model was running. For example,
assume that Channel vector is [2 5 8], Reset vector is [1 0 1], and Initial
value vector is [2.3 5.6 0]. On initial download, channel 2 is set to 2.3 volts,
channel 5 to 5.6 volts, and channel 8 to 0.0 volts. When the model is stopped,
channel 2 resets to 2.3 volts, channel 5 remains at the last value attained, and
channel 8 resets to 0.0 volts.

18-18
 PMC-ADADIO

Range vector — From the list, select +-10V, +-5V or +-2.5V as the output
voltage range of the board. You must select the range that corresponds to the
factory configured output range. Consult the board’s documentation to
determine the voltage range of your board. xPC Target uses this parameter to
convert the data from floating point numbers to integers.
Autocalibration — The PMC-ADADIO can check its own calibration
(autocalibration) against an internal voltage reference. Choose this check box
to execute the autocalibration cycle when the model is downloaded to the xPC
Target target PC. The calibration cycle takes several seconds to run. The
output ports show a square wave during the cycle. Refer to the PMC-ADADIO
documentation for further information on autocalibration.
Enable input port — Select this check box to display an input enable port that
controls writing data to the D/A ports on the hardware. If the enable input
signal is true, then the block input data is written to the D/A ports on the
hardware. If the enable input signal is false, then data is not written to the D/A
ports on the hardware and the output remains at the previous value. If this
check box is not selected, then the enable input signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

18-19
18 General Standards

PMC-ADADIO Analog Output (D/A) Update

Scaling Input to Output
The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.
Driver Block Parameters
Enable input port — Select this check box to display an input enable port that
controls writing data to the D/A ports on the hardware. If the enable input
signal is true, then the block input data is written to the D/A ports on the
hardware. If the enable input signal is false, then data is not written to the D/A
ports on the hardware and the output remains at the previous value. If this
check box is not selected, then the enable input signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

18-20
 PMC-ADADIO

PMC-ADADIO Digital Input

Note that you cannot use the PMC-ADADIO Digital Input and Digital Output
driver blocks simultaneously on the same board. Doing so causes an error at
model update or build.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines to be read. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]
Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0. Note that the 8 digital lines are either all input or
all output.
Enable input port — Select this check box to display an input enable port that
controls writing data from the digital input ports on the hardware. If the enable
input signal is true, then the digital input values are read and output to the
block output port. If the enable input signal is false, then zero data is output to
the block output port. If this check box is not selected, then the enable input
signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.

18-21
18 General Standards

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PMC-ADADIO Digital Output

Note that you cannot use the PMC-ADADIO Digital Input and Digital Output
driver blocks simultaneously on the same board. Doing so causes an error at
model update or build.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

The values passed to the enable input port and enable output port of this block
are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines to be written. This driver allows the selection of individual digital output
lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines
used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

18-22
 PMC-ADADIO

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0. Note that the 8 digital lines are either all input or
all output.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running. For example, if Channel
vector is [ 2 3 ] and the Reset vector is [1], the action taken will be the same
as if Reset vector was set to [1 1]. Both channels will be reset to their initial
values when model execution is stopped.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial logical
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. These values can only contain 1’s and 0’s. If you
specify a scalar value, that value is the initial value for all channels. The
channels are set to the initial values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started. When model execution is stopped, the corresponding
position in Reset vector is checked. Depending on that value, the channel is
either reset to the initial value or remains at the last value attained while the
model was running. For example, assume that Channel vector is [2 5 8],
Reset vector is [1 0 1], and Initial value vector is [1 1 0]. On initial
download, channel 2 is set to high, channel 5 to high, and channel 8 to low.
When the model is stopped, channel 2 resets to high, channel 5 remains at the
last value attained, and channel 8 resets to low.
Enable input port — Select this check box to display an input enable port that
controls writing data to the digital output ports on the hardware. If the enable
input signal is true, then the block input data is written to the digital output
ports on the hardware. If the enable input signal is false, then data is not
written to the digital output ports on the hardware and the output remains at
the previous value. If this check box is not selected, then the enable input
signal is assumed to be true.
Enable output port — Select this check box to pass the Boolean value from the
input enable port to the output enable port. You can connect this port to the
input enable port on another block to control other blocks in the model and
specify execution ordering.

18-23
18 General Standards

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Create Enable Signal

Use the Create Enable Signal block to determine whether a series of blocks
executes as well as to start the sequence of the blocks’ execution. For example,
connect another block in your model to the input port S to trigger the sequence
chain of the ADADIO blocks. The output enable port, E, provides the first
Boolean output to feed into the other ADADIO driver blocks.

Scaling Input to Output

The values passed to the enable output port of this block are Boolean values.

Driver Block Parameters

Show input port for thresholding signal of type double — Select this check
box to display the level input port, L. Connect the signal whose level you want
to compare to the threshold value to this port.
If this check box is not selected, then the output enable port has a Boolean
value of true. The output enable port provides a link for sequencing the
execution of your blocks.
Enable threshhold — Enter a threshold value. If the block input signal
connected to the level input port, L, is above this threshold, the output enable
port has a Boolean value of true. If the input signal is below this threshold, the
output enable port has a Boolean value of false.

18-24
 PMC-16AO-12

PMC-16AO-12
The PMC-16AO12 board is a high speed board that has twelve 16-bit analog
outputs. In this section, PMC-16AO12 refers to the board, PMC-16AO-12 refers
to the xPC Target block.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PMC-16AO-12 Analog Output” on page 18-25

Board Characteristics
Board name PMC-16AO12
Manufacturer General Standards
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PMC-16AO-12 Analog Output

Scaling Input to Output
The analog output range of this board depends on the output range that was
chosen at the time of purchase. This range can be +-2.5, +-5.0, or +-10.0.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 12. This is a vector
parameter that specifies the hardware output channels. For example, to
produce output on channels 2 and 3, enter
[2 3]

All unspecified channels are set to 0.0 volts on output.

18-25
18 General Standards

Number the channels beginning with 1 although the board manufacturer

starts numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running. For example, if Channel
vector is [ 2 3 ] and the Reset vector is [1], the action taken will be the same
as if Reset vector was set to [1 1]. Both channels will be reset to their initial
values when model execution is stopped.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started. When model
execution is stopped, the corresponding position in Reset vector is checked.
Depending on that value, the channel is either reset to the initial value or
remains at the last value attained while the model was running. For example,
assume that Channel vector is [2 5 8], Reset vector is [1 0 1], and Initial
value vector is [2.3 5.6 0]. On initial download, channel 2 is set to 2.3 volts,
channel 5 to 5.6 volts, and channel 8 to 0.0 volts. When the model is stopped,
channel 2 resets to 2.3 volts, channel 5 remains at the last value attained, and
channel 8 resets to 0.0 volts.
Range — From the list, choose either +-2.5, +-5.0, or +-10.0. The
PMC-16AO-12 is specified at purchase time as having one of these three
ranges. Choose the range to match that for which the board is configured.
Note that the range you set does not alter any configuration on the board. It is
used to scale the signal when it is converted to a 16-bit value to be written to
the output D/A converter (DAC).
Autocalibration — The PMC-16AO-12 can check its own calibration
(autocalibration) against an internal voltage reference. Choose this check box
to execute the autocalibration cycle when the model is downloaded to the xPC
Target target PC. The calibration cycle takes several seconds to run. The
output ports show a square wave during the cycle. The calibration cycle yields
adjustment factors that are retained in onboard NVRAM. The PMC-16AO-12

18-26
 PMC-16AO-12

reads these adjustment factors when the board is initialized. Refer to the
PMC-16AO-12 documentation for further information on autocalibration.
Ground sense — Choose this check box to enable the hardware provided
compensation for ground potential differences. Refer to the PMC-16AO-12
documentation for further information on ground sense.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

18-27
18 General Standards

18-28
 19

Humusoft

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target

(http://www.humusoft.cz/datacq/index.htm).

AD 512 (p. 19-2) I/O board with 8 single analog input (A/D) channels, 2
analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital inputs, and 8
digital outputs.
19 Humusoft

AD 512
The AD 512 is an I/O board with 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit)
with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 8 digital inputs, and 8 digital outputs.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “AD 512 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 19-3

• “AD 512 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 19-4
• “AD 512 Digital Input” on page 19-5
• “AD 512 Digital Output” on page 19-6

Board Characteristics
Board name AD 512
Manufacturer Humusoft
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

19-2
 AD 512

AD 512 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver block Parameter

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual channels in any order. The number of elements defines
the number of A/D channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels entered in the
channel vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different range for each channel.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

19-3
19 Humusoft

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the jumper settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

AD 512 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — This parameter is a combined Channel vector and Range
vector. The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used.
Enter a range code for each of the channels used. This driver allows a different
range for each channel with a maximum of 2 channels.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to + 5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second channel is
0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

19-4
 AD 512

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

AD 512 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Channel vector — Enter a numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital line numbers in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital input lines used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth digital input lines, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the lines beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

19-5
19 Humusoft

AD 512 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Channel vector — Enter a numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual digital line numbers in any order. The number of
elements defines the number of digital output lines used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth digital output lines, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the lines beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

19-6
 20

Keithley

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.keithley.com).

DAS-1800HR (p. 20-2) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 4 digital input lines and 4 digital output
lines.
KCPI-1801HC (p. 20-7) I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 4
digital input and output lines.
KPCI-1802HC (p. 20-14) I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 4
digital input and output lines.
20 Keithley

DAS-1800HR
The DAS-1800HR is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 4 digital input
lines and 4 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DAS-1800HR Analog Input (A/D)” on page 20-3

• “DAS-1800HR Digital Input” on page 20-5
• “DAS-1800HR Digital Output” on page 20-5

Board Characteristics
Board name DAS-1800HR
Manufacturer Keithley
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

20-2
 DAS-1800HR

DAS-1800HR Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter set to
Single-ended channels or Single-ended common mode) enter numbers
between 1 and 16 to select the number of individual channels used. If you select
eight channels (Input coupling parameter set to Differential) enter
numbers between 1 and 8 to select the A/D channels used. This driver allows
the selection of individual A/D channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of A/D channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Gain vector (1,2,4,8) — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the
channel vector to choose the gain code of that channel. The gain vector must be
the same length as the channel vector. This driver allows the gain of each
channel to be different.
Notice that by increasing the gain code the voltage range is decreased. The gain
divides the input voltage range.
For example, if the first channel has a gain code of 1 (10 volt range) and the
second and fifth channels have a gain code of 2 (5 volt range), enter
[1,2,2]

Range vector — From the list, choose either Bipolar or Unipolar.

The range setting defines if the board is working in bipolar or unipolar input
mode. This setting is the same for all of the selected channels.

20-3
20 Keithley

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver given the gain entered
and the range chosen.

Gain Bipolar Range (V) Unipolar Range (V)

1 -10 to +10 0 to 10

2 -5 to + 5 0 to +5

4 -2.5 to 2.5 0 to 2.5

8 -1.25 to +1.25 0 to 1.25

Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:
• Differential (8 channels)
• Single-ended (16 channels)
• Single-ended common mode (16 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Common-mode is similar to single-ended mode but the negative wire of the
source to be measured is connected to input AI-SENSE instead of LLGND.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

20-4
 DAS-1800HR

DAS-1800HR Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number
of digital input lines used with this port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DAS-1800HR Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — Enter a number between 1 and 4 to select the number
of digital output lines used with this port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

20-5
20 Keithley

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

20-6
 KCPI-1801HC

KCPI-1801HC
The KCPI-1801 is an I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 333 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 4 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “KPCI-1801HC Analog Input (A/D)” on page 20-8

• “KPCI-1801HC Analog Output (D/A)” on page 20-10
• “KPCI-1801HC Digital Input” on page 20-11
• “KPCI-1801HC Digital Output” on page 20-12

xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name KCPI-1801HC
Manufacturer Keithley Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:Yes, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

20-7
20 Keithley

KPCI-1801HC Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 64. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-5 to +5 -5 0 to 5 5

-1 to +1 -1 0 to 1 1

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 to 0.1 0.1

-0.02 to +0.02 -0.02 0 to 0.02 0.02

For example, if the first channel is -5 to + 5 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-5,1,1]

20-8
 KCPI-1801HC

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

single- 0 Analog input line connected to the positive

ended input. Analog input ground (IGND) internally
connected to the negative input.

differential 1 First analog input line connected to the

positive input of the PGIA. Second analog
input line connected to the negative input of
the PGIA. See the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,1]

The driver selects a second differential input 32 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the 37th channel as a
differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

20-9
20 Keithley

KPCI-1801HC Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of
individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the
number of D/A channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

20-10
 KCPI-1801HC

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

KPCI-1801HC Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

20-11
20 Keithley

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

KPCI-1801HC Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

20-12
 KCPI-1801HC

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

20-13
20 Keithley

KPCI-1802HC
The KCPI-1802 is an I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 333 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 4 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “KPCI-1802HC Analog Input (A/D)” on page 20-15

• “KPCI-1802HC Analog Output (D/A)” on page 20-17
• “KPCI-1802HC Digital Input” on page 20-18
• “KPCI-1802HC Digital Output” on page 20-19

xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name KPCI-1802HC
Manufacturer Keithley Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D:No, D/A:Yes, Digital I/O:Yes
Multiple board support Yes

20-14
 KPCI-1802HC

KPCI-1802HC Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 64. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to 5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to 2.5 2.5

-1.25to +1.25 -1.25 0 to 1.25 1.25

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

20-15
20 Keithley

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

single- 0 Analog input line connected to the positive

ended input. Analog input ground (IGND) internally
connected to the negative input.

differential 1 First analog input line connected to the

positive input of the PGIA. Second analog
input line connected to the negative input of
the PGIA. See the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,1]

The driver selects a second differential input 32 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the 37th channel as a
differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

20-16
 KPCI-1802HC

KPCI-1802HC Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of
individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the
number of D/A channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

20-17
20 Keithley

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

KPCI-1802HC Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

20-18
 KPCI-1802HC

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

KPCI-1802HC Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

20-19
20 Keithley

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

20-20
 21
Measurement Computing
(Formerly
ComputerBoards)

I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.measurementcomputing.com)

CIO-CTR05 (p. 21-5) I/O board with 5 counter/timer channels.

CIO-CTR10 (p. 21-14) I/O board with 10 counter/timer channels.
CIO-DAC08 (/12) (p. 21-23) I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A) channels.
CIO-DAC08/16 (p. 21-25) I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A) channels.
CIO-DAC16 (/12) (p. 21-27) I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels.
CIO-DAC16/16 (p. 21-30) I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels.
CIO-DAS16/330 (p. 21-33) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 4 digital input lines, and 4 digital output
lines.
CIO-DAS16/JR (/12) (p. 21-35) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output
lines, and 3 counter/timers (16-bit).
CIO-DAS16JR/16 (p. 21-40) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 4 digital input lines, 4 digital output
lines and 3 counter/timers.
CIO-DAS1601/12 (p. 21-42) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 32
digital input and output lines, and 3 counters.
CIO-DAS1602/12 (p. 21-49) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 32
digital input and output lines, and 3 counters.
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS1602/16 (p. 21-55) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 32
digital I/O lines, and 3 counters.
CIO-DDA06 (/12) (p. 21-61) I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital I/O lines.
CIO-DDA06/16 (p. 21-67) I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO24 (p. 21-73) I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO24H (p. 21-77) I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO48 (p. 21-80) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO48H (p. 21-84) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO96 (p. 21-88) I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DIO192 (p. 21-92) I/O board with 192 digital I/O lines.
CIO-DO24DD (p. 21-96) I/O board with 24 open-collector digital output lines.
CIO-PDISO16 (p. 21-98) I/O board with 16 isolated digital input lines and 16 relay
driven digital output lines.
CIO-QUAD02 (p. 21-101) 24-bit counting board with 2 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders.
CIO-QUAD04 (p. 21-109) 24-bit counting board with 4 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders.
PC104-DAC06 (/12) (p. 21-117) I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels.
PC104-DAS16JR/12 (p. 21-119) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels, 4 digital input lines and 4 digital output lines.
PC104-DAS16JR/16 (p. 21-123) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 4 digital input lines and 4 digital output
lines.
PC104-DIO48 (p. 21-127) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
PCI-CTR05 (p. 21-131) I/O board with 5 counter/timer channels.

21-2
PCI-DAS1200 (p. 21-141) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital input and output lines.
PCI-DAS1200/JR (p. 21-148) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, and 24 digital I/O lines.
PCI-DAS1602/12 (p. 21-153) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital input and output lines and 3 counters.
PCI-DAS1602/16 (p. 21-160) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital input and output lines and 3 counters.
PCI-DDA02/12 (p. 21-167) I/O board with 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DDA02/16 (p. 21-173) I/O board with 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DDA04/12 (p. 21-179) I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines
PCI-DDA04/16 (p. 21-185) I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DDA08/12 (p. 21-191) I/O board with 8 analog output (A/D) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DDA08/16 (p. 21-197) I/O board with 8 analog output (A/D) channels, and 48
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DIO24 (p. 21-203) I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
PCI-DIO24H (p. 21-207) I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
PCI-DIO48H (p. 21-211) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
PCI-DIO96H (p. 21-215) I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
PCI-DIO96 (p. 21-219) I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
PCI-PDISO8 (p. 21-223) I/O board with eight inputs and eight relay outputs.
PCI-PDISO16 (p. 21-226) I/O board with 16 inputs and 16 relay outputs.

21-3
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCIM-DAS1602/16 (p. 21-229) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital input and output lines and 3 counters.
PCIM-DDA06/16 (p. 21-236) I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels, and 24
digital I/O lines.
PCI-DUAL-AC5 (p. 21-242) I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
PCI-QUAD04 (p. 21-246) 24-bit counting board with 4 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders.
PCI-DAS-TC (p. 21-254) I/O board with 16 differential analog thermocouple input
channels. The thermocouple signals are converted by a
high frequency synchronous V-F A/D converter.

21-4
 CIO-CTR05

CIO-CTR05
The CIO-CTR05 is an I/O board with five counter/timer channels (16-bit).
It contains one AM9513A counter/timer chip. For additional information about
the various counter/timer modes of that chip see the AM9513A data sheet
which is part of the board documentation.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM” on page 21-6

• “CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 21-7
• “CIO-CTR05 Counter FM” on page 21-9
• “CIO-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM” on page 21-10
• “CIO-CTR05 PWM Capture” on page 21-12
• “CIO-CTR05 Frequency Capture” on page 21-13
• “CIO-CTRxx” on page 21-13

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-CTR05
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-5
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM

The CIOCTR05 has one AM9513A chip with five counters.
The CIO-CTR05 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

21-6
 CIO-CTR05

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM

The CIO-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with five counters.
The CIO-CTR05 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.

21-7
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,

F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-8
 CIO-CTR05

CIO-CTR05 Counter FM
The CIO-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with five counters.
The CIO-CTR05 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

21-9
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM

The CIO-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with five counters.
The CIO-CTR05 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4 or, 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.

21-10
 CIO-CTR05

Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,

F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-11
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-CTR05 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5. This selects which two
counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. In each case, one block
is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-12
 CIO-CTR05

CIO-CTR05 Frequency Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This selects which counter the
driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is needed for
each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTRxx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and Frequency Capture blocks use this
block in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

21-13
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-CTR10
The CIO-CTR10 is an I/O board with ten counter/timer channels (16-bit).
It contains one AM9513A counter/timer chip. For additional information about
the various counter/timer modes of that chip see the AM9513A data sheet
which is part of the board documentation.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM” on page 21-15

• “CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 21-16
• “CIO-CTR10 Counter FM” on page 21-18
• “CIO-CTR10 Counter FM & ARM” on page 21-19
• “CIO-CTR10 PWM Capture” on page 21-21
• “CIO-CTR10 Frequency Capture” on page 21-22
• “CIO-CTRxx” on page 21-22

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-CTR05
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-14
 CIO-CTR10

CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM

The CIOCTR10 has one AM9513A chip with ten counters.
The CIO-CTR10 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

21-15
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTR10 Counter PWM & ARM

The CIO-CTR10 has two AM9513A chip with ten counters.
The CIO-CTR10 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

21-16
 CIO-CTR10

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency
base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave - From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-17
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-CTR10 Counter FM
The CIO-CTR10 has two AM9513A chip with ten counters.
The CIO-CTR05 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. XTAL frequency is assumed to
be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in position 1MHz
not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

21-18
 CIO-CTR10

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTR10 Counter FM & ARM

The CIO-CTR10 has two AM9513A chips with ten counters.
The CIO-CTR10 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4,5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.

21-19
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,

F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-20
 CIO-CTR10

CIO-CTR10 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter - From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5, 5&6, 6&7, 7&8, 8&9, 9&10. This
selects which two counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. In
each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base - From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR10 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time - Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address - Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-21
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-CTR10 Frequency Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10. This selects which
counter the driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is
needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR10 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-CTRxx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and Frequency Capture blocks use this
block in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

21-22
 CIO-DAC08 (/12)

CIO-DAC08 (/12)
The CIO-DAC08 (/12) is an I/O board with eight analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-DAC08 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-23

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAC08 (CIO-DAC08/12)
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DAC08 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This board allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

21-23
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Range vector — Range code for each of the channels in the channel vector. The
range vector must have the same length as the channel vector. This board
allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-24
 CIO-DAC08/16

CIO-DAC08/16
The CIO-DAC08/16 is an I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-DAC08/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-25

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAC08/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DAC08/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This board allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

21-25
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Range vector — Range code for each of the channels in the channel vector. The
range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This driver allows
the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-26
 CIO-DAC16 (/12)

CIO-DAC16 (/12)
The CIO-DAC016 is an I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:
• “CIO-DAC16/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-30

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAC16 (/12)
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DAC16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

21-27
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to 2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-28
 CIO-DAC16 (/12)

The jumpers by the range DIP switches on the board all have to be in the XFER
position. The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.

21-29
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAC16/16
The CIO-DAC16/16 is an I/O board with 16 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-DAC16/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-30

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAC08/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DAC16/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This board allows the
selection of individual A/D channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

21-30
 CIO-DAC16/16

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to 2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Reset vector – The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector – The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address - Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-31
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

The jumpers by the range DIP switches on the board all have to be in the XFER
position. The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.

21-32
 CIO-DAS16/330

CIO-DAS16/330
The CIO-DAS16/330 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 330 kHz, 4 digital
input lines, and 4 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:
• “CIO-DAS16/330 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-34

Note xPC Target does not support the digital I/O on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAS16/330
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

21-33
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS16/330 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended (16 channels)

• Differential (8 channels)
This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-34
 CIO-DAS16/JR (/12)

CIO-DAS16/JR (/12)
The CIO-DAS16/JR is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 130 kHz, 4 digital input
lines, 4 digital output lines, and 3 counter/timers (16-bit). An external signal
conditioning board can be added to the CIO-DAS16/JR board.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DAS16/JR Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-36

• “CIO-DAS16/JR (/12) Analog Input (A/D) with EXP Signal Conditioning
Board” on page 21-37

Note xPC Target does not support the digital I/O or counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAS16/JR
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

21-35
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS16/JR Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended (16 channels)

• Differential (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-36
 CIO-DAS16/JR (/12)

CIO-DAS16/JR (/12) Analog Input (A/D) with EXP

Signal Conditioning Board
Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

There are signal conditioning boards (external devices) available from

ComputerBoards which can be connected to the CIO-DAS16/JR. Each
EXP-board contains its own multiplexer circuit which multiplexes a maximum
number of 16 EXP-channels to one A/D-channel of the CIO-DAS16/JR. For this
type of operation the CIO-DAS16/JR has to be setup for single-ended input
mode and this results in a theoretical number of 256 EXP-channels per
CIO-DAS/16JR board.

• EXP16
• EXP32
• EXP-BRIDGE16
• EXP-RTD
• EXP-GP

Driver Block Parameters

EXP Channel vector — This parameter describes the EXP-channels used.
Because always a group of 16 EXP-channels are mapped to one A/D-channel of
the CIO-DAS16/JR the EXP-channel vector can contain elements between 0
and 15 and no value should occur twice. The number of elements of the vector
defines the number of block outputs. The EXP-channel defined as the first
element is output at the first block output, the EXP-channel defined as the
second element is output at the second block output and so on.
Example:EXP Channel Vector:[4,0,12]
the Signal of EXP-channel 4 is output at block outut 1
the Signal of EXP-channel 0 is output at block outut 2
the Signal of EXP-channel 12 is output at block outut 3

21-37
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Note If a EXP32 is used and the EXP-channels 16 to 31 should be acquired, the

elements of the EXP Channel Vector have still to be in the range of 0 to 15.
Therefore the EXP-channel numbers have to be subsaturated by the constant
16.
A special case is provided by setting the EXP Channel Vector to an empty
vector. In this case it is assumed that no EXP-board is connected to the
specified A/D-channel (see dialog field A/D Board Channel) and the signal is
directly connected to the A/D-input of the CIO-DAS16Jr board. This feature
allows to use the A/D-channels of a CIO-DAS16Jr either for EXP-channels or
for direct input. Therefore it is not necessary to purchase another A/D-board for
direct input.

Note This feature should only be used if at least one EXP-board has to be
connected to the CIO-DAS16Jr. If all inputs are directly connected to the A/D
board use the CIO-DAS16Jr/12 (2.2.1) driver instead which allows much
higher sample rates.

EXP Gain — This parameter describes the gains for each EXP-channel used.
This vector corresponds over his indices with the EXP-gain vector and must
therefore have the same length. Because this I/O-driver can be used together
with all different EXP-boards there is no restriction about the gain value itself.
The EXP-board manual should be contacted to know what the gains of the
different EXP-boards are. The gains on the EXP-board depend on several DIP
switches on the specific EXP-board.
Example:EXP Channel Vector:[4,0,12]
EXP Gain Vector:[1,1000,200]
EXP-channel 4 has gain 1, channel 0 gain 1000 and channel 12 gain
200

If EXP Channel Vector is an empty vector EXP Gain Vector has to be an empty
vector as well.
A/D Board Channel — This field specifies to which A/D-channel of the
CIO-DAS16Jr the block of 16 EXP-channels are mapped. Because the input
coupling of the A/D board has to be single-ended channel 0 to 16 can be used.
The channel selection jumpers on the EXP-boards have to be set accordingly to
this software setting.

21-38
 CIO-DAS16/JR (/12)

A/D Board Range — This field specifies the input voltage range for the
CIO-DAS16/JR which is the same for all 16 single-ended channels.
From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V, +-2.5V,
+-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does not allow
the selection of different range for each channel.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address - Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Note If this driver is used the input coupling switch on the CIO-DAS16Jr has
always to be in the 16 (single-ended) position.

21-39
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS16JR/16
The CIO-DAS16JR/16 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 4 digital
input lines, 4 digital output lines and 3 counter/timers.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D)” in Chapter 21

Note xPC Target does not support the digital I/O or the counters on this
board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAS16JR/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

21-40
 CIO-DAS16JR/16

CIO-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one of the input modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-41
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS1601/12
The CIO-DAS1601/12 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 160 kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 32 digital input and output lines, and 3
counters (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-43

• “CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-44
• “CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Input” on page 21-45
• “CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Output” on page 21-46

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DAS1601/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: Yes, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-42
 CIO-DAS1601/12

CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. if a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter

21-43
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

0x300

CIO-DAS1601/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

21-44
 CIO-DAS1601/12

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Input

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-45
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DAS1601/12 Digital Output

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-46
 CIO-DAS1601/12

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-47
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-48
 CIO-DAS1602/12

CIO-DAS1602/12
The CIO-DAS1602/12 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 100kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 32 digital input and output lines, and 3
counters (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-50

• “CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-51
• “CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Input” on page 21-52
• “CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Output” on page 21-53

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board Name CIO-DAS1602/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: Yes, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-49
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. if a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-50
 CIO-DAS1602/12

CIO-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be planted according to the ranges
used.

21-51
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Input

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-52
 CIO-DAS1602/12

For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DAS1602/12 Digital Output

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-53
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-54
 CIO-DAS1602/16

CIO-DAS1602/16
The CIO-DAS1602/16 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 100kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (16-bit), 32 digital I/O lines, and 3 counters
916-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-56

• “CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-57
• “CIO-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input” on page 21-58
• “CIO DAS1602/16 Digital Output” on page 21-59

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board Name CIO-DAS1602/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: Yes, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-55
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. if a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-56
 CIO-DAS1602/16

CIO-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be planted according to the ranges
used.

21-57
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-58
 CIO-DAS1602/16

For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO DAS1602/16 Digital Output

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-59
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip
with 3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-60
 CIO-DDA06 (/12)

CIO-DDA06 (/12)
The CIO-DDA06 (/12) is an I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), and 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DDA06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-62

• “CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Input” on page 21-63
• “CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Output” on page 21-64

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DDA06 (/12)
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-61
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DDA06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to +2.5 2.5

-1.67 to +1.67 -1.67 0 to +1.67 1.67

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

21-62
 CIO-DDA06 (/12)

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
The jumpers by the range DIP switches on the board all have to be in the XFER
position. The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Input

The CIO-DDA06 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-63
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DDA06 (/12) Digital Output

The CIO-DDA06 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-64
 CIO-DDA06 (/12)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-65
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Base address - Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-66
 CIO-DDA06/16

CIO-DDA06/16
The CIO-DDA06/16) is an I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit), and 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-68

• “CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Input” on page 21-69
• “CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Output” on page 21-70

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DDA06/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-67
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to +2.5 2.5

-1.67 to +1.67 -1.67 0 to +1.67 1.67

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

21-68
 CIO-DDA06/16

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
The jumpers by the range DIP switches on the board all have to be in the XFER
position. The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Input

The CIO-DDA06/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-69
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DDA06/16 Digital Output

The CIO-DDA06/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-70
 CIO-DDA06/16

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-71
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-72
 CIO-DIO24

CIO-DIO24
The CIO-DIO24 is an I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO24 Digital Input” on page 21-73

• “CIO-DIO24 Digital Output” on page 21-74
• “CIO-DIO24 Signal Conditioning” on page 21-76

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO24
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO24 Digital Input

The CIO-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-73
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DIO24 Digital Output

The CIO-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

21-74
 CIO-DIO24

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-75
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO24 Signal Conditioning

Block Parameters
Genix initialization file (path\file) — Provide the filename of the Genix
initialization file.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-76
 CIO-DIO24H

CIO-DIO24H
The CIO-DIO24H is an I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO24H Digital Input” on page 21-77

• “CIO-DIO24H Digital Output” on page 21-78

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO24H
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO24H Digital Input

The CIO-DIO24H has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-77
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DIO24H Digital Output

The CIO-DIO24H has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

21-78
 CIO-DIO24H

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-79
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO48
The CIO-DIO48 is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO48 Digital Input” on page 21-80

• “CIO-DIO48 Digital Output” on page 21-81

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO48
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO48 Digital Input

The CIO-DIO48 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-80
 CIO-DIO48

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DIO48 Digital Output

The CIO-DIO48 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-81
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-82
 CIO-DIO48

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-83
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO48H
The CIO-DIO48H is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO48H Digital Input” on page 21-84

• “CIO-DIO48H Digital Output” on page 21-86

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO48H
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO48H Digital Input

The CIO-DIO48H has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-84
 CIO-DIO48H

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-85
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO48H Digital Output

The CIO-DIO48H has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-86
 CIO-DIO48H

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter 0x300

21-87
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO96
The CIO-DIO96 is an I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO96 Digital Input” on page 21-88

• “CIO-DIO96 Digital Output” on page 21-89

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO96
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO96 Digital Input

The CIO-DIO96 has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-88
 CIO-DIO96

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DIO96 Digital Output

The CIO-DIO96 has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-89
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.

21-90
 CIO-DIO96

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-91
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DIO192
The CIO - DIO192 is an I/O board with 192 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-DIO192 Digital Input” on page 21-92

• “CIO-DIO192 Digital Output” on page 21-93

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DIO192
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DIO192 Digital Input

The CIO-DIO96 has eight 8255 chips (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8). Each chip has three
ports (A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-92
 CIO-DIO192

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. The Chip parameter defines
which of the eight 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-DIO192 Digital Output

The CIO-DIO192 has eight 8255 chips (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8). Each chip has three
ports (A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-93
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. The Chip parameter defines
which of the eight 8255 chips is used.

21-94
 CIO-DIO192

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-95
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-DO24DD
The CIO-DO24DD is an I/O board with 24 open-collector digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-DO24DD Digital Output” on page 21-96

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-DO24DD
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-DO24DD Digital Output

The CIO-DIO24DD has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that are configured as outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-96
 CIO-DO24DD

For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-97
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

CIO-PDISO16
The CIO-PDISO16 is an I/O board with 16 isolated digital input lines and 16
relay driven digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “CIO-PDISO16 Digital Input” on page 21-98

• “CIO-PDISO16 Digital Output” on page 21-99

Note xPC Target does not support the 16 relays on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-PDISO16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-PDISO16 Digital Input

The CIO-PDISO16 has two independent connectors. Each connector has 8
digital input lines.
Use a separate driver block for each connector.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

5 to 24 volts DC/AC Double ~0 volts = 0.0

5 to 24 volts = 1.0

21-98
 CIO-PDISO16

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number
of digital input lines used with this connector. This driver does not allow the
selection of individual digital input lines.
Section(Connector) — From the list, choose either 1 (nearest to
backplate) or 2 (farthest from backplate to select the connector used.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.

The switch and jumper settings, that are not mentioned here, have no influence
on the running of xPC Target.

CIO-PDISO16 Digital Output

The CIO-PDISO16 has two independent connectors. Each connector has 8
relay driven digital input lines.
Use a separate driver block for each connector.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

relay Double < 0.5 = Relay open

> 0.5 = Relay closed

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number
of digital output lines used with this connector. This driver does not allow the
selection of individual digital output lines.

21-99
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Section(Connector) — From the list, choose either 1 (nearest to

backplate) or 2 (farthest from backplate to select the connector used.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.

The switch and jumper settings, that are not mentioned here, have no influence
on the running of xPC Target.

21-100
 CIO-QUAD02

CIO-QUAD02
The CIO-QUAD02 is a 24-bit counting board with 2 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders. Incremental encoders convert
physical motion into electrical pulses that can be used to determine velocity,
direction, and distance.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder” on page 21-101

See “CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 21-106 if you

have an earlier version of this driver.

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-QUAD02
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder

This driver block has one block output: Count.
The raw count value is a 24-bit integer that is converted to a double precision
float output from the block. The 24-bit value can be interpreted in different
ways (see Count Range).
In this section, the clockwise direction is the direction in which the counter
increments. The counterclockwise direction is the direction in which the
counter decrements. Note that the counter direction depends on the encoder
manufacturer and the way in which the encoder is installed.

21-101
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Note If you are using an earlier version of this driver block, see
“CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 21-106.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies the
channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address) two
blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Index input resets counter — Choose this check box to control the behavior
when the index is reached. For example, a rotary encoder typically reaches the
index at one particular position in its range of motion. Setting this check box to
reset the count value allows you to get a repeatable position from an encoder.
When the encoder reaches the index (asserts the index), the counter value is
set to the value given in the Count Limit or Reset Value field.
Index Polarity — From the list, select the index pulse slope that the board
should detect. Select Positive Index for a positive slope; select Negative
Index for a negative slope.

Counting Mode — From the list, select a counting mode (Normal, Range Limit,
Non-recycle, or Modulo-N). The output of the block depends on both the setting
of Index input resets counter and on the counting mode as described in the
following table.

21-102
 CIO-QUAD02

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Normal Upon model start, the output count is Upon model start, the counter is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset initialized to 0. The counter then
Value. The output count increments or increments or decrements until it
decrements one full revolution from the either overflows or underflows. For a
Count Limit or Reset Value. The rotary encoder, the number of
output count is reset to this value each revolutions is the number of output
time the index is reached. counts divided by the number of
For example, if Index input resets counts per revolution. The resulting
counter is selected, and a rotary integer is the number of revolutions;
encoder has 1024 counts per the fractional part can be converted
revolution, and a Count Limit or to an angle.
Reset Value value of 5000, a full
clockwise revolution of the encoder
increments the counter to 6023, at
which the index is reached. The
counter then resets to 5000.

21-103
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Range Limit Upon model start, the counter Upon model start, the counter is
increments or decrements until it initialized to 0. In the clockwise
reaches the count limit Count Limit direction, the counter increments
or Reset Value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at Count Limit or
clockwise, the counter stays at Count Reset Value. In the counterclockwise
Limit or Reset Value once it reaches direction, the counter decrements
that value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at 0.
counterclockwise, the counter
decrements one revolution then resets You can use this setting to set a
to Count Limit or Reset Value. repeatable 0 when there is a
mechanical stop. At model start, the
count is initialized to 0. The machine
then shifts to the negative direction
stop. At that point, the encoder
reports 0 at the stop and all other
positions will be positive and
repeatable.

Non-recycle Upon model start, the counter is The behavior of this option is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset undefined.
Value. With counterclockwise rotation,
the counter decrements and saturates
at 0. If the encoder reaches the index
before the counter saturates at 0, the
counter resets to Count Limit or
Reset Value. With clockwise rotation,
the counter increments until the
encoder reaches the index. When the
encoder reaches the index, the counter
resets to Count Limit or Reset Value.
You can use this setting to place 0 at
the first index inside a mechanical
limit.

21-104
 CIO-QUAD02

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Modulo-N The behavior of this option is Upon model start, the counter is
undefined. initialized to 0. In the clockwise
direction, the counter increments to
Count Limit or Reset Value, then
resets to 0 and repeats. When the
counter decrements, it counts to 0,
then resets to the Count Limit or
Reset Value value and continues to
decrement. You can use this setting
to repeat intervals that do not match
the distance between indexes
(resulting, for example, from gear
ratios).

Count Limit or Reset Value — The preset register (PR) on the counter chip is
a 24-bit quantity. The counter uses this value as a limit for the Range Limit,
Non-recycle, and Modulo-N counting modes.
When Index input resets counter is selected, this value acts as both the initial
value at model start and the value that an index resets the count to.
You can enter negative limit values, but the counter treats them as large
positive values. For example, a limit of -1 results in the Modulo-N range from
0 to 2 24 – 1 , not from -1 to 0.
Count Range — From the list, choose 0...2^24-1 or -2^23...+2^23-1. The
counter uses a 24-bit accumulator which overflows from 2 24 – 1 to 0. This same
overflow can be interpreted as the transition from -1 to 0. Selecting the
unipolar range 0 to 2 24 – 1 puts the discontinuity in counts at 0. Selecting the
bipolar range of ( – 2 ) 23 to 2 23 – 1 puts the discontinuity far away from 0. The
bipolar range is achieved by sign extending the 24-bit count to 32 bits before
converting to double.
Count Speed — From the list, choose non-quadrature, 1X, 2X, or 4X:

• non-quadrature — Counts the rising edges of the A input, losing direction

information in the process. The presence of a quadrature signal on the B

21-105
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

input might cause undefined results. You should disconnect the B and index
inputs.
• 1X — Counts up or down once per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 2X — Counts up or down twice per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 4X — Counts up or down four times per complete cycle of the quadrature
signal.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

Sample Time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base Address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init
remains 1 unless Counter Reset by Index is set to First Only, and the counter
detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block Parameters” on
page 21-107.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.
The distance is given by:
distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

21-106
 CIO-QUAD02

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose 1 or 2. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counter Reset by Index — From the list choose either Only First, or
Continuous.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.
Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise the
counting direction is reversed.
Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.

21-107
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

Sample Time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base Address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-108
 CIO-QUAD04

CIO-QUAD04
The CIO-QUAD04 is a 24-bit counting board with 4 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders. Incremental encoders convert
physical motion into electrical pulses that can be used to determine velocity,
direction, and distance.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder” on page 21-110

See “CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 21-114 if you

have an earlier version of this driver.
Note on usage:
There is a hardware limitation with the CIO-Quad04 boards in the way that
they handle unconnected inputs. Even with the Index input resets counter
check box disabled, noise on the index input line might cause the counter chip
on the board to latch an incorrect value. This value differs from the correct
value by a multiple of 256. The frequency of occurrence of the bad reads
depends on the count frequency coming from the encoder. High count rates
result in more bad reads.
To work around this issue, try the following:

1 If the index signal from an encoder is not being used, connect the index
inputs.

2 Connect the index+ input to +5 volts.

3 Connect the index- input to ground.

These connections should be made as close to the board as possible to minimize

any crosstalk at high count frequencies.

21-109
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Board Characteristics
Board name CIO-QUAD04
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder

This driver block has one block output: Count.
The raw count value is a 24-bit integer that is converted to a double precision
float output from the block. The 24-bit value can be interpreted in different
ways (see Count Range).
In this section, the clockwise direction is the direction in which the counter
increments. The counterclockwise direction is the direction in which the
counter decrements. Note that the counter direction depends on the encoder
manufacturer and the way in which the encoder is installed.

Note If you are using an earlier version of this driver block, see
“CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 21-114.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies the
channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address) two
blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Index input resets counter — Choose this check box to control the behavior
when the index is reached. For example, a rotary encoder typically reaches the
index at one particular position in its range of motion. Setting this check box to
reset the count value allows you to get a repeatable position from an encoder.
When the encoder reaches the index (asserts the index), the counter value is
set to the value given in the Count Limit or Reset Value field.

21-110
 CIO-QUAD04

Index Polarity — From the list, select the index pulse slope that the board
should detect. Select Positive Index for a positive slope; select Negative
Index for a negative slope.

Counting Mode — From the list, select a counting mode (Normal, Range Limit,
Non-recycle, or Modulo-N). The output of the block depends on both the setting
of Index input resets counter and on the counting mode as described in the
following table.

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Normal Upon model start, the output count is Upon model start, the counter is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset initialized to 0. The counter then
Value. The output count increments or increments or decrements until it
decrements one full revolution from the either overflows or underflows. For a
Count Limit or Reset Value. The rotary encoder, the number of
output count is reset to this value each revolutions is the number of output
time the index is reached. counts divided by the number of
For example, if Index input resets counts per revolution. The resulting
counter is selected, and a rotary integer is the number of revolutions;
encoder has 1024 counts per the fractional part can be converted
revolution, and a Count Limit or to an angle.
Reset Value value of 5000, a full
clockwise revolution of the encoder
increments the counter to 6023, at
which the index is reached. The
counter then resets to 5000.

21-111
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Range Limit Upon model start, the counter Upon model start, the counter is
increments or decrements until it initialized to 0. In the clockwise
reaches the count limit Count Limit direction, the counter increments
or Reset Value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at Count Limit or
clockwise, the counter stays at Count Reset Value. In the counterclockwise
Limit or Reset Value once it reaches direction, the counter decrements
that value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at 0.
counterclockwise, the counter
decrements one revolution then resets You can use this setting to set a
to Count Limit or Reset Value. repeatable 0 when there is a
mechanical stop. At model start, the
count is initialized to 0. The machine
then shifts to the negative direction
stop. At that point, the encoder
reports 0 at the stop and all other
positions will be positive and
repeatable.

Non-recycle Upon model start, the counter is The behavior of this option is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset undefined.
Value. With counterclockwise rotation,
the counter decrements and saturates
at 0. If the encoder reaches the index
before the counter saturates at 0, the
counter resets to Count Limit or
Reset Value. With clockwise rotation,
the counter increments until the
encoder reaches the index. When the
encoder reaches the index, the counter
resets to Count Limit or Reset Value.
You can use this setting to place 0 at
the first index inside a mechanical
limit.

21-112
 CIO-QUAD04

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Modulo-N The behavior of this option is Upon model start, the counter is
undefined. initialized to 0. In the clockwise
direction, the counter increments to
Count Limit or Reset Value, then
resets to 0 and repeats. When the
counter decrements, it counts to 0,
then resets to the Count Limit or
Reset Value value and continues to
decrement. You can use this setting
to repeat intervals that do not match
the distance between indexes
(resulting, for example, from gear
ratios).

Count Limit or Reset Value — The preset register (PR) on the counter chip is
a 24-bit quantity. The counter uses this value as a limit for the Range Limit,
Non-recycle, and Modulo-N counting modes.
When Index input resets counter is selected, this value acts as both the initial
value at model start and the value that an index resets the count to.
You can enter negative limit values, but the counter treats them as large
positive values. For example, a limit of -1 results in the Modulo-N range from
0 to 2 24 – 1 , not from -1 to 0.
Count Range — From the list, choose 0...2^24-1 or -2^23...+2^23-1. The
counter uses a 24-bit accumulator which overflows from 2 24 – 1 to 0. This same
overflow can be interpreted as the transition from -1 to 0. Selecting the
unipolar range 0 to 2 24 – 1 puts the discontinuity in counts at 0. Selecting the
bipolar range of ( – 2 ) 23 to 2 23 – 1 puts the discontinuity far away from 0. The
bipolar range is achieved by sign extending the 24-bit count to 32 bits before
converting to double.

21-113
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Count Speed — From the list, choose non-quadrature, 1X, 2X, or 4X:

• non-quadrature — Counts the rising edges of the A input, losing direction

information in the process. The presence of a quadrature signal on the B
input might cause undefined results. You should disconnect the B and index
inputs.
• 1X — Counts up or down once per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 2X — Counts up or down twice per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 4X — Counts up or down four times per complete cycle of the quadrature
signal.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init
remains 1 unless Counter Reset by Index is set to First Only, and the counter
detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block Parameters” on
page 21-107.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.

21-114
 CIO-QUAD04

The distance is given by:

distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose, 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counter Reset by Index — From the list choose either Only First, or
Continuous.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, The first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.
Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise the
counting direction is reversed.

21-115
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-116
 PC104-DAC06 (/12)

PC104-DAC06 (/12)
The PC104-DAC06 (12) is an I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PC104-DAC06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-117

Board Characteristics
Board name PC104-DAC06 (/12)
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PC104-DAC06 (/12) Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This board allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

21-117
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Range vector — Range code for each of the channels in the channel vector. The
range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This board allows
the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the jumper settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The jumpers by the range DIP switches on the board all have to be in the XFER
position. The Wait-State jumper has to be in the off position.

21-118
 PC104-DAS16JR/12

PC104-DAS16JR/12
The PC104-DAS16JR/12 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 150 kHz, 4 digital input
lines and 4 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PC104-DAS16JR/12 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-119

• “PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Input” on page 21-121
• “PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Output” on page 21-122

Board Characteristics
Board name PC104-DAS16JR/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PC104-DAS16JR/12 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.

21-119
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-120
 PC104-DAS16JR/12

PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 4 to select the number
of digital input lines used. This driver does not allow the selection of individual
digital input lines.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-121
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PC104-DAS16JR/12 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 4 to select the number
of digital output lines used. This driver does not allow the selection of
individual digital output lines.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The switch and jumper settings, that are not mentioned here, have no influence
on the running of xPC Target.

21-122
 PC104-DAS16JR/16

PC104-DAS16JR/16
The PC104-DAS16JR/16 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 4 digital
input lines and 4 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PC104-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-123

• “PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Input” on page 21-125
• “PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Output” on page 21-126

Board Characteristics
Board name PC104-DAS16JR/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PC104-DAS16JR/16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.

21-123
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-124
 PC104-DAS16JR/16

PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 4 to select the number
of digital input lines used. This driver does not allow the selection of individual
digital input lines.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-125
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PC104-DAS16JR/16 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 4 to select the number
of digital output lines used. This driver does not allow the selection of
individual digital output lines.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-126
 PC104-DIO48

PC104-DIO48
The PC104-DIO48 is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “PC104-DIO48 Digital Input” on page 21-128
• “PC104-DIO48 Digital Output” on page 21-129

Board Characteristics
Board name PC104-DIO48
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

21-127
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PC104-DIO48 Digital Input

The CIO-DIO48 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs. Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital
input driver block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-128
 PC104-DIO48

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC104-DIO48 Digital Output

The PC104-DIO48 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs. Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital
output driver block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.

21-129
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

21-130
 PCI-CTR05

PCI-CTR05
The PCI-CTR05 is an I/O board with 5 counter/timer channels (16-bit).
It contains one AM9513A counter/timer chip. For additional information about
the various counter/timer modes of that chip see the AM9513A data sheet
which is part of the board documentation.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM” on page 21-132

• “PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 21-133
• “PCI-CTR05 Counter FM” on page 21-135
• “PCI-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM” on page 21-137
• “PCI-CTR05 PWM Capture” on page 21-138
• “PCI-CTR05 Frequency Capture” on page 21-139
• “PCI-CTRxx” on page 21-140

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-CTR05
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-131
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM

The PCI-CTR05 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency

base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.

21-132
 PCI-CTR05

Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-CTR05 Counter PWM & ARM

The PCI-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The PCI-CTR05 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

21-133
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency

base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.

21-134
 PCI-CTR05

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-CTR05 Counter FM
The PCI-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The PCI-CTR05 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

21-135
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-136
 PCI-CTR05

PCI-CTR05 Counter FM & ARM

The PCI-CTR05 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The PCI-CTR05 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

21-137
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-CTR05 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

21-138
 PCI-CTR05

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5. This selects which two
counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. In each case, one block
is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-CTR05 Frequency Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

21-139
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. This selects which counter the
driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is needed for
each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-CTRxx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and Frequency Capture blocks use this
block in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

21-140
 PCI-DAS1200

PCI-DAS1200
The PCI-DAS1200 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 330 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 24 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DAS1200 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-141

• “PCI-DAS1200 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-143
• “PCI-DAS1200 Digital Input” on page 21-144
• “PCI-DAS1200 Digital Output” on page 21-146

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DAS1200
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: Yes, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DAS1200 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.

21-141
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does not allow
the selection of different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-142
 PCI-DAS1200

PCI-DAS1200 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.

21-143
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DAS1200 Digital Input

The PCI-DAS1200 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-144
 PCI-DAS1200

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-145
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DAS1200 Digital Output

The PCI-DAS1200 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-146
 PCI-DAS1200

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-147
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DAS1200/JR
The PCI-DAS1200/JR is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 330 kHz, and 24
digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DAS1200/JR Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-148

• “PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Input” on page 21-149
• “PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Output” on page 21-151

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DAS1200/JR
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DAS1200/JR Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.

21-148
 PCI-DAS1200/JR

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does not allow
the selection of different range for each channel.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Input

The PCI-DAS1200/JR has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-149
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-150
 PCI-DAS1200/JR

PCI-DAS1200/JR Digital Output

The PCI-DAS1200 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-151
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-152
 PCI-DAS1602/12

PCI-DAS1602/12
The PCI-DAS1602/12 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 200kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and 24 digital input and output lines and
3 counters (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-153

• “PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-155
• “PCI-DAS 1602/12 Digital Input” on page 21-156
• “PCI-DAS1602/12 Digital Output” on page 21-158

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCI-DAS1602/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

21-153
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. if a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-154
 PCI-DAS1602/12

PCI-DAS1602/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts

numbering channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in

21-155
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DAS 1602/12 Digital Input

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-156
 PCI-DAS1602/12

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-157
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DAS1602/12 Digital Output

The DAS1601/12 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-158
 PCI-DAS1602/12

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-159
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DAS1602/16
The PCI-DAS1602/16 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 200kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (16-bit), and 24 digital input and output lines and
3 counters (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-161

• “PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-162
• “PCI-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input” on page 21-163
• “PCI-DAS1602/16 Digital Output” on page 21-165

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCI-DAS1602/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-160
 PCI-DAS1602/16

PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. if a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

21-161
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of
individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the
number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog
output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts

numbering channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a vector or range codes to specify the ranges of each of
the channels. This must be a vector of the same length as the channel vector.
Otherwise, a scalar is assumed to apply to each channel.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

21-162
 PCI-DAS1602/16

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be planted according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

21-163
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-164
 PCI-DAS1602/16

PCI-DAS1602/16 Digital Output

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-165
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-166
 PCI-DDA02/12

PCI-DDA02/12
The PCI-DDA02/12) is an I/O board with 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA02/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-167

• “PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Input” on page 21-169
• “PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Output” on page 21-170

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA02/12
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA02/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of
individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the
number of D/A channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output
channels, enter
[1,2]

21-167
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-168
 PCI-DDA02/12

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA02/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-169
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA02/12 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA02/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-170
 PCI-DDA02/12

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-171
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-172
 PCI-DDA02/16

PCI-DDA02/16
The PCI-DDA02/16) is an I/O board with 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA02/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-173

• “PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Input” on page 21-175
• “PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Output” on page 21-176

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA06/12
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA02/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-173
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-174
 PCI-DDA02/16

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA02/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-175
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA02/16 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA02/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-176
 PCI-DDA02/16

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-177
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-178
 PCI-DDA04/12

PCI-DDA04/12
The PCI-DDA04/12) is an I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA04/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-179

• “PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Input” on page 21-181
• “PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Output” on page 21-182

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA04/12
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA04/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-179
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-180
 PCI-DDA04/12

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA4/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-181
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA04/12 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA04/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-182
 PCI-DDA04/12

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-183
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-184
 PCI-DDA04/16

PCI-DDA04/16
The PCI-DDA04/16) is an I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA04/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-185

• “PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Input” on page 21-187
• “PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Output” on page 21-188

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA04/16
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA04/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-185
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-186
 PCI-DDA04/16

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA4/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-187
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA04/16 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA04/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-188
 PCI-DDA04/16

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-189
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-190
 PCI-DDA08/12

PCI-DDA08/12
The PCI-DDA08/12) is an I/O board with 8 analog output (A/D) channels
(16-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA08/12 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-191

• “PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Input” on page 21-193
• “PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Output” on page 21-194

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA08/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA08/12 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-191
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-192
 PCI-DDA08/12

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA08/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-193
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA08/12 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA08/12 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-194
 PCI-DDA08/12

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-195
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-196
 PCI-DDA08/16

PCI-DDA08/16
The PCI-DDA08/16) is an I/O board with 8 analog output (A/D) channels
(12-bit), and 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DDA08/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-197

• “PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Input” on page 21-199
• “PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Output” on page 21-200

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DDA06/12
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DDA08/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-197
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 - +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 - +2.5 2.5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be placed according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

21-198
 PCI-DDA08/16

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Input

The PCI-DDA08/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

21-199
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DDA08/16 Digital Output

The PCI-DDA08/16 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-200
 PCI-DDA08/16

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-201
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-202
 PCI-DIO24

PCI-DIO24
The PCI-DIO24 is an I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO24 Digital Input” on page 21-203

• “PCI-DIO24 Digital Output” on page 21-204
• “PCI-DIO24 Signal Conditioning” on page 21-206

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DIO24
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO24 Digital Input

The PCI-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-203
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO24 Digital Output

The PCI-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-204
 PCI-DIO24

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-205
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO24 Signal Conditioning

Genix initialization file (path\file) — Provide the filename of the Genix
initialization file.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-206
 PCI-DIO24H

PCI-DIO24H
The PCI-DIO24H is an I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO24H Digital Input” on page 21-207

• “PCI-DIO24H Digital Output” on page 21-208

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DIO24H
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO24H Digital Input

The PCI-DIO24H has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-207
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO24H Digital Output

The PCI-DIO24H has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-208
 PCI-DIO24H

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-209
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-210
 PCI-DIO48H

PCI-DIO48H
The PCI-DIO48H is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO48H Digital Input” on page 21-211

• “PCI-DIO48H Digital Output” on page 21-212

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DIO48H
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO48H Digital Input

The PCI-DIO48H has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital

21-211
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO48H Digital Output

The PCI-DIO48H has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports (A,B,C).
Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs
or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-212
 PCI-DIO48H

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.

21-213
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-214
 PCI-DIO96H

PCI-DIO96H
The PCI-DIO96H is an I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO96H Digital Input” on page 21-215

• “PCI-DIO96H Digital Output” on page 21-216

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DIO96H
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO96H Digital Input

The PCI-DIO96H has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital

21-215
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO96H Digital Output

The PCI-DIO96H has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-216
 PCI-DIO96H

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.

21-217
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-218
 PCI-DIO96

PCI-DIO96
The PCI-DIO96 is an I/O board with 96 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO96 Digital Input” on page 21-219

• “PCI-DIO96 Digital Output” on page 21-220

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DIO96
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO96 Digital Input

The PCI-DIO96 has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital

21-219
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port of the current 8255 chip is used for this driver block.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DIO96 Digital Output

The PCI-DIO96 has four 8255 chips (1,2,3,4). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-220
 PCI-DIO96

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port of the current 8255 chip is used for this driver block.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Chip parameter defines which of
the four 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-221
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-222
 PCI-PDISO8

PCI-PDISO8
The PCI-PDISO8 is an I/O board with eight inputs and eight relay outputs.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-PDISO8 Digital Input” on page 21-223

• “PCI-PDISO8 Digital Output” on page 21-225

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-PDISO8
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-PDISO8 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

OPTO Double Low (opto off) = 0.0

High (opto on) = 1.0

The input is rectified before being applied to the opto isolator on the input.
With no additional input current limiting resistor, the opto turns on when
V in > 3 volts.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-223
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

For example, to use all of the digital inputs, enter

[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Filter vector — This vector controls the 5 ms noise filter. It is the same length
as the channel vector. A value of 1 turns the filter on, and a value of 0 turns the
filter off. If you specify a scalar, this value is applied to all channels.
Port — From the list choose A because this board only has eight channels.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-224
 PCI-PDISO8

PCI-PDISO8 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

RELAY Double < 0.5 = relay off

> 0.5 = relay on

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines to drive. This driver allows the selection of individual digital output lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose A because this board only has eight channels.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-225
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-PDISO16
The PCI-PDISO16 is an I/O board with 16 inputs and 16 relay outputs.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-PDISO16 Digital Input” on page 21-226

• “PCI-PDISO16 Digital Output” on page 21-228

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-PDISO16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-PDISO16 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

OPTO Double Low (opto off) = 0.0

High (opto on) = 1.0

The input is rectified before being applied to the opto isolator on the input.
With no additional input current limiting resistor, the opto turns on when
V in > 3 volts.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-226
 PCI-PDISO16

For example, to use all of the digital inputs, enter

[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Filter vector — This vector controls the 5 ms noise filter. It is the same length
as the channel vector. A value of 1 turns the filter on, and a value of 0 turns the
filter off. If you specify a scalar, this value is applied to all channels.
Port — From the list choose either A or B. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital inputs.
More than one block can be connected to the same port, but each channel can
only be referenced by one block at a time.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-227
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-PDISO16 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

RELAY Double < 0.5 = relay off

> 0.5 = relay on

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines to drive. This driver allows the selection of individual digital output lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A or B. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital outputs.
More than one output block can be used with the same port, but each output
channel can only be controlled by one block at a time.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-228
 PCIM-DAS1602/16

PCIM-DAS1602/16
The PCIM-DAS1602/16 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 100kHz, 2
analog output (D/A) channels (16-bit), and 24 digital input and output lines and
3 counters (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 21-230

• “PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-231
• “PCIM-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input” on page 21-233
• “PCIM-DAS1602/16 Digital Output” on page 21-234

Note xPC Target supports only 24 digital I/O lines and does not support the
counters on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCIM-DAS1602/16
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

21-229
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter
set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input coupling
parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.
This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels or to mix
single-ended and differential inputs.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 volts to +10 volts), +-5V,
+-2.5V, +-1.25V, +-0.625V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 0-2.5V, or 0-1.25V.This driver does
not allow the selection of a different range for each channel.
If a bipolar range is used, the bipolar switch on the board must be in the bipolar
position. If a unipolar range is used, the bipolar switch must be in the unipolar
position.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-230
 PCIM-DAS1602/16

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCIM-DAS1602/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1,2]

Number channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts

numbering channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

21-231
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.
Also the Bipolar/ Unipolar jumpers have to be inserted according to the ranges
used.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

21-232
 PCIM-DAS1602/16

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCIM-DAS 1602/16 Digital Input

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.

21-233
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCIM-DAS1602/16 Digital Output

The PCIM-DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

21-234
 PCIM-DAS1602/16

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The port name defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-235
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCIM-DDA06/16
The PCIM-DDA06/16) is an I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit), and 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCIM-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 21-236

• “PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Input” on page 21-238
• “PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Output” on page 21-239

Board Characteristics
Board name PCIM-DDA06/16
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCIM
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCIM-DDA06/16 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

21-236
 PCIM-DDA06/16

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5 0 to +2.5 2.5

-1.67 to +1.67 -1.67 0 to +1.67 1.67

-.625 to +.625 -0.625

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board.

Note For xPC Target, set the Simultaneous Transfer jumper to the XFER
setting.

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

21-237
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Input

The PCIM-DDA6/16 has a 8255 chip with three ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

21-238
 PCIM-DDA06/16

For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCIM-DDA06/16 Digital Output

The PCIM-DDA06/16 has a 8255 chip with three ports (A,B,C). Each port has
a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

21-239
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

21-240
 PCIM-DDA06/16

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-241
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DUAL-AC5
The PCI-DUAL-AC5 is an I/O board with 48 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Input” on page 21-242

• “PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Output” on page 21-243

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DUAL-AC5
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type compact PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Input

The PCI-DUAL-AC5 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

21-242
 PCI-DUAL-AC5

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-DUAL-AC5 Digital Output

The PCI-DUAL-AC5 has two 8255 chips (1,2). Each chip has three ports
(A,B,C). Each port has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs.

21-243
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has two 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

21-244
 PCI-DUAL-AC5

Chip — From the list choose 1 or 2. The Chip parameter defines which of the
two 8255 chips is used.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

21-245
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-QUAD04
The PCI-QUAD04 is a 24-bit counting board with 4 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders. Incremental encoders convert
physical motion into electrical pulses that can be used to determine velocity,
direction, and distance.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder” on page 21-247

See “PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 21-251 if you have

an earlier version of this driver.
Note on usage
There is a hardware limitation with the PCI-Quad04 boards in the way that
they handle unconnected inputs. Even with the Index input resets counter
check box disabled, noise on the index input line might cause the counter chip
on the board to latch an incorrect value. This value differs from the correct
value by a multiple of 256. The frequency of occurrence of the bad reads
depends on the count frequency coming from the encoder. High count rates
result in more bad reads.
To work around this issue, try the following:

1 If the index signal from an encoder is not being used, connect the index
inputs.

2 Connect the index+ input to +5 volts.

3 Connect the index- input to ground.

These connections should be made as close to the board as possible to minimize

any crosstalk at high count frequencies.

21-246
 PCI-QUAD04

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-QUAD04
Manufacturer ComputerBoards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder

This driver block has one block output: Count.
The raw count value is a 24-bit integer that is converted to a double precision
float output from the block. The 24-bit value can be interpreted in different
ways (see Count Range).
In this section, the clockwise direction is the direction in which the counter
increments. The counterclockwise direction is the direction in which the
counter decrements. Note that the counter direction depends on the encoder
manufacturer and the way in which the encoder is installed.

Note If you are using an earlier version of this driver block, see the
description at the end of this section.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies the
channel you use for this block. For the same board (same PCI slot) two blocks
cannot have the same channel number.
Index input resets counter — Choose this check box to control the behavior
when the index is reached. For example, a rotary encoder typically reaches the
index at one particular position in its range of motion. Setting this check box to
reset the count value allows you to get a repeatable position from an encoder.
When the encoder reaches the index (asserts the index), the counter value is
set to the value given in the Count Limit or Reset Value field.

21-247
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Index Polarity — From the list, select the index pulse slope that the board
should detect. Select Positive Index for a positive slope; select Negative
Index for a negative slope.

Counting Mode — From the list, select a counting mode (Normal, Range Limit,
Non-recycle, or Modulo-N). The output of the block depends on both the setting
of Index input resets counter and on the counting mode as described in the
following table.

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Normal Upon model start, the output count is Upon model start, the counter is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset initialized to 0. The counter then
Value. The output count increments or increments or decrements until it
decreases one full revolution from the either overflows or underflows. For a
Count Limit or Reset Value. The rotary encoder, the number of
output count is reset to this value each revolutions is the number of output
time the index is reached. counts divided by the number of
For example, if Index input resets counts per revolution. The resulting
counter is selected, and a rotary integer is the number of revolutions;
encoder has 1024 counts per the fractional part can be converted
revolution, and a Count Limit or to an angle.
Reset Value value of 5000, a full
clockwise revolution of the encoder
increments the counter to 6023, at
which the index is reached. The
counter then resets to 5000.

21-248
 PCI-QUAD04

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Range Limit Upon model start, the counter Upon model start, the counter is
increments or decrements until it initialized to 0. In the clockwise
reaches the count limit Count Limit direction, the counter increments
or Reset Value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at Count Limit or
clockwise, the counter stays at Count Reset Value. In the counterclockwise
Limit or Reset Value once it reaches direction, the counter decrements
that value. If the clock motion is until it saturates at 0.
counterclockwise, the counter
decrements one revolution then resets You can use this setting to set a
to Count Limit or Reset Value. repeatable 0 when there is a
mechanical stop. At model start, the
count is initialized to 0. The machine
then shifts to the negative direction
stop. At that point, the encoder
reports 0 at the stop and all other
positions will be positive and
repeatable.

Non-recycle Upon model start, the counter is The behavior of this option is
initialized to Count Limit or Reset undefined.
Value. With counterclockwise rotation,
the counter decrements and saturates
at 0. If the encoder reaches the index
before the counter saturates at 0, the
counter resets to Count Limit or
Reset Value. With clockwise rotation,
the counter increments until the
encoder reaches the index. When the
encoder reaches the index, the counter
resets to Count Limit or Reset Value.
You can use this setting to place 0 at
the first index inside a mechanical
limit.

21-249
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Counting Index input resets counter Selected Index input resets counter
Mode Deselected

Modulo-N The behavior of this option is Upon model start, the counter is
undefined. initialized to 0. In the clockwise
direction, the counter increments to
Count Limit or Reset Value, then
resets to 0 and repeats. When the
counter decrements, it counts to 0,
then resets to the Count Limit or
Reset Value value and continues to
decrement. You can use this setting
to repeat intervals that do not match
the distance between indexes
(resulting, for example, from gear
ratios).

Count Limit or Reset Value — The preset register (PR) on the counter chip is
a 24-bit quantity. The counter uses this value as a limit for the Range Limit,
Non-recycle, and Modulo-N counting modes.
When Index input resets counter is selected, this value acts as both the initial
value at model start and the value that an index resets the count to.
You can enter negative limit values, but the counter treats them as large
positive values. For example, a limit of -1 results in the Modulo-N range from
0 to 2 24 – 1 , not from -1 to 0.
Count Range — From the list, choose 0...2^24-1 or -2^23...+2^23-1. The
counter uses a 24-bit accumulator which overflows from 2 24 – 1 to 0. This same
overflow can be interpreted as the transition from -1 to 0. Selecting the
unipolar range 0 to 2 24 – 1 puts the discontinuity in counts at 0. Selecting the
bipolar range of ( – 2 ) 23 to 2 23 – 1 puts the discontinuity far away from 0. The
bipolar range is achieved by sign extending the 24-bit count to 32 bits before
converting to double.

21-250
 PCI-QUAD04

Count Speed — From the list, choose non-quadrature, 1X, 2X, or 4X:

• non-quadrature — Counts the rising edges of the A input, losing direction

information in the process. The presence of a quadrature signal on the B
input might cause undefined results. You should disconnect the B and index
inputs.
• 1X — Counts up or down once per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 2X — Counts up or down twice per complete cycle of the quadrature signal.
• 4X — Counts up or down four times per complete cycle of the quadrature
signal.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter

0xff
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init

21-251
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

remains 1 unless Counting reset by index is set to Only First, and the
counter detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block
Parameters” on page 21-107.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.
The distance is given by:
distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counting reset by index — From the list choose Only First, Continuous, or
Index input disabled.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, The first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.

21-252
 PCI-QUAD04

Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter

Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise,
the counting direction is reversed.
Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter

0xff
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

21-253
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

PCI-DAS-TC
The PCI-DAS-TC is an I/O board with 16 differential analog thermocouple
input channels. The thermocouple signals are converted by a high frequency
synchronous V-F A/D converter. The board is equipped with its own
micro-controller responsible for calibration, cold junction compensation,
moving average calculations, conversion, and conversion into physical
engineering units. The on-board micro-controller significantly off loads the
main CPU.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PCI-DAS-TC Thermocouple” on page 21-255

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-DAS-TC
Manufacturer Computer Boards
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

21-254
 PCI-DAS-TC

PCI-DAS-TC Thermocouple
Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

Volts Double temperature in

either degrees C, K,
or F.

Driver Block Parameters

Conversion rate (interrogation time) — From the list, choose either 50Hz,
60Hz, or 400 Hz. This is the conversion rate for the V-F A/D converter. The
conversion rate is the same for all input channels.
Number of samples for moving average — From the list, choose a value from
1 to 16. Converted signal values are put into a cyclic buffer of size n which is
used to calculate the moving average over these n samples.
Number of channels to be acquired (1..n) — From the list, choose a value
from 1 to 16. This is the number of input channels activated for conversion. The
first channel of the scan is always and input channel with the number 1 and
the last channel has the number n.
Vector input thermocouple types (cell array of char) — For each acquired
channel, enter a valid type of either 'J', 'K', 'E', 'T', 'R', 'S', or 'B'. This
vector defines the type of thermocouple for each channel. The vector must be
the same length as the Number of channels to be acquired.
Vector of input gains (double array) — For each acquired channel, enter a
valid input gain of either 1, 125, 166.7, or 400. This vector defines the input
gain for each channel. The vector must be the same length as the Number of
channels to be acquired.
Vector or temperature formats (cell array of char) — For each acquired
channel, enter a valid format of either 'C' or 'F'. 'C'= Celsius and 'F'=
Fahrenheit. The vector must be the same length as the Number of channels
to be acquired.

21-255
21 Measurement Computing (Formerly ComputerBoards)

Read and output CJC temperature — If you want the block to read, convert,
and output the temperature of the cold junction (CJC) sensor on the board,
select this check box. If selected, the block shows an additional output port with
the value of the CJC temperature.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note Each time a target application containing this driver block is

downloaded to the target PC, the board automatically does a full calibration.
Thermocouple sensor calibration is an extensive procedure and because it has
to take place for each channel independently, the calibration time can easily
exceed several seconds, especially when the number of channels to be acquired
is 5 or higher.

Because of this long calibration period during the initialization stage of the
target application, the download procedure can time-out and return an error
message. To avoid this error, increase the default timeout duration. See
“Increasing the Time-Out Value” on page 3-49.

21-256
 22

National Instruments

This chapter I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.ni.com).

AT-AO-6 (p. 22-4) I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16
digital I/O lines.
AT-AO-10 (p. 22-6) I/O board with 10 analog output (D/A) channels, and 16
digital I/O lines.
PC-DIO-24 (p. 22-8) I/O board with 24 digital input and output lines.
PC-TIO-10 (p. 22-12) I/O board with 16 digital input and output lines, and 10
counter/timer channels.
PCI-6023E (p. 22-23) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 8 digital I/O lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6024E (p. 22-31) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital
input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6025E (p. 22-40) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog inputs
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output channels, 32 digital input
and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6030E (Formerly I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
PCI-MIO-16XE-10) (p. 22-49) (A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital
input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6031E (p. 22-59) I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital
input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(p. 22-69) channels, 2 analog output channels, 8 digital input and
output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
22 National Instruments

PCI/PXI-6052E (p. 22-79) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels, 2 analog output channels and 8 digital input
and output lines.
PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(p. 22-89) channels, 2 analog output channels, 8 digital input and
output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6071E (p. 22-99) I/O board with 64 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital
input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PCI-6503 (p. 22-109) I/O board with 24 digital input and output lines.
PCI-6527 (p. 22-113) I/O board with 24 filtered digital input lines and 24
digital output lines. You can individually turn input
filtering on or off for each of the 24 input lines.
PCI-6601 (p. 22-117) General purpose counter/timer board. It has four 32-bit
counter channels.
PCI/PXI-6602 (p. 22-125) General purpose counter/timer board. It has eight 32-bit
counter channels.
PCI-6703 (p. 22-134) I/O board with 16 voltage outputs and 8 digital I/O lines.
PCI-6704 (p. 22-136) I/O board with 16 voltage outputs, 16 current outputs,
and 8 digital I/O lines.
PCI-6711 (p. 22-138) I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A) channels and 8
digital input and output lines.
PCI/PXI-6713 (p. 22-143) I/O board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels and 8
digital input and output lines.
PCI-DIO-96 (p. 22-148) I/O board with 96 digital input and output lines.
PXI-6040E (p. 22-152) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels, 2 analog output channels, 8 digital input and
output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PXI-6070E (p. 22-162) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels, 2 analog output channels, 8 digital input and
output lines, and 2 counter/timers.

22-2
PXI-6071E (p. 22-171) I/O board with 64 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8 digital
input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers.
PXI-6508 (p. 22-181) I/O board with 96 digital input and output lines.
PXI-6527 (p. 22-185) I/O board with 24 filtered digital input lines and 24
digital output lines. You can individually turn input
filtering on or off for each of the 24 input lines.
PXI-6704 (p. 22-189) I/O board with 16 voltage outputs, 16 current outputs,
and 8 digital I/O lines.

22-3
22 National Instruments

AT-AO-6
The AT-AO-6 is an I/O board with 6 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), and
16 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:

• “AT-AO-6 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-4

Board Characteristics
Board name AT-AO-6
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

AT-AO-6 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 6. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

22-4
 AT-AO-6

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 10 volts, enter
[-10,10]

The range settings have to correspond to the jumper settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

numbering the lines with 0.

22-5
22 National Instruments

AT-AO-10
The AT-AO-10 is an I/O board with 10 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
and 16 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:

• “AT-AO-10 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-6

Board Characteristics
Board name AT-AO-10
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

AT-AO-10 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 10. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

22-6
 AT-AO-10

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 10volts, enter
[-10,10]

The range settings have to correspond to the jumper settings on the board.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

22-7
22 National Instruments

PC-DIO-24
The PC-DIO-24 is an I/O board with 24 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PC-DIO-24 Digital Input” on page 22-8

• “PC-DIO-24 Digital Output” on page 22-9

Board Characteristics
Board name PC-DIO-24
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O-mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PC-DIO-24 Digital Input

The PC-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

22-8
 PC-DIO-24

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-DIO-24 Digital Output

The PC-DIO24 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

22-9
22 National Instruments

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-10
 PC-DIO-24

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

22-11
22 National Instruments

PC-TIO-10
The PC-TIO-10 is an I/O board with 16 digital input and output lines, and 10
counter/timer channels (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PC-TIO-10 Digital Input” on page 22-12

• “PC-TIO-10 Digital Output” on page 22-13
• “PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM” on page 22-15
• “PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 22-16
• “PC-TIO-10 Counter FM” on page 22-17
• “PC-TIO10 Counter FM & ARM” on page 22-19
• “PC-TIO10 PWM Capture” on page 22-21
• “PC-TIO10 FM Capture” on page 22-22

Board Characteristics
Board Name PC-TIO10
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PC-TIO-10 Digital Input

The PC-TIO-10 has one MC6821 chip with 2 ports (PIA A, PIA B). Each port
has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or
outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

22-12
 PC-TIO-10

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — Enter the number of digital input channels (from 1 to
8) to use with the port specified in Port.
Port — From the list choose either PIA A, or PCA B. The I/O board has a
MC6821 chip with 2 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the
MC6821 chip is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8
digital lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs depending on which
driver block is chosen. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-TIO-10 Digital Output

The PC-TIO-10 has one MC6821 chip with 2 ports (PIA A, PIA B). Each port
has a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or
outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

22-13
22 National Instruments

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Number of channels — Enter the number of digital output channels (from 1
to 8) to use with the port specified in Port.
Port — From the list choose either PIA A, or PCA B. The I/O board has a
MC6821 chip with 2 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the
MC6821 chip is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8
digital lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs depending on which
driver block is chosen. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

22-14
 PC-TIO-10

PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM

The PC-TIO-10 has two AM9513A chips each with 5 counters for a total of 10
counters on the board.
The PC-TIO-10 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value less than 1. The Relative output
frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to set the fixed output
frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

22-15
22 National Instruments

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-TIO-10 Counter PWM & ARM

The PC-TIO-10 has two AM9513A chips each with 5 counters for a total of 10
counters on the board.
The PC-TIO-10 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.

22-16
 PC-TIO-10

Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,

F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value less than 1. The Relative output
frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to set the fixed output
frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 17.5 kHz, then
choose F2=100kHz as the Frequency base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
output frequency. 100kHz x 0.175 = 17.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-TIO-10 Counter FM
The PC-TIO-10 has two AM9513A chips each with 5 counters for a total of 10
counters on the board.

22-17
22 National Instruments

The PC-TIO-10 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency

Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency.

Output duty Cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of
the square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See “PWM
and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.

22-18
 PC-TIO-10

Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-TIO10 Counter FM & ARM

The PC-TIO-10 has two AM9513A chips each with 5 counters for a total of 10
counters on the board.
The PC-TIO-10 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 to select which
counter is used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each
counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency.

22-19
22 National Instruments

Output duty Cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of
the square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See “PWM
and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed. If a value 1 is asserted, the counter gets armed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The dialogue box of the block allows the following settings:

22-20
 PC-TIO-10

PC-TIO10 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5, 6&7, 7&8, 8&9, 9&10. This
selects which two counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. Use
one block for each pair of counters. No two blocks should use the same counter.
For example, use counters 1&2 for one block and 3&4 for a second block. Do not
use a combination like 1&2 and 2&3.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

22-21
22 National Instruments

PC-TIO10 FM Capture
This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This selects which counter the
driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is needed for
each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=1MHz, F2=100kHz, F3=10kHz,
F4=1kHz, or F5=100Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the CIO-CTR05 has to be in
position 1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PC-TIO-10xx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and FM Capture blocks use this block
in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

22-22
 PCI-6023E

PCI-6023E
The PCI-6023E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 200 kHz, 8 digital I/O
lines, and 2 counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20
MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6023E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-24

• “PCI-6023E Digital Input” on page 22-26
• “PCI-6023E Digital Output” on page 22-27
• “PCI-6023E Pulse Generation” on page 22-28
• “PCI-6023E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-29

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6023E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth Measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No.
Multiple board support Yes

22-23
22 National Instruments

PCI-6023E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 -0.5 to +0.5 -0.5

-5 to +5 -5 -0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.

22-24
 PCI-6023E

The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-25
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6023E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-26
 PCI-6023E

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6023E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in

22-27
22 National Instruments

the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6023E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, or Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-28
 PCI-6023E

PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6023E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column is the result of a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

22-29
22 National Instruments

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-30
 PCI-6024E

PCI-6024E
The PCI-6024E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 200 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6024E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-32

• “PCI-6024E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-34
• “PCI-6024E Digital Input” on page 22-35
• “PCI-6024E Digital Output” on page 22-36
• “PCI-6024E Pulse Generation” on page 22-37
• “PCI-6024E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-38

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6024E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-31
22 National Instruments

PCI-6024E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 -0.5 to +0.5 -0.5

-5 to +5 -5 -0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.

22-32
 PCI-6024E

The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-33
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6024E Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-34
 PCI-6024E

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6024E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-35
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6024E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in

22-36
 PCI-6024E

the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6024E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-37
22 National Instruments

PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6024E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

22-38
 PCI-6024E

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-39
22 National Instruments

PCI-6025E
The PCI-6025E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog inputs
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 200 kHz, 2 analog
output channels (12-bit), 32 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
The PCI-6025E provides 8 digital input and output lines, the PCI-6025E 8255
provides an additional 24 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “PCI-6025E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-41
• “PCI-6025E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-43
• “PCI-6025E and PCI-6025E 8255 Digital Input” on page 22-44
• “PCI-6025E Digital Output” on page 22-45
• “PCI-6025E Pulse Generation” on page 22-46
• “PCI-6025E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-47

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6025E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-40
 PCI-6025E

PCI-6025E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 -0.5 to +0.5 -0.5

-5 to +5 -5 -0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.

22-41
22 National Instruments

The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this

22-42
 PCI-6025E

driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6025E Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-43
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6025E and PCI-6025E 8255 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — (PCI-6025E 8255) From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board
has an 82C55A chip with 3 ports. The port name defines which port of the
82C55A chip is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital
lines that can be configured as inputs. The PCI-6025E provides 8 digital input
lines, the PCI-6025E 8255 provides an additional 24 digital input lines,

22-44
 PCI-6025E

distributed across the ports A, B, and C. In each case, one block is needed for
each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6025E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

22-45
22 National Instruments

Port — (PCI-6025E 8255) From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board
has an 82C55A chip with 3 ports. The port name defines which port of the
82C55A chip is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital
lines that can be configured as inputs. The PCI-6025E provides 8 digital input
lines, the PCI-6025E 8255 provides an additional 24 digital input lines,
distributed across the ports A, B, and C. In each case, one block is needed for
each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6025E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for

22-46
 PCI-6025E

a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6025E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In

22-47
22 National Instruments

this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-48
 PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

The PCI-6030E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (16-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6030E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-50

• “PCI-6030E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-52
• “PCI-6030E Digital Input” on page 22-54
• “PCI-6030E Digital Output” on page 22-55
• “PCI-6030E Pulse Generation” on page 22-56
• “PCI-6030E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-57

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6030E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-49
22 National Instruments

PCI-6030E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

22-50
 PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-51
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6030E Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-52
 PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 10volts, enter
[-10,10]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-53
22 National Instruments

PCI-6030E Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-54
 PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

PCI-6030E Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

22-55
22 National Instruments

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6030E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-56
 PCI-6030E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16XE-10)

PCI-6030E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-57
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-58
 PCI-6031E

PCI-6031E
The PCI-6031E is an I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (16-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6031E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-60

• “PCI-6031E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-62
• “PCI-6031E Digital Input” on page 22-64
• “PCI-6031E Digital Output” on page 22-65
• “PCI-6031E Pulse Generation” on page 22-66
• “PCI-6031E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-67

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6031E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-59
22 National Instruments

PCI-6031E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 64. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

22-60
 PCI-6031E

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-61
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6031E Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-62
 PCI-6031E

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 10volts, enter
[-10,10]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-63
22 National Instruments

PCI-6031E Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-64
 PCI-6031E

PCI-6031E Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-65
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6031E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-66
 PCI-6031E

PCI-6031E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-67
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-68
 PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

The PCI-6040E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 500 kHz, 2 analog output
channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers (24-bit)
with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6040E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-70

• “PCI-6040E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-72
• “PCI-6040E Digital Input” on page 22-74
• “PCI-6040E Digital Input” on page 22-74
• “PCI-6040E Pulse Generation” on page 22-76
• “PCI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-77

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6040E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-69
22 National Instruments

PCI-6040E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

22-70
 PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-71
22 National Instruments

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6040E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-72
 PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-73
22 National Instruments

PCI-6040E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-74
 PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

PCI-6040E Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-75
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6040E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-76
 PCI-6040E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-4)

PCI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-77
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-78
 PCI/PXI-6052E

PCI/PXI-6052E
The PXI/PCI-6052E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 333 kHz, 2 analog output
channels (16-bit) and 8 digital input and output lines, and two counters/timers
(24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-80

• “PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-82
• “PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Input” on page 22-84
• “PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Output” on page 22-85
• “PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Generation” on page 22-86
• “PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-87

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI/PCI-6052E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI/PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-79
22 National Instruments

PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

22-80
 PCI/PXI-6052E

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-81
22 National Instruments

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI/PCI-6052E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels begin with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-82
 PCI/PXI-6052E

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 V -10 0 - 10 V 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-83
22 National Instruments

PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Input

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-84
 PCI/PXI-6052E

PXI/PCI-6052E Digital Output

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

22-85
22 National Instruments

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-86
 PCI/PXI-6052E

PXI/PCI-6052E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-87
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-88
 PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

The PCI-6070E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 1.25 MHz, 2 analog output
channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers (24-bit)
with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6070E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-90

• “PCI-6070E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-92
• “PCI-6070E Digital Input” on page 22-94
• “PCI-6070E Digital Output” on page 22-95
• “PCI-6070E Pulse Generation” on page 22-96
• “PCI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-97

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6070E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-89
22 National Instruments

PCI-6070E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

22-90
 PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-91
22 National Instruments

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6070E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-92
 PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-93
22 National Instruments

PCI-6070E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-94
 PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

PCI-6070E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

22-95
22 National Instruments

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6070E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, or Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-96
 PCI-6070E (Formerly PCI-MIO-16E-1)

PCI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-97
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-98
 PCI-6071E

PCI-6071E
The PCI-6071E is an I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 1.25 MHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6071E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-100

• “PCI-6071E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-102
• “PCI-6071E Digital Input” on page 22-104
• “PCI-6071E Digital Output” on page 22-105
• “PCI-6071E Pulse Generation” on page 22-106
• “PCI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-107

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCI-6071E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-99
22 National Instruments

PCI-6071E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 64. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second, and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0 to +2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0 to +1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 to +0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 to +0.2 0.2

22-100
 PCI-6071E

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 to +0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-101
22 National Instruments

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6071E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-102
 PCI-6071E

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-103
22 National Instruments

PCI-6071E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-104
 PCI-6071E

PCI-6071E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-105
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6071E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-106
 PCI-6071E

PCI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-107
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-108
 PCI-6503

PCI-6503
The PCI-6503 is an I/O board with 24 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6503 Digital Input” on page 22-109

• “PCI-6503 Digital Output” on page 22-110

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6503
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6503 Digital Input

The PCI-6503 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

22-109
22 National Instruments

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6503 Digital Output

The PCI-6503 has one 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

22-110
 PCI-6503

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-111
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-112
 PCI-6527

PCI-6527
The PCI-6527 is an I/O board with 24 filtered digital input lines and 24 digital
output lines. You can individually turn input filtering on or off for each of the
24 input lines. However, there is only one filter time of all of the input lines that
have filtering enabled.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6527 Digital Input” on page 22-113

• “PCI-6527 Digital Output” on page 22-115

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6527
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6527 Digital Input

The PCI-6527 has one chip with 3 ports (A,B,C) for digital input. Each port has
a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines. Use a separate driver block for each port.

Note The interrupt on change capability of this board is not used.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

OPTO Double < 0.5 = 0

> 0.5 = 1

22-113
22 National Instruments

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital inputs.
In each case, one block is needed for each port.
The documentation for this board from National Instruments labels these ports
0, 1, and 2.
Filter vector — This is a Boolean vector that selects which input lines to filter.
For example, if you enter a Channel vector of [1,3,5], and you want to filter
all three lines, enter
[1,1,1]

If you want to filter lines 1 and 5, but not line 3, then enter
[1,0,1]

If the filter vector is a single element, then it is scaler expanded to the same
width as the Channel vector. In the example above, if the Filter vector is [0],
it is expanded to [0,0,0]. Likewise, if the Filter vector is [1]it is expanded to
[1,1,1].

Filter interval — Enter the time interval the hardware filter uses to
determine a stable pulse. If the input pule is shorter then this interval, it is
ignored. There is only one filter interval for all filtered inputs, and if you filter
on more than one digital input block for this board, you must enter the same
Filter interval for all blocks.
A reasonable value for the Filter interval would be 200 to 300 us.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-114
 PCI-6527

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6527 Digital Output

The PCI-6527 has one chip with 3 ports (A,B,C) for digital output. Each port
has a maximum of 8 digital output lines. Use a separate driver block for each
port.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Block Output Scaling

Output Data Type

OPTO Double <0.5 = OPTO is OFF, no current

flowing
>0.5 = OPTO is ON, current can
flow

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

22-115
22 National Instruments

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital output
lines. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
The documentation for this board from National Instruments labels these ports
3, 4, and 5.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-116
 PCI-6601

PCI-6601
The National Instruments PCI-6601 is a general purpose counter/timer board.
It has four 32-bit counter channels. The reference frequency for this board is 20
MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with the following driver blocks:

• “PCI-6601 Digital Input” on page 22-117

• “PCI-6601 Digital Output” on page 22-118
• “PCI-6601 Incremental Encoder” on page 22-120
• “PCI-6601 Pulse Generation” on page 22-121
• “PCI-6601 Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-122
• “PCI-6601 Armed Pulse Generation” on page 22-124

xPC Target does not support the interrupt or timer functionality of the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6601
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6601 Digital Input

Only one input block can exist in a model for any given board.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input ports.
This driver allows the selection of individual digital input ports in any order.
The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first four ports as digital input channels, enter
[1,2,3,4]

22-117
22 National Instruments

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the ports with 0.

Note Treat the eight I/O ports as two groups of four ports. The two groups
are ports 1 to 4 and ports 5 to 8. Do not specify both input and output channels
in the same group of four ports. The driver will emit an error.

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6601 Digital Output

Only one output block can exist in a model for any given board.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output ports.
This driver allows the selection of individual digital output ports in any order.
The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the last four ports as digital output channels, enter
[5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the ports with 0.

22-118
 PCI-6601

Note Treat the eight I/O ports as two groups of four ports. The two groups
are ports 1 to 4 and ports 5 to 8. Do not specify both input and output channels
in the same group of four ports. The driver will emit an error.

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, and the Channel parameter is longer, that
setting is used for all channels. If you specify a value of 1, the corresponding
channel is reset to the value specified in the initial value vector. If you specify
a value of 0, the channel remains at the last value attained while the model was
running.
For example, if the block parameters are set as follows:

• Channel — [5 6 7 8]
• Reset vector — [1 1 0 0]
• Initial value vector — [ 1 0 1 0]

Channels 5 and 6 will reset to the initial value vector. Channels 7 and 8 will
hold at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
When execution stops, the driver writes the vector values to the output
channels if the corresponding entry in the Reset vector is set to 1.
For example, if the block parameters are set as follows:

• Channel — [5 6 7 8]
• Reset vector — [1 1 0 0]
• Initial value vector — [ 1 0 1 0]

When the target application is downloaded to the target, channel 5 is set to 1,

channel 6 is set to 0, channel 7 is set to 1 and channel 8 is set to 0.

22-119
22 National Instruments

After the target application executes, then stops, channel 5 will be set back to
1 and channel 6 will be set to 0. Channels 7 and 8 will hold the last values
attained.
Sample time — The usual sampletime in seconds. Can be a MATLAB variable.
PCI slot — The usual slot number as used by all PCI board drivers.

PCI-6601 Incremental Encoder

Driver Block Parameters
Channel — From the list, select a channel number between 1 and 4.

Note If you want to attach a 3-wire encoder, do so by connecting the channel

A signal to the appropriate SOURCE pin, the channel B signal to the AUX
pin, and the index signal to the GATE pin.

Counting mode — From the list, select a counting mode. Choose one of the
following:

• Normal
• Quadrature Mode X1
• Quadrature Mode X2
• Quadrature Mode X4
• Two-pulse mode
• Synchronous Source Mode

Initial count — The initial count specifies the initial value for the counter.
Enter a nonnegative integer.
Reload at index pulse — Select this check box to have the count value reset to
the value of Initial count at each index pulse.
Index phase — If the Reload at index pulse check box is selected, the Index
phase parameter specifies the phase of the quadrature signals during which
the count will be reloaded with the initial count. The count is reloaded in
response to a channel index pulse. From the list, select one of the following:

22-120
 PCI-6601

• A low B low
• A low B high
• A high B low
• A high B high

Filter — You can apply a digital debouncing filter to the input pins prior to
processing. From the list, select one of the following filter types:

• None
• Synchronize input to Timebase 3 (20 MHz)
• Minimum pulse width 5 microsec
• Minimum pulse width 1 microsec
• Minimum pulse width 500 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 100 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 25 nanosec

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in your target
PC, enter
-1

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6601 Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block are separate, one for the high count and one for the low
count.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1

22-121
22 National Instruments

•2
•3
•4

These parameters specify the counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
The reference frequency for this board is 20 MHz.
Initial high count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain for a high level.
Initial low count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain at a low level.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI-6601 Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Channel — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1
•2
•3
•4

22-122
 PCI-6601

These parameters specify the counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type

22-123
22 National Instruments

getxpcpci

PCI-6601 Armed Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block are separate, one for the high count (H), one for the low
count (L), and one for the arm input (A). If the arm input signal is less than 0.5,
the frequency generation is disabled. If the arm input signal is greater than or
equal to 0.5, the frequency generation is enabled.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1
•2
•3
•4

These parameters specify the counter to be used with this driver block. In each
case, one block is needed for each port.
The reference frequency for this board is 20 MHz.
Initial high count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain for a high level.
Initial low count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain at a low level.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-124
 PCI/PXI-6602

PCI/PXI-6602
The National Instruments PCI/PXI-6602 is a general purpose counter/timer
board. It has eight 32-bit counter channels. The reference frequency for this
board is 80 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with the following driver block:
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Input” on page 22-125
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Output” on page 22-126
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Incremental Encoder” on page 22-128
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Generation” on page 22-129
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-130
• “PCI/PXI-6602 Armed Pulse Generation” on page 22-132

xPC Target does not support the interrupt or timer functionality of the board.

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI/PXI-6602
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Input

Only one input block can exist in a model for any given board.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input ports.
This driver allows the selection of individual digital input ports in any order.
The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the first four ports as digital input channels, enter
[1,2,3,4]

22-125
22 National Instruments

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the ports with 0.

Note Treat the eight I/O ports as two groups of four ports. The two groups
are ports 1 to 4 and ports 5 to 8. Do not specify both input and output channels
in the same group of four ports. The driver will emit an error.

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI/PXI-6602 Digital Output

Only one output block can exist in a model for any given board.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output ports.
This driver allows the selection of individual digital output ports in any order.
The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use the last four ports as digital output channels, enter
[5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the ports with 0.

22-126
 PCI/PXI-6602

Note Treat the eight I/O ports as two groups of four ports. The two groups
are ports 1 to 4 and ports 5 to 8. Do not specify both input and output channels
in the same group of four ports. The driver will emit an error.

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, and the Channel parameter is longer, that
setting is used for all channels. If you specify a value of 1, the corresponding
channel is reset to the value specified in the initial value vector. If you specify
a value of 0, the channel remains at the last value attained while the model was
running.
For example, if the block parameters are set as follows:

• Channel — [5 6 7 8]
• Reset vector — [1 1 0 0]
• Initial value vector — [ 1 0 1 0]

Channels 5 and 6 will reset to the initial value vector. Channels 7 and 8 will
hold at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
When execution stops, the driver writes the vector values to the output
channels if the corresponding entry in the Reset vector is set to 1.
For example, if the block parameters are set as follows:

• Channel — [5 6 7 8]
• Reset vector — [1 1 0 0]
• Initial value vector — [ 1 0 1 0]

When the target application is downloaded to the target, channel 5 is set to 1,

channel 6 is set to 0, channel 7 is set to 1 and channel 8 is set to 0.

22-127
22 National Instruments

After the target application executes, then stops, channel 5 will be set back to
1 and channel 6 will be set to 0. Channels 7 and 8 will hold the last values
attained.
Sample time — The usual sampletime in seconds. Can be a Matlab variable.
PCI slot — The usual slot number as used by all PCI board drivers.

PCI/PXI-6602 Incremental Encoder

Driver Block Parameters
Channel — From the list, select a channel number between 1 and 8.

Note If you want to attach a 3-wire encoder, do so by connecting the channel

A signal to the appropriate SOURCE pin, the channel B signal to the AUX
pin, and the index signal to the GATE pin.

Counting mode — From the list, select a counting mode. Choose one of the
following:

• Normal
• Quadrature Mode X1
• Quadrature Mode X2
• Quadrature Mode X4
• Two-pulse mode
• Synchronous Source Mode

Initial count — The initial count specifies the initial value for the counter.
Enter a nonnegative integer.
Reload at index pulse — Select this check box to have the count value reset to
the value of Initial count at each index pulse.
Index phase — If the Reload at index pulse check box is selected, the Index
phase parameter specifies the phase of the quadrature signals during which
the count will be reloaded with the initial count. The count is reloaded in
response to a channel index pulse. From the list, select one of the following:

22-128
 PCI/PXI-6602

• A low B low
• A low B high
• A high B low
• A high B high

Filter — You can apply a digital debouncing filter to the input pins prior to
processing. From the list, select one of the following filter types:

• None
• Synchronize input to Timebase 3 (80 MHz)
• Minimum pulse width 5 microsec
• Minimum pulse width 1 microsec
• Minimum pulse width 500 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 100 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 25 nanosec

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in your target
PC, enter
-1

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block are separate, one for the high count and one for the low
count.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1

22-129
22 National Instruments

•2
•3
•4
•5
•6
•7
•8
These parameters specify the counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
The reference frequency for this board is 80 MHz.
Initial high count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain for a high level.
Initial low count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain at a low level.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI/PXI-6602 Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1
•2

22-130
 PCI/PXI-6602

•3
•4
•5
•6
•7
•8

These parameters specify the counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 20000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 60000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 80000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 80MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Filter — From the list, choose one of the following:

• None
• Synchronize input to Timebase 3 (80MHz)

22-131
22 National Instruments

• Minimum pulse width 5 microsec

• Minimum pulse width 1 microsec
• Minimum pulse width 500 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 100 nanosec
• Minimum pulse width 25 nanosec

This parameter specifies the level of digital filtering you want to apply to the
pin. See the National Instruments PCI/PXI-6602 user manual documentation
for details.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PCI/PXI-6602 Armed Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block are separate, one for the high count (H), one for the low
count (L), and one for the arm input (A). If the arm input signal is less than 0.5,
the frequency generation is disabled. If the arm input signal is greater than or
equal to 0.5, the frequency generation is enabled.

Driver Block Parameters

Channel — From the list, choose one of the following:

•1
•2
•3
•4
•5

22-132
 PCI/PXI-6602

•6
•7
•8
These parameters specify the counter to be used with this driver block. In each
case, one block is needed for each port.
The reference frequency for this board is 80 MHz.
Initial high count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain for a high level.
Initial low count — Enter the number of clock ticks the counter should
maintain at a low level.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-133
22 National Instruments

PCI-6703
The PCI-6703 is an I/O board with 16 voltage outputs and 8 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PCI-6703 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-134

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6703
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6703 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the first and
second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-134
 PCI-6703

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-135
22 National Instruments

PCI-6704
The PCI-6704 is an I/O board with 16 voltage outputs, 16 current outputs, and
8 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PCI-6704 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-136

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6704
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6704 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 32. Channels 1-16 refer to
the voltage output channels, and 17-32 the current output channels. This
driver allows the selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number
of elements defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the
first and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

22-136
 PCI-6704

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-137
22 National Instruments

PCI-6711
The PCI-6711 is an analog output board with 4 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit) and 8 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-6711 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-138

• “PCI-6711 Digital Input” on page 22-140
• “PCI-6711 Digital Output” on page 22-141

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-6711
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-6711 Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 4. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the analog
output channels 1 and 2, enter
[1,2]

22-138
 PCI-6711

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
starts numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-139
22 National Instruments

PCI-6711 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Each line can be used for input or output. If a line is not listed in this field, a
digital output block using the same board can use that line.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-140
 PCI-6711

PCI-6711 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Each line can be used for input or output. If a line is not listed in this field, a
digital input block using the same board can use that line.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-141
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-142
 PCI/PXI-6713

PCI/PXI-6713
The PCI/PXI-6713 is an analog output board with 8 analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit) and 8 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI/PXI-6713 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-143

• “PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Input” on page 22-145
• “PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Output” on page 22-146

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI/PXI-6713
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI/PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI/PXI-6713 Analog Output (D/A)

The analog output range of this board is set -10 to +10 volts.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows the
selection of individual D/A channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to use the analog
output channels 1 and 2, enter
[1,2]

22-143
22 National Instruments

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
starts numbering the channels with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-144
 PCI/PXI-6713

PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Each line can be used for input or output. If a line is not listed in this field, a
digital output block using the same board can use that line.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-145
22 National Instruments

PCI/PXI-6713 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Each line can be used for input or output. If a line is not listed in this field, a
digital input block using the same board can use that line.
Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-146
 PCI/PXI-6713

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-147
22 National Instruments

PCI-DIO-96
The PC-DIO-96 is an I/O board with 96 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-DIO-96 Digital Input” on page 22-148

• “PCI-DIO-96 Digital Output” on page 22-149

Board Characteristics
Board name PC-DIO-96
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-DIO-96 Digital Input

The PC-DIO-96 has four 8255 chips with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

22-148
 PCI-DIO-96

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has four 8255 chips
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-DIO-96 Digital Output

The PC-DIO24 has four 8255 chips with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

22-149
22 National Instruments

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.

22-150
 PCI-DIO-96

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

22-151
22 National Instruments

PXI-6040E
The PXI-6040E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 500 kHz, 2 analog output
channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers (24-bit)
with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI-6040E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-153

• “PXI-6040E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-155
• “PXI-6040E Digital Input” on page 22-157
• “PXI-6040E Digital Output” on page 22-158
• “PXI-6040E Pulse Generation” on page 22-159
• “PXI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-160

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI-6040E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PXI (Compact PCI)
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-152
 PXI-6040E

PXI-6040E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

22-153
22 National Instruments

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-154
 PXI-6040E

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6040E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-155
22 National Instruments

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-156
 PXI-6040E

PXI-6040E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-157
22 National Instruments

PXI-6040E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-158
 PXI-6040E

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6040E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-159
22 National Instruments

PXI-6040E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-160
 PXI-6040E

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-161
22 National Instruments

PXI-6070E
The PXI-6070E is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 1.25 MHz, 2 analog output
channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2 counter/timers (24-bit)
with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI-6070E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-162

• “PXI-6070E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-165
• “PXI-6070E Digital Input” on page 22-166
• “PXI-6070E Digital Output” on page 22-167
• “PXI-6070E Pulse Generation” on page 22-169
• “PXI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-169

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI-6070E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PXI (Compact PCI)
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

PXI-6070E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

22-162
 PXI-6070E

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0-2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0-1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 - 0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 - 0.2 0.2

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 - 0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.

22-163
22 National Instruments

The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-164
 PXI-6070E

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6070E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

22-165
22 National Instruments

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6070E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

22-166
 PXI-6070E

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6070E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

22-167
22 National Instruments

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-168
 PXI-6070E

PXI-6070E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, o r Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6070E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

22-169
22 National Instruments

Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-170
 PXI-6071E

PXI-6071E
The PXI-6071E is an I/O board with 64 single or 32 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 1.25 MHz, 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 digital input and output lines, and 2
counter/timers (24-bit) with a maximum source clock rate of 20 MHz.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI-6071E Analog Input (A/D)” on page 22-172

• “PXI-6071E Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-174
• “PXI-6071E Digital Input” on page 22-176
• “PXI-6071E Digital Output” on page 22-177
• “PXI-6071E Pulse Generation” on page 22-178
• “PXI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement” on page 22-179

Board Characteristics
Board Name PXI-6071E
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, D/A: No, Digital I/O: Yes;
Period/Pulsewidth measurement: Yes;
Pulsetrain Generation: No
Multiple board support Yes

22-171
22 National Instruments

PXI-6071E Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 64. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

-2 to +2 -2 0 to +2 2

-1 to + 1 -1 0 to +1 1

-0.5 to +0.5 -0.5 0 to +0.5 0.5

-0.2 to +0.2 -0.2 0 to +0.2 0.2

22-172
 PXI-6071E

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-0.1 to +0.1 -0.1 0 to +0.1 0.1

-0.05 to +0.05 -0.05

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +1 volts, enter
[-10,1,1]

Input coupling vector — Enter a coupling code for each of the channels in the
channel vector. The coupling vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different coupling for each channel.
The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 0 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input ground (AIGND)
internally connected to the negative input of the
PGIA. See the board manual.

NRSE 1 Analog input line connected to the positive input

of the PGIA. Analog input sense (AISENSE)
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

DIFF 2 First analog input line connected to the positive

input of the PGIA. Second analog input line
connected to the negative input of the PGIA. See
the board manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are single input and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,2]

22-173
22 National Instruments

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6071E Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2. This driver allows the selection of individual
D/A channels in any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A
channels used. For example, to use both of the analog output channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.

22-174
 PXI-6071E

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-175
22 National Instruments

PXI-6071E Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-176
 PXI-6071E

PXI-6071E Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-177
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6071E Pulse Generation

The inputs to the block should be a two element vector. The first element is the
number of counts (of the 20 MHz source clock) that the counter should
maintain at a low level, and the second element is the number of clock ticks for
a high level. For example, to generate a pulsetrain at 1KHz with 25% low and
75% high, use the vector
[5000 15000]

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose Counter 0, Counter 1, or Both to select the
counter(s) to be used with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed
for each physical board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-178
 PXI-6071E

PXI-6071E Pulse Width/Period Measurement

Driver Block Parameters
Counter — From the list, select a counter from 0 or 1.
Trigger mode — From the list, choose Level Triggered or Edge Triggered.
See the table below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect
one another. In this table, the data in the Output column resulted from a 1KHz
pulse train with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.
Polarity — From the list, choose Active low or Active high. See the table
below for an example of how Trigger mode and Polarity affect one another. In
this table, the data in the Output column is the result of a 1KHz pulse train
with a 25% low and a 75% high pulse.

Measurement Trigger mode Polarity Output

objective

Pulse width (low Level Triggered Active low 5000

pulse)

Pulse width (high Level Triggered Active High 15000

pulse)

Period Edge Triggered NA 20000

In every case, the output of the block is the number of clock ticks (of the 20MHz
source clock) required for the specified measurement. When measuring pulse
width, the output reflects the number of clock ticks for which the input signal
was in the specified (low or high) state. See the table above for an example.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

22-179
22 National Instruments

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-180
 PXI-6508

PXI-6508
The PXI-6508 is an I/O board with 96 digital input and output lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI-6508 Digital Input” on page 22-181

• “PXI-6508 Digital Output” on page 22-182

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI-6508
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PXI (Compact PCI)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PXI-6508 Digital Input

The PXI-6508 has four 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

22-181
22 National Instruments

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip
with 3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used
for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be
configured as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In
each case, one block is needed for each port.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6508 Digital Output

The PXI-6508 has four 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

22-182
 PXI-6508

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The I/O board has a 8255 chip with
3 ports. The Port parameter defines which port of the 8255 chip is used for this
driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital lines that can be configured
as inputs or outputs depending on which driver block is chosen. In each case,
one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Chip — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Sample time - Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-183
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-184
 PXI-6527

PXI-6527
The PXI-6527 is an I/O board with 24 filtered digital input lines and 24 digital
output lines. You can individually turn input filtering on or off for each of the
24 input lines. However, there is only one filter time of all of the input lines that
have filtering enabled.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PXI-6527 Digital Input” on page 22-185

• “PXI-6527 Digital Output” on page 22-187

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI-6527
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PXI-6527 Digital Input

The PXI-6527 has one chip with 3 ports (A,B,C) for digital input. Each port has
a maximum of 8 digital I/O lines. Use a separate driver block for each port.

Note The interrupt on change capability of this board is not used.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

OPTO Double < 0.5 = 0

> 0.5 = 1

22-185
22 National Instruments

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital inputs.
In each case, one block is needed for each port.
The documentation for this board from National Instruments labels these ports
0, 1, and 2.
Filter vector — This is a Boolean vector that selects which input lines to filter.
For example, if you enter a Channel vector of [1,3,5], and you want to filter
all three lines, enter
[1,1,1]

If you want to filter lines 1 and 5, but not line 3, then enter
[1,0,1]

If the filter vector is a single element, then it is scaler expanded to the same
width as the Channel vector. In the example above, if the Filter vector is [0],
it is expanded to [0,0,0]. Likewise, if the Filter vector is [1]it is expanded to
[1,1,1].

Filter interval — Enter the time interval the hardware filter uses to
determine a stable pulse. If the input pule is shorter then this interval, it is
ignored. There is only one filter interval for all filtered inputs, and if you filter
on more than one digital input block for this board, you must enter the same
Filter interval for all blocks.
A reasonable value for the Filter interval would be 200 to 300 us.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

22-186
 PXI-6527

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PXI-6527 Digital Output

The PXI-6527 has one chip with 3 ports (A,B,C) for digital output. Each port
has a maximum of 8 digital output lines. Use a separate driver block for each
port.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Block Output Scaling

Output Data Type

OPTO Double <0.5 = OPTO is OFF, no current

flowing
>0.5 = OPTO is ON, current can
flow

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

22-187
22 National Instruments

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The Port parameter defines which
port is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum or 8 digital output
lines. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
The documentation for this board from National Instruments labels these ports
3, 4, and 5.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-188
 PXI-6704

PXI-6704
The PXI-6704 is an I/O board with 16 voltage outputs, 16 current outputs, and
8 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “PXI-6704 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 22-189

Board Characteristics
Board name PXI-6704
Manufacturer National Instruments
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PXI-6704 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 32. Channels 1-16 refer to
the voltage output channels, and 17-32 the current output channels. The
number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used. For example, to
use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

22-189
22 National Instruments

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

22-190
 23
North Atlantic Industries,
Inc. (Formerly Apex)

This chapter describes the North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (NAII) I/O boards supported by xPC Target
(http://www.naii.com).

PC-12SD (PC-77SD1) (p. 23-2) I/O board with up to 12 input channels for positioning
sensors of type Synchro or Resolver.
NAII (Apex) 73LD3 (p. 23-5) I/O board with up to 6 input channels for LVDT/RVDT
position sensors. The capabilities of this board vary
according to its part number designation.
NAII (Apex) 73SD3 (p. 23-8) I/O board with up to six Synchro/Resolver-to-digital
channels. The capabilities of this board vary according to
its part number designation.
NAII (Apex) 76LD1 (p. 23-12) I/O board with up to 12 2-wire or up to six 3-wire or
4-wire stimulus (output) channels for LVDT/RVDT
position sensors.
NAII (Apex) 76CL1 (p. 23-15) I/O board with up to eight 2-wire or up to four 3-wire or
4-wire LVDT/RVDT measurement (input) channels for
LVDT/RVDT position sensors.
NAII (Apex) 76CS1 (p. 23-21) I/O board with up to 8 synchro/resolver measurement
(input, S/D) channels and up to six stimulus (output, D/S)
channels for positioning sensors of type Synchro or
Resolver.
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

PC-12SD (PC-77SD1)
The PC-12SD is an I/O board with up to 12 input channels for positioning
sensors of type Synchro or Resolver. The manufacturer individually programs
the board according to the order code or board code. Values for some of the block
parameters with this driver depend on this board code.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver:
• “PC-12SD (PC-77SD1) Synchro/Resolver” on page 23-2

Board Characteristics
Board name PC-12SD
Manufacturer Apex (NAA)
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PC-12SD (PC-77SD1) Synchro/Resolver

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Input Data Type Scaling

Synchro or Resolver Double angle in rad,

velocity in rps

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 12 to select the
Synchro/Resolver (S/D) channels you use with this block. The driver allows the
selection of individual S/D channels in any order, but repeating channels is not
allowed. For example, to use the first and second S/D channels, enter
[1,2]

23-2
 PC-12SD (PC-77SD1)

Number channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts

numbering channels with 0.
Sensor type vector (0:resolver, 1:synchro) — If the board code allows
switching between Synchro or Resolver inputs, use this vector to define which
type of sensor is attached to the corresponding channel. The vector his to have
the same length as the Channel vector. Use a value 0 is to specify Resolver
input, and a value 1 to specify Synchro input. If the board code stands for a
static type of sensor, enter and empty vector ([ ]).
Ratio vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 255 to define the ratio for each
channel. This vector has to have the same length as the Channel vector. For
single speed input, use a ratio value of 1. For double speed input the ratio
depends on your sensor and application and can have a value between 2 and
255. In the case of double speed input, two channels are used to provide fine
and coarse data.
Output format — From the list, choose Angle, Angle-Status,
Angle-Velocity, or Angle-Velocity-Status. This is the output format for
each S/D channel and also the format for the output port of this block. The
possible selections are:

• Angle — The signal width is 1. This scalar is the angular position in radians.
• Angle - Status — The signal width is 2. The first element is the angular
position, and the second element is the status.
• Angle - Velocity — The signal width is 2. The first element is the angular
position, and the second element is the angular velocity. The unit for the
angular velocity is revolutions/second (rps).
• Angle - Velocity - Status —The signal width is 3. The first element is the
angular position, the second element the angular velocity, and the third
element is the status.

The status signal returns information about test status, signal status and
reference status for each S/D channel. Each status returns binary information
(0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The test status has weight 20, signal status has
weight 21, and the reference status has weight 22.
For example, a status value of 5, means the test status is OK and both signal
status and reference status are FAILURE.

23-3
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

Note, if you do not provide a Reference Vector by entering an empty matrix,

the reference status is not returned. See the board manual for more
information about statuses.
Velocity scaling (max. RPS) vector — Enter a scale factor for defining the
maximum rotations/second (rps) for each S/D channel. You need to enter a
value to read velocity information. This vector has to have the same length as
the Channel vector. The values entered here define the maximum
revolutions/second and affect the accuracy of the velocity readings. Choose
values to have the best accuracy.
Show input ports for dynamic velocity scaling — Selecting this check box
allows you to update the Velocity scaling vector at runtime.
If checked, the block shows the same number of input ports as output ports.
That is, one port for each selected S/D channel. The signal width of each input
port is 1. You can use the signal entering the corresponding input port to
update the Velocity scaling vector. Even if you select this check box and you
provide values to the input ports, you still have to enter a Velocity scaling
vector. In this case, the Velocity scaling vector defined the initial values.
Reference vector (frequency, voltage) — If the board code includes the
Reference Output option, you can use this vector to define the frequency and
amplitude of the reference output. If you enter an empty matrix ([ ]), the
reference output circuit is not accessed, even if the board is equipped with it.
To activate the reference output, you have to enter a row vector with two
elements, where the first element defines the frequency in Hertz and the
second element defines the output voltage in Volts.
Sample time - Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address -Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

23-4
 NAII (Apex) 73LD3

NAII (Apex) 73LD3

The NAII (Apex) 73LD3 is an I/O board with up to six input channels for
LVDT/RVDT position sensors. The capabilities of this board vary according to
its part number designation. There can be 2, 4, or 6 channels. The board might
contain an on-board reference. If this reference is present, the supported
frequency range is board dependent. The acceptable ranges of values for the
driver block parameters vary according to board type.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver:
• “73LD3 LVDT/RVDT Converter” on page 23-5

xPC Target does not support the digital I/O functionality of this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name 73LD3
Manufacturer Apex
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

73LD3 LVDT/RVDT Converter

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

LVDT or RVDT Double -32768...32767

23-5
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first three analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number them beginning with 1
even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number can be 2, 4, or 6 depending on the board
type.
Signal scale vector — For 2 wire applications, enter the transformation ratio
so that the full range of motion results in a full scale output signal from -32768
through 32767. For 3 or 4 wire applications, a setting of 65535 results in a full
scale output signal. This scale factor can be chosen for each channel
independently. If a scalar value is entered, it is applied to all channels.
Velocity scale vector — Enter the velocity (strokes/s or rev/s) that results in
an output signal equal to 32767, the maximum 16-bit integer. This scale factor
can be chosen for each channel independently. If a scalar value is entered, it is
applied to all channels.
Show input ports for dynamic velocity scaling — Select this check box if you
want to be able to update the velocity scale vector at run-time. If this check box
is selected, the block displays one input port for each output channel selected.
These input ports are all of width 1 and can be used to update the velocity scale
vector dynamically. Even if you select this check box and provide values to the
input ports, you still must enter a velocity scale vector to specify the initial
values.
Output format — From the list select an output format for all channels:

• position — A signal width of 1 that contains the linear position.

• position-status — A signal width of 2 that contains the linear position and
status.
• position-velocity — A signal width of 2 the contains the linear position
and velocity.
• position-velocity-status — A signal width of 3 that contains the linear
position, velocity, and status.

The following notes apply to these formats:

23-6
 NAII (Apex) 73LD3

• The position and velocity values are each normalized to lie between -1 and 1.
• Position and velocity are returned in radians and radians per second,
respectively.
• The status value is encoded in a 3-bit integer that is returned as a double.
The status value consists of the following status information for the channel:

- test status, weight of 2 0

- signal status, weight of 2 1
- reference status, weight of 2 2
Each status is a binary value (0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The driver encodes
these binary values into a single signal. For example, a status value of 5
(100), means the test status is OK and both signal status and reference
status are FAILURE. If the board does not provide a reference/excitation, the
test status and reference status have no effect.
When you request a format with status, you also enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing.
Wiring — From the list, select either 2 wire or 3 or 4 wire.
Excitation frequency (Hz) — Enter the reference frequency of the board in
hertz. Note that the possible ranges of reference frequencies depend on the
board type and the jumper settings on the board.
Excitation voltage (RMS) — Enter the reference root-mean-square voltage
value. Note that the possible ranges of reference voltages depend on the board
type.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. Be sure that this
corresponds to the actual DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 in hexadecimal, enter
0x300

23-7
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

NAII (Apex) 73SD3

The NAII (Apex) 73SD3 is an I/O board with up to six
Synchro/Resolver-to-digital channels. The capabilities of this board vary
according to its part number designation. There can be 2, 4, or 6 channels. The
board might contain an on-board reference. If this reference is present, the
supported frequency range is board dependent. The acceptable ranges of values
for the driver block parameters vary according to board type.
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:

• “NAII 73SD3 Synchro/Resolver” on page 23-9

Board Characteristics
Board name 73SD3
Manufacturer NAII
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

23-8
 NAII (Apex) 73SD3

NAII 73SD3 Synchro/Resolver

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

Synchro or Double position: radians

Resolver velocity: radians/second

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the measurement
(input) channels. For example, to use the Synchro/Resolver channels 1 and 4,
enter
[1, 4]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 2, 4, or 6 depending on the board type.
Two-speed ratio vector (1: single speed; greater than 1: two-speed) — Enter
a two-speed ratio vector of integers greater than 0. This must be either a scalar
or a vector the same length as the channel vector.
The two-speed ratio is normally 1 unless you are using a contiguous odd-even
channel pair (such as 3 and 4) as a single two-speed channel. In this case, the
two-speed ratio represents the gear ratio between the odd (coarse) and even
(fine) channels of the pair. Include only the even member of a two-speed
channel pair in the channel vector. For example, if you want to use channels 3
and 4 as a two-speed channel geared in the ratio of 36:1, perform the following:

• Add the value 4 (but not the value 3) to the Channel vector value
• Set the corresponding Two-speed ratio vector value to 36

High resolution vector (0: 16-bit; 1:24-bit) — Enter a high resolution vector
for the channels. This must be a scalar or a vector the same length as the
Channel vector value. Enter one of the following values:

• 0 — Specifies a 16-bit channel

• 1 — Specifies a 24-bit channel

23-9
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

Note, you can specify high resolution only for the even-numbered channels of a
two-speed channel pair. Specifying high resolution incurs a small additional
overhead.
Encoder vector (4, 6, 8: commutator poles; 12-16: encoder bits) — Enter a
scalar or a vector that is the same length as the Channel vector value. The
encoder vector controls the encoder or commutation outputs on connector JP5.
Enter values according to the following:

• Commutator — Enter values from the set [4 6 8]. These values specify the
number of poles for a commutator output.
• Encoder — Enter values from the set [12 13 14 15 16]. These values specify
the number of bits for an encoder output.

Output format — From the list select an output format for all channels:

• position — A signal width of 1 that contains the linear position.

• position-status — A signal width of 2 that contains the linear position and
status.
• position-velocity — A signal width of 2 the contains the linear position
and velocity.
• position-velocity-status — A signal width of 3 that contains the linear
position, velocity, and status.

The following notes apply to these formats:

• The position and velocity values are each normalized to lie between -1 and 1.
• Position and velocity are returned in radians and radians per second,
respectively.
• The status value is encoded in a 3-bit integer that is returned as a double.
The status value consists of the following status information for the channel:

- test status, weight of 2 0

- signal status, weight of 2 1
- reference status, weight of 2 2
Each status is a binary value (0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The driver encodes
these binary values into a single signal. For example, a status value of 5
(100), means the test status is OK and both signal status and reference

23-10
 NAII (Apex) 73SD3

status are FAILURE. If the board does not provide a reference/excitation, the
test status and reference status have no effect.
When you request a format with status, you also enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing.
Max RPS vector — Enter the maximum measurable velocity (in revolutions
per second) for each channel. This value sets the velocity scale for each channel.
This value must be a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the Channel
vector value. Enter positive numbers less than 152.
Show input ports for dynamic max RPS - Select this check box to display an
input port for each channel to be used for specifying the maximum RPS
dynamically. When you select this check box, the input port signal is internally
limited to between 9.5367 and 152.5878 RPS.
Latch all channels before reading position data — Select this check box to
guarantee that all channels are latched before being read. This ensures that all
channels are sampled at exactly the same time. Note that selecting this option
incurs a small additional resource overhead.
Excitation frequency (47-10000) — Enter the frequency of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. Be sure that this
corresponds to the actual DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 in hexadecimal, enter
0x300

23-11
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

NAII (Apex) 76LD1

The NAII (Apex) 76LD1 is an I/O board with up to 12 2-wire or up to six 3-wire
or 4-wire stimulus (output) channels. The capabilities of this board vary
according to its part number designation. The board might contain an on-board
reference. If this reference is present, the supported frequency range is board
dependent. The acceptable ranges of values for the driver block parameters
vary according to board type.
xPC Target supports this board with one driver block:

• “NAII 76LD1 L/D” on page 23-12

Board Characteristics
Board name 76LD1
Manufacturer NAII
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

NAII 76LD1 L/D

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

LVDT or RVDT Double -1...1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the measurement
(input) channels. For example, to use the L/D channels 1 and 3, enter
[1, 3]

23-12
 NAII (Apex) 76LD1

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 0, 2, 4, or 8 depending on the board type.
Wiring vector (2 for 2-wire;3 for 3-wire or 4-wire) — Enter the wire type for
each of the channels in Channel vector. This entry must be either a scalar or
a vector that is the same length as the Channel vector entry. Specify the
wiring vector as follows:

• 2 — Specifies that the corresponding channel is 2-wire

• 3 — Specifies that the corresponding channel is 3-wire or 4-wire

For example, for a Channel vector entry of [1, 3], a Wiring vector entry of
[2, 3]

specifies that channel 1 is 2-wire and channel 3 is 3-wire or 4-wire.

Output format — From the list select an output format for all channels:

• position — A signal width of 1 that contains the linear position.

• position-status — A signal width of 2 that contains the linear position and
status.
• position-velocity — A signal width of 2 the contains the linear position
and velocity.
• position-velocity-status — A signal width of 3 that contains the linear
position, velocity, and status.

The following notes apply to these formats:

• The position and velocity values are each normalized to lie between -1 and 1.
• Position and velocity are returned in radians and radians per second,
respectively.
• The status value is encoded in a 3-bit integer that is returned as a double.
The status value consists of the following status information for the channel:

- test status, weight of 2 0

- signal status, weight of 2 1
- reference status, weight of 2 2
Each status is a binary value (0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The driver encodes
these binary values into a single signal. For example, a status value of 5

23-13
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

(100), means the test status is OK and both signal status and reference
status are FAILURE. If the board does not provide a reference/excitation, the
test status and reference status have no effect.
When you request a format with status, you also enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing.
Latch all channels before reading position data — Select this check box to
guarantee that all channels are latched before being read. This ensures that all
channels are sampled at exactly the same time. Note that selecting this option
incurs a small additional resource overhead.
Excitation frequency (360-10000) — Enter the frequency for the on-board
reference/excitation signal.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation signal.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci
Note that the device ID of the NAII 76LD1 board is 7631 in hexadecimal.

23-14
 NAII (Apex) 76CL1

NAII (Apex) 76CL1

The NAII (Apex) 76CL1 I/O board provides up to eight 2-wire or up to four
3-wire or 4-wire LVDT/RVDT measurement (input) channels. It also provides
up to 12 2-wire or up to six 3-wire or 4-wire stimulus (output) channels. The
capabilities of this board vary according to its part number designation. The
board might contain an on-board reference. If this reference is present, the
supported frequency range is board dependent. The acceptable ranges of values
for the driver block parameters vary according to board type.
xPC Target supports this board with two driver blocks:

• “NAII 76CL1 L/D” on page 23-15

• “NAII 76CL1 D/L” on page 23-18

Board Characteristics
Board name 76Cl1
Manufacturer NAII
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

NAII 76CL1 L/D

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

LVDT or RVDT Double -1...1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the stimulus (output)
channels. For example, to use the L/D channels 1 and 3, enter

23-15
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 0, 2, 4, or 8 depending on the board type.
Wiring vector (2 for 2-wire;3 for 3-wire or 4-wire) — This must be either a
scalar or a vector the same length as the Channel vector value. Enter a value
of 2 to indicate that the corresponding channel is 2-wire. Enter a value of 3 to
indicate the corresponding channel is 3-wire or 4-wire. For example, a Channel
vector value of [1,3] and a wiring vector setting of
[2, 3]

indicates that channel 1 is 2-wire and that channel 3 is 3-wire or 4-wire.

Output format — From the list select an output format for all channels:

• position — A signal width of 1 that contains the linear position.

• position-status — A signal width of 2 that contains the linear position and
status.
• position-velocity — A signal width of 2 the contains the linear position
and velocity.
• position-velocity-status — A signal width of 3 that contains the linear
position, velocity, and status.

The following notes apply to these formats:

• The position and velocity values are each normalized to lie between -1 and 1.
• Position and velocity are returned in radians and radians per second,
respectively.
• The status value is encoded in a 3-bit integer that is returned as a double.
The status value consists of the following status information for the channel:

- test status, weight of 2 0

- signal status, weight of 2 1
- reference status, weight of 2 2
Each status is a binary value (0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The driver encodes
these binary values into a single signal. For example, a status value of 5
(100), means the test status is OK and both signal status and reference

23-16
 NAII (Apex) 76CL1

status are FAILURE. If the board does not provide a reference/excitation, the
test status and reference status have no effect.
When you request a format with status, you also enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing.
Latch all channels before reading position data — Select this check box to
guarantee that all channels are latched before being read. This ensures that all
channels are sampled at exactly the same time. Note that selecting this option
incurs a small additional resource overhead.
Excitation frequency (360-10000) — Enter the frequency of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci
Note that the device ID of the NAII 76CL1 board is 7651 in hexadecimal.

23-17
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

NAII 76CL1 D/L

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

LVDT/RVDT Double -1...1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the stimulus (output)
channels. For example, to use the D/L channels 1 and 3, enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 0, 2, 4, or 6 depending on the board type.
If a channel n is configured as a 2-wire channel pair (as specified in the Wiring
vector parameter), enter the A and B subchannels in Channel vector as n and
-n, respectively. For example, if all channels are configured as 2-wire, the
Channel vector value
[1, -1, 2, -2, 3, -3, 4, -4, 5, -5, 6, -6]

refers to channels 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, and so on in that order.

Reset vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
Channel vector value. The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at
model termination. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all
channels. If you specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel resets to the
value specified in the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel
remains at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
Channel vector value. The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values (in the range -1 to 1) for the output channels. If you specify a scalar
value, that value is the initial value for all channels. The channels are set to
the initial values between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is
started.

23-18
 NAII (Apex) 76CL1

Wiring vector (2 for 2-wire;3 for 3-wire or 4-wire) — Enter the wire type for
each of the channels in Channel vector. This entry must be either a scalar or
a vector that is the same length as the Channel vector entry. Specify the
wiring vector as follows:

• 2 — Specifies that the corresponding channel is 2-wire

• 3 — Specifies that the corresponding channel is 3-wire or 4-wire

Note that if a channel is 2-wire, you can specify A and B subchannels (as
described for the Channel vector parameter).
For example, a Channel vector of
[5, 6]

and a Wiring vector value of

[2, 3]

indicates that channel 5 is 2-wire and channel 6 is 3-wire or 4-wire. In this

channel vector, 5 refers to channel 5A. Channel 6, because it 3-wire or 4-wire,
does not have this distinction. The corresponding input port on the block
changes its label to 5A when you click Apply or OK.
On the other hand, the channel vector
[-5, 6]

designates channels 5B and 6.

Transformation ratio vector — Enter the transformation ratio vector for the
channels specified in the Channel vector value. This entry must be either a
scalar or a vector that is the same length as the Channel vector value. Enter
a ratio within the range 0-2. For 2-wire channels, the transformation ratio
applies to both A and B channels.
Show output status port — Select this check box to enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing. This option displays a
status output port labeled S when you click Apply or OK. This port emits a
signal with a width of 3. The signal contains the following words for the board:

• test status
• signal status
• excitation status

23-19
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

Excitation frequency (360-10000) — Enter the frequency of the on-board

reference/excitation.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci
Note that the device ID of the NAII 76CL1 board is 7651 in hexadecimal.

23-20
 NAII (Apex) 76CS1

NAII (Apex) 76CS1

The NAII (Apex) 76CS1 I/O board provides up to 8 synchro/resolver
measurement (input, S/D) channels and up to six stimulus (output, D/S)
channels. The capabilities of this board vary according to its part number
designation. The board might contain an on-board reference. If this reference
is present, the supported frequency range is board dependent.
xPC Target supports this board with two driver blocks:

• “NAII 76CS1 S/D” on page 23-21

• “NAII 76CS1 D/S” on page 23-25

Board Characteristics
Board name 76CS1
Manufacturer NAII
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

NAII 76CS1 S/D

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

Synchro or Double position: radians

Resolver velocity: radians/second

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the measurement (S/D) channels 1 and 4, enter
[1, 4]

23-21
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 0, 2, 4, or 8 depending on the board type.
Two-speed ratio vector (1: single speed; greater than 1: two-speed) — Enter
a two-speed ratio vector of integers greater than 0. This must be either a scalar
or a vector the same length as the Channel vector value.
The two-speed ratio is normally 1 unless you are using a contiguous odd-even
channel pair (such as 3 and 4) as a single two-speed channel. In this case, the
two-speed ratio represents the gear ratio between the odd (coarse) and even
(fine) channels of the pair. Include only the even member of a two-speed
channel pair in the Channel vector. For example, if you want to use channels
3 and 4 as a two-speed channel geared in the ratio of 36:1, perform the
following:

• Add the value 4 (but not the value 3) to the Channel vector value
• Set the corresponding Two-speed ratio vector value to 36

High resolution vector (0: 16-bit; 1:24-bit) — Enter a high resolution vector
for the channels. This must be a scalar or a vector the same length as the
Channel vector value. Enter one of the following values:

• 0 — Specifies a 16-bit channel

• 1 — Specifies a 24-bit channel

Note, you can specify high resolution only for the even-numbered channels of a
two-speed channel pair. Specifying high resolution incurs a small additional
overhead.
Synchro vector — Enter a value to indicate that a channel is synchro or
resolver. This value must be a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
Channel vector value. For each channel, enter

• 1 to indicate that the corresponding channel is a synchro

• 0 to indicate that it is a resolver

Encoder vector (4, 6, 8: commutator poles; 12-16: encoder bits) — Enter a

scalar or a vector that is the same length as the Channel vector value. The
encoder vector controls the encoder or commutation outputs on connector JP5.
Enter values according to the following:

23-22
 NAII (Apex) 76CS1

• Commutator — Enter values from the set [4 6 8]. These values specify the
number of poles for a commutator output.
Encoder — Enter values from the set [12 13 14 15 16]. These values specify
the number of bits for an encoder output.
Output format — From the list select an output format for all channels:

• position — A signal width of 1 that contains the linear position.

• position-status — A signal width of 2 that contains the linear position and
status.
• position-velocity — A signal width of 2 the contains the linear position
and velocity.
• position-velocity-status — A signal width of 3 that contains the linear
position, velocity, and status.

The following notes apply to these formats:

• The position and velocity values are each normalized to lie between -1 and 1.
• Position and velocity are returned in radians and radians per second,
respectively.
• The status value is encoded in a 3-bit integer that is returned as a double.
The status value consists of the following status information for the channel:

- test status, weight of 2 0

- signal status, weight of 2 1
- reference status, weight of 2 2
Each status value is a binary value (0 is OK, 1 is FAILURE). The driver
encodes these binary values into a single signal. For example, a status value
of 5 (100), means the test status is OK and both signal status and reference
status are FAILURE. If the board does not provide a reference/excitation, the
test status and reference status have no effect.
When you request a format with status, you also enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing.
Max RPS vector — Enter the maximum measurable velocity (in revolutions
per second) for each channel. This value sets the velocity scale for each channel.
This value must be a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the Channel
vector value. Enter positive numbers less than 152.

23-23
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

Show input ports for dynamic max RPS - Select this check box to display an
input port for each channel to be used for specifying the maximum RPS
dynamically. When you select this check box, the input port signal is internally
limited to between 9.5367 and 152.5878 RPS.
Latch all channels before reading position data — Select this check box to
guarantee that all channels are latched before being read. This ensures that all
channels are sampled at exactly the same time. Note that selecting this option
incurs a small additional resource overhead.
Save board setup at model termination (takes 5 seconds) — Select this
check box to save the current board settings to the board at model termination.
This action takes approximately 5 seconds. Wait for the save action to complete
before removing power from the board. Upon save completion, the message
Setup has been saved

appears in the message window on the upper right of the target PC screen.
Excitation frequency (47-1000) — Enter the frequency of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci
Note that the device ID of the NAII 76CS1 board is 7621 in hexadecimal.

23-24
 NAII (Apex) 76CS1

NAII 76CS1 D/S

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

Synchro or Resolver Double radians

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the stimulus (output)
channels. For example, to use the D/S channels 1 and 3, enter
[1, 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. The maximum allowable channel
number can be 0, 2, 4, or 6 depending on the board type.
Reset vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
Channel vector value. The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at
model termination. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all
channels. If you specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel resets to the
value specified in the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel
remains at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
channel vector. The initial value vector contains the initial values (in radians)
for the output channels. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the initial
value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between the
time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Two-speed ratio vector (1: single speed; greater than 1: two-speed) — Enter
a two-speed ratio vector of integers greater than 0. This must be either a scalar
or a vector the same length as the channel vector.
The two-speed ratio is normally 1 unless you are using a contiguous odd-even
channel pair (such as 3 and 4) as a single two-speed channel. In this case, the
two-speed ratio represents the gear ratio between the odd (coarse) and even
(fine) channels of the pair. Include only the even member of a two-speed
channel pair in the channel vector. For example, if you want to use channels 3
and 4 as a two-speed channel geared in the ratio of 36:1, perform the following:

23-25
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

• Add the value 4 (but not the value 3) to the Channel vector value
• Set the corresponding Two-speed ratio vector value to 36

High resolution vector (0: 16-bit; 1:24-bit) — Enter a high resolution vector
for the channels. This must be a scalar or a vector the same length as the
Channel vector value. Enter one of the following values:

• 0 — Specifies a 16-bit channel

• 1 — Specifies a 24-bit channel

Note, you can specify high resolution only for the even-numbered channels of a
two-speed channel pair. Specifying high resolution incurs a small additional
overhead.
Show output status port — Select this check box to enable the automatic
background (bit D2 of the Test Enable Register) testing. This option displays a
status output port labeled S when you click Apply or OK. This port emits a
signal with a width of 3. The signal contains the following words for the board:

• test status
• signal status
excitation status
Excitation frequency (47-10000) — Enter the frequency of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Excitation voltage (0, 2-28, or 115) — Enter the voltage of the on-board
reference/excitation.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type

23-26
 NAII (Apex) 76CS1

getxpcpci
Note that the device ID of the NAII 76CS1 board is 7621 in hexadecimal.

23-27
23 North Atlantic Industries, Inc. (Formerly Apex)

23-28
 24

Quanser

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.quanser.com).

Q8 (p. 24-2) Multifunction measurement and control board with

eight 14-bit singled-ended A/D converters, eight
12-bit D/A voltage outputs, 32 digital
communication channels, eight 24-bit encoder
inputs, and two 32-bit counter/timers.
24 Quanser

Q8
The Quanser Q8 is a multifunction measurement and control board. It has
eight 14-bit singled-ended A/D converters (supported by two A/D chips with
four channels per chip), eight 12-bit D/A voltage outputs, 32 digital
communication channels (each of which can be used for digital input or digital
output), eight 24-bit encoder inputs, and two 32-bit counter/timers.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:
• “Q8 Analog Input” on page 24-2
• “Q8 Analog Output” on page 24-4
• “Q8 Digital Input” on page 24-6
• “Q8 Digital Output” on page 24-7
• “Q8 Incremental Encoder” on page 24-8
• “Q8 Counter” on page 24-11

Board Characteristics
Board name Q8
Manufacturer Quanser
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

Q8 Analog Input
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

24-2
 Q8

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. This driver
allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. For example, to use the first,
second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0. Note that the input range is -10V to 10V for all
channels and is not reconfigurable.
Two A/D chips on the Q8 board convert these channels. One A/D chip converts
channels 1 to 4, the second A/D chip converts channels 5 to 8. To maximize
throughput, balance the conversion load between the two groups of channels.
For example, if you want to convert four channels, a channel vector value like
the following has one A/D chip convert channels 1 and 2 and the other A/D chip
convert channels 5 and 6:
[1, 2, 5, 6]

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

24-3
24 Quanser

Q8 Analog Output
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. This driver

allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. For example, to use the first,
second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Two A/D chips on the Q8 board convert these channels. One A/D chip converts
channels 1 to 4, the second A/D chip converts channels 5 to 8. To maximize
throughput, balance the conversion load between the two groups of channels.
For example, if you want to convert four channels, a channel vector value like
the following has one A/D chip convert channels 1 and 2 and the other A/D chip
convert channels 5 and 6:
[1, 2, 5, 6]

Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The value can be a scalar or a vector that must be the same length as
the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all
channels. This board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10

-5 to +5 -5

0 to 10 10

24-4
 Q8

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Simultaneous update — Choose this check box to ensure that all the outputs
update simultaneously (non-transparent mode).
Note that choosing this check box requires an extra register write per sample
time and might cause some performance loss.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

24-5
24 Quanser

Q8 Digital Input
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low=0

TTL high=1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 32. This driver
allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. For example, to use the first,
second and fifth digital channels for input, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
The Q8 board has 32 digital channels. You can use each of these digital
channels for input or output.

Note If you have a Q8 digital input and digital output block corresponding to
the same board (the same PCI slot), do not use the same digital channel
number in both blocks.

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type

24-6
 Q8

getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

Q8 Digital Output
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 32. This driver
allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. For example, to use the first,
second and fifth digital channels for input, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
The Q8 board has 32 digital channels. You can use each of these digital
channels for input or output.

Note If you have a Q8 digital input and digital output block corresponding to
the same board (the same PCI slot), do not use the same digital channel
number in both blocks.

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.

24-7
24 Quanser

Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

Q8 Incremental Encoder
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. This driver
allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. For example, to use the first
three odd encoder input channels, enter
[1,3,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.

Note If you specify four channels or less, it is more efficient to use channels
that are all odd or all even. Doing so ensures optimal performance.

Initial count vector — The initial value vector contains valid count values to
be loaded into the preload register (PR) for the corresponding channel. After a
counter decrements to zero, it reloads from the value in the preload register.

24-8
 Q8

Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you
specify a scalar value, that value is the initial count value for all channels.
Prescale vector — The prescale vector is a base prescale factor for digital
filtering. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
filter clock frequency helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from
0 to 255. An entry of 0 corresponds to the highest possible available frequency
of 16.7 MHz.
Quadrature vector — Enter the quadrature vector. Enter a scalar or a vector
that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that
setting is used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Non-quadrature or normal. The driver treats the A input as count and

the B input as direction.
• 1 — 1X quadrature. Counts up or down once per complete cycle of the
quadrature signal
• 2 — 2X quadrature. Counts up or down twice per complete cycle of the
quadrature signal
• 4 — 4X quadrature. Counts up or down four times per complete cycle of the
quadrature signal

Mode vector — Enter the counting mode. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Normal. The counter wraps from 0 to 0xFFFFFF when decrementing

and from 0xFFFFFF to 0 when incrementing.
• 1 — Range Limit. The counter freezes upon reaching 0 from above and upon
reaching the preload register (PR) value from below. In both cases, once
counting has stopped, the counter resumes only when the count direction
reverses.
• 2 — Non-recycle. Counting stops upon overflow or underflow and does not
resume.
• 3 — Modulo-N. This mode is similar to Normal mode except that the
maximum count is specified by the preload register (PR).

24-9
24 Quanser

Synchronous index vector — Enter the synchronous index vector. Enter a

scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify
a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Disables index mode. This mode treats the index/load (I/LD) input as a
level-sensitive asynchronous input.
• 1 — Enables index mode. This mode treats the index/load (I/LD) input as a
level-sensitive synchronous input with the quadrature clocks.

Index polarity vector — Enter the index polarity mode vector. Enter a scalar
or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that setting is used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Active Low, for a negative slope

• 1 — Active High, for a positive slope

Preserve counts vector — Enter the preserve counts vector. Enter a scalar or
a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that setting is used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Do not preserve the current count for the corresponding channel. The
driver loads its counter from its preload register (PR) when the model is
restarted.
• 1 — Preserve the current count for the corresponding channel when the
model is restarted. (Note that the count will be meaningless after power is
recycled.)

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

24-10
 Q8

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

Q8 Counter
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers containing 1 or 2. This driver
allows you to enter channel numbers in any order. Channel 1 references the
counter channel, channel 2 references the watchdog channel. For example, to
use both channels, enter
[1,2]

Mode vector — Enter the display port mode. Enter a scalar or a vector that is
the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting
is used for all channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Frequency Modulation (FM). Display a single input port for the

corresponding channel. This port dynamically specifies the lengths (in 30
nanosecond units) of both the low and high phases of a square wave output
over the channel.
• 1 — Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). Display a lo and a hi input port for
each corresponding channel. These port dynamically specifies the lengths (in
30 nanosecond units) of the low and high phases respectively of a rectangular
wave output over the channel.

Show arm input vector — Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all
channels. The allowable entries are

• 0 — Do not display the input arm input. The channel is always armed.
• 1 — Display the input arm input for the associated channel. This setting
allows a channel to be armed or disarmed. You can use this port to enable or
disable the channel output dynamically. To enable or disable the channel
output, connect a signal to the input arm input. A signal value of 1 enables
the channel output, a value of 0 disables the channel output.

24-11
24 Quanser

When you disarm a channel, its output is continuously high. When you arm a
channel, the corresponding input port(s) control the output, as usual.
The value of an input port is undefined for the time between when a model is
downloaded and the time it is started. If an input port is armed, its initial value
is determined by the corresponding Initial low count vector and Initial high
count vector values:

• If either the Initial low count vector or Initial high count vector value is
nonzero, the channel will be armed between download time and model start
time
• If both the Initial low count vector or Initial high count vector value is
zero, the channel will be disarmed.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial low count vector — This parameter specifies the initial width (the time
after model download and prior to model start) in 30 nanosecond intervals of
the low portion of the output signal for the corresponding channel. Enter a
scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify
a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels.
Initial high count vector — This parameter specifies the initial width (the
time after model download and prior to model start) in 30 nanosecond intervals
of the high portion of the output signal for the corresponding channel. Enter a
scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify
a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI slot — If only one board of this type is physically present in the target PC,
enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

24-12
 Q8

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of the Quanser Q8 board is 0x0010.

24-13
24 Quanser

24-14
 25

Real Time Devices

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.rtdusa.com).

DM6420 (p. 25-2) I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input
(A/D) channels, 2 analog output (D/A) channels, 8
independent digital I/O lines, 8 dependent digital I/O
lines, and 2 counter/timers.
DM6430 (p. 25-9) ISA PC/104 I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential
analog input (A/D) channels, 1 analog output (D/A)
channel, 16 digital I/O lines, and 2 counter/timers.
DM6604 (p. 25-15) ISA PC/104 I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A)
channels, and 24 digital I/O lines.
DM6804 (p. 25-19) ISA PC/104 I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines and 5
counter/timer channels.
DM6814 (p. 25-30) 16-bit counting board with 3 channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders.
DM6816 (p. 25-34) ISA PC/104 I/O board with 9 independent PWM channels,
8-bit resolution, 3 16-bit timer/counters, and an on-board
8 MHZ clock.
DM7420 (p. 25-36) PCI PC/104 I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential
analog input (A/D) channels, 8 independent digital I/O
lines, 8 dependent digital I/O lines, and 9 counter/timers.
25 Real Time Devices

DM6420
The DM6420 is an I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 500 kHz, 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), 8 independent digital I/O lines, 8 dependent digital I/O
lines, and 2 counter/timers (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM6420 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 25-3

• “DM6420 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 25-5
• “DM6420 Digital Input” on page 25-6
• “DM6420 Digital Output” on page 25-7

Note xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6420
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

25-2
 DM6420

DM6420 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual A/D channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of A/D channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Input coupling vector — Enter either 1 (single-ended) or 2 (differential) for
each of the channels in the channel vector to choose the coupling code. The
coupling vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This driver
allows the coupling of each channel to be different.
For example, if the first and second channels are single-ended and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[1,1,2]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels entered in the
channel vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different range for each channel.

25-3
25 Real Time Devices

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5,5]

Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the channel vector
to choose the gain code of that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the channel vector. This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different.

Note While this board has programmable input ranges of +5, +10 and 0 to
10, this driver sets the input range to +10, and then lets you select different
input ranges by choosing different gains.

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver given the gain entered
in the gain vector.

Gain Range (V)

1 -10 to 10

2 -5 to +5

4 -2.5 to 2.5

8 -1.25 to 1.25

Notice that by increasing the gain code the voltage range is decreased. The gain
divides the input voltage range.

25-4
 DM6420

For example, if the first channel has a gain code of 1 (10 volt range) and the
second and fifth channels have a gain code of 2 (5 volt range), enter
[1,2,2]

Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6420 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the analog output
(D/A) channels used. This driver allows the selection of individual channels in
any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels entered in the
channel vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different range for each channel.

25-5
25 Real Time Devices

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5,5]

Sample time — Enter the model base sample time or a multiple of the base
sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6420 Digital Input

The DAS1601/16 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A,B,C). Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

25-6
 DM6420

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The port name defines which port
is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that
can be configured as inputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6420 Digital Output

The DAS1601/16 has an 8255 chip with 2 ports (1,2). Each port has a maximum
of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

25-7
25 Real Time Devices

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either 1 or 2. The port name defines which port is
used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can
be configured as outputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

25-8
 DM6430

DM6430
The DM6430 is an ISA PC/104 I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz, 1 analog
output (D/A) channel (16-bit), 16 digital I/O lines, and 2 counter/timers (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM6430 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 25-9

• “DM6430 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 25-11
• “DM6430 Digital Input” on page 25-12
• “DM6430 Digital Output” on page 25-13

Note xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6430
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

DM6430 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

25-9
25 Real Time Devices

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual A/D channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of A/D channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, or 8 for each of the channels in the channel vector
to choose the gain code of that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the channel vector. This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver given the gain entered
in the gain vector.

Gain Range (V)

1 -10 to 10

2 -5 to +5

4 -2.5 to 2.5

8 -1.25 to 1.25

Notice that by increasing the gain code the voltage range is decreased. The gain
divides the input voltage range.
For example, if the first channel has a gain code of 1 (10 volt range) and the
second and fifth channels have a gain code of 2 (5 volt range), enter
[1,2,2]

Input coupling vector — Enter either 1 (single-ended) or 2 (differential) for

each of the channels in the channel vector to choose the coupling code. The
coupling vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This driver
allows the coupling of each channel to be different.

25-10
 DM6430

For example, if the first and second channels are single-ended and the fifth
channel is a differential input, enter
[0,0,1]

The driver selects a second differential input 8 channels higher than the first
channel. In the example above, the driver would select the thirteenth channel
as a differential input with the fifth channel.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6430 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

This board has 2 analog outputs (D/A) with a fixed range of -10 to +10 volts.
Channel vector — Enter 1 or 2 to select the digital output lines used with this
port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines in any
order. The number of elements defines the number of digital lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you

25-11
25 Real Time Devices

specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in

the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same
length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the
initial value for all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between
the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6430 Digital Input

The DM6430 has an 8255 chip with 2 ports (1,2). Each port has a maximum of
8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

25-12
 DM6430

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either 1 or 2. The port name defines which port is
used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can
be configured as inputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6430 Digital Output

The DM6430 has a 8255 chip with 2 ports (1,2). Each port has a maximum of 8
digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

25-13
25 Real Time Devices

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either 1 or 2. The port name defines which port is
used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that can
be configured as outputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter

25-14
 DM6604

DM6604
The DM6604 is an ISA PC/104 I/O board with 8 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), and 24 digital I/O lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM6604 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 25-15

• “DM6604 Digital Input” on page 25-16
• “DM6604 Digital Output” on page 25-17

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6604
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DM6604 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the analog output
(D/A) channels used. This driver allows the selection of individual channels in
any order. The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

25-15
25 Real Time Devices

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector —Enter a range code for each of the channels entered in the
channel vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. This driver allows a different range for each channel.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5,5]

Sample time — Enter the model base sample time or a multiple of the base
sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6604 Digital Input

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.

25-16
 DM6604

Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The port name defines which port
is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that
can be configured as inputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6604 Digital Output

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The port name defines which port
is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that
can be configured as outputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

25-17
25 Real Time Devices

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

25-18
 DM6804

DM6804
The DM6804 is an ISA PC/104 I/O board with 24 digital I/O lines and 5
counter/timer channels (16-bit).
It contains one 8255 chip with 3 digital I/O ports and one AM9513A
counter/timer chip. For additional information about the various counter/timer
modes of that chip see the AM9513A data sheet which is part of the board
documentation.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM6804 Digital Input” on page 25-20

• “DM6804 Digital Output” on page 25-20
• “DM6804 Counter PWM” on page 25-21
• “DM6804 Counter PWM & ARM” on page 25-23
• “DM6804 Counter FM” on page 25-24
• “DM6804 Counter FM & ARM” on page 25-26
• “DM6804 PWM Capture” on page 25-27
• “DM6804 FM Capture” on page 25-28
• “DM6804xx” on page 25-29

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6804
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

25-19
25 Real Time Devices

DM6804 Digital Input

The DM6804 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A, B, C). Each port has a maximum
of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The port name defines which port
is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that
can be configured as inputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 Digital Output

The DM6804 has a 8255 chip with 3 ports (A, B, C). Each port has a maximum
of 8 digital I/O lines that can be configured as inputs or outputs.
Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

25-20
 DM6804

For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either A, B, or C. The port name defines which port
is used for this driver block. Each port has a maximum of 8 digital lines that
can be configured as outputs. In each case, one block is needed for each port.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 Counter PWM

The DM6804 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The DM6804 PWM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and
variable duty cycle). The block has one input which defines the variable duty
cycle between 0 and 1. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal
is output at the pin named OUT.

25-21
25 Real Time Devices

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency

base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 87.5 kHz, then
choose F2=500kHz as the Frequency Base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
Output Frequency. 500kHz x 0.175 = 87.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)

25-22
 DM6804

Base address —Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 Counter PWM & ARM

The DM6804 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The DM6804 PWM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for PWM or
disarmed signal generation (a square wave with fixed frequency and variable
duty cycle). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the counter by the
second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Duty cycle: Double 0 to 1

Arm: Double <0.5 disarmed
>0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Relative output frequency — Enter a value between 0 and .25*Frequency

base. The Relative output frequency is multiplied by the Frequency base to
set the fixed output frequency of the PWM-signal.
For example, if the output frequency of a square wave has to be 87.5 kHz, then
choose F2=500kHz as the Frequency Base and enter 0.175 as the Relative
Output Frequency. 500kHz x 0.175 = 87.5 kHz
Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

25-23
25 Real Time Devices

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 Counter FM
The DM6804 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The DM6804 FM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). For the corresponding counter channel, the PWM signal is
output at the pin named OUT.

25-24
 DM6804

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the duty cycle entering the block defines the duration of the TTL
high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running and gets
armed when the application begins running. This parameter sets the TTL level
when the counter is disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)

25-25
25 Real Time Devices

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 Counter FM & ARM

The DM6804 has one AM9513A chip with 5 counters.
The DM6804 FM & ARM driver programs the AM9513A for FM (Frequency
Modulation) signal generation (a square wave with fixed duty cycle and
variable frequency). Additionally the driver allows to arm and disarm the
counter by the second block input. For the corresponding counter channel, the
PWM signal is output at the pin named OUT.

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Variable frequency: Double <0.5 disarmed

Arm: Double >0.5 armed

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 to select which counter is used
with this driver block. In each case, one block is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the DM6804 has to be in position
1MHz not 5MHz.
Output duty cycle — Enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the duty cycle of the
square wave. The Duty Cycle is held fixed during execution of the target
application.

Note Your control over the output duty cycle is not always precise. See
“PWM and FM Driver Block Notes” on page 1-8 for details.

25-26
 DM6804

Level sequence of square wave — From the list, choose either high-low or
low-high:

• If you choose high-low, the square wave period starts with the TTL high part
followed by the TTL low part.
• If you choose low-high, the square wave period starts with the TTL low part
followed by the TTL high part.

In either case, the Output duty cycle defined in the setting above define the
duration of the TTL high part.
Level when disarmed — From the list, choose either high or low. The counter
is automatically disarmed when the target application is not running. If the
application is running, the second input port controls whether the counter is
armed or disarmed. This parameter sets the TTL level when the counter is
disarmed.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 PWM Capture

This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing PWM signals by using two
counters. One counter measures the cycle duration, and the other counter
measures the duration the signal is high.
There are two outputs. One output is the relative frequency compared to the
base frequency. The other output is the duty cycle. To get the actual frequency,
multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The PWM signal has to enter the pins named GATE of both corresponding
counter channels (parallel wiring). Both CLK pins have to be left unconnected.

25-27
25 Real Time Devices

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1&2, 2&3, 3&4, 4&5. This selects which two
counters the driver block uses to determine the PWM. In each case, one block
is needed for each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency. The XTAL frequency is
assumed to be 1MHz, therefore the jumper on the DM6804 has to be in position
1MHz not 5MHz.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804 FM Capture
This block programs the AMD9513A for capturing FM signals.
There is one output for relative frequency compared to the base frequency. To
get the actual frequency, multiply the base frequency by the relative frequency.
The FM signal has to enter the pin named GATE of the corresponding counter
channel. The CLK pin has to be left unconnected.

25-28
 DM6804

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double 0 to 1

Driver Block Parameters

Counter — From the list, choose 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This selects which counter the
driver block uses to determine the FM. In each case, one block is needed for
each counter.
Frequency base — From the list, choose F1=5MHz, F2=500kHz, F3=50kHz,
F4=5kHz, or F5=500Hz to set the base frequency.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle)
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6804xx
You can use this block to program the AMD9513A counter. The PWM, PWM &
ARM, FM, FM & ARM, PWM Capture, and FM Capture blocks use this block
in their underlying subsystems. The API for this block is not currently
documented.

25-29
25 Real Time Devices

DM6814
The DM6814 is a 16-bit counting board with three channels. This board
typically connects to incremental encoders. Incremental encoders convert
physical motion into electrical pulses that can be used to determine velocity,
direction, and distance.
Each board also three I/O ports, with each port containing eight digital I/O
lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM6814 Incremental Encoder” on page 25-31

• “DM6814 Digital Input” on page 25-31
• “DM6814 Digital Output” on page 25-32

Note xPC Target does not support the 12 digital input lines on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6814
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

25-30
 DM6814

DM6814 Incremental Encoder

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double counts

Driver Block Parameters

Encode Channel — From the list choose, 1, 2, or 3. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counter initial value — Enter the initial value of the counter. The value must
16
be between 1 and 2 –1.
Enable counter reset on px.2 (index input) — If this check box is selected,
the counter is reset to its initial value (default zero) whenever the incremental
encoder is moved over its index mark.
For this purpose you must connect the incremental encoder index output to the
correct pin: P0.2 for encoder channel 1, P2.2 for channel 2, and P4.2 for channel
3.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6814 Digital Input

You can use only one digital input block per port. You can use an input and an
output block for the same port, but then each block must use channels different
from those in the other block.

25-31
25 Real Time Devices

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel Vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all the digital inputs for the current port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — Select port A, B, or C.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

DM6814 Digital Output

You can configure two digital I/O lines for output. You can use only one digital
input block per port. You can use an input and an output block for the same
port, but then each block must use channels different from those in the other
block.

25-32
 DM6814

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double <0.5 = TTL low

>0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel Vector — Enter either numbers 1 or 2 to select the digital output
lines you use with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual
digital output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number
of digital lines used.
For example, to use all available digital outputs for the current port, enter
[1,2]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — Select port A, B, or C.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial values (0 or
1) of the output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as
the channel vector. If you enter a scalar, that value is used for all channels. The
channels are set to these initial values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address board setting. For example, if the base address
is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

25-33
25 Real Time Devices

DM6816
The DM6816 is an ISA PC/104 I/O board with 9 independent PWM channels,
8-bit resolution, 3 16-bit timer/counters, and an on-board 8 MHZ clock.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “DM6816 PWM” on page 25-34

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6816
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type ISA (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

DM6816 PWM
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 9 to select the PWM channel.
This driver allows the selection of individual PWM channels in any order. The
number of elements defines the number of channels used.
For example, to use all of the channels, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Clock source for channels 1, 2, 3 — From the list choose either 8 MHz clock
or Timer 1 output as the clock source for the channels. By default, it is Timer
1 output. This parameter affects channels 1, 2, or 3.

Clock source for channels 4, 5, 6 — From the list choose either 8 MHz clock
or Timer 1 output as the clock source for the channels. By default, it is Timer
1 output. This parameter affects channels 4, 5, or 6.

25-34
 DM6816

Clock source for channels 7, 8, 9 — From the list choose either 8 MHz clock
or Timer 1 output as the clock source for the channels. By default, it is Timer
1 output. This parameter affects channels 7, 8, or 9.

Frequency divisors for timers 0, 1, 2 — Enter a vector [d0 d1 d2] of integers,

with each integer in the range from 2 to 65535. The driver uses these integers
as frequency divisors for the timers 0, 1, and 2, respectively. For example, if
timer 0 uses the 8 MHz clock as a source, a frequency divisor value of 4 for d0
causes timer 0 to run at 2 MHz (8 MHz/4).
If you specify one integer in the vector, that value applies to all timers.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address (e.g. 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the board. It is
important that this entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board.
For example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

25-35
25 Real Time Devices

DM7420
The DM7420 is a PCI PC/104 I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential analog
input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 600 kHz, 8
independent digital I/O lines, 8 dependent digital I/O lines, and 9
counter/timers.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “DM7420 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 25-36

• “DM7420 Digital Input” on page 25-40
• “DM7420 Digital Output” on page 25-40

Note xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name DM6604
Manufacturer Real Time Devices
Bus type PCI (PC104)
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

DM7420 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

25-36
 DM7420

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16. This driver allows the
selection of individual A/D channels in any order. The number of elements
defines the number of A/D channels used.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 10 volts, enter
[-10,10]

Gain vector — Enter 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 for each of the channels in the channel
vector to choose the gain code of that channel. The gain vector must be the same
length as the channel vector. This driver allows the gain of each channel to be
different.

25-37
25 Real Time Devices

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver given the gain entered
in the gain vector.

Gain Range (V)

1 0 to 10

2 0 to +5

4 0 to 2.5

8 0 to 1.25

16 0 to 0.625

32 0 to 0.312

Notice that by increasing the gain code the voltage range is decreased. The gain
divides the input voltage range.
For example, if the first channel has a gain code of 1 (10 volt range) and the
second and fifth channels have a gain code of 2 (5 volt range), enter
[1,2,2]

Input coupling vector — Enter either 1 (ground-referenced single-ended

(RSE)), 2 (nonreferenced singled-ended (NRSE)), or 3 (differential (DIFF)) for
each of the channels in the channel vector to choose the coupling code. The
coupling vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This driver
allows the coupling of each channel to be different.

25-38
 DM7420

The following table is a list of the couplings for this driver and the
corresponding coupling codes.

Coupling Coupling Description

Code

RSE 1 High side of input signal connected to the

selected analog input channel. Low side of input
signal connected to one of the analog ground
(ANALOG GND) pins. See the board manual.

NRSE 2 High side of input signal connected to the

selected analog input channel. Low side of the
input signal connected to the analog input sense
(AINSENSE) pin at the I/O connector. See the
board manual.

DIFF 3 High side of input signal connected to the

selected analog input channel AIN1+...AIN8+.
Low side of input signal connected to AIN- pin
corresponding to the AIN+. See the board
manual.

For example, if the first and second channels are ground referenced
single-ended and the third channel is a differential input, enter
[1,1,3]

For differential inputs, the driver selects a second differential input that is
eight channels higher than the first channel. In the example above, the driver
selects the eleventh channel (AIN11/AIN3-) as a differential input.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

25-39
25 Real Time Devices

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

DM7420 Digital Input

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital input
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.
For example, to use all of the digital inputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either 0 or 1.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

DM7420 Digital Output

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8 to select the digital output
lines used with this port. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of digital
lines used.

25-40
 DM7420

For example, to use all of the digital outputs for one port, enter
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Port — From the list choose either 0 or 1.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

25-41
25 Real Time Devices

25-42
 26

SBS Technologies

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.sbs.com).

Flex/104A PC/104 IP Carrier Board (p. 26-2) PC/104 format IP carrier board with a capacity of 2
IP modules.
IP-16ADC (p. 26-4) 16 single or 8 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (16-bit) with a combined throughput of
100kHz.
IP-16DAC (p. 26-6) 3 independent precalibrated analog output (D/A)
channels (16-bit).
IP-DAC (p. 26-8) 6 independent precalibrated analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit).
IP-Digital 24 (p. 26-10) 24 digital I/O lines which can be independently
configured for input or output.
IP-HiADC (p. 26-13) 16 analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit).
IP-Synchro (p. 26-15) Two channels of position measurement using
synchro, resolver, LVDT, or Inductosyn®
transducers.
IP-Unidig-E-48 (p. 26-17) 48 digital I/O lines which can be independently
configured for input or output
PCI-40A Carrier Board (p. 26-20) ISA format IP carrier board with a capacity of 4 IP
modules.
Broadcast Memory (p. 26-21) PCI broadcast memory node
26 SBS Technologies

Flex/104A PC/104 IP Carrier Board

Each IP module must be physically plugged into an IP carrier board such as the
Flex/104A. Models containing IP module blocks must also contain
corresponding IP carrier blocks. The relationship ‘IP module A is plugged into
carrier B’ is expressed by selecting the same Carrier ID for both A and B.
The Flex/104A holds up to two IP modules.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver blocks:
• “Flex-104A” on page 26-2

Board Characteristics
Board name Flex-104A PC/104 carrier board
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type PC/104
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

Flex-104A
Driver Block Parameters
Carrier ID — Enter a number to uniquely identify this IP carrier board within
the model.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

26-2
 Flex/104A PC/104 IP Carrier Board

This board permutes the expected pinout of the 50-pin I/O connector for each
IP module as follows

Expected Actual Expected Actual Expected Actual

Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin

1 1 18 35 35 20

2 3 19 37 36 22

3 5 20 39 37 24

4 7 21 41 38 26

5 9 22 43 39 28

6 11 23 45 40 30

7 13 24 47 41 32

8 15 25 49 42 34

9 17 26 2 43 36

10 19 27 4 44 38

11 21 28 6 45 40

12 23 29 8 46 42

13 25 30 10 47 44

14 27 31 12 48 46

15 29 32 14 49 48

16 31 33 16 50 50

17 33 34 18

26-3
26 SBS Technologies

IP-16ADC
The IP-16ADC I/O board has 16 single or 8 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (16-bit) with a combined throughput of 100kHz.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “IP-16ADC Analog Input (A/D)” on page 26-4

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-16ADC
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-16ADC Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.

26-4
 IP-16ADC

Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-16ADC
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 16. The channel
numbers can occur in any order. For example, to use the first and third analog
output (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Range Code Input Range (V)

-10 -10 to +10

-5 -5 to +5

5 0 to 5

10 0 to 10

Range codes –10 and –5 specify differential channels, which each use two pins
on the I/O cable. Range codes 10 and 5 specify single-ended channels, which
each use only one pin. Certain combinations of channel numbers and range
codes can refer to conflicting physical I/O pins and will cause an error of the
form “Bipolar channel x and unipolar channel y use the same I/O pins”. Consult
the section “I/O Pin Wiring” in the IP-16ADC User’s Manual as you select the
channel and range vectors to avoid this.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

26-5
26 SBS Technologies

IP-16DAC
The IP-16DAC I/O board has 3 independent precalibrated analog output (D/A)
channels (16-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “IP-16DAC Analog Output (D/A)” on page 26-6

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-16DAC
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-16DAC Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.

26-6
 IP-16DAC

Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-16DAC
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 3. The channel
numbers can occur in any order. For example, to use the first and second analog
output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Channel numbers 1, 2, and 3 correspond to DAC A, DAC B, and DAC C

respectively.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Range Code Input Range (V)

-10 -10 to +10

-5 -5 to +5

5 0 to 5

10 0 to 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter [-10,5]
The range settings must correspond to the jumper settings on the board for
DAC A and DAC B and DAC C.
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

26-7
26 SBS Technologies

IP-DAC
The IP-DAC I/O board has 6 independent precalibrated analog output (D/A)
channels (12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver blocks:
• “IP-DAC Analog Output (D/A)” on page 26-8

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-DAC
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-DAC Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.

26-8
 IP-DAC

Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-16ADC
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 6. The channel
numbers can occur in any order. For example, to use the first and second analog
output (D/A) channels, enter
[1,2]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
board allows the range of each channel to be different.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Range Code Input Range (V)

-10 -10 to +10

-5 -5 to +5

-2.5 -2.5 to 2.5

5 0 to 5

10 0 to 10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter [-10,5]
The range settings have to correspond to the OUTPUT RANGE SELECTION
settings on the board for DAC0 and DAC1 (channel 1 and 2 respectively).
Sample time — Base sample time of a multiple of the base sample time.

26-9
26 SBS Technologies

IP-Digital 24
IP-Digital 24 boards have 24 digital I/O lines which can be independently
configured for input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “IP-Digital 24 Digital Input” on page 26-10

• “IP-Digital 24 Digital Output” on page 26-11

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-Digital-24
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-Digital 24 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Scaling

Type

TTL double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

26-10
 IP-Digital 24

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.
Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-Digital 24
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 24 to select the digital input
lines to be used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of lines used.
For example, to use the first three digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

IP-Digital 24 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Scaling

Type

TTL double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

26-11
26 SBS Technologies

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 24 to select the digital
output lines to be used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of lines
used.
For example, to use the first three digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

26-12
 IP-HiADC

IP-HiADC
The IP-HiADC I/O board has 16 analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “IP-HiADC Analog Input (A/D)” on page 26-13

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-HiADC
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-HiADC Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Scaling

Type

volts double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.

26-13
26 SBS Technologies

Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-HiADC
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 16. The channel
numbers can occur in any order. For example, to use the first and third analog
output (A/D) channels, enter
[1, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range — Select either -5V to 5V or -10V to 10V. This applies to all channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

26-14
 IP-Synchro

IP-Synchro
IP-Synchro provides two channels of position measurement using synchro,
resolver, LVDT, or Inductosyn® transducers.
xPC Target supports this board with this driver block:
• “IP-Synchro” on page 26-15

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-Synchro
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

IP-Synchro
Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Output Data Type Scaling

Synchro or Resolver double angle in radians

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the
IP-Synchro module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.

26-15
26 SBS Technologies

Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the IP-Synchro
module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have different slot
capacities.
Channel vector — Enter a vector with one or two elements to select the
Synchro/Resolver input channels you use with this block. 1 represents channel
A and 2 represents channel B. This driver allows the selection of inputs in
either order.
For example to use channels A and B in that order, enter
[1,2]

Precision vector — This must be a scalar or a vector the same length as the
channel vector. For each input channel it specifies a precision of either 10, 12,
14, or 16 bits. If the automatic precision option is in effect, then the selected
precision for each channel will be used for the entire run. Otherwise it merely
specifies the initial precision.
Automatic precision — Select this check box to have the IP-Synchro
automatically change its precision (resolution) in order to track the input
velocity.
Output format — This option selects the output status format.

• position — Output position only

• position and status — Output position and status

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

26-16
 IP-Unidig-E-48

IP-Unidig-E-48
IP-Unidig-E-48 boards have 48 digital I/O lines which can be independently
configured for input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Input” on page 26-17

• “IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Output” on page 26-18

Board Characteristics
Board name IP-Unidig-E-48
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type N/A
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Scaling

Type

TTL double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

26-17
26 SBS Technologies

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.
Carrier slot — Select the slot on the carrier board into which the
IP-Unidig-E-48 module is plugged. Note that different carrier boards can have
different slot capacities.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 48 to select the digital input
lines to be used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital input lines
in any order. The number of elements defines the number of lines used.
For example, to use the first three digital inputs, enter
[1,2,3]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

IP-Unidig-E-48 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Scaling

Type

TTL double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

26-18
 IP-Unidig-E-48

Driver Block Parameters

Carrier ID — Enter the Carrier ID of the IP carrier board into which the IP
module is plugged.
In order to use an IP module, it must be physically plugged into an IP carrier
board and the model must contain a block representing this carrier board. Each
carrier block has a Carrier ID parameter, which must be set to a number not
shared by any other carrier board block in the model.
Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 48 to select the digital
output lines to be used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order. The number of elements defines the number of lines
used.
For example, to use the first three digital outputs, enter
[1,2,3]

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

26-19
26 SBS Technologies

PCI-40A Carrier Board

Each IP module must be physically plugged into an IP carrier board such as the
PCI-40A. Models containing IP module blocks must also contain corresponding
IP carrier blocks. The relationship ‘IP module A is plugged into carrier B’ is
expressed by selecting the same Carrier ID for both A and B. The PCI-40A
holds up to four IP modules. xPC Target supports this board with this driver
block:
• “PCI-40A” on page 26-20

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-40A carrier board
Manufacturer SBS Technologies
Bus type PCI
Access method I/O Mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-40A
Driver Block Parameters
Carrier ID — Enter a number to uniquely identify this IP carrier board within
the model.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

26-20
 Broadcast Memory

Broadcast Memory
xPC Target uses a model for shared memory that includes Simulink blocks, for
the shared memory drivers, and MATLAB structures for defining shared
memory and node initialization partitions. The topics in this section are

• “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 26-21 — Before you begin to use
SBS Broadcast Memory shared memory blocks, define a partition structure
that defines how you want to allocate shared memory.
• “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes” on page 26-24 — Before you begin to use
SBS Broadcast Memory shared memory blocks, define a node initialization
structure that defines how shared memory is allocated (partitioned) and how
the board is configured.

Note The xPC Target SBS25x0 driver does not fully support node-to-node
network configuration. In most cases, a shared memory hub is required to use
the SBS Shared driver blocks. If you have additional questions, please contact
The MathWorks Technical Support.

Create Shared Memory Partitions

To use the xPC Target SBS Broadcast Memory shared memory blocks to read,
write, pack, or unpack data, you must define a partition structure. SBS
Broadcast Memory shared memory drivers use MATLAB structures to define
shared memory partitions. A partition structure describes how you want to
allocate (or partition) the shared memory. xPC Target allocates shared memory
with bundles of data that are packed into memory partitions. The following
SBS Broadcast Memory blocks use shared memory partition structures:

• Shared memory read/write

• Shared memory pack/unpack

After you define the shared memory partitions, you can add SBS Broadcast
Memory shared memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared
memory structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Partition
Structure” on page 26-29 for the complete list of fields for the structure.
The following description refers to the smpartsbs25x0 command. Type

26-21
26 SBS Technologies

help smpartsbs25x0

for a description of the command.

• Using the smpartsbs25x0 command at the MATLAB Command Window,

create a default partition structure. For example, type
x=smpartsbs25x0

>> smpartsbs25x0
SBS25x0 Shared Memory Parition
Shared-Memory partition
Total Bytes in partition = 4
Starting Address = 0x0
Number of segments = 1

To get the contents of x, type

>> get(x)

ans =
Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Alignment: '4'
Size: '[ 1 ]'
WIT: 'off'

• At the MATLAB Command Window, create a user-defined partition

structure. The easiest way to do this is to create an M-file, partially define a
structure, load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace. For example
Partition(1).Address='0x5000';
Partition(1).Type='int8';
Partition(1).Size='10';
Partition(2).Type='uint16';
Partition(2).Size='5';
Partition(3).Type='uint8';
Partition(3).Size='1';
Partition(3).Alignment='8';
Partition(4).Type='double';
Partition(4).Size='3';

To get the contents of x with these settings, type

26-22
 Broadcast Memory

>> x=smpartsbs25x0(Partition)

SBS25x0 Shared Memory Parition

Shared-Memory partition
Total Bytes in partition = 16
Starting Address = 0x5000
Number of segments = 4

This example defines a partition with four segments.

- The Address field is optional. Only specify this field for the first segment
of a partition. The elements of a partition are defined as a continuous
memory block from the first address. The following segments extrapolate
their addresses from the first segment. If you have fragmented memory,
use multiple partitions and SBS Broadcast Memory read/write blocks to
work with the memory.
- The Type and Size fields are required for all fields in the partition
structure.
- The Alignment value is optional. It is '4' by default, which forces
segments that do not have alignment specifications to start on 4 byte (32
bit) boundaries. In this partition, the third segment (Partition(3)) has an
alignment of '8'.
- The base addresses of subsequent segments are fully defined by the data
type, size, and alignment of the preceding segment.
- You can then call the smpartsbs25x0() command to fully populate the
partition structure.

26-23
26 SBS Technologies

Initialize Shared Memory Nodes

To use the xPC Target SBS Broadcast Memory shared memory, you must
define a node initialization structure. SBS Broadcast Memory shared memory
drivers use MATLAB structures to define shared memory node initialization.
A node initialization structure describes the shared memory partition (see
“Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 26-21) and the SBS Broadcast
Memory board configuration, including interrupt configurations. The following
SBS Broadcast Memory block requires shared memory node initialization
structures:
• SBS25x0 init
After you define the node initialization partition, you can add SBS Broadcast
Memory shared memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared
memory structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Node
Initialization Structure” on page 26-31 for the complete list of fields for the
structure.
The following description refers to the smnodesbs25x0 command. Type
help smnodesbs25x0

for a description of the command.

Using the smnodesbs25x0 command at the MATLAB Command Window,
create a default node initialization structure. For example, type
>> node=smnodesbs25x0
Node Definition for SBS2500/SBS2510 Broadcast Memory

To get the contents of node, type

>> get(node)

ans =
TargetAbortEnable: 'off'
LoopbackEnable: 'off'
Node2Node: 'off'
RXEnable: 'on'
TXEnable: 'on'
MemorySize: '256kByte'
WITEnable: 'off'
IRQ_ErrorEnable: 'off'

26-24
 Broadcast Memory

IRQ_WITEnable: 'off'
Partition: []
SlotID: 'any'

• At the MATLAB Command Window, create a user-defined node structure.

The easiest way to do this is to create an M-file, partially define a structure,
load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace. For example
z.LoopbackEnable='on';
z.Partition=x

To get the contents of node with these settings, type

>> node=smnodesbs25x0(node1)

Node Definition for SBS2500/SBS2510 Broadcast Memory

>> get(node)

ans =
TargetAbortEnable: 'off'
LoopbackEnable: 'on'
Node2Node: 'off'
RXEnable: 'on'
TXEnable: 'on'
MemorySize: '256kByte'
WITEnable: 'off'
IRQ_ErrorEnable: 'off'
IRQ_WITEnable: 'off'
Partition: [1x1 smpartsbs25x0]
SlotID: 'any'

Currently, you can define values only for the fields LoopbackEnable,
WITEnable, and Partition.

SBS 2510/2500 Broadcast Memory

The SBS 2510/2500 Broadcast Memory board is a high-speed fiber optic
reflective memory. It can also generate/broadcast interrupts. xPC Target uses
this board as part of the shared memory network that you can use to exchange
data between computer nodes.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

26-25
26 SBS Technologies

• “SBS25x0 init” on page 26-26

• “SBS25x0 read” on page 26-27
• “SBS25x0 write” on page 26-28
• “Shared Memory Pack” on page 26-28
• “Shared Memory Unpack” on page 26-29

For information about the Change endianess block, see “Byte Reversal/Change
Endianess Block” in Chapter 6.

Board Characteristics
Board name SBS Broadcast Memory
Manufacturer SBS
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

SBS25x0 init
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure these block parameters, be sure that you have a
predefined node initialization structure. See “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes”
on page 26-24.
Each model that uses shared memory must have one 5565 init block for every
SBS Broadcast Memory board in the system.
Node struct — Enter the name of the predefined node initialization structure.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

26-26
 Broadcast Memory

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

SBS25x0 read
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The 5565 read block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 26-21.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Error Status Port — Select this check box to monitor the status of the SBS
Broadcast Memory board LIER register modes.

26-27
26 SBS Technologies

SBS25x0 write
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The 5565 write block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 26-21.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
and object. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Error Status Port — Select this check box to monitor the status of the SBS
Broadcast Memory board LIER register modes.

Shared Memory Pack

Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
Memory partitions consist of groups of Simulink signals, which are combined
into blocks (packets) of 32 bit words. The 5565 pack block packs the specified
partition structure into an unstructured double word array vector by
converting one or more Simulink signals of varying data types into the vector.
Typically, the input to a pack block is the output from a write block. Simulink

26-28
 Broadcast Memory

is not aware of structures; you must pass the output of each structure segment
as input to the 5565 pack block.
This block ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure.

Shared Memory Unpack

Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
The 5565 unpack block unpacks an unstructured double word array vector
(from the 5565 pack block) into the specified partition structure. This block
ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block unpacks the double word array vector into this structure.

Shared Memory Structure Reference

You do not need to use all the fields of a partition or node initialization
structure. However, knowing the possible structure fields will be helpful when
you are creating any of the structures.
This section includes the following topics:

• “Shared Memory Partition Structure” on page 26-29 — Description of the

partition node structure fields
• “Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure” on page 26-31 — Description
of the node initialization structure fields

Shared Memory Partition Structure

A shared memory partition structure has the following fields:
Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Alignment: '4'

26-29
26 SBS Technologies

Size: '[ 1 ]'

WIT: 'off'

where:

Partition Description
Fields

Address Specifies the base address (in hexadecimal) of the memory

partition within the node’s shared memory space. The
default value is '0x0', the first location in shared memory.

Align partition addresses on 32-bit word boundaries (for

example, 0x0, 0x4, 0x8, and so forth).
Type Specifies the data type of the memory segment. Specify one
of the following types:

• single (IEEE Single Precision)

• double (IEEE Double Precision)
• uint8
• int8
• uint16
• int16
• uint32
• int32
• Boolean (a single byte represents a boolean value)

The default value is 'uint32'. A minimum partition size is

32 bits.

26-30
 Broadcast Memory

Partition Description
Fields

Size Specifies the dimension and size of the memory segment.

You can enter a scalar value or a value with the [m,n]
format. The default value is '1'.

• scalar — Treats the Size entry as the specification of the

length of a non-oriented array or vector
• [m,n] — Treats the Size entry as an array dimension.
The total number of elements in this segment is m*n.
Alignment If another partition precedes this partition, defines the byte
alignment of this segment. Specify one of the following
alignment values: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8. The default value is '4'.
This value forces a double word boundary alignment for the
first address of this segment.
WIT Write Interrupt Table. If this partition segment receives a
write request, specifies whether or not the partition
generates an interrupt. Specify 'off', 'first', 'all',
'last'. The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from generating interrupts

'first' — Allows a write to the first double word of the

memory block to generate an interrupt.

'all' — Allows a write to all locations of the memory block

to generate an interrupt.

'last' — Allows a write to only the last double word of the

memory segment to generate an interrupt.

Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure

A node initialization structure has the following fields:
TargetAbortEnable: 'off'
LoopbackEnable: 'off'
Node2Node: 'off'
RXEnable: 'on'

26-31
26 SBS Technologies

TXEnable: 'on'
MemorySize: '256kByte'
WITEnable: 'off'
IRQ_ErrorEnable: 'off'
IRQ_WITEnable: 'off'
Partition: []
SlotID: 'any'

These values affect the Extended Control Register. Refer to the SBS Broadcast
Memory product documentation for further details on registers.
Of particular note are the following register modes:

Board Description
Modes

Loopback Specifies if xPC Target can operate without having the

Enable shared memory network fully operational.

• 'off' — Normal shared memory operation (requires

operating shared memory network)
• 'on' — Loop back enable. This allows xPC Target to
operate without having the shared memory network fully
operational.

26-32
 Broadcast Memory

Board Description
Modes

Memory Specifies the minimum memory size required. The SBS

Size Broadcast Memory driver checks this value against the
memory size of the SBS Broadcast Memory board. An SBS
Broadcast Memory board has a memory size of either
'64MByte' or '128MByte'. If you enter a size in this field
that is larger than the actual SBS Broadcast Memory board
memory size, the driver will return an error. You can enter
values of:

'256kByte'

'512kByte'

'1MByte'

'2MByte'

'4MByte'

'8MByte'

Partition Specifies the memory partition to be initialized. The node

requires this value to initialize the interrupt table for the
partition. This parameter is required for xPC Target
configurations that will be driven by shared memory
interrupts.

Board Interrupts. If you want to have an interrupt source, the SBS shared
memory board can generate PCI interrupts in response to writes to memory
partitions of a memory block. You define this behavior through the WIT field of
shared memory partition structure. Each partition segment has its own WIT
setting.
To enable a memory location to generate an interrupt, set the WIT field as
desired, then configure the xPC Target model to generate an interrupt.
The following procedure describes how to configure an entire xPC Target model
to accept an interrupt from an SBS shared memory board:

26-33
26 SBS Technologies

1 From the MATLAB Command Window, type

getxpcpci

This command lists board information for all installed PCI devices that xPC
Target knows about.

2 If you have multiple SBS shared memory boards, find the board ID for which
you want to define the interrupt.

3 Find the IRQ specified for your SBS25x0 board.

This is the interrupt source number you need to specify in the xPC target
code generation options field in step 10 of the following procedure.

4 From the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of your Simulink
model.

The Simulink model appears.

5 From the Simulation menu, click Simulation Parameters.

6 Click the Real-Time Workshop tab.

7 From the Category list, choose xPC Target code generation options.

8 Ensure that the Execution mode field is set to Real-Time.

9 Click the Real-Time interrupt source list.

10 Select the interrupt number to which the board is set (from step 3).

11 Click the I/O board generating the interrupt list and select the SBS board
that is associated with the IRQ. From the list, choose the appropriate board
ID:
SBS_25x0_ID_0x100
SBS_25x0_ID_0x101
SBS_25x0_ID_0x102
SBS_25x0_ID_0x103

26-34
 Broadcast Memory

12 If your system has multiple boards, at the PCI slot/ISA base address
parameter, specify the PCI slot that contains the board you are configuring
for interrupts.

13 Click OK.

26-35
26 SBS Technologies

26-36
 27

Sensoray

This chapter describes the Sensoray boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.sensoray.com).

526 (p. 27-2) Multifunction measurement and control board with eight
16-bit analog inputs, four 16-bit analog outputs, four
24-bit quadrature encoder inputs, and eight digital I/O
channels.
626 (p. 27-11) Multifunction I/O board with 16 14-bit differential analog
inputs, four 13-bit analog outputs, three pairs of 24-bit
up/down counters (total of six counters), 48 digital I/O
channels, watchdog timer, and backup battery support.
27 Sensoray

526
The Sensoray 526 is a multifunction measurement and control board. It has
eight 16-bit analog inputs, four 16-bit analog outputs, four 24-bit quadrature
encoder inputs, and eight digital I/O channels.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Sensoray526 AD” on page 27-2

• “Sensoray526 Dual AD” on page 27-3
• “Sensoray526 DA” on page 27-4
• “Sensoray526 Dual DA” on page 27-5
• “Sensoray526 DI” on page 27-7
• “Sensoray526 DO” on page 27-8
• “Sensoray526 Encoder Input” on page 27-9

Board Characteristics
Board name 526
Manufacturer Sensoray
Bus type PC/104
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

Sensoray526 AD
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts [-10, +10] Double [-10,+10] 1

27-2
 526

Driver Block Parameters

Channels — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. Do not repeat any
channel number. For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1, 2, 5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values.

Sensoray526 Dual AD
The Sensoray526 Dual AD block controls two boards simultaneously. This
enables simultaneous conversion for both boards. Each board does not have to
wait for the other to finish converting data before starting its own conversion.
Acquisition overlaps result in considerable time savings.

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts [-10,+10] Double [-10,+10] 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board A Channels/Board B Channels — For each board, enter a vector of
numbers between 1 and 8. Do not repeat any channel number. For example, to
use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1, 2, 5]

27-3
27 Sensoray

Note, for optimal performance, equally split the active channels between the
two boards. If you need eight channels, use four channels on each board.
Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Board A base address/Board B base address — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on
the board. For example, if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values. For dual boards, change the
base address of at least one of the boards. The boards cannot have the same
base address.

Sensoray526 DA
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts [10, +10] Double [10, +10] 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channels — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 4. Do not repeat any
channel number. For example, to use the first, second and fourth channels,
enter
[1, 2, 4]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.

27-4
 526

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the output channels. At initialization, the block always uses this
value. If Reset vector has a value of 1, the board sets the corresponding
channel to the value of the Initial value vector when execution stops. Enter a
double precision voltage value in the range -10 to +10. This must be scalar or a
vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that value is the initial value for all channels. The channels are set to
the initial values between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is
started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values.

Sensoray526 Dual DA
The Sensoray526 Dual AD block controls two boards simultaneously. This
enables the block to write the output registers to both boards before the
conversion start bits are written on both boards.
Output from the second board changes state approximately 1 to 2 microseconds
after the first board. This change is independent of the number of channels in
use.

27-5
27 Sensoray

Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts [-10,+10] Double [-10,+10] 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board A Channels/Board B Channels — Enter a vector of numbers between
1 and 4. Do not repeat any channel number. For example, to use the first,
second and fourth channels, enter
[1, 2, 4]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Board A Reset vector/Board B Reset vector — The reset vector controls the
behavior of the channel at model termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is
the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting
is used for all channels. If you specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel
is reset to the value specified in the initial value vector. If you specify a value
of 0, the channel remains at the last value attained while the model was
running.
Board A Initial value vector/Board B Initial value vector — The initial
value vector contains the initial voltage values for the output channels. At
initialization, the block always uses this value. If Reset vector has a value of
1, the board sets the corresponding channel to the value of the Initial value
vector when execution stops. Enter a double precision voltage value in the
range -10 to +10. This must be scalar or a vector that is the same length as the
channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that value is the initial value for
all channels. The channels are set to the initial values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

27-6
 526

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values. For dual boards, change the
base address of at least one of the boards. The boards cannot have the same
base address.

Sensoray526 DI
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL (0 or +5) volts Double (0 or 1) 1

Driver Block Parameters

Channels — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. These are the
channels to which the board writes output. Each group, 1 to 4 and 5 to 8, can
be either input or output. Do not combine them. For example, if channels 1 to
4 are the input channels, you cannot have output on channel 2. Instead, you
can use channels 5 to 8 to be the output channels.
Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values.

27-7
27 Sensoray

Sensoray526 DO
Scaling of Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL (0 or +5) volts input < 0.5, output = 0 volts 1

input > 0.5, output = 5 volts

Driver Block Parameters

Channels — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 8. These are the
channels to which the board writes output. Each group, 1 to 4 and 5 to 8, can
be either input or output. Do not combine them. For example, if channels 1 to
4 are the input channels, you cannot have output on channel 2. Instead, you
can use channels 5 to 8 to be the output channels.
Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial logic values
for the output channels. At initialization, the block always uses this value.
Enter a 0 or 1. If Reset vector has a value of 1, the board sets the corresponding
channel to the value of the Initial value vector when execution stops. Enter a
scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify
a scalar value, that value is the initial value for all channels. The channels are
set to the initial values between the time the model is downloaded and the time
it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

27-8
 526

Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values.

Sensoray526 Encoder Input

Driver Block Parameters
Channel — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies the
encoder input channel that this block reads.
Index reset mode — From the list, choose one of the following. This is the
event on the index input that resets the counter to the value of Reset value.
• Rising edge on index
• Falling edge on index
• Both edges
• None
Reset value — The reset value contains the value of the counter when the
event that the Index reset mode parameter specifies occurs on the index
input.
Initial value — The initial value vector contains the value that is initially
loaded into the counter when model execution starts. The counter is set to the
initial value between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is
started.
Output range — This parameter controls the way the 24-bit integer count is
converted to the double precision signal output. From the list, select

• Signed +- 2^23 — If the block interprets the high order bit as a sign bit, the
output takes values in the range -223 to (+223)-1.
• Unsigned 0 -> 2^24-1 — If the block interprets the 24-bit counter as an
unsigned quantity, the output is in the range 0 to (224)-1.

Count speed — From the list, select a counting mode. Choose one of the
following:

27-9
27 Sensoray

• 1x — If counting up, count on the rising edge of CLKA. If counting down,

count on the falling edge of CLKA.
• 2x — Count both edges of CLKA, up or down.
• 4x — Count both edges of both CLKA and CLKB, up or down.

Refer to the board manufacturer documentation for details on the counting

mode.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the base address DIP switch settings on the board. For example,
if the base address is 2C0 (hexadecimal), enter
0x2C0

Note that the Sensoray 526 board ships from the manufacturer with a base
address of 0x2C0. If you want to change the base address, see the board
manufacturer documentation for allowed values.

27-10
 626

626
The Sensoray 626 is a multifunction I/O board. It has 16 14-bit differential
analog inputs, four 13-bit analog outputs, three pairs of 24-bit up/down
counters (total of six counters), 48 digital I/O channels, watchdog timer, and
backup battery support.
You can have up to four Sensoray 626 boards in your system.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “Sensoray 626 Initialize” on page 27-11

• “Sensoray 626 Analog Input” on page 27-12
• “Sensoray 626 Analog Output” on page 27-13
• “Sensoray 626 Digital Input” on page 27-14
• “Sensoray 626 Digital Output” on page 27-14
• “Sensoray 626 Encoder” on page 27-15
• “Sensoray 626 PWM Capture” on page 27-16

Board Characteristics
Board name 626
Manufacturer Sensoray
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

Sensoray 626 Initialize

You must use a Sensoray 626 Initialize block for every physical board that the
model uses. One model can have up to four Sensoray 626 Initialize blocks.
Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to initialize. Note that this board number is

27-11
27 Sensoray

arbitrary. You can reference a physical board as 1, 2, 3, or 4. However, you must

be consistent in your board number choice throughout the model.
Board rev A — Select this check box if the board you are initializing is a
Revision A board. Otherwise, leave this check box unselected.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Note that the Device ID of this board is 0x7146.

Sensoray 626 Analog Input

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 16. This driver
allows the selection of individual analog input lines in any order. The number
of elements identifies the number of analog input channels used. For example,
to use three analog input channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Range vector — Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels
in the channel vector. The value can be a scalar or a vector that must be the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels.

27-12
 626

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code

-5 to +5 -5

-10 to +10 -10

For example, if the first channel is -10 to +10 volts, and the second channel is
0 to 5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Sensoray 626 Analog Output

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 4. This driver
allows the selection of individual analog output lines in any order. The number
of elements identifies the number of analog output channels used. For example,
to use three analog output channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial value for
each analog output channel when model execution starts. Enter a scalar or a

27-13
27 Sensoray

vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that setting is used for all channels. The channel is set to the initial
value between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Sensoray 626 Digital Input

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 48. This driver
allows the selection of individual digital input lines in any order. The number
of elements identifies the number of digital input channels used. For example,
to use three digital input channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Sensoray 626 Digital Output

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 48. This driver
allows the selection of individual digital output lines in any order. The number
of elements identifies the number of digital output channels used. For example,
to use three digital output channels, enter
[1, 2, 3]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.

27-14
 626

Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. If you
specify a value of 1, the corresponding channel is reset to the value specified in
the initial value vector. If you specify a value of 0, the channel remains at the
last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial value for
each digital output channel when model execution starts. Enter a scalar or a
vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that setting is used for all channels. The channel is set to the initial
value between the time the model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Sensoray 626 Encoder

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 6. This driver
allows the selection of individual encoder lines in any order. The number of
elements identifies the number of encoder channels used. For example, to use
three odd encoder input channels, enter
[1, 3, 5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even though the board manufacturer
numbers them beginning with 0.
Count speed vector — The count speed vector specifies a counting mode for
the channel. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. Choose
one of the following.

Code Quadrature Type

1 1X quadrature

27-15
27 Sensoray

Code Quadrature Type

2 2X quadrature

4 4X quadrature

Index reset mode vector — This is the event on the index input that resets
the channel to the value of the Reset value vector value. Enter a scalar or a
vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar
value, that setting is used for all channels.
• Rising edge on index
• Falling edge on index
• Both edges
• None
Reset value vector — This parameter contains the preload value for the
corresponding channel. This is the value to which the channel is set when the
event specified by the Index reset mode parameter occurs. Enter a valid value,
as a scalar or a vector, that is the same length as the channel vector. If you
specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

Sensoray 626 PWM Capture

Driver Block Parameters
Board — From the list, select 1, 2, 3, or 4 to represent which of the physical
Sensoray 626 boards you want to use. Note that you must also add to the model
an Initialize block for the same board.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers between 1 and 3. For example,
to use the first two channels, enter
[1, 2]

27-16
 626

This parameter refers to one of the three pairs of 24-bit up/down counters (total
of six counters). Each channel corresponds to a counter pair.

Counter Pair Channel

0A, 0B 1

1A, 1B 2

2A, 2B 3

When measuring a signal, connect that signal to the B+ pin of the second
encoder. For example, for a Channel 1 input signal, connect the signal to
Encoder (0B) B+, which is pin 5 of the J4 connector. Connect the signal ground
to the GND pins (not to the B- pins). See the manufacturer documentation for
this board for further information.
Clock source vector — This parameter specifies the clock source for the
channel. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. Choose
one of the following.

Clock Source Vector Source

0 Internal 2MHz clock

1 External clock

Sample size vector — This value specifies how many measurement samples
the output for the channel is based on. For example, if the sample size for a
channel is n, the board samples the signal n times, then returns as its output
the number of times out of n that the signal was high.
Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel vector. If you
specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

27-17
27 Sensoray

27-18
 28

Softing

Due to the complexity of CAN applications, the Softing (http://www.softing.com) board drivers that
xPC Target supports are not described in this chapter. Instead, see the chapters “CAN I/O Support”
and “CAN I/O Support for FIFO” for details.
28 Softing

28-2
 29

Systran

This chapter describes the Systran reflective shared memory boards supported by xPC Target
(http://www.systran.com).

Before You Start (p. 29-2) Guidelines for setting up structures for shared
memory
SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI (p. 29-5) Real-time reflective PCI memory board with 2
MBytes of node memory
Shared Memory Structure Reference (p. 29-9) Shared memory reference for structures
29 Systran

Before You Start

xPC Target uses a model for reflective memory (also known as shared memory)
that includes Simulink blocks, for the shared memory drivers, and MATLAB
structures for defining shared memory and node initialization partitions. The
topics in this section are

• “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 29-2 — Before you begin to use
SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory blocks, define a partition structure that
defines how you want to allocate shared memory.
• “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes” on page 29-4 — Before you begin to use
SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory blocks, define a node initialization
structure that defines how shared memory is allocated (partitioned) and how
the board is configured.

Create Shared Memory Partitions

To use the xPC Target SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory blocks to read,
write, pack, or unpack data, you must define a partition structure.
SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory drivers use MATLAB structures to define
shared memory partitions. A partition structure describes how you want to
allocate (or partition) the shared memory. xPC Target allocates shared memory
with bundles of data that are packed into memory partitions. The following
SCRAMNet+ SC150 blocks use shared memory partition structures:

• SC150 read/write
• SC150 pack/unpack

After you define the shared memory partitions, you can add SCRAMNet+
SC150 shared memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared
memory structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Partition
Structure” on page 29-9 for the complete list of fields for the structure.
The following description refers to the completepartitionstruct command.
Type
help completepartitionstruct

for a description of the command.

• Using the completepartitionstruct command at the MATLAB Command

Window, create a default partition structure. For example, type

29-2
 Before You Start

completepartitionstruct([],'scramnet')

ans =

Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Size: '1'
Alignment: '4'
RIE: 'off'
TIE: 'off'
ExtTrigger1: 'off'
ExtTrigger2: 'off'
HIPRO: 'off'
Internal: [1x1 struct]

• At the MATLAB Command Window, create a user-defined partition

structure. The easiest way to do this is to create an M-file, partially define a
structure, load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace, and supplement the
resulting structure with a call to the completepartitionstruct function.
For example
Partition(1).Address='0x5000';
Partition(1).Type='int8';
Partition(1).Size='10';
Partition(2).Type='uint16';
Partition(2).Size='5';
Partition(3).Type='double';
Partition(3).Size='3';
Partition(4).Type='uint8';
Partition(4).Size='[2, 3]';

This example defines a partition with four segments.

- The Address field is optional. Only specify this field for the first segment
of a partition. The elements of a partition are defined as a continuous
memory block from the first address. The following segments extrapolate
their addresses from the first segment. If you have fragmented memory,
use multiple partitions and SCRAMNet+ SC150 read/write blocks to work
with the memory.
- The Type and Size fields are required for all fields in the partition
structure.

29-3
29 Systran

- The base addresses of subsequent segments are fully defined by the data
type, size, and alignment of the preceding segment.
- You can then call the completepartitionstruct() command to full
populate the partition structure.

Initialize Shared Memory Nodes

To use the xPC Target SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory, you must define a
node initialization structure. SCRAMNet+ SC150 shared memory drivers use
MATLAB structures to define shared memory node initializations. A node
initialization structure describes the shared memory partition (see “Create
Shared Memory Partitions” on page 29-2) and the SCRAMNet+ SC150 board
configuration, including interrupt configurations. The following SCRAMNet+
SC150 block requires shared memory node initialization structures:
• SC150 init

After you define the node initialization partition, you can add SCRAMNet+
SC150 shared memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared
memory structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Node
Initialization Structure” on page 29-14 for the complete list of fields for the
structure.
The following description refers to the completenodestruct command. Type
help completenodestruct

for a description of the command.

• Using the completenodestruct command at the MATLAB Command

Window, create a default node initialization structure. For example, type
node=completenodestruct([],'scramnet')

node =

Interface: [1x1 struct]

Partitions: [1x1 struct]

• A user-defined node structure, create with m-code or from the MATLAB

Command Window and supplement the resulting structure with a call to the
completenodestruct function.

29-4
 SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI

SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI

The SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI board is a real-time reflective PCI memory board.
It can also generate/broadcast interrupts. xPC Target uses this board as part
of the shared memory network that you can use to exchange data between
computer nodes.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “SC150 init” on page 29-5

• “SC150 read” on page 29-6
• “SC150 write” on page 29-7
• “Shared Memory Pack” on page 29-8
• “Shared Memory Unpack”

For information about the Change endianess block, see “Byte Reversal/Change
Endianess Block” in Chapter 6.

Board Characteristics
Board name SCRAMNet+ SC150
Manufacturer Systran
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

SC150 init
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure these block parameters, be sure that you have a
predefined node initialization structure. See “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes”
on page 29-4.
Each model that uses shared memory must have one SC150 init block for every
SCRAMNet+ SC150 board in the system.

29-5
29 Systran

Node struct — Enter the name of the predefined node initialization structure.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

SC150 read
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The SC150 read block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 29-2.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

29-6
 SCRAMNet+ SC150 PCI

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

SC150 write
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The SC150 write block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 29-2.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

29-7
29 Systran

Shared Memory Pack

Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
Memory partitions consist of groups of Simulink signals, which are combined
into blocks (packets) of 32 bit words. The SC150 pack block packs the specified
partition structure into an unstructured double word array vector by
converting one or more Simulink signals of varying data types into the vector.
Typically, the input to a pack block is the output from a write block. Simulink
is not aware of structures; you must pass the output of each structure segment
as input to the SC150 pack block.
This block ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure.

Shared Memory Unpack

Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
The SC150 unpack block unpacks an unstructured double word array vector
(from the SC150 pack block) into the specified partition structure. This block
ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block unpacks the double word array vector into this structure.

29-8
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Shared Memory Structure Reference

You do not need to use all the fields of a partition or node initialization
structure. However, knowing the possible structure fields will be helpful when
you are creating any of the structures.
This section includes the following topics:

• “Shared Memory Partition Structure” on page 29-9 — Description of the

partition node structure fields
• “Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure” on page 29-14 — Description
of the node initialization structure fields

Shared Memory Partition Structure

A shared memory partition structure has the following fields:
Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Size: '1'
Alignment: '4'
RIE: 'off'
TIE: 'off'
ExtTrigger1: 'off'
ExtTrigger2: 'off'
HIPRO: 'off'
Internal: [1x1 struct]

where

29-9
29 Systran

Partition Description
Fields

Address Specifies the base address (in hexadecimal) of the memory

partition within the node’s shared memory space. The
default value is '0x0', the first location in shared memory.
Note that the base address is byte aligned.
Type Specifies the data type of the memory segment. Specify one
of the following types:
• double
• float
• uint8
• int8
• uint16
• int16
• uint32
• int32
• boolean (a single byte represents a boolean value)

The default value is 'uint32'. A minimum partition size is

32 bits.
Size Specifies the dimension and size of the memory segment.
You can enter a scalar value or a value with the [m,n]
format. The default value is '1'.

• scalar — Treats the Size entry as the specification of the

length of a non-oriented array or vector
• [m,n] — Treats the Size entry as an array dimension.
The total number of elements in this segment is m*n.

29-10
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Partition Description
Fields

Alignment If another partition precedes this partition, defines the

byte alignment of this segment. Specify one of the
following alignment values: 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default value
is '4'. This value forces a double word boundary
alignment for all elements.
RIE Specifies whether or not this partition can receive
interrupts (Receive Interrupt Register (RIE)). Specify
'off', 'first', 'all', 'last'. The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from receiving interrupts

'first' — Allows only the first double word of the

memory segment to be marked with the corresponding
Auxiliary Control RAM bit.

'all' — Allows all memory locations of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

'last' — Allows only the last double word of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

29-11
29 Systran

Partition Description
Fields

TIE Specifies whether or not this partition can receive

interrupts (Transmit Enable (TIE)). Specify 'off',
'first', 'all', 'last'. The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from receiving interrupts

'first' — Allows only the first double word of the

memory segment to be marked with the corresponding
Auxiliary Control RAM bit.

'all' — Allows all memory locations of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

'last' — Allows only the last double word of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.
ExtTrigger1 If this partition receives a write access, specifies whether
or not this partition can generate a trigger signal to an
external connector. Specify 'off', 'first', 'all', 'last'.
The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from generating signals

'first' — Allows only the first double word of the

memory segment to be marked with the corresponding
Auxiliary Control RAM bit.

'all' — Allows all memory locations of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

'last' — Allows only the last double word of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

29-12
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Partition Description
Fields

ExtTrigger2 If this partition receives a write access, specifies whether

or not this partition can generate a trigger signal to an
external connector. Specify 'off', 'first', 'all', 'last'.
The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from generating signals

'first' — Allows only the first double word of the

memory segment to be marked with the corresponding
Auxiliary Control RAM bit.

'all' — Allows all memory locations of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.

'last' — Allows only the last double word of the memory

segment to be marked with the corresponding Auxiliary
Control RAM bit.
HIPRO Specifies whether or not the elements in this partition can
be transmitted as one network message. Specify 'off', or
'on'. The default value is 'off'.

'off' — Prevents the partition from transmitting the

elements as one message

'on' — Allows the partition to transmit the elements as

one message
Internal Reserved for internal use.

29-13
29 Systran

Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure

A node initialization structure has the following fields:
Interface: [1x1 struct]
Partitions: [1x1 struct]

where

Node Description
Structure
Fields

Interface Specifies settings for the board Control/Status Register

(CSR). The Interface structure has the following fields.
Refer to the SCRAMNet+ SC150 product documentation for
a description of the CSR and its operation modes.

• Mode — Configures board modes (see “Board Mode” on

page 29-14)
• Timeout — Enables the board to set the timeout value (see
“Board Timeout” on page 29-16)
• DataFilter — Controls the data filtering operation (see
“Board Data Filter” on page 29-17)
• VirtualPaging — Controls the board virtual paging
operation (see “Virtual Paging” on page 29-18)
• Interrupts — Enables the board to generate and receive
interrupts from the network (see “Board Interrupts” on
page 29-18)
• Internal — Reserved for internal use
Partitions Stores the shared memory segments (see “Create Shared
Memory Partitions” on page 29-2)

Board Mode
The SCRAMNet+ SC150 board has a number of modes that you can set through
the Interface.Mode field. The Interface Mode fields set the corresponding bits
in the CSR. To display the board mode fields, type

29-14
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

>> node.Interface.Mode
ans =
NetworkCommunicationsMode: 'TransmitReceive'
InsertNode: 'on'
DisableFiberOpticLoopback: 'on'
EnableWireLoopback: 'off'
DisableHostToMemoryWrite: 'off'
WriteOwnSlotEnable: 'off'
MessageLengthLimit: '256'
VariableLengthMessagesOnNetwork: 'off'
HIPROEnable: 'off'
MultipleMessages: 'on'
NoNetworkErrorCorrection: 'on'
MechanicalSwitchOverride: 'on'
DisableHoldoff: 'on'

These modes have the following values:

Field Values Default CSR

NetworkCom 'none', 'transmitreceive' CSR3[8..15]

munications 'receiveonly',
Mode 'transmitonly',
'transmit
receive'

InsertNode 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR0[0..1]

DisableFiber 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR2[6]
Optic
Loopback

EnableWire 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR2[7]

Loopback

DisableHost 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR2[8]

ToMemory
Write

WriteOwnSlot 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR2[9]

Enable

29-15
29 Systran

Field Values Default CSR

Message '256', '1024' '256' CSR2[11]

LengthLimit

Variable 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR212]

Length
MessagesOn
Network

HIPROEnable 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR2[13]

Multiple 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR2[14]
Messages

NoNetwork 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR2[15]

Error
Correction

Mechanical 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR8[11]

Switch
Override

Disable 'off', 'on' 'on' CSR8[11]

Holdoff

Board Timeout
The SCRAMNet+ SC150 board allows you to set the network timeout through
the Interface.Timeout field. The Interface Timeout fields set the
corresponding bits in the CSR.
To display the timeout fields, type
>> node.Interface.Timeout
ans =
NumOfNodesInRing: '2'
TotalCableLengthInM: '2'

29-16
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

These fields have the following values:

Field Values Default CSR

NumOfNodes '0'..'255' '2' CSR5

InRing

TotableCable '0'..'n' '2' CSR5

LengthInM

Refer to the SCRAMNet+ SC150 product documentation for a description of

these fields.

Board Data Filter

The SCRAMNet+ SC150 board allows you to set the data filter operation
through the Interface.DataFilter field. The Interface DataFilter fields set
the corresponding bits in the CSR.
>> node.Interface.DataFilter
ans =
EnableTransmitDataFilter: 'off'
EnableLower4KBytesForDataFilter: 'off'

>>
These fields have the following values:

Field Values Default CSR

Enable 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[10]

TransmitData
Filter

EnableLower4 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[11]

KBytesFor
DataFilter

29-17
29 Systran

Virtual Paging
The SCRAMNet+ SC150 board allows you to set the bits of the Virtual Paging
Register operation through the Interface.VirtualPaging field. The Interface
VirtualPaging fields set the corresponding bits in the CSR.
>> node.Interface.VirtualPaging
ans =
VirtualPagingEnable: 'off'
VirtualPageNumber: '0'

These fields have the following values:

Field Values Default CSR

VirtualPaging 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR12[0]

Enable

VirtualPage '0'..'2047' '0' CSR12[5..15]

Number

Board Interrupts
The SCRAMNet+ SC150 board allows you to specify the interrupt sources
transmitted and received between the nodes of the network. You can set these
bits through the Interface.Interrupts field. The Interface Interrupts fields
set the corresponding bits in the CSR.
>> node.Interface.Interrupts
ans =
HostInterrupt: 'off'
InterruptOnMemoryMaskMatch: 'off'
OverrideReceiveInterrupt: 'off'
InterruptOnError: 'off'
NetworkInterrupt: 'off'
OverrideTransmitInterrupt: 'off'
InterruptOnOwnSlot: 'off'
ReceiveInterruptOverride: 'off'

>>

29-18
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

These fields have the following values:

Field Values Default CSR

HostInterrupt 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[3]

InterruptOn 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[5]
MemoryMask
Match

Override 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[6]

Receive
Interrupt

InterruptOn 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[7]

Error

Network 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[8]

Interrupt

Override 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR0[9]

Transmit
Interrupt

InterruptOn 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR2[10]

OwnSlot

Receive 'off', 'on' 'off' CSR8[10]

Interrupt
Override

29-19
29 Systran

29-20
 30
United Electronic
Industries (UEI)

This chapter describes the groups of boards supported by xPC target (http://www.ueidaq.com).

Grouping the UEI Boards (p. 30-4) Explanation of the grouping of the UEI boards
PD2-MF 12-Bit Series (p. 30-13) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of
1.25MHz. The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000. The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-MF 14-Bit Series (p. 30-23) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (14-bit). The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000.
The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input lines, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-MF 16-Bit Series (p. 30-33) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (16-bit). The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000.
The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series (p. 30-43) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series (p. 30-53) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (14-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series (p. 30-63) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series (p. 30-73) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate of
1.25MHz. The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000. The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series (p. 30-83) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (14-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital
output lines.
PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series (p. 30-93) 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32 differential analog input (A/D)
channels (16-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output
(D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital
output lines.
PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series (p. 30-103) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series (p. 30-113) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (14-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series (p. 30-124) 4 or 8 single analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit). The
boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit),
16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines.
PD2-AO Series (p. 30-134) 8, 16, or 32 analog output (D/A) channels (16-bit) with a
maximum sample rate of 100 kHz per channel. They also
have 8 digital input and 8 digital output lines.
PD2-DIO-64 (p. 30-139) 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit ports, three
counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial
interface (ESSI) ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ
lines.
PD2-DIO-128 (p. 30-143) 128 digital I/O channels in 16-bit ports, three
counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial
interface (ESSI) ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ
lines.

30-2
PD2-DIO-128i (p. 30-146) 64 optoisolated digital input and 64 optoisolated digital
output ports in 16-bit ports.
PDL-DIO-64 (p. 30-149) Lab boards with 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit ports,
three counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial
interface (ESSI) ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ
lines.
PDXI-DIO-64 (p. 30-153) 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit ports, three
counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial
interface (ESSI) ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ
lines.
PDXI-AO Series (p. 30-157) 8, 16, or 32 analog output (D/A) channels (16 bit) with a
maximum sampling rate of 100 kHz per channel. They
also have 8 digital input lines, and 8 digital output lines.

30-3
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Grouping the UEI Boards

The United Electronic Industries (UEI) PowerDAQ board series contains a
large number of boards. The board names follow a standard pattern:
[Form Factor]-[Board Type]-[Channel]-[Speed]/[Resolution][Gain]
For example, one UEI board is named PD2-MF-16-1M/12L. The possibilities
for the parts of the name are

• Form Factor — The form factor can be one of two things. PD2 denotes a
32-bit, 33-MHz PCI bus board. PDXI indicates a 32-bit, 33-MHz PXI/PCI bus
board.
• Board Type — The board type can be one of three things. MF indicates a
multifunction board. MFS indicates a multifunction board with sample and
hold. AO indicates an analog output board.
• Channel — For MF and MFS board types, the channel is the number of
analog input channels. For AO board types, the channel is the number of
analog output channels.
• Speed — The speed is the number of samples per second supported by the
board.
• Resolution — For MF and MFS boards, the Resolution is the analog input
resolution. For AO board types, the Resolution is the analog output
resolution.
• Gain — Gain is denoted by letters that represent ranges. DG indicates a gain
of 1, 2, 5, or 10. L indicates a range of 1, 10, 100, or 1000. H indicates a range
of 1, 2, 4, or 8.

For example, the PD2-MF-16-1M/12L is a PCI multifunction board with

sixteen 12-bit analog input channels supporting one million (1M) samples per
second with available gains of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.

Changing the Board Associated with the Block

Note that the board displayed on the block is the current board type. To specify
a different board, double-click on the block. In the Board type list, choose a
different board.

30-4
 Grouping the UEI Boards

Getting Information on a Specific Board

The boards in this manual are grouped by Form Factor, Board Type, and
Resolution. For more information on a specific board, open the MATLAB Help
browser. Click on the Search tab. Verify that the Product Filter is set to All
or that xPC Target is one of your selected products. In the Search type list,
choose Full Text. In the Search for text box, type the name of your board. Click
Go. Browse through the search results for more information on your board.

30-5
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Analog Input Frame Driver Blocks

The following UEI PowerDAQ board series have Analog Input frame driver
blocks:

• PD2-MF — 12, 14, and 16-bit series

• PD2-MFS — 12, 14, and 16-bit series
• PDXI-MF — 12, 14, and 16-bit series
• PDXI-MFS — 12, 14, and 16-bit series

In frame-based mode, the boards for these driver blocks send interrupts to xPC
Target. The xPC Target model is executed when each frame completes on the
board. For proper use of the UEI frame driver blocks, note the IRQ values for
each UEI board in the model and configure those boards appropriately with the
model Configuration Parameters dialog. The topics in this section describe

• “Notes on Master and Slave Boards” on page 30-6 — Note the listed master
and slave boards usage notes.

• “Interrupt Numbers” on page 30-7 — Look for and note the correct UEI
board IRQ number. You use the number that the target machine BIOS
assigns.
• “Interrupt Configuration” on page 30-9 — Configure the model with the
correct UEI board IRQ number using the model simulation parameters
dialog.
• “Example Models” on page 30-11 — Refer to the example UEI frame model
examples in the xpcdemos directory.

Notes on Master and Slave Boards

Before you begin, observe the following usage notes for the UEI boards in a
master/slave configuration:

• You should set the slowest board as the master. If you do not want to use the
slowest board as the master, you can explicitly set the Acquisition
frequency parameter of the master board driver block to one that enables
the slowest board in the configuration to work. You can derive the maximum
speed of the board from the board name.
• Slave boards do not need to be identical to the master board.

30-6
 Analog Input Frame Driver Blocks

• In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.
• The number of channels in use on the master does not need to be the same
as those used on any of the slave boards.
• Connect the master and its slave(s) with the J6 connectors on the boards and
the appropriate cables. This ensures that the acquisition clock and the scan
clock from the master board is sent to all slave boards.
• The number of slaves you can have is limited by the number of connection
points available on the cable and the availability of PCI slots.

Interrupt Numbers
This topic describes how you determine the interrupt number to which the
board is set. The methods vary depending on your hardware configuration.
This topic includes

• “Single UEI Board” on page 30-8 — How to use getxpcpci to get information
about the PCI devices installed on the target machine. This method works if
you have one UEI board in your system. The target machine BIOS assigns
the IRQ number.
• “Guidelines for Multiple UEI Boards” on page 30-8 — How to get information
about the PCI devices if you have two or more UEI boards configured in a
master/slave configuration. This is an iterative method that requires you to
reboot the target machine with the insertion of each UEI board.

Note To ensure that the PCI BIOS sets up the plugged-in PCI cards
properly, disable (set to No) the Plug-and-Play (PnP) operating system feature.
The xPC Target kernel is not a PnP operating system; you must ensure that
this feature is disabled or PCI devices will not work on xPC Target.

30-7
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Single UEI Board

If you have one UEI board for your target machine, that board is the master.

1 Insert the UEI board in a slot of your target machine.

2 Reboot the target machine.

3 From the MATLAB Command Window, type

getxpcpci all

A list of the installed PCI devices and their relevant information is

displayed. Included in this information is the IRQ. Note the IRQ number for
the UEI board for which you are configuring the frame driver block.

4 Compare this board’s IRQ number with the Ethernet Controller IRQ
number, also listed in the getxpcpci display.

These numbers should not be the same. If they are, move the UEI board to
another slot and reboot the target machine.

5 Assuming a unique IRQ UEI board number, note the IRQ, bus, and slot
number for the UEI board.
Once you know your UEI board and its IRQ number, go to “Interrupt
Configuration” on page 30-9 for further configuration details.

Guidelines for Multiple UEI Boards

If you have two or more UEI boards in a master/slave configuration, you should
try the following procedure. Note which UEI board you want to use as the
master.

1 Insert a board into the target machine.

2 Reboot the target machine.

3 From a MATLAB Command Window running on the host machine, type

getxpcpci all

4 Note the bus and slot information for the board you just installed.

5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for each UEI board you want in your configuration.

30-8
 Analog Input Frame Driver Blocks

6 Note the IRQ for the UEI board you designate as the master after you install
all the boards.

7 Check this board’s IRQ number with the Ethernet Controller IRQ number,
also listed in the getxpcpci display.

These numbers should not be the same. If they are, move the master UEI
board to another slot, reboot the target machine, and check the master IRQ
number again. Ignore the slave board IRQ numbers.

8 Assuming a unique IRQ UEI board number, note the IRQ, bus, and slot
number for the UEI board.

Once you know the bus and slot information for the UEI boards, and the
master’s IRQ number, go to “Interrupt Configuration” on page 30-9 for further
configuration details.

Interrupt Configuration
After you add a frame block to a model, use the following procedures to set the
simulation parameters to use the interrupt from the UEI board rather than the
timer interrupt when running the model. This section assumes that you know
the appropriate IRQ numbers for the boards you are configuring. If you do not,
see “Interrupt Numbers” on page 30-7.
This topic includes

• “Simulation Parameters” on page 30-9 — If the UEI A/D frame block is not
in a Function-Call Subsystem called from an IRQ Source block, use this
procedure.
• “IRQ Source Block” on page 30-10 — If the UEI A/D frame block is in a
Function-Call Subsystem called from an IRQ Source block, use this
procedure.

Simulation Parameters
If the UEI A/D frame block is not in a Function-Call Subsystem called from an
IRQ Source block,

1 From the model, select Simulation -> Configuration parameters.

30-9
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

2 Select the Real-Time Workshop node.

3 In the Target selection section, from the RTW system target file list,
browse to and select xpctarget.tlc.

4 In the xPC Target options node, from the Real-time interrupt source list,
select the IRQ number you have jumpered on the board.

Note This number must not match the IRQ number for the Ethernet
controller.

5 In the same node, from the I/O board generating the interrupt list, select
the value UEI-MFx. This specifies that the UEI MFx board generates the
interrupt.

6 In the same node, for the PCI slot/ISA base address parameter, enter the
same PCI address as for the UEI MFx Frame block PCI slot parameter.
- Only enter -1 (for autodetection) if this is the only UEI board in the target
system.
- If more than one UEI board is or will be in the target system, enter the bus
and slot number using the format [bus, slot].

7 Click OK and save the model.

IRQ Source Block

If the UEI A/D frame block is in a Function-Call Subsystem called from an IRQ
Source block,

1 In the model, select the IRQ Source block.

2 From the IRQ line number list, select the IRQ number.

3 From the I/O board generating the interrupt list, select the value UEI-MFx.
This specifies that a UEI MFx board generates the interrupt.

30-10
 Analog Input Frame Driver Blocks

Note This number must not match the IRQ number for the Ethernet
controller.

4 For the PCI slot parameter, enter the same PCI address as for the UEI MFx
Frame block PCI slot parameter.
- Only enter -1 (for autodetection) if this is the only UEI board in the target
system.
- If more than one UEI board is or will be in the target system, enter the bus
and slot number using the format [bus, slot].

5 Click OK.

6 Repeat this procedure for each IRQ Source block calling separate
subsystems.

Example Models
Example models that illustrate the use of UEI frame driver blocks are in the
xpcdemos directory. Correct operation of these models requires that the
interrupt source be set correctly in the simulation parameters dialog.
Note that these examples use the UEI PD2-MF-16-333/16H driver block.
Replace the block as appropriate for your target system.

• xpcUEIFrame.mdl — A simple frame-based model that outputs to an xPC

Target scope. The model runs each time the board completes a frame of data.
• xpcUEIMasterSlaveframe.mdl — A master/slave frame-based model.
• xpcUEIasync.mdl — A model that implements a UEI A/D frame block in a
Function-Call Subsystem called by an IRQ Source block. To set the interrupt
for the UEI board, you work with the IRQ Source block parameters.
In this example, the interval at which the IRQ Source block triggers the
Function-Call Subsystem is the board frame completion time. The rest of the
model runs at the model sample time. This latter point implies that there
may or may not be a new frame of output data in the output signal when the
rest of the model executes. However, if you place all processing of the data in
the Function-Call Subsystem, this is not an issue.

30-11
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Even if the frame time at which the board runs is set to the same time
as the model sample time, because the times derive from different sources
they will drift relative to each other.

• xpcUEIDualasync.mdl — A model that implements multiple UEI A/D frame

blocks in Function-Call Subsystems called by IRQ Source blocks. To set the
interrupt for the UEI boards, you work with the IRQ Source block
parameters.
• xpcFrameloop.mdl — A model that illustrates how to perform sample-based
processing on a frame of data. Because the fastest interrupt available is the
frame completion interrupt, no part of the model can execute at a faster rate
than frame completion. The For Iterator block executes once per frame
completion and loops through the data.

30-12
 PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

The PD2-MF 12-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate
of 1.25MHz. The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000. The boards also have 2
analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output
lines. xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-14

• “PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-15
• “PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-19
• “PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-20
• “PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-21

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MF-16-1M/12L
PD2-MF-16-1M/12H
PD2-MF-64-1M/12L
PD2-MF-64-1M/12H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-13
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-14
 PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-15
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:

30-16
 PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

• Single Ended
• Differential
Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.
Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 512. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 256.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-17
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-18
 PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.

30-19
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

30-20
 PD2-MF 12-Bit Series

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the

30-21
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-22
 PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

The PD2-MF 14-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (14-bit). The gain varies from 1 to 8 or
1 to 1000. The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16
digital input lines, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not support the
counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-24

• “PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-25
• “PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-29
• “PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-30
• “PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-31

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MF-16-400/14L
PD2-MF-16-400/14H
PD2-MF-64-400/14L
PD2-MF-64-400/14H
PD2-MF-16-2M/14H
PD2-MF-64-2M/14H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI, ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-23
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-24
 PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate

30-25
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:
• Single Ended
• Differential

30-26
 PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 512. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 256.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-27
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-28
 PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output

30-29
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.

30-30
 PD2-MF 14-Bit Series

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.

30-31
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-32
 PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

The PD2-MF 16-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit). The gain varies from 1 to 8 or
1 to 1000. The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16
digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not support the
counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-34

• “PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-35
• “PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-39
• “PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-40
• “PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-41

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MF-16-50/16H
PD2-MF-16-333/16L
PD2-MF-16-333/16H
PD2-MF-64-333/16L
PD2-MF-64-333/16H
PD2-MF-16-500/16L
PD2-MF-16-500/16H
PD2-MF-64-500/16L
PD2-MF-64-500/16H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI, ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-33
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-34
 PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-35
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:

30-36
 PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

• Single Ended
• Differential
Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.
Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 512. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 256.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-37
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-38
 PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output

30-39
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.

30-40
 PD2-MF 16-Bit Series

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.

30-41
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-42
 PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

The PD2-MFS 12-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-44

• “PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-45
• “PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-49
• “PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-50
• “PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-51

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MFS-4-1M/12
PD2-MFS-4-1M/12DG
PD2-MFS-8-1M/12
PD2-MFS-8-1M/12DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI, ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-43
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-44
 PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type:

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate

30-45
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

30-46
 PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.

30-47
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave

combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type

30-48
 PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-49
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-50
 PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.

30-51
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-52
 PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

The PD2-MFS 14-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (14-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-54

• “PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-55
• “PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-59
• “PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-60
• “PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-61

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MFS-4-500/14
PD2-MFS-4-500/14DG
PD2-MFS-8-500/14
PD2-MFS-8-500/14DG
PD2-MFS-4-800/14
PD2-MFS-4-800/14DG
PD2-MFS-8-800/14
PD2-MFS-8-800/14DG
PD2-MFS-4-2M/14
PD2-MFS-4-2M/14DG
PD2-MFS-8-2M/14
PD2-MFS-8-2M/14DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI, ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-53
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-54
 PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-55
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

30-56
 PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

30-57
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-58
 PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-59
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-60
 PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset

30-61
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-62
 PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

The PD2-MFS 16-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-64

• “PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-65
• “PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-69
• “PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-70
• “PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-71

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-MFS-4-300/16
PD2-MFS-4-300/16DG
PD2-MFS-8-300/16
PD2-MFS-8-300/16DG
PD2-MFS-4-500/16
PD2-MFS-4-500/16DG
PD2-MFS-8-500/16
PD2-MFS-8-500/16DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI, ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-63
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-64
 PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-65
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

30-66
 PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

30-67
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-68
 PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels 1
or 2. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A) channels,
enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-69
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-70
 PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset

30-71
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-72
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

The PDXI-MF 12-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (12-bit) with a maximum sample rate
of 1.25MHz. The gain varies from 1 to 8 or 1 to 1000. The boards also have 2
analog output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output
lines. xPC Target does not support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-74

• “PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-75
• “PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-79
• “PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-80
• “PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-81

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MF-16-1M/12L
PDXI-MF-16-1M/12H
PDXI-MF-64-1M/12L
PDXI-MF-64-1M/12H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-73
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-74
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-75
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:

30-76
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

• Single Ended
• Differential
Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.
Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-77
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-78
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.

30-79
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The

30-80
 PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series

maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 12-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.

30-81
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-82
 PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

The PDXI-MF 14-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (14-bit). The boards also have 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC
Target does not support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-84

• “PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-85
• “PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-89
• “PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-90
• “PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-91

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MF-16-400/14L
PDXI-MF-16-400/14H
PDXI-MF-64-400/14L
PDXI-MF-64-400/14H
PDXI-MF-16-2M/14H
PDXI-MF-64-2M/14H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-83
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-84
 PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-85
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:

30-86
 PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

• Single Ended
• Differential
Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.
Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-87
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-88
 PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.

30-89
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The

30-90
 PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series

maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 14-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.

30-91
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-92
 PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

The PDXI-MF 16-bit series contains I/O boards with 16 or 64 single or 8 or 32
differential analog input (A/D) channels (16-bit). The boards also have 2 analog
output (D/A) channels (12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC
Target does not support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-94

• “PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-95
• “PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-99
• “PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-100
• “PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-101

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MF-16-333/16L
PDXI-MF-16-333/16H
PDXI-MF-64-333/16L
PDXI-MF-64-333/16H
PDXI-MF-16-500/16L
PDXI-MF-16-500/16H
PDXI-MF-64-500/16L
PDXI-MF-64-500/16H
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-93
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-94
 PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-95
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Input coupling mode — From the list, select one from the following list of
input coupling modes:

30-96
 PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

• Single Ended
• Differential
Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for input connections.
Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

30-97
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.

30-98
 PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.

30-99
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The

30-100
 PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series

maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MF 16-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.

30-101
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-102
 PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

The PDXI-MFS 12-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-104

• “PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-105
• “PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-109
• “PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-110
• “PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-111

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MFS-4-1M/12
PDXI-MFS-4-1M/12DG
PDXI-MFS-8-1M/12
PDXI-MFS-8-1M/12DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-103
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-104
 PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-105
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

30-106
 PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

30-107
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-108
 PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

30-109
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-110
 PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 12-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset

30-111
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-112
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

The PDXI-MFS 14-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (14-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-114

• “PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-116
• “PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-120
• “PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-121
• “PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-122

30-113
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MFS-4-500/14
PDXI-MFS-4-500/14DG
PDXI-MFS-8-500/14
PDXI-MFS-8-500/14DG
PDXI-MFS-4-800/14
PDXI-MFS-4-800/14DG
PDXI-MFS-8-800/14
PDXI-MFS-8-800/14DG
PDXI-MFS-4-2M/14
PDXI-MFS-4-2M/14DG
PDXI-MFS-4-2M/14H
PDXI-MFS-8-2M/14
PDXI-MFS-8-2M/14DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

30-114
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-115
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

30-116
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.

30-117
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked

30-118
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-119
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

30-120
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-121
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.

30-122
 PDXI-MFS 14-Bit Series

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-123
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

The PDXI-MFS 16-bit series contains I/O boards with 4 or 8 single analog input
(A/D) channels (16-bit). The boards also have 2 analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit), 16 digital input, and 16 digital output lines. xPC Target does not
support the counter/timers on these boards.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)” on page 30-125

• “PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input” on page 30-126
• “PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-130
• “PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input” on page 30-131
• “PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output” on page 30-132

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-MFS-4-300/16
PDXI-MFS-4-300/16DG
PDXI-MFS-8-300/16
PDXI-MFS-8-300/16DG
PDXI-MFS-4-500/16
PDXI-MFS-4-500/16DG
PDXI-MFS-8-500/16
PDXI-MFS-8-500/16DG
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-124
 PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, use the first and third analog input (A/D) channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the board
type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to select the gains for each of the
channels. Available gains vary depending on board type. MF PGL gains may
be set to 1, 10, 100, or 1000. MF PGH gains may be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8. MF
DG-option gains may be set to 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Mux settling time factor — This vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. If 1, the corresponding channel has
a longer settling time. This is useful when using a high gain such as 100 or
1000.
Range — Select the voltage range from the list provided. This applies to all
channels.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-125
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Frame Analog Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers that make up one scan. For
example, to read the first and fifth channels, enter
[1 5]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even though the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0.
The maximum allowable channel number is 4, 8, 16, or 64 depending on the
board type.
Gain vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the gains for each of the
channels in the scan. Enter a single value to use the same gain for all vectors
in the scan. Available gains vary depending on board type. Allowable values
depend on the board type.

• L (Low level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
• H (High level) boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 4, or 8.
• DG-option boards — Specify the gain as one of 1, 2, 5, or 10.

30-126
 PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

Mux settling time vector (slow bit) — Enter a vector that is the same length
as the channel vector. Each vector element must be a 0 or 1. If you specify 1,
the corresponding channel has a longer settling time. To get an accurate
reading, you might want to specify a 1 for channels that have higher gains,
such as 100 or 1000. Refer to the UEI PowerDAQ documentation for further
information on the longer settling time. This time depends on the board type.

Caution With frame based acquisition, the additional time needed for the
Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value might cause an acquisition
overrun that xPC Target does not detect. For example, on a
PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, each nonslow acquisition takes 3 microseconds. If
the slow bit is set to 1, that same acquisition takes more than 10
microseconds. With xPC Target, the scan is performed at the maximum rate
for a given board. This means that the slow acquisition takes a multiple of 3
microsecond ticks. For a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, this becomes 12
microseconds.

For example, assume that N scans of the channel vector compose a frame of
data. Assume also that you have a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board with a Channel
vector value of [1 2 3 4] and a Mux settling time vector (slow bit) value of
[0 1 0 1]. For the PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, two of the of the acquisition
delays are 3 microseconds, and two are 12 microseconds. With a Block
sampletime value of .001 second, if N is greater than 38, the data will not be
acceptable. If you set all slow bits to 0, N can have a value of up to 83. The
software detects the limit at N = 83, but is not aware of the extra board
dependent delay.

Range — From the list, select one of the following voltage ranges. The value
you select applies to all channels.

• +-10 Volts
• +-5 Volts
• 0-10 Volts
• 0-5 Volts

30-127
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Frame size — Enter the number of samples per channel to return as a frame
of data. Due to constraints in the hardware architecture, the total number of
samples in a frame of data cannot exceed 1024. The relationship between the
number of samples, frame size, and number of channels is
total number of samples = FrameSize x nChannels

For example, if you specify two channels, the frame size must be less than or
equal to 512.
Output format — From the list, select either Frame or Vector.

• Frame — Select Frame if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for a block that requires a frame. For example, a Signal
Processing block.
• Vector — Select Vector if you expect the output signal from this block to be
the input signal for an xPC Target scope or some other block that requires
vector input.

Scan clock source — Select Internal or External to identify the clock source
for the frame scans.
Scan time — Enter the time (in seconds) between scans as the interval.
Frame time — Enter the interval (in seconds) during which the board will
interrupt. The driver block evenly spaces the scans in the frame across the
Frame time interval. If the Frame time interval is too short, you will receive
a buffer overrun error at run time. For optimal results, experimentally increase
the Frame time value and reiterate the process. Always rebuild the model
when you change this value.
The Frame size, Scan time, and Frame time parameters are not independent,
but are related by

Frametime = Framesize × Scantime

After you specify two of the parameters, specify -1 for the third parameter and
the equation determines the third parameter.

Note Because xPC Target uses this value to set hardware parameters on the
board, you cannot change the Frame time value at the MATLAB prompt.

30-128
 PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

Block is in an ISR — Select this check box if the block is in an interrupt service
routine (ISR). Selecting this check box forces the block sample time to -1, which
enables the block to work in the ISR. If this check box is not selected, the block
sample time is equal to the value of Frame time.
Slave board — If you have multiple boards configured in a master/slave
combination, select this box for the slave boards only. Leave the box unchecked
for the master board. (Note that a single board configuration is considered a
master board.)

Note In the model, set the priority of slave blocks higher than master blocks.
Right-click the slave or master block and select Block Properties. In the
dialog, enter a value in the Priority property. For example, if you have
multiple slave blocks, you can enter values of 2 for the slave blocks and 3 for
the master block, where a lower number indicates a higher priority.

Acquisition frequency — Enter the rate at which the high speed conversion
clock runs. This is the clock used to acquire each scan in a frame. For example,
with a PD2-MF-xx-333/16H board, the maximum clock is 333 kHz. At that rate,
the second channel in a scan will be acquired 3 microseconds after the first one
in every scan of the frame.
Specify -1 to select the maximum rate available for the specified board.
DMA burst size — From the list, select either 32, 16, or 8. The DMA engine
transfers data in packets of the burst size or less. Between each burst, a new
bus arbitration cycle must complete. The best performance is achieved with
higher DMA burst size values, with 32 being highest. However, in some
architectures and with some PCI bus adaptors, a DMA burst size of 32 might
cause problems. For example, it might lock up the target machine when DMA
is attempted. In these cases, reduce the DMA burst size value to 8, rebuild and
rerun the target application. If the DMA works at 8, select 16 to increase
performance and try again.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

30-129
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, or 32 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards series
the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.

30-130
 PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-131
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset

30-132
 PDXI-MFS 16-Bit Series

to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-133
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-AO Series
The PD2-AO series boards have 8, 16, 32, or 96 analog output (D/A) channels
(16-bit) with a maximum sample rate of 100 kHz per channel. They also have
8 digital input and 8 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-AO Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-134

• “PD2-AO Digital Input” on page 30-136
• “PD2-AO Digital Output” on page 30-137

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-AO-8/16
PD2-AO-16/16
PD2-AO-32/16
PD2-AO-96/16
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PD2-AO Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

30-134
 PD2-AO Series

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels
between 1 and 8, 1 and 16, 1 and 32, or 1 and 96. For example, to use the first
and second analog output (D/A) channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO series boards is 8, 16, 32, or
96 depending on the specific board type.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-135
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-AO Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-136
 PD2-AO Series

PD2-AO Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-137
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-138
 PD2-DIO-64

PD2-DIO-64
The PD2-DIO-64 series PCI boards have 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit ports,
three counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial interface (ESSI) ports,
and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-DIO-64 Digital Input” on page 30-140

• “PD2-DIO-64 Digital Output” on page 30-141

xPC Target only supports the digital I/O channels for this board series. It does
not support the additional functionality.

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-DIO-64
PD2-DIO-64ST
PD2-DIO-64CT
PD2-DIO-64TS
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-139
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-DIO-64 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Note that each block of 16 ports must be input or output.
Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value plus the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-140
 PD2-DIO-64

PD2-DIO-64 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value and the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
parameter contains values of 0 or 1. It controls the behavior at model
termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset to the
value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel to
remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. This parameter contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the
output channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-141
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-142
 PD2-DIO-128

PD2-DIO-128
The PD2-DIO-128 series PCI boards have 128 digital I/O channels in 16-bit
ports, three counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial interface (ESSI)
ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-DIO-128 Digital Input” on page 30-143

• “PD2-DIO-128 Digital Output” on page 30-144

xPC Target only supports the digital I/O channels for this board series. It does
not support the additional functionality.

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-DIO-128
PD2-DIO-128ST
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PD2-DIO-128 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Note that each block of 16 ports must be input or output.
Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.

30-143
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value plus the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-DIO-128 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.

30-144
 PD2-DIO-128

Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value and the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
parameter contains values of 0 or 1. It controls the behavior at model
termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset to the
value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel to
remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. This parameter contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the
output channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-145
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PD2-DIO-128i
The PD2-DIO-128i series PCI boards have 64 optoisolated digital input and 64
optoisolated digital output ports in 16-bit ports.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PD2-DIO-128i Digital Input” on page 30-146

• “PD2-DIO-128i Digital Output” on page 30-147

Board Characteristics
Board type PD2-DIO-128i
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PD2-DIO-128i Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value plus the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
The input and output ports on the PD2-DIO-128i are completely separate.
There is no conflict if you use the same port numbers as input and output.

30-146
 PD2-DIO-128i

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

PD2-DIO-128i Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value and the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.

30-147
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

The input and output ports on the PD2-DIO-128i are completely separate.
There is no conflict if you use the same port numbers as input and output.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
parameter contains values of 0 or 1. It controls the behavior at model
termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset to the
value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel to
remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. This parameter contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the
output channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-148
 PDL-DIO-64

PDL-DIO-64
The PDL-DIO-64 series PCI lab boards have 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit
ports, three counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial interface (ESSI)
ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDL-DIO-64 Digital Input” on page 30-150

• “PDL-DIO-64 Digital Output” on page 30-151

xPC Target only supports the digital I/O channels for this board series. It does
not support the additional functionality.

Board Characteristics
Board type PDL-DIO-64
PDL-DIO-64ST
PDL-DIO-64CT
PDL-DIO-64TS
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-149
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDL-DIO-64 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Note that each block of 16 ports must be input or output.
Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value plus the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-150
 PDL-DIO-64

PDL-DIO-64 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value and the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
parameter contains values of 0 or 1. It controls the behavior at model
termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset to the
value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel to
remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. This parameter contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the
output channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-151
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-152
 PDXI-DIO-64

PDXI-DIO-64
The PDXI-DIO-64 series PXI boards have 64 digital I/O channels in 16-bit
ports, three counters/timers, two enhanced synchronous serial interface (ESSI)
ports, and four high-speed (100 ns) IRQ lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Input” on page 30-154

• “PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Output” on page 30-155

xPC Target only supports the digital I/O channels for this board series. It does
not support the additional functionality.

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-DIO-64
PDXI-DIO-64ST
PDXI-DIO-64CT
PDXI-DIO-64TS
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

30-153
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Note that each block of 16 ports must be input or output.
Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value plus the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-154
 PDXI-DIO-64

PDXI-DIO-64 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Port (first channel of port) — From the list, select the first channel of the
port. Each port is 16 bits. This value and the Channel vector value appear on
the terminal block.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 0, which is the same as the hardware label.
Reset vector — The reset vector controls the behavior of the channel at model
termination. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the same length as the channel
vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is used for all channels. This
parameter contains values of 0 or 1. It controls the behavior at model
termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset to the
value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel to
remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector contains the initial voltage
values for the digital output channels. Enter a scalar or a vector that is the
same length as the channel vector. If you specify a scalar value, that setting is
used for all channels. This parameter contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the
output channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the
model is downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-155
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-156
 PDXI-AO Series

PDXI-AO Series
The PDXI-AO series boards have 8, 16, or 32 analog output (D/A) channels (16
bit) with a maximum sampling rate of 100 kHz per channel. They also have 8
digital input lines, and 8 digital output lines.
xPC Target supports this series of boards with these driver blocks:

• “PDXI-AO Analog Output (D/A)” on page 30-157

• “PDXI-AO Digital Input” on page 30-159
• “PDXI-AO Digital Output” on page 30-160

Board Characteristics
Board type PDXI-AO-8/16
PDXI-AO-16/16
PDXI-AO-32/16
PDXI-AO-96/16
Manufacturer United Electronic Industries (UEI)
Bus type CompactPCI, PXI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PDXI-AO Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.

30-157
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels

between 1 and 16. For example, to use the first and second analog output (D/A)
channels, enter
[1 2]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number for PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series boards
is 8, 16, 32, or 96 depending on the specific board type. For all other boards
series the maximum channel number is 2.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector and should contain the initial voltage values for the output
channels. The channels are set to these values between the time the model is
downloaded and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-158
 PDXI-AO Series

PDXI-AO Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the input channels. For
example, to use the first and third digital input channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all boards except for the PD2-AO
and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number is 8.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-159
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

PDXI-AO Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Board type — Select the specific board type from the list provided.
Channel vector — Enter a vector of numbers to specify the output channels.
For example, to use the first and third digital output channels, enter
[1 3]

The channel numbers can occur in any order. Number the channels beginning
with 1 even if the board manufacturer numbers them beginning with 0. The
maximum allowable channel number is 16 for all board types except for the
PD2-AO and PDXI-AO series. For those boards, the maximum channel number
is 8.
Reset vector — The reset vector must be the same length as the channel
vector. It contains values of 0 or 1. This parameter controls the behavior at
model termination. A value of 1 causes the corresponding channel to be reset
to the value specified in the initial value vector. A value of 0 causes the channel
to remain at the last value attained while the model was running.
Initial value vector — The initial value vector must be the same length as the
channel vector. It contains the initial values (0 or 1) for the output channels.
The channels are set to these values between the time the model is downloaded
and the time it is started.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

30-160
 PDXI-AO Series

PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

30-161
30 United Electronic Industries (UEI)

30-162
 31
xPC Target Support for
Vector CANape

xPC Target interfaces the target PC to the Vector CAN Application Environment (CANape)
(http://www.vector-cantech.com) using the Universal Calibration Protocol (XCP). This chapter
includes the following sections

Vector CANape (p. 31-2) Third-party monitoring system that you can use to work
with xPC Target data.
Configuring xPC Target and Vector How to set up the xPC Target system to work Vector
CANape (p. 31-5) CANape.
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

Vector CANape
You can use a target PC as an electronic control unit (ECU) for a Vector
CANape system. Using a target PC in this way, a Vector CANape system can
read signals and parameters from a target application running on the target
PC. To support this feature, xPC Target provides an XCP protocol component.
The xPC Target XCP component translates XCP commands to standard xPC
Target equivalents.

Note This chapter describes how to configure xPC Target and Vector
CANape to work together. It also assumes that you are familiar with the
Vector CANape product family. See http://www.vector-cantech.com for
further information about the Vector CANape products.

xPC Target works with Vector CANape, Version 5.00.20 and 5.00.30. To enable
a target PC to work with Vector CANape, you need to

• Configure Vector CANape to use the xPC Target XCP communication layer.
• Enable xPC Target to generate a target application that can provide data
compliant with Vector CANape.
• Provide a standard RS-232 or TCP/IP physical layer between the host PC
and target PC.
To support the XCP communication layer, xPC Target provides
• An xPC Target XCP conversion library (xcpforxpc.dll) to convert the XCP
commands in the user-defined XCP communication layer to the
corresponding xPC Target commands.
• A generator that produces A2L files that Vector CANape can load into the
Vector CANape database. The generated file contains signal and parameter
access information for the target application.

The following illustrates how xPC Target and Vector CANape interact.

31-2
 Vector CANape

model_name.a2l Vector CANape

(signal and parameter database)
XCP Commands

xpcenv.mat xcpforxpc.dll
(defines communication parameters)
C API

xpcapi.dll
Host PC
RS-232 or Ethernet

Target PC Target PC
Running xPC Target

Notes on xPC Target and Vector CANape

xPC Target does not support the following for Vector CANape:

• Vector CANape data acquisition commands

• Vector CANape calibration commands
• Multiple simultaneous target connections — The network connection to the
xPC Target is not shareable (thread-safe). You can only attach it to one
program at a time, including
- Any program that links to the C API library xpcapi.dll, such as Vector
CANape and any xPC Target demo program
- The MATLAB command line interface to xPC Target. You can use
MATLAB/Simulink while Vector CANape is attached to xPC Target, but
you must unload (delete) any xPC Target objects (such as those created
with the MATLAB command xpc, or implicitly created during code
generation).
To unload any xPC Target objects, type clear all in the MATLAB
Command Window. Alternatively, to unload xPC Target objects, but keep
your workspace variables, type clear mex in the MATLAB Command
Window.
• Vector CANape signal value selection — You might get an error concerning
datatypes. This error message indicates that you need to reapply the value

31-3
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

255 to the parameters MAX_CTO and MAX_DTO. See “Creating a new

Vector CANape Project to Associate with a Particular Target Application” on
page 31-7.

xPC Target Parameters and the A2L File

During the model build, xPC Target generates an A2L file of signal and
parameter information for the Vector CANape database file. A small number
of parameter values are common to all target PCs. Other parameter values are
for application-wide settings and top-level status information. xPC Target
automatically inserts entries for these parameters into the generated A2L file:

• xAveTET (Measurement) — Average task execution time (in seconds).

• xExecutionTime (Measurement) — Execution time for the target
application.
• xIsOverloaded (Measurement) — If the target PC experiences an execution
overload condition, this value is set to 0. During normal operation, this value
is 1.
• xSampleTime (Characteristic) — Base sample time (in seconds) of the target
application. This can only be modified when the target PC is stopped.
• xStartStop (Characteristic) — If the target PC is running, this value is set
to 1. If the target PC is halted, this value is set to 0.
• xStopTime (Characteristic) — Stop time (in seconds) of the target
application. This can only be modified when the target PC is stopped.

31-4
 Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape

Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape

To set up xPC Target and Vector CANape, see the following sections:

• “Getting Started” on page 31-5 — Set up your model to work with Vector
CANape.
• “Creating a new Vector CANape Project to Associate with a Particular
Target Application” on page 31-7 — Create a new Vector CANape and
associate that project with a particular target application
• “Associating an Existing Vector CANape Project with a Particular Target
PC” on page 31-9 — Associate an existing Vector CANape project with one
particular target PC
• “Providing A2L Files for Vector CANape Database” on page 31-10 — Provide
target application A2L files for a CANape database

Getting Started
Set up your model to work with Vector CANape. This procedures uses the
xpcosc model. This procedure assumes that you have already configured your
model to generate xPC Target code. If you have not done so, see the xPC Target
getting started documentation.

1 In the MATLAB window, type

xpcosc

2 In the model Simulink window, and from the Simulation menu, click
Configuration Parameters.

The Configuration Parameters dialog box is displayed for the model.

3 In the left pane, click the xPC Target options node.

The associated pane is displayed.

31-5
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

4 In the Miscellaneous options area, select the Generate CANape

extensions check box.

This enables target applications to generate data, such as that for A2L, for
Vector CANape.

The Real-Time Workshop pane should now look like the figure shown.

5 Build the model.

xPC Target builds the target application, including an A2L data file for the
target application.
Next, copy the XCP library files (two) into the CANape binary directory. These
files reside in the xPC Target directory area under the MATLAB install
location. Follow these instructions:

31-6
 Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape

1 Relative to the MATLAB root directory that you found with matlabroot,
change directory as follows
cd <MATLABroot>\toolbox\rtw\targets\xpc\api

2 Copy xpcapi.dll and xcpforxpc.dll to the binary directory Exec under

your Vector CANape install directory. For example if your Vector CANape is
installed in C:\Applications\CANape, then use the following command line
copy commands:
copy xpcapi.dll C:\Applications\CANape\Exec
copy xcpforxpc.dll C:\Applications\CANape\Exec

Creating a new Vector CANape Project to Associate

with a Particular Target Application
This procedure describes how to create a new Vector CANape project that can
communicate with an xPC Target application. If your xPC Target application
is loaded and running during this process, you can test and confirm the
communications configuration in step 18.

1 In a DOS window, create a new directory to hold your project. This can be
the same directory as your xPC Target model files. For example, type
mkdir C:\MyProject

2 Start the Vector CANape Create a new Project wizard. The Windows Start
menu contains this as a selection in the Vector CANape section.

3 After you create the new project, start it.

You can start the new project directly from the last screen of the create a
new project wizard. After the preliminary warning, the CANape window is
displayed.

4 In the CANape window, select Tools -> Device configuration.

The device configuration window is displayed.

5 In the device configuration window, click New.

6 In Device Name, enter a name for the device to describe your target
application. For example, type

31-7
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

xPCTarget

Add any appropriate comments.

7 Click Next

8 From the driver-type menu list, select XCP.

9 Click Driver configuration.

The XCP driver settings window is displayed.

10 Click Extended protocol settings.

11 In that screen, set

- MAX_CTO and MAX_DTO to 255

- Byte order to Intel
- Address granularity to BYTE

You might get an error concerning datatypes. This error message indicates
that you need to reapply the value 255 to the parameters MAX_CTO and
MAX_DTO.

12 Click OK.

The XCP driver settings window is displayed.

13 In the Transport layer pane, from the Interface menu list of the, select
USER_DEFINED.

14 In the Transport layer pane, click Configuration.

15 Browse and select the file xcpforxpc.dll from the CANape\Exec directory.

16 Click Open.

17 Click OK.

18 In the XCP driver settings window, verify the connection to the target PC by
clicking Test connection. This command only succeeds if the target PC is

31-8
 Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape

running and connected properly. Be sure that no other host is connected to

the target PC.

19 Click OK and answer Yes if you are asked to update your database.

20 You have completed the configuration of Vector CANape for xPC Target.
Continue with the rest of the Vector CANape wizard dialog as usual.
This CANape project should now be ready to monitor and control your xPC
Target. The CANape database should populated with a comprehensive list of
xPC Target application signals and parameters that are available. During
target revisions, it may be necessary to manually reload the A2L that is
generated by the xPC Target build process. This can be done from the CANape
Database editor.
Next, provide your target application A2L file to Vector CANape. See
“Providing A2L Files for Vector CANape Database” on page 31-10. If you want
to associate your Vector CANape project with a particular target PC, see
“Associating an Existing Vector CANape Project with a Particular Target PC”
on page 31-9.

Associating an Existing Vector CANape Project with

a Particular Target PC
You might want to force a particular Vector CANape project to use a specific
set of communications properties if either of the following situations applies:

• You are working with multiple target PCs from the same host computer.
• You are using a host computer that does not have an installed copy of
MATLAB and xPC Target.

This topic assumes that

• You have set up and built your model to generate data for Vector CANape. If
you have not yet done so, see “Getting Started” on page 31-5.
• You have an existing Vector CANape project directory

When Vector CANape connects to a target PC, it reads the communications

parameters from the last MATLAB session that configured an xPC Target.
The XCP layer searches for the xPC Target configuration file (xpcenv.mat, a
standard MATLAB MAT file). Vector CANape automatically connects to that
same target PC.

31-9
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

Note Clear any MATLAB connections before opening CANape, as described

in “Notes on xPC Target and Vector CANape” on page 31-3.

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpcexplr

2 Configure the communications protocols as desired for the target PC.

3 If the target PC is connected to this computer, test the connection. In the

MATLAB Command Window, type xpctargetping and/or xpc.

4 If you are satisfied with these settings, copy the xPC Target configuration
file to the desired Vector CANape project directory. For example:
copy C:\WINNT\Profiles\smith\Application
Data\MathWorks\MATLAB\R14\xPCTargetPrefs C:\MyProject

To retrieve the actual path of xpcenv.mat, you can use the following
MATLAB command:
[prefdir '\xPCTargetPrefs']

The Vector CANape project now has a local copy of xpcenv.mat. It will always
connect to the same target PC, regardless of the state of MATLAB. Next, you
must provide your target application A2L file to Vector CANape. See
“Providing A2L Files for Vector CANape Database” on page 31-10.

Providing A2L Files for Vector CANape Database

This topic assumes that

• You have set up and built your model to generate data for Vector CANape. If
you have not yet done so, see “Getting Started” on page 31-5.
• You have created a Vector CANape project directory and know the name of
that project directory.
To enable Vector CANape to load the A2L file for the model xpcosc

1 In a DOS shell, change directory to the one that contains the A2L file from
the previous procedure. For example

31-10
 Configuring xPC Target and Vector CANape

cd D:\work\xpc

2 Look for and copy the A2L file to your Vector CANape project directory. For
example
copy xpcosc.a2l C:\MyProject

Vector CANape automatically loads the target application A2L file when it
connects to the target PC.

31-11
31 xPC Target Support for Vector CANape

31-12
 32

Versalogic

This chapter describes I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.versalogic.com).

VSBC-6 (p. 32-2) A single board computer with 8 signal ended analog input
(A/D) channels, 16 digital I/O lines, and a watchdog
timer.
32 Versalogic

VSBC-6
The VSBC-6 is a single board computer with 8 signal ended analog input (A/D)
channels, 16 digital I/O lines, and a watchdog timer.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “VSBC-6 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 32-2

• “VSBC-6 Digital Input” on page 32-3
• “VSBC-6 Digital Output” on page 32-4
• “VSBC-6 Watch Dog” on page 32-4

Board Characteristics
Board name VSBC-6
Manufacturer Versalogic
Bus type N/A
Access method N/A
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support No

VSBC-6 Analog Input (A/D)

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 8. This driver allows you to
enter channel numbers in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth channels, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Range vector — Enter a range code for each of the channels in the channel
vector. The range vector must be the same length as the channel vector. This
driver allows each channel to be different.

32-2
 VSBC-6

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 to +10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0 to +5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second and fifth
channels are 0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5,5]

Sample time — Model base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.

VSBC-6 Digital Input

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter a numbers between 1 and 16 to select the number of
digital input lines used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
input lines in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth digital input lines, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the lines beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

32-3
32 Versalogic

VSBC-6 Digital Output

Scaling Input to Output

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters

Channel vector — Enter numbers between 1 and 16 to select the number of
digital output lines used. This driver allows the selection of individual digital
output lines in any order.
For example, to use the first, second and fifth digital output lines, enter
[1,2,5]

Number the lines beginning with 1, even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

VSBC-6 Watch Dog

Block Parameters
Show enable port — Select this check box to show a digital input port on the
driver block. This port indicates that the watchdog timer is enabled. The
watchdog timer starts in a disabled state. If you want to use the VSBC-6 board
to reboot the system when a programmable timeout occurs, select this check
box.
Show reset port — Select this check box to show a digital input port on the
driver block. A signal connected to this port resets the watchdog whenever its
value exceeds 1.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

32-4
 33

VMIC

This chapter describes the VMIC reflective shared memory board supported by xPC Target
(http://www.vmic.com).

VMICPCI-5565 (p. 33-6) High-speed fiber optic reflective PCI memory board
with 64 or 128 MBytes shared memory
33 VMIC

Before You Start

xPC Target uses a model for reflective memory (also known as shared memory)
that includes Simulink blocks, for the shared memory drivers, and MATLAB
structures for defining shared memory and node initialization partitions. The
topics in this section are

• “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 33-2 — Before you begin to use
VMIC shared memory blocks, define a partition structure that defines how
you want to allocate shared memory.
• “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes” on page 33-4 — Before you begin to use
VMIC shared memory blocks, define a node initialization structure that
defines how shared memory is allocated (partitioned) and how the board is
configured.

Create Shared Memory Partitions

To use the xPC Target VMICPCI-5565 shared memory blocks to read, write,
pack, or unpack data, you must define a partition structure. VMIC shared
memory drivers use MATLAB structures to define shared memory partitions.
A partition structure describes how you want to allocate (or partition) the
shared memory. xPC Target allocates shared memory with bundles of data that
are packed into memory partitions. The following VMIC blocks use shared
memory partition structures:

• 5565 read/write
• 5565 pack/unpack

After you define the shared memory partitions, you can add VMIC shared
memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared memory
structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Partition
Structure” on page 33-11 for the complete list of fields for the structure.
The following description refers to the completepartitionstruct command.
Type
help completepartitionstruct

for a description of the command.

• Using the completepartitionstruct command at the MATLAB Command

Window, create a default partition structure. For example, type

33-2
 Before You Start

completepartitionstruct([],'5565')

ans =

Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Size: '1'
Alignment: '4'
Internal: [1x1 struct]

• At the MATLAB Command Window, create a user-defined partition

structure. The easiest way to do this is to create an M-file, partially define a
structure, load that M-file into the MATLAB workspace, and supplement the
resulting structure with a call to the completepartitionstruct function.
For example
Partition(1).Address='0x5000';
Partition(1).Type='int8';
Partition(1).Size='10';
Partition(2).Type='uint16';
Partition(2).Size='5';
Partition(3).Type='uint8';
Partition(3).Size='1';
Partition(3).Alignment='8';
Partition(4).Type='double';
Partition(4).Size='3';

This example defines a partition with four segments.

- The Address field is optional. Only specify this field for the first segment
of a partition. The elements of a partition are defined as a continuous
memory block from the first address. The following segments extrapolate
their addresses from the first segment. If you have fragmented memory,
use multiple partitions and VMIC read/write blocks to work with the
memory.
- The Type and Size fields are required for all fields in the partition
structure.

33-3
33 VMIC

- The Alignment value is optional. It is '4' by default, which forces

segments that do not have alignment specifications to start on 4 byte (32
bit) boundaries. In this partition, the third segment (Partition(3)) has an
alignment of '8'.
- The base addresses of subsequent segments are fully defined by the data
type, size, and alignment of the preceding segment.
- You can then call the completepartitionstruct() command to full
populate the partition structure.

Initialize Shared Memory Nodes

To use the xPC Target VMICPCI-5565 shared memory, you must define a node
initialization structure. VMIC shared memory drivers use MATLAB structures
to define shared memory node initialization. A node initialization structure
describes the shared memory partition (see “Create Shared Memory
Partitions” on page 33-2) and the VMIC board configuration, including
interrupt configurations. The following VMIC block requires shared memory
node initialization structures:
• 5565 init
After you define the node initialization partition, you can add VMIC shared
memory driver blocks to your Simulink model. Create a shared memory
structure in one of the following ways. See “Shared Memory Node Initialization
Structure” on page 33-13 for the complete list of fields for the structure.
The following description refers to the completenodestruct command. Type
help completenodestruct

for a description of the command.

• Using the completenodestruct command at the MATLAB Command

Window, create a default node initialization structure. For example, type
node=completenodestruct([],'5565')

node =

Interface: [1x1 struct]

Partitions: [1x1 struct]

33-4
 Before You Start

• A user-defined node structure, create with m-code or from the MATLAB

Command Window and supplement the resulting structure with a call to the
completenodestruct function.

33-5
33 VMIC

VMICPCI-5565
The VMICPCI-5565 is a high-speed fiber optic reflective memory. It can also
generate/broadcast interrupts. xPC Target uses this board as part of the
shared memory network that you can use to exchange data between computer
nodes.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “5565 init” on page 33-6

• “5565 read” on page 33-7
• “5565 write” on page 33-8
• “5565 pack” on page 33-9
• “5565 unpack” on page 33-9
• “5565 broadcast” on page 33-9

For information about the Change endianess block, see “Byte Reversal/Change
Endianess Block” in Chapter 6.

Board Characteristics
Board name VMICPCI-5565
Manufacturer VMIC
Bus type PCI
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

5565 init
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure these block parameters, be sure that you have a
predefined node initialization structure. See “Initialize Shared Memory Nodes”
on page 33-4.

33-6
 VMICPCI-5565

Each model that uses shared memory must have one 5565 init block for every
VMIC board in the system.
Node struct — Enter the name of the predefined node initialization structure.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

5565 read
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The 5565 read block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 33-2.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

33-7
33 VMIC

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Error Status Port — Select this check box to monitor the status of the VMIC
board LISR register modes.

5565 write
Driver Block Parameters
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure. The 5565 write block requires this
structure to specify how Simulink signal values are mapped in the shared
memory. It also uses this structure to determine the total size and address of
the shared memory. See “Create Shared Memory Partitions” on page 33-2.
Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block uses this structure to specify how Simulink signal values
map into shared memory.
Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Error Status Port — Select this check box to monitor the status of the VMIC
board LISR register modes.

33-8
 VMICPCI-5565

5565 pack
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
Memory partitions consist of groups of Simulink signals, which are combined
into blocks (packets) of 32 bit words. The 5565 pack block packs the specified
partition structure into an unstructured double word array vector by
converting one or more Simulink signals of varying data types into the vector.
Typically, the input to a pack block is the output from a write block. Simulink
is not aware of structures; you must pass the output of each structure segment
as input to the 5565 pack block.
This block ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure.

5565 unpack
Before you begin to configure this block, be sure that you have a predefined
shared memory partition structure.
The 5565 unpack block unpacks an unstructured double word array vector
(from the 5565 pack block) into the specified partition structure. This block
ignores the Address field of the partition structure.

Driver Block Parameters

Partition struct — Enter the name of the predefined shared memory partition
structure. The block unpacks the double word array vector into this structure.

5565 broadcast
The 5565 broadcast block generates a network interrupt that other boards in
the shared memory network can detect.
The 5565 broadcast block has two inputs:

• En — This input port is a Boolean input that can enable or disable the
transmission of a network interrupt. For continuous interrupts. connect this
input port to a Constant block with a Boolean value of true (1). If you want

33-9
33 VMIC

to enable interrupts only part of the time, you can use another kind of input,
such as a pulse generator.
• Data — This input port allows you to transmit a data value (uint32) with the
interrupt. Note that xPC Target does not support receiving this data value.

Driver Block Parameters

Target Node — Enter the node ID of the node to which to broadcast the
interrupt. Enter -1 to broadcast the interrupt to all the nodes in the shared
memory network. Note that you cannot broadcast the interrupt to any other
subset of nodes.
Interrupt Number — Enter the VMIC shared IRQ number. This value is the
special interrupt number that VMIC boards send between each other (see the
LIER register bit descriptions in the VMIC product documentation). This value
must match the value of X in a line like the following, which you specify for the
receiving end of the shared memory network (see “Board Interrupts” on
page 33-16).
node.Interface.Interrupts.PendingIntX

Sampletime — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically present in the target PC, enter
the bus number and the PCI slot number of the board associated with this
driver block. Use the format [BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the bus
number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

33-10
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Shared Memory Structure Reference

You do not need to use all the fields of a partition or node initialization
structure. However, knowing the possible structure fields will be helpful when
you are creating any of the structures.
This section includes the following topics:

• “Shared Memory Partition Structure” on page 33-11 — Description of the

partition node structure fields
• “Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure” on page 33-13 — Description
of the node initialization structure fields

Shared Memory Partition Structure

A shared memory partition structure has the following fields:
Address: '0x0'
Type: 'uint32'
Size: '1'
Alignment: '4'
Internal: [1x1 struct]

where:

33-11
33 VMIC

Partition Description
Fields

Address Specifies the base address (in hexadecimal) of the memory

partition within the node’s shared memory space. The
default value is '0x0', the first location in shared memory.

Align partition addresses on 32-bit word boundaries (for

example, 0x0, 0x4, 0x8, and so forth).
Type Specifies the data type of the memory segment. Specify one
of the following types:

• single (IEEE Single Precision)

• double (IEEE Double Precision)
• uint8
• int8
• uint16
• int16
• uint32
• int32
• Boolean (a single byte represents a boolean value)

The default value is 'uint32'. A minimum partition size is

32 bits.
Size Specifies the dimension and size of the memory segment.
You can enter a scalar value or a value with the [m,n]
format. The default value is '1'.

• scalar — Treats the Size entry as the specification of the

length of a non-oriented array or vector
• [m,n] — Treats the Size entry as an array dimension.
The total number of elements in this segment is m*n.

33-12
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Partition Description
Fields

Alignment If another partition precedes this partition, defines the byte

alignment of this segment. Specify one of the following
alignment values: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8. The default value is '4'.
This value forces a double word boundary alignment for all
elements.
Internal Reserved for internal use.

Shared Memory Node Initialization Structure

A node initialization structure has the following fields:
Interface: [1x1 struct]
Partitions: [1x1 struct]

where:

33-13
33 VMIC

Node Description
Structure
Fields

Interface Specifies how the board is configured. The Interface

structure has the following fields, three of which are
structures:

• Mode — Configures board registers (see “Board Mode”)

• Interrupts — Enables the board to generate PCI
interrupts from network events that have been broadcast
from other nodes, or error conditions (see “Board
Interrupts”)
• NodeID — Specifies the node ID for the board (see “Board
Node ID”)
• Internal — Reserved for internal use
Partitions Stores the shared memory segments (see “Create Shared
Memory Partitions” on page 33-2)

Board Mode
The VMIC board has a number of registers that you can set through the
Interface.Mode field. To display the board mode fields, type
>> node.Interface.Mode

ans =
StatusLEDOff: 'off'
TransmitterDisable: 'off'
DarkOnDarkEnable: 'off'
LoopbackEnable: 'off'
LocalParityEnable: 'off'
MemoryOffset: '0'
MemorySize: '64MByte'

33-14
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

Note that mode values affect the VMIC board setting of the LSR1 (Local
Control and Status Register 1) and LIER (Local Interrupt Enable Register)
registers. Refer to the VMIC product documentation for further details on these
two registers. To monitor the status of these modes, select the Error Status
Port check box of the VMIC 5565 read or write block.
Of particular note are the following modes:

Board Modes Description

StatusLEDOff Turns the VMIC board status LED on and off. Setting
this value to 'off' turns off the LED when the xPC Target
model runs, setting this value to 'on' turns on the LED
when the xPC Target model runs. When the xPC Target
terminates, the LED status reverses in both cases. The
default value is 'off'.
MemoryOffset Applies a global offset to all network data transfers
coming from the VMIC board. The following table lists
offset values and the resulting offset. The default value
is '0'.
MemorySize Specifies the minimum memory size required. The VMIC
driver checks this value against the memory size of the
VMIC board. A VMIC board has a memory size of either
'64MByte' or '128MByte'. If you enter a size in this field
that is larger than the actual VMIC board memory size,
the driver will return an error. The default value is
'64MByte'.

This table lists the values for MemoryOffset:

Value Offset Produced

'0' 0
'1' 0x4000000

33-15
33 VMIC

Value Offset Produced

'2' 0x8000000
'3' 0xC000000

Board Interrupts
The VMIC board can generate PCI interrupts in response to network events
that have been broadcast from other nodes, or error conditions. For example,
you can configure two xPC Target Simulink models, one as master, and one as
a slave of the broadcast node in the master xPC Target model. In such a
configuration, the broadcast node interrupt triggers the model’s time steps.
To display the interrupt mode fields, type
>> node.Interface.Interrupts

ans =
LocalMemoryParity: 'off'
MemoryWriteInhibited: 'off'
LatchedSyncLoss: 'off'
RXFifoFull: 'off'
RXFifoAlmostFull: 'off'
BadData: 'off'
PendingInit: 'off'
RoguePacket: 'off'
ResetNodeRequest: 'off'
PendingInt3: 'off'
PendingInt2: 'off'
PendingInt1: 'off'

Each field corresponds to a bit in the LIER register of the VMIC board. Each
bit enables the specified interrupt source on the VMIC board. Refer to the
VMIC product documentation for further details on this register.
To enable a node to generate a network interrupt source, add the 5565
broadcast block to a model (for example, the master model). This block issues
network interrupts at the model sample rate. Correspondingly, to enable other
nodes of the network (for example, the slaves) to accept broadcast interrupts
from the model, configure the slave model to expect the broadcast interrupt.

33-16
 Shared Memory Structure Reference

The following procedure describes how to configure an entire xPC Target model
to accept a broadcast interrupt from a VMIC board. See “5565 broadcast” on
page 33-9 for a description of the Interrupt parameter value that the xPC
Target model expects.

1 From the MATLAB Command Window, type

getxpcpci

This command lists board information for all installed PCI devices that xPC
Target knows about.

2 Find the IRQ specified for the VMIC board.

This is the interrupt source number you need to specify in the xPC target
code generation options field in step 10 of the following procedure.

3 Edit your M-file and add a line like the following.

node.Interface.Interrupts.PendingInt1='on'

This line directs the model to expect an interrupt. It assumes that the value
of the 5565 broadcast block Interrupt parameter is 1.

4 From the MATLAB Command Window, type the name of your Simulink
model.

The Simulink model appears.

5 From the Simulation menu, click Simulation Parameters.

6 Click the Real-Time Workshop tab.

7 From the Category list, choose xPC Target code generation options.

8 Ensure that the Execution mode field is set to Real-Time.

9 Click the Real-Time interrupt source list.

10 Select the interrupt number to which the board is set (from step 2).

11 Click the I/O board generating the interrupt list and select VMIC-5565
from the list.

33-17
33 VMIC

12 Click OK.

Note If you have a larger model, and you want to localize control of the
interrupt within that model, use the IRQ Source block from the Asynchronous
Event sublibrary.

Board Node ID
The jumpers of the VMIC board specify the board node ID. Correspondingly,
you can also configure the VMIC block with the board node ID using the
Interface.NodeID field. Enter values according to the following:

NodeID Description
Value

'any' Allows the VMIC driver to work with any VMIC node
regardless of the VMIC board node ID jumper setting

value from Specifies the particular VMIC node that the driver must
'0' to look for. If this value does not match the jumpered value on
'255' the VMIC board, the driver returns an error.

The default value of 'any' suffices in most instances. However, you might want
to specify a particular NodeID value if you have multiple VMIC boards in your
system and you want to identify the driver for a particular node.

33-18
 34

Miscellaneous Blocks

This chapter describes the miscellaneous blocks supported by xPC Target.

xPC Target Scope Block (p. 34-3) For information about this block, see “Adding an xPC
Target Scope Block” on page 3-16 and “Entering
Parameters for an xPC Target Scope Block” on page 3-20.
From xPC Target (p. 34-10) This block behaves like a source. This block creates and
controls an xPC Target scope object running on the target
PC.
To xPC Target (p. 34-12) The main purpose of this block is to write a new value to a
specific parameter on the target application while it is
running.
xPC Target From File (p. 34-14) Use the xPC Target From File block to read data from a
file on the target PC hard disk and distribute that data in
chunks every sample time.
xPC Target Software Reboot (p. 34-18) Use the Software Reboot block to reboot the target PC
when your simulation reaches a certain state.
I/O Port Read (p. 34-19) To access the address space reserved for I/O devices and
communicate directly to a device, xPC Target provides
the I/O Port Read and I/O Port Write blocks.
I/O Port Write (p. 34-21) To access the address space reserved for I/O devices and
communicate directly to a device, xPC Target provides
the I/O Port Read and I/O Port Write blocks.
xPC Target TET (p. 34-23) This block outputs the Task Execution Time (TET) in
seconds. Use the output of this block as an input to an xPC
Target Scope block.
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

xPC Target Time (p. 34-24) This block outputs the time in clock ticks that the kernel
has been executing.
Asynchronous Event Support (p. 34-25) xPC Target incudes support for asynchronous events.
These events are triggered by a hardware interrupt
asynchronously to normal execution

34-2
 xPC Target Scope Block

xPC Target Scope Block

For information about this block, see “Adding an xPC Target Scope Block” in
Chapter 3 and “Entering Parameters for an xPC Target Scope Block” in
Chapter 3 of the xPC Target getting started documentation.
There are three types of scopes, target, host, and file. The xPC Target Scope
block dialog changes depending on which scope type you are configuring. The
following sections describe the procedure depending on the scope type:

• “xPC Target Scope of Type Target Parameters” on page 34-3

• “xPC Target Scope of Type Host Parameters” on page 34-6
• “xPC Target Scope of Type File Parameters” on page 34-7

xPC Target Scope of Type Target Parameters

By default, the scope dialog displays the scope of type Target dialog.
Scope number — Contains a unique number to identify the scope that is
displayed. This number is incremented each time you add a new xPC Target
Scope block. Normally, you do not want to edit this value.
This number identifies the xPC Target Scope block and the scope screen on the
host or target computer.
Scope type — From the list, select Target if it is not already selected.
The updated dialog box displays.
Start scope when application starts — Select this check box to start a scope
when the target application is downloaded and started. The scope window
opens automatically.
Scope mode — From the list, select either Numerical, Graphical redraw,
Graphical sliding, or Graphical rolling.

If you have a scope type of Target and a scope mode of Numerical, the scope
block dialog adds a Numerical format box to the dialog. You can define the
display format for the data. If you choose not to complete the Numerical
format box, xPC Target displays the signal using the default format of %15.6f,
which is a floating point format, with no label.

34-3
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

Numerical format — If you have a scope type of Target and a scope mode of
Numerical, the scope block dialog adds a Numerical format box to the dialog.
Enter a label and associated numeric format type in which to display signals.
By default, the entry format is the floating point %15.6f. The Numerical
format box takes entries of the format:
'[LabelN] [%width.precisiontype] [LabelX]'

where:
LabelN is the label for the signal. You can use a different label for each signal
or the same label for each signal. This argument is optional.
width is the minimum number of characters to offset from the left of the screen
or label. This argument is optional.
precision is the maximum number of decimal points for the signal value. This
argument is optional.
type is the data type for the signal format. You can use one or more of the
following types:

Type Description

%e or %E Exponential format using e or E

%f Floating point

%g Signed value printed in f or e format depending on which

is smaller

%G Signed value printed in f or E format depending on which is

smaller

LabelX is a second label for the signal. You can use a different label for each
signal or the same label for each signal. This argument is optional.
Enclose the contents of the Numerical format field in quotation marks.
For example
'Foo %15.2f end'

34-4
 xPC Target Scope Block

For a whole integer signal value, enter 0 for the precision value. For example
'Foo1 %15.0f end'

For a multiple format entries, delimit each entry with a command and
surround the entire string with a pair of quotes. For example
'Foo2 %15.6f end,Foo3 %15.6f end2'

You can have multiple Numerical format entries, separated by a comma. If

you enter one entry, that entry applies to each signal (scalar expansion). If you
enter fewer label entries than signals, the first entry applies to the first signal,
the second entry applies to the second signal, and so forth, and the last entry
is scalar expanded for the remaining signals. If you have two entries and one
signal, xPC Target ignores the second label entry and applies the first entry.
You can enter as many format entries as you have signals for the scope.
Grid — Select this check box to display grid lines on the scope. Note that this
parameter is only applicable for scopes of type Target and scope modes of type
Graphical redraw, Graphical sliding, and Graphical rolling.

Y-Axis limits — Enter a row vector with two elements where the first element
is the lower limit of the y-axis and the second element is the upper limit. If you
enter 0 for both elements, then the scaling is set to auto. Note that this
parameter is only applicable for scopes of type Target and scope modes of type
Graphical redraw, Graphical sliding, and Graphical rolling.

Number of samples — Enter the number of values to be acquired in a data

package.
If you select a Scope mode of Graphical redraw, this parameter specifies the
number of values to be acquired before the graph is redrawn.
If you select a Trigger mode other than FreeRun, this parameter can specify
the number of samples to be acquired before the next trigger event.
Number of pre/post samples — Enter the number of samples to save or skip.
Specify a value less than 0 to save this number of samples before a trigger
event. Specify a value greater than 0 to skip this number of samples after the
trigger event before data acquisition begins.
Decimation — Enter a value to collect data at each sample time (1) or to collect
data at less than every sample time (2 or greater).

34-5
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

Trigger mode — From the list, select either FreeRun, Software Triggering,
Signal Triggering, or Scope Triggering.

If you select FreeRun or Software Triggering, you do not need to specify

anything else.
If you select Signal Triggering, then in the Trigger signal box, enter the
index of a signal. In the Trigger level box, enter a value for the signal to cross
before triggering. From the Trigger slope list, select either, rising, or
falling. You do not need to specify the Trigger scope number.

If you select Scope Triggering, then in the Trigger scope number box, enter
the scope number of a Scope block. If you use this trigger mode, you must also
add a second Scope block to your Simulink model. You do not need to specify
the Trigger signal.
If you want the scope to trigger on a specific sample of the other scope, enter a
value in the Sample to trigger on box. The default value is 0 and indicates that
the triggering scope and the triggered (current) scope start simultaneously. For
more information on this field, see “Triggering One Scope with Another Scope
to Acquire Data” in Chapter 2 in the xPC Target user’s guide documentation.
For additional information on trigger, see “Advanced Data Acquisition Topics”
on page 2-11.

xPC Target Scope of Type Host Parameters

By default, the scope dialog displays the scope of type Target dialog.
Scope number — Contains a unique number to identify the scope that is
displayed. This number is incremented each time you add a new xPC Target
scope block. Normally, you do not want to edit this value.
This number identifies the xPC Target Scope block and the scope screen on the
host or target computer.
Scope type — From the list, select Host.
The updated dialog box is displayed.
Start scope when application starts — Select this check box to start a scope
when the target application is downloaded and started. With a scope of type
target, the scope window opens automatically. With a scope of type host, you
can open a host scope viewer window from xPC Target Explorer.

34-6
 xPC Target Scope Block

Number of samples — Enter the number of values to be acquired in a data

package.
Number of pre/post samples — Enter the number of samples to save or skip.
Specify a value less than 0 to save this number of samples before a trigger
event. Specify a value greater than 0 to skip this number of samples after the
trigger event before data acquisition begins.
Decimation — Enter a value to collect data at each sample time (1) or to collect
data at less than every sample time (2 or greater).
Trigger Mode — From the list, select either FreeRun, Software Triggering,
Signal Triggering, or Scope Triggering.

If you select FreeRun or Software Triggering, the trigger event is an

automatic one. No other trigger specification is required (see trigger for
further details on software trigger).
If you select Signal Triggering, then in the Trigger signal box, enter the
index of a signal. In the Trigger level box, enter a value for the signal to cross
before triggering. From the Trigger slope list, select either, rising, or
falling. You do not need to specify scope triggering.

If you select Scope Triggering, then in the Trigger scope number box, enter
the scope number of a Scope block. If you use this trigger mode, you must also
add a second Scope block to your Simulink model. You do not need to specify
signal triggering.
If you want the scope to trigger on a specific sample of the other scope, enter a
value in the Sample to trigger on box. The default value is 0 and indicates that
the triggering scope and the triggered (current) scope start simultaneously. For
more information on this field, see “Triggering One Scope with Another Scope
to Acquire Data” in Chapter 2 in the xPC Target user’s guide documentation.

xPC Target Scope of Type File Parameters

By default, the scope dialog displays the scope of type Target dialog.
Scope number — Contains a unique number to identify the scope that is
displayed. This number increments each time you add a new xPC Target scope
block. Normally, you do not want to edit this value.
This number identifies the xPC Target Scope block and the scope screen on the
host or target computer.

34-7
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

Scope type — From the list, select File.

The updated dialog box is displayed.
Start scope when application starts — Select the check box to start a scope
when the target application is downloaded and started. The scope window
opens automatically.
Number of samples — Enter the number of values to be acquired in a data
package. This parameter works in conjunction with the AutoRestart check
box. If the AutoRestart box is selected, the scope of type file collects data up to
Number of samples, then starts over again, overwriting the buffer. If the
AutoRestart box is not selected, the scope of type file collects data only up to
Number of samples, then stops.
Number of pre/post samples — Enter the number of samples to save or skip.
Specify a value less than 0 to save this number of samples before a trigger
event. Specify a value greater than 0 to skip this number of samples after the
trigger event before data acquisition begins.
Decimation — Enter a value to collect data at each sample time (1) or to collect
data at less than every sample time (2 or greater).
Trigger Mode — From the list, select either FreeRun, Software Triggering,
Signal Triggering, or Scope Triggering.

If you select FreeRun or Software Triggering, the trigger event is an

automatic one. No external trigger specification is required.
If you select Signal Triggering, then in the Trigger signal box, enter the
index of a signal. In the Trigger level box, enter a value for the signal to cross
before triggering. From the Trigger slope list, select either, rising, or
falling. You do not need to specify scope triggering.

If you select Scope Triggering, then in the Trigger scope number box, enter
the scope number of a Scope block. If you use this trigger mode, you must also
add a second Scope block to your Simulink model. You do not need to specify
signal triggering.
If you want the scope to trigger on a specific sample of the other scope, enter a
value in the Sample to trigger on box. The default value is 0 and indicates that
the triggering scope and the triggered (current) scope start simultaneously. For
more information on this field, see “Triggering One Scope with Another Scope
to Acquire Data” in Chapter 2 in the xPC Target user’s guide documentation.

34-8
 xPC Target Scope Block

Filename — Enter a name for the file to contain the signal data. By default,
the target PC writes the signal data to a file named C:\data.dat.
Mode — From the list, select either Lazy or Commit. Both modes open a file,
write signal data to the file, then close that file at the end of the session. With
the Commit mode, each file write operation simultaneously updates the FAT
entry for the file. This mode is slower, but the file system always knows the
actual file size. With the Lazy mode, the FAT entry is updated only when the
file is closed and not during each file write operation. This mode is faster, but
if the system crashes before the file is closed, the file system might not know
the actual file size (the file contents, however, will be intact).
WriteSize — Enter the block size, in bytes, of the data chunks. This parameter
specifies that a memory buffer, of length Number of samples, writes data to
the file in WriteSize chunks. By default, this parameter is 512 bytes, which is
the typical disk sector size. Using a block size that is the same as the disk sector
size provides optimal performance.
Number of samples — Enter the number of values to be acquired in a data
package.
AutoRestart — Select this check box to enable the scope of type file to collect
data up to Number of samples, then start over again, appending the new data
to the end of the signal data file. Clear the AutoRestart check box to have the
scope of type file collect data up to Number of samples, then stop.

34-9
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

From xPC Target

This block behaves like a source. Its output is usually connected to the input of
a display device.

Note The use of From xPC Target blocks require a connection between the
host and target PC. If there is no connection between the host and target PC,
operations such as opening a model that contains these blocks or copying
these blocks within or between models, will take significantly longer than
normal.

Some notes on the From xPC Target block behavior

• To highlight a signal line that a From xPC Target block refers to, double-click
the From xPC Target block.
• If the From xPC Target block has not yet been configured, double-clicking
the From xPC Target block has no effect.
• To edit the From xPC Target block parameters, right-click on the block and
select Mask parameters.

To run a model that contains From xPC Target blocks, you must

• Configure the Real-Time Workshop parameters RTW system target file for
the model. Set this value to xpctarget.tlc. You access this dialog from the
Simulink model Simulation -> Configuration Parameters menu. See
“Entering the Real-Time Workshop Parameters” on page 3-42 in the xPC
Target getting started documentation.
• Specify the correct target PC environment on the xPC Target options node
of the Real-Time Workshop parameters dialog. In particular, either select
the Use default target PC check box or enter the target name of the target
PC to which you want to connect. If you have only one target PC, the model
uses the default target PC and you do not to perform this configuration. See
the Use the default target PC check box description in “xPC Target
Options” on page 3-50 in the xPC Target getting started documentation.

34-10
 From xPC Target

Note If you have only one target PC, the model uses the default target and
you do not perform these configurations.

34-11
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

To xPC Target
This block behaves as a sink. The main purpose of this block is to write a new
value to a specific parameter on the target application. This block is
implemented as an M-file S-function. The block is optimized so that it only
changes a parameter on the target application when the input value differs
from the value that existed at the last time step. This block uses the parameter
downloading feature of the xPC Target command-line interface.

Note The use of To xPC Target blocks require a connection between the host
and target PC. If there is no connection between the host and target PC,
operations such as opening a model that contains these blocks or copying
these blocks within or between models, will take significantly longer than
normal.

Some notes on the To xPC Target block behavior

• To highlight the Simulink model block referenced by a To xPC Target block,

double-click the To xPC Target block.
• If the To xPC Target block has not yet been configured, double-clicking the
To xPC Target block has no effect.
• To edit the To xPC Target block parameters, right-click on the block and
select Mask parameters.

Some notes on the From xPC Target block behavior

• To highlight a signal line that a From xPC Target block refers to, double-click
the From xPC Target block.
• If the From xPC Target block has not yet been configured, double-clicking
the From xPC Target block has no effect.
• To edit the From xPC Target block parameters, right-click on the block and
select Mask parameters.

34-12
 To xPC Target

To run a model that contains From xPC Target blocks, you must

• Configure the Real-Time Workshop parameters RTW system target file for
the model. Set this value to xpctarget.tlc. You access this dialog from the
Simulink model Simulation -> Configuration Parameters menu. See
“Entering the Real-Time Workshop Parameters” on page 3-42 in the xPC
Target getting started documentation.
• Specify the correct target PC environment on the xPC Target options node
of the Real-Time Workshop parameters dialog. In particular, either select
the Use default target PC or enter the target name of the target PC to which
you want to connect. If you have only one target PC, the model uses the
default target PC and you do not to perform this configuration.See the Use
the default target PC check box description in “xPC Target Options” on
page 3-50 in the xPC Target getting started documentation.

Note If you have only one target PC, the model uses the default target and
you do not perform these configurations.

34-13
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

xPC Target From File

The xPC Target From File block reads data from a file on the target PC hard
disk and distributes that data in chunks every sample time. As the xPC Target
kernel on the target PC reads the file data, it writes that data into a software
buffer whose size is user-defined. The From File block then reads the data from
this buffer in real time. One example where you might want to use the From
File block is if you want to use externally-acquired data (data from a file) to
drive a model.
The From File block distributes the data as a sequence of bytes. To use these
data bytes as input to a model, convert the data into one or more signals. To do
so, use the UDP byte Unpack block. The UDP Unpack block outputs data in
various Simulink data types. For example, assume data in your file represents
a single precision scalar and a double precision vector of width 3. To convert
data of this type, set up the block to output every sample time:
28 bytes (1 * sizeof('single') + 3 * sizeof('double))

This can then be converted into the appropriate signals by the Byte Unpacking
block.

See the following topics:

• “File Format” on page 34-15 — Describes the target PC source file format
• “Block parameters” on page 34-16 — Describes the block parameters for the
From File block

34-14
 xPC Target From File

File Format
Before you use a target PC file as the source for the From File block, ensure
that the data in the file is formatted properly. The file format is a concatenation
of the different data elements for one time step, followed by the next time step,
and so on.
For example, assume that the data in your file is the same as that in the
preceding example. Assign a variable to each component, for example,

• a — single precision value

• b — double precision vector of 3

Assume, also, that there are N time steps worth of data. The array dimension
for a and b are then

• size(a) — [1, N]
• size(b) — [3, N]

In sequence, write out the data like the following to create the file.
a(1, 1) 4 bytes
b(:, 1) 24 bytes
a(1, 2) 4 bytes
b(:, 2) 24 bytes
...
...
a(1, N) 4 bytes
b(:, N) 24 bytes

If you already have the data as MATLAB variables, use the xpcbytes2file
function to create the file on the host PC before transferring it to the target PC.
This function has the following syntax:
xpcbytes2file(filename, var1, ... varn)

where

• filename — Specify the name of the data file from which the From File block
distributes data
• var1, ... varn— Specify the column of data to be output to the model.

34-15
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

Block parameters
Filename — Enter the name of the target PC file that contains the data.
Output port width — Enter the size, in bytes, of the data to be distributed
each sample time.
Buffer size — Enter the size of the software FIFO, in bytes. The xPC Target
kernel fills this FIFO with the data to be input to the model. The From File
block empties this FIFO as it inputs the data to the model.
This parameter should ideally be

• Much larger than Output port width

• At least several time the disk read size

If your model has varying Task Execution Times (because of multitasking or

because of the use of conditionally executed subsystems), increasing this
parameter value helps prevent the real-time application from emptying the
buffer faster than the background task can compile it, causing eventual
saturation.
Disk read size — Enter the number of bytes to read when necessary. To
understand this parameter, assume the following default values:

• Buffer size is 2000

• Disk read size is 512
• Output port width is 8

This means that the data buffer is of size 2000. This buffer is initially full.
Each time the block executes, eight bytes are output to the model, and the
number of bytes in the buffer decreases by eight. Each time the number of free
bytes in the buffer goes to 512 or higher, the xPC Target kernel attempts to
read 512 bytes from the xPC Target data file to fill the buffer.
Setting this parameter to another value, for example 1024, causes the From
File block to wait until 1024 bytes are free before attempting the next read.
For efficiency, set this vale to a multiple of 512 (a disk sector is 512 bytes).

34-16
 xPC Target From File

When reaching EOF — Select the behavior of the block for when you run the
application beyond when you have data in the file. Select

• Hold last output — Stops reading and stops the output at the last value
• Seek to beginning — Returns to the beginning of the file and starts reading
the data (this option results in periodic data)

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

34-17
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

xPC Target Software Reboot

You can use the Software Reboot block to reboot the target PC when your
simulation reaches a certain state. For example, if your control system becomes
unstable you may want to reboot the target PC.
This block has one input. The input is the reboot signal and accepts the
following values:

• 1 — Reboots the target PC.

• 0 — If you use a Software Reboot block and you don’t want the target PC to
reboot, the input value to this block must be 0.

Note Not all systems support rebooting from software. You can test whether
your system supports a software reboot. From the MATLAB Command
Window, enter xpctest. For more information, see “Testing the Installation”
on page 2-45.

Block parameters
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

34-18
 I/O Port Read

I/O Port Read

Intel 80x86 and compatible processors have a special address space reserved
for I/O devices. To access this address space and communicate directly to a
device, xPC Target provides the I/O Port Read and I/O Port Write blocks. These
blocks enable the transfer of data from and to the I/O ports (see also “I/O Port
Write” on page 34-21).

1 Double click the I/O Port Read block.

The Block Parameters: I/O Port Read dialog box opens.

2 In the I/O-Port address box, enter the beginning address for each value this
block reads.

For example, if you want to read a word (16 bits) starting at I/O port 0x300,
followed by a byte (8 bits) at 0x302, enter
{'0x300','0x302'}

3 In the Data type box, enter the type for each value this block reads. There
is one type for each address you entered in the I/O-Port address box.

For example if you want to read a word and then a byte, enter
{'uint16','uint8'}

Your dialog box should look similar to the figure shown below.

34-19
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

4 Click OK.

The number of outputs from the block changes to reflect the length of the
I/O-Port address cell array.

Block Parameters Description

I/O-Port address (cell array) This is the cell array containing the
beginning I/O port addresses for the data
you want to read. These addresses are
specified in terms of hexadecimal strings.

Data type (cell array) This is the cell array containing the types of
data you want to read from I/O port. The
Data type cell array has one value for each
value in the I/O-Port address cell array.

The type uint32 reads a double word (32

bits), uint16 reads a word, and a uint8
reads a byte.

Sample time Enter a base sample time or a multiple of

the base sample time.

34-20
 I/O Port Write

I/O Port Write

Intel 80x86 and compatible processors have a special address space reserved
for I/O devices. To access this address space and communicate directly to a
device, xPC Target provides the I/O Port Read and I/O Port Write blocks. These
blocks enable the transfer of data from and to the I/O ports (see also, “I/O Port
Read” on page 34-19).

1 Double click the I/O Port Write block.

The Block Parameters: I/O Port Write dialog box opens.

2 Enter the parameters.

For example, if you want to write a double word (32 bits) starting at I/O port
0x300, followed by a word (16 bits) at 0x304, enter
{'0x300','0x304'}

Your dialog box should look similar to the figure shown below.

34-21
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

3 Click OK.

The number of inputs to the block changes to reflect the length of the
I/O-Port address cell array. The data type of the input signal reflects the
type of value written to the I/O port.For example, an input signal of type
uint32 writes a double word, an uint16 input signal writes a word, and an
uint8 input signal writes a byte.

Block Parameters Description

I/O-Port address (cell array) This is the cell array containing the I/O port
addresses for the data that you want read.
These addresses are specified in terms of
hexadecimal strings.

Sample time Enter a base sample time or a multiple of

the base sample time.

34-22
 xPC Target TET

xPC Target TET

This block outputs the Task Execution Time (TET) in seconds.
Use the output of this block as an input to an xPC Target Scope block. This
allows you to visualize the TET while your target application is running.

34-23
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

xPC Target Time

This block outputs the time in clock ticks that the kernel has been executing.
This is not the same as the execution time of the target application, but it is the
time since you booted up the target PC.
A use for this block is to determine the execution time of subsystems in your
Simulink model. Add an xPC Target Time block before and after the
subsystem, and then calculate the difference in time.
The time is in clock ticks, and it uses the target PC interval timer to generate
the ticks. Since the interval timer runs at a frequency of 1.193 Mhz, you can
6
calculate the time in seconds by dividing the output by 1.193 × 10 .

34-24
 Asynchronous Event Support

Asynchronous Event Support

xPC Target includes support for asynchronous events. These events are
triggered by a hardware interrupt asynchronously to normal execution. Some
I/O boards raise interrupts that the CPU can use to interrupt the normal
execution of code and jump to another sections of code called an Interrupt
Service routine (ISR).
This section includes the following topics:

• “Adding an Asynchronous Event” on page 34-25 — Add an Async IRQ Source

block to your Simulink model
• “Async IRQ Source Block” on page 34-28 — Reference for block parameters
• “Async Rate Transition Block” on page 34-29 — Reference for block
parameters
• “Async Buffer Write and Read Blocks” on page 34-30 — Reference for block
parameters
• “Asynchronous Interrupt Examples” on page 34-31 — Examples for data
transfer with a Transition block, buffered data transfer with Real/Write
blocks, and interrupt CAN communication with PCI and PC/104 boards

Adding an Asynchronous Event

When developing a model in Simulink that runs in the xPC Target
environment, an Interrupt Server Routine (ISR) is modeled by using a
Function-Call Subsystem. Additionally, you need to add an IRQ Source block
connected to the Function-Call Subsystem block. This subsystem is then
executed when an interrupt occurs and the CPU is ready to accept it.
After you install an I/O board with interrupt support into your target PC, you
can add xPC Target asynchronous blocks to your Simulink model.

1 In the MATLAB Command Window, type

xpclib

The xPC Target Library opens.

2 Double-click the Asynchronous Event group block.

34-25
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

The Library: xpclib/Asynchronous Event window opens.

3 Drag-and-drop the xPC Target IRQ block in your Simulink model and
connect the output to this block to the input of a Function-Call Subsystem.
For more information on Function-Call subsystems, see the Simulink and
Real-Time Workshop documentation.

34-26
 Asynchronous Event Support

In the setup shown above, the CPU executes the contents of the Function
Call-Subsystem whenever IRQ 5 occurs.

4 Double-click the IRQ Source block.

The Block Parameters: IRQ Source dialog box opens.

5 From the IRQ line number list, choose 1, 2, . . . , 15. To determine the
available IRQ line numbers on the target PC, use the function getxpcpci.

6 Select or deselect the Allow preemption of function call subsystem check box.

7 From the I/O board generating the interrupt list, select an interrupt board.

8 In the PCI slot box, enter the PCI slot number or enter -1 to let xPC Target
determine the number.

9 Click OK.

For more information about the IRQ Source block, see “Async IRQ Source
Block” on page 34-28.
If you need to transfer data from your ISR, add an Async Transition Block or
Async Read/Write blocks to your Simulink model. See “Async Rate Transition
Block” on page 34-29, “Async Buffer Write and Read Blocks” on page 34-30,
and “Asynchronous Interrupt Examples” on page 34-31.

34-27
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

If you are using a CAN field bus with interrupts, see “Asynchronous Interrupt
Examples” on page 34-31.

Async IRQ Source Block

The main block that notifies Simulink and xPC Target that a particular
Function-Call Subsystem should be treated as an ISR is the IRQ Source block.
This block is actually a virtual block and does not exist at model execution time.
However, the model initialization code sets things up with the CPU to execute
the ISR when the proper interrupt occurs.

Block Parameters Description

IRQ line number Select the IRQ line number you are using for
this block. This depends on the characteristics of
your hardware. You may need to query the PCI
bus on the target PC to find what IRQ the PCI
bus assigned to your hardware. Use the function
getxpcpci.

Valid IRQ numbers are between 3 and 15.

Allow preemption of Normally, while the ISR is executing, another

function-call subsystem interrupt will not cause re-execution of the ISR
(That is the ISR will not preempt itself). If this
check box is checked, the ISR will interrupt
itself.

34-28
 Asynchronous Event Support

Block Parameters Description

I/O board generating For many I/O boards, you need to set up the
the interrupt board properly to generate the interrupt. You
might also need to set up board specific features
at the beginning and/or end of an ISR. Select
the correct board that you intend to use from
the drop-down list.

PCI slot (-1: autosearch) If only one board of this type is physically
present in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

If two or more boards of this type are physically
present in the target PC, enter the bus number
and the PCI slot number of the board associated
with this driver block. Use the format
[BusNumber, SlotNumber]. To determine the
bus number and the PCI slot number, type
getxpcpci

Async Rate Transition Block

Use the Asynchronous Rate Transition block to double buffer data between the
function call subsystem and the rest of the model which executes
rate-monotonically in real-time.
Normally, the interrupt service routine writes to the first buffer. When the next
model step executes, the first buffer is copied to the second buffer and its value
is used for model calculations.
If a second interrupt occurs while the buffer is being copied, data is corrupted.
This corruption happens when part of the data is copied from the first buffer,
the interrupt occurs and writes over the entire first buffer, and then the
transition block continues the copy operation from the first buffer that now has
data from the second interrupt.

34-29
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

To prevent possible data corruption, use Async Buffer Write and Read blocks.
See “Async Buffer Write and Read Blocks” on page 34-30.

Block Parameters Description

Sample time Enter a base sample time or a multiple of

the base sample time.

Async Buffer Write and Read Blocks

These blocks provide double buffering of data between the ISR and the model
which executes rate-monotonically in real-time. Always use these blocks in
pairs with an Async Buffer Write Block leading into an Async Buffer Read
block. The Async Buffer Write Block has to be part of the ISR, and the Async
Buffer Read block is outside the ISR.
Use Async Buffer Write and Read blocks for a more secure method of
transferring data. Unlike the rate transition block, the data from one buffer is
not copied to the second buffer. Instead, interrupts are disabled, and pointers
to the buffers are swapped. This method produces the smallest time the
interrupts are disabled and protects against data corruption caused by
overwriting partially copied buffers.

Block Parameters Description

Sample time Enter a base sample time or a multiple of

the base sample time.

34-30
 Asynchronous Event Support

Asynchronous Interrupt Examples

xPC Target provides several example models. If you installed MATLAB in the
default location, these models are located in
C:\MATLAB\toolbox\rtw\targets\xpc\xpcdemos

To access any of these models, in the MATLAB Command Window, type the
name of the model. Each model contain annotations documenting its purpose,
and should serve as an example of how to use these blocks.

• xpcasyncbuffer — Model using an external TTL signal to trigger and

interrupt on the PCI-CTR05 board. Data exchange between an asynchronous
task and a monotonic task using Async Buffer Read/Write blocks.
• xpcasynctrans — Model using an external TTL signal to trigger and
interrupt. on the PCI-CTR05 board. Data exchange between and
asynchronous task and a rate monotonic task using a Async Rate
Transition block.
• xpccanintpc104 — Model using interrupt driven CAN I/O communication
with the CAN-AC2-104 board.
• xpccanintpci — Model using interrupt driven CAN I/O communication with
the CAN-AC2-PCI board.

34-31
34 Miscellaneous Blocks

34-32
 35

Obsoleted Drivers

xPC Target has obsoleted some or all the drivers for the following manufacturers:

xPC Target Library of Obsoleted Library of obsoleted I/O drivers

Drivers (p. 35-2)
Burr-Brown (p. 35-3) Obsoleted I/O drivers from Burr-Brown
Gespac (p. 35-15) Obsoleted I/O drivers from Gespac
“Measurement Computing (Computer Obsoleted I/O drivers from Measurement Computing
Boards)” on page 35-20
35 Obsoleted Drivers

xPC Target Library of Obsoleted Drivers

You can still access obsoleted driver blocks by typing the following command at
the MATLAB Command Window.
xpcobsoletelib

Existing models that use these drivers will still work. However, their presence
is not guaranteed for future releases. Do not use these driver blocks in new
models.
In addition, in the xPC Target library (xpclib), there are new versions of the
following Measurement Computing Incremental Encoder drivers. Please use
the new version of these drivers.

• CIO-QUAD02
• CIO-QUAD04
• PCI-QUAD04

To access the previous versions of these drivers, use the xpcobsoletelib

command. The presence of the obsoleted versions of these drivers is not
guaranteed for future releases.

35-2
 Burr-Brown

Burr-Brown
I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.instrument.com/pci).

PCI-20003M
The PCI-20003M is an I/O board with two analog output (D/A) channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board when it is installed on a PCI-20041C carrier
board with this driver block:
• “PCI-20003M Analog Output (D/A)” on page 35-3

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-20003M
Manufacturer Burr-Brown
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-20003M Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters.

Channel vector — This parameter is a combined Channel vector and Range
vector. The number of elements defines the number of A/D channels used.
Enter a range code for each of the A/ D channels used. This driver allows a
different range for each channel with a maximum of two A/D channels.

35-3
35 Obsoleted Drivers

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

0-5 5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second channel is
0 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5]

The jumpers W1 to W5, W13, W14, W27, W31, W7 to W11, W30, W32 on the
module must correspond to this range setting.
Sample Time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Module Number — Enter a number from 1 to 3 to identify the connector on the
carrier board where the I/O module is inserted. This driver verifies if the
module is placed on the specified module connector.
Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For
example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-20019M
The PCI-20019M is an I/O board with 8 single analog input (A/D) channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board when it is installed on a PCI-20041C carrier
board with this driver block:
• “PCI-20019M Analog Input (A/D)” on page 35-5

35-4
 Burr-Brown

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-20019M
Manufacturer Burr-Brown
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-20019M Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of A/D channels used. This driver does not allow the selection of individual
channels.
Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Input Range — Enter an input range code for all A/D channels. This driver
does not allow the selection of a different range for individual channel. The
input range is the same for all A/D channels

35-5
35 Obsoleted Drivers

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5 0-5 5

-2.5 to +2.5 -2.5

The jumpers W1 to W5 on the module must correspond to this range setting.

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Module Number (1-3) — Enter a number from 1 to 3 to identify the connector
on the carrier board where the I/O module is inserted. This driver verifies if the
module is placed on the specified module connector.
Base Address of Carrier Board (ie. 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For
example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

Other jumper on this board. The switch and jumper settings, that are not
mentioned here, have no influence on the running of xPC Target.

Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper

Number Number

W6 out W22 out

W8 in W27 out

W10 out W30 -

W11 in W31 -

W12 out

35-6
 Burr-Brown

PCI-20023M
The PCI-20023M is an I/O board with 8 single analog input (A/D) channels
(12-bit).
xPC Target supports this board when it is installed on a PCI-20041C carrier
board with this driver block:
• “PCI-20023M Analog Input (A/D)” on page 35-7

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-20023M
Manufacturer Burr-Brown
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-20023M Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of A/D channels used. This driver does not the selection of individual channels.
Number the channels beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the channels with 0.
Input Range — Enter an input range code for all A/D channels. This driver
does not allow the selection of a different range for individual channel. The
input range is the same for all A/D channels.

35-7
35 Obsoleted Drivers

The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input range (V) Range code Input range (V) Range code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5

The jumpers W1, W2, W4, W5, W33 on the module must correspond to this
range setting. The switch and jumper settings, that are not mentioned here,
have no influence on running xPC Target.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Module Number (1-3) — Enter a number from 1 to 3 to identify the connector
on the carrier board where the I/O module is inserted. This driver verifies if the
module is placed on the specified module connector.
Base Address of Carrier Board (ie. 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
I/O board. It is important that this entry corresponds to the DIP-switch
settings on the board. For example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal),
enter
0x300

Other jumpers on this board. The switch and jumper settings, that are not
mentioned here, have no influence on the running of xPC Target.

Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper

Number Number

W6 out W12 out

W8 in W27 out

W9 - W30 -

W10 out W31 -

W11 in

35-8
 Burr-Brown

PCI-20041C
The PCI-20041C is a carrier board with 32 digital I/O-lines grouped into four
ports that can be configured as digital input or output. Each port has a
maximum of 8 digital lines.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-20041C Digital Input” on page 35-9

• “PCI-20041C Digital Output” on page 35-10

Board Characteristics
Board name PCI-20041C
Manufacturer Burr-Brown
Bus type ISA
Access method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-20041C Digital Input

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital input lines used with this port.
Port Number (1-4) — Enter a number from 1 to 4 to identify the port used with
this block of digital input lines.

35-9
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Module Number (0-3) — Enter a number from 0 to 3 to identify the connector
on the carrier board where the I/O module is inserted. This driver verifies if the
module is placed on the specified module connector.
Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For
example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-20041C Digital Output

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital output lines used with this port.
Port Number (0-3) — Enter a number from 0 to 3 to identify the port used with
this block of digital output lines.
Sample Time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Module Number (1-3) — Enter a number from 1 to 3 to identify the connector
on the carrier board where the I/O module is inserted. This driver verifies if the
module is placed on the specified module connector.

35-10
 Burr-Brown

Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For
example, if the base address is d000 (hexadecimal), enter
0xd000

PCI-20098C
The PCI-20098C is a carrier board with 8 single or 16 differential analog input
(A/D) channels (12-bit), and 16 digital I/O-lines grouped into two 8-line ports.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “PCI-20098C Analog Input (A/D)” on page 35-11

• “PCI-20098C Digital Input” on page 35-12
• “PCI-20098C Digital Output” on page 35-13

Board Characteristics
Board Name PCI-20098C
Manufacturer Burr-Brown
Bus Type ISA
Access Method Memory mapped
Multiple block instance support A/D: No, Digital I/O: Yes
Multiple board support Yes

PCI-20098C Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

35-11
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter

set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16 to select
the number of single A/D channels used. If you select eight channels (Input
coupling parameter set to 8 differential channels) enter a number
between 1 and 8. This driver does not allow the selection of individual channels
or a different Input coupling setting for each channel.
Range — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 to +10 volts), +-5V (-5 to +5
volts), or 0-10V.This driver does not allow the selection of a different range for
each channel. The input range is the same for all A/D channels
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• 16 single-ended channels
• 8 differential channels

This entry must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For
example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-20098C Digital Input

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

35-12
 Burr-Brown

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital input lines used with this port.
Port Number — From the list, choose either A or B to identify the port used
with this block of I/O lines.
Sample Time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board.
For example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-20098C Digital Output

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of Channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital output lines used with this port.
Number lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering lines with 0.
Port Number — From the list, choose either A or B to identify the port used
with this block of I/O lines.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.

35-13
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Base Address or Carrier Board (ie: 0xd000) — Enter the base address of the
board. This entry must corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board.
For example, if the base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

35-14
 Gespac

Gespac
I/O boards supported by xPC Target (http://www.gespac.com).

GESADA-1
The GESADA-1 is an industrial I/O board with 16 single or 8 differential
analog input (A/D) channels, and 4 analog output (D/A) channels (10-bit).
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “GESADA-1 Analog Input (A/D)” on page 35-16

• “GESADA-1 Analog Output (D/A)” on page 35-17

Note xPC Target does not support the external trigger and interrupt
propagation on this board.

Board Characteristics
Board name GESADA-1
Manufacturer Gespac
Bus type ISA industrial
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support No
Multiple board support Yes

35-15
35 Obsoleted Drivers

GESADA-1 Analog Input (A/D)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of channels — If you select 16 channels (Input coupling parameter

set to 16 single-ended channels) enter a number between 1 and 16. If you
select eight channels (Input coupling parameter set to 8 differential
channels) enter a number between 1 and 8.

Number the lines beginning with 1 even if the board manufacturer starts
numbering the lines with 0.
Range vector — From the list, choose either +-10V (-10 to +10 volts), +-5V (-5
to +5 volts), or 0-10V.This driver does not allow you to select a different range
for each channel. The input range is the same for all A/D channels.
The input range setting must correspond to the settings of jumper J6 and J9 on
the board.
Input coupling — From the list, select one from the following list of input
modes:

• Single-ended channels (16 channels)

• Differential channels (8 channels)

This choice must correspond to the MUX-switch setting on the board.

The differential mode is only supported if the board is equipped with option 1A.
The MUX setting must correspond to the settings of jumper J3 and J7 on the
board.
Sample time — Base sample time or a multiple of the base sample time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

35-16
 Gespac

GESADA-1 Analog Output (D/A)

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

volts Double 1

Driver Block Parameters.

Channel vector — This parameter is a combined Channel vector and Range

vector. The number of elements defines the number of D/A channels used.
Enter a range code for each of the channels used. This driver allows a different
range for each D/A channel with a maximum of 2 channels.
The following table is a list of the ranges for this driver and the corresponding
range codes.

Input Range (V) Range Code Input Range (V) Range Code

-10 to +10 -10 0 - 10 10

-5 to +5 -5

For example, if the first channel is -10 to + 10 volts and the second, third and
fourth channel are -5 to +5 volts, enter
[-10,5,5,5]

The range settings have to correspond to the jumper setting of J5 on the board.
Sample time — Enter the base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
correspond to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

The base address specifies the base address of the board and has to correspond
to the Jumper setting (J12) on the board.

35-17
35 Obsoleted Drivers

GESPIA-2A
The GESPIA-2A is an industrial I/O board with 32 digital I/O lines. The
GESPIA-2A has two 6821 PIAs (0 and 1) from Motorola. Each PIA has two
ports (A and B) with 8 digital lints which can be defined as input or output.
xPC Target supports this board with these driver blocks:

• “GESPIA-2A Digital Input” on page 35-18

• “GESPIA-2A Digital Output” on page 35-19

Board Characteristics
Board name GESPIA-2A
Manufacturer Gespac
Bus type ISA industrial
Access method I/O mapped
Multiple block instance support Yes
Multiple board support Yes

GESPIA-2A Digital Input

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital input driver
block, the port is configured as input.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Input Block Output Data Type Scaling

TTL Double TTL low = 0.0

TTL high = 1.0

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital input lines used with this port.
Port Name — From the list, choose either PIA0A, PIA0B, PIA1A or PIA1B to
identify the port used with this block of I/O lines.

35-18
 Gespac

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

GESPIA-2A Digital Output

Use a separate driver block for each port. By selecting the digital output driver
block, the port is configured as output.

Scaling Input to Output.

Hardware Output Block Input Data Type Scaling

TTL Double < 0.5 = TTL low

> 0.5 = TTL high

Driver Block Parameters.

Number of channels — Enter a number between 1 and 8 to select the number

of digital output lines used with this port.
Port Name — From the list, choose either PIA0A, PIA0B, PIA1A or PIA1B to
identify the port used with this block of I/O lines.
Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. This entry must
corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the base
address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

35-19
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Measurement Computing (Computer Boards)

I/O boards supported by xPC Target
(http://www.measurementcomputing.com).
There are new versions of the following Measurement Computing Incremental
Encoder drivers. Please use the new version of these drivers. This topic
describes the obsoleted drivers:

• “CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 35-20

• “CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 35-22
• “PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)” on page 35-24

To access the previous versions of these drivers, use the xpcobsoletelib

command. The presence of the obsoleted versions of these drivers is not
guaranteed for future releases.

CIO-QUAD02 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init
remains 1 unless Counter Reset by Index is set to First Only, and the counter
detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block Parameters” on
page 35-21.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.
The distance is given by:
distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

35-20
 Measurement Computing (Computer Boards)

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose 1 or 2. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counter Reset by Index — From the list choose either Only First, or
Continuous.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.
Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise the
counting direction is reversed.
Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

35-21
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Sample Time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base Address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

CIO-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init
remains 1 unless Counter Reset by Index is set to First Only, and the counter
detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block Parameters” on
page 35-21.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.
The distance is given by:
distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

35-22
 Measurement Computing (Computer Boards)

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose, 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counter Reset by Index — From the list choose either Only First, or
Continuous.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, The first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.
Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise the
counting direction is reversed.
Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

35-23
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
Base address — Enter the base address of the board. It is important that this
entry corresponds to the DIP-switch settings on the board. For example, if the
base address is 300 (hexadecimal), enter
0x300

PCI-QUAD04 Incremental Encoder (Obsolete)

This driver block has three block outputs: Angle, Turns, and Init.
You can use Init to determine when the block output values are valid. Init is
first set to 0. When the encoder reached the first index, Init is set to 1. From
then on, you can determine the exact position, direction, and velocity. Init
remains 1 unless Counting reset by index is set to Only First, and the
counter detects a rollover. For more information, see “Driver Block
Parameters” on page 35-21.
Turns is the number of complete revolutions made by the encoder. Angle is the
amount the encoder turns since the last full revolution.
The distance is given by:
distance = 2 * pi * Turns + Angle

The velocity is given by:

velocity = (distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)) / ts

The direction is given by:

direction = distance(ts) - distance(ts-1)

A negative value is reverse, while a positive value is forward.

35-24
 Measurement Computing (Computer Boards)

Driver Block Parameters

Function module — From the list choose 1, 2, 3, or 4. This parameter specifies
which channel you use for this block. For the same board (same base address)
two blocks cannot have the same channel number.
Counting reset by index — From the list choose Only First, Continuous, or
Index input disabled.

If you choose Only First, the first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. The encoder ignores all other times it reaches the index. Init remains
1 until a rollover is detected, and then set to -1. A rollover is when the counter
reaches its maximum value and begins to start counting at zero again. A
rollover can also occur when the counter reaches its minimum value and the
counter resets itself to the maximum value and resumes counting down. The
outputs are still accurate after rollover. The -1 flag is used to alert that a
rollover has occurred.
If you choose Continuous, The first time the encoder reaches the index, the
counter is reset to zero, the Init output signal is set to 1, and the encoder begins
to count. Each time the encoder reaches the index, it resets to zero. Init
remains always at l because a rollover cannot occur.
Positive Rotation — From the list, choose either Clockwise or Counter
Clockwise. This parameter sets the direction for positive rotation. If you choose
Clockwise, when the encoder is turned clockwise it counts up, and when
turned counter clockwise it counts down. If you choose Counter Clockwise,
the counting direction is reversed.
Mode — From the list, choose Single, Double, or Quadruple. This parameter
specifies the phase detection mode. That is, how many phase changes are
detected. For more information, see the board manual.
Resolution — This field specifies the divisions of the connected incremental
encoder for one revolution.
Filter prescale factor — Enter a base prescale factor for digital filtering. This
filter helps eliminate high frequency noise. Enter a value from 0 to ff in
hexadecimal (0 to 256 in decimal). For example, for a prescale factor value of
ff in hexadecimal, enter
0xff

35-25
35 Obsoleted Drivers

Sample time — Enter a base sample time or a multiple of the base sample
time. The sample time indicates the update rate of registration on the input
(Duty Cycle). Enter -1 to inherit the model sample time from another block.
The sample time is in seconds.
PCI Slot (-1:autosearch) — If only one board of this type is physically present
in the target PC, enter
-1

to automatically locate the board.

35-26